This is a modern-English version of Chess Strategy, originally written by Lasker, Edward.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
Chess Strategy
by
Edward Lasker
Translated by J. du Mont
CONTENTS
TRANSLATOR’S PREFACE
As the first edition of Edward Lasker’s Chess Strategy was exhausted within a comparatively short time of its appearance, the author set himself the task of altering and improving the work to such an extent that it became to all intents and purposes a new book. I had the privilege of co-operating with him to a slight degree on that second edition, and was in consequence able to appreciate the tremendous amount of work he voluntarily took upon himself to do; I say voluntarily, because his publishers, anxious to supply the strong demand for the book, wished to reprint it as it stood.
As the first edition of Edward Lasker’s Chess Strategy sold out fairly quickly after it was released, the author decided to revise and enhance the work so much that it essentially became a new book. I had the privilege of collaborating with him to a small extent on that second edition, which allowed me to see the incredible amount of work he took on voluntarily; I mention voluntarily because his publishers, eager to meet the high demand for the book, wanted to reprint it as it was.
A little later I undertook to translate this second edition into English for Messrs. Bell & Sons. Only a few months had elapsed, the tournaments at Petrograd, Chester, and Mannheim had taken place, several new discoveries had been made, and it is the greatest testimony to Edward Lasker’s indefatigable devotion to the Art of Chess that I am able to say that this is not a translation of the second edition, but of what is practically a new book. It contains a new preface, a chapter for beginners, a new introduction, new variations. Furthermore, a large number of new games have taken the place of old ones.
A little later, I agreed to translate this second edition into English for Messrs. Bell & Sons. Only a few months had passed, the tournaments in Petrograd, Chester, and Mannheim had happened, several new discoveries had been made, and it’s a huge testament to Edward Lasker’s tireless dedication to the Art of Chess that I can say this isn’t just a translation of the second edition, but practically a new book. It includes a new preface, a chapter for beginners, a new introduction, and new variations. Additionally, many new games have replaced the old ones.
I have no doubt that any chess player who will take the trouble to study Chess Strategy will spend many a pleasurable hour. Incidentally new vistas will be opened to him, and his playing strength increased to a surprising degree.
I’m sure that any chess player who takes the time to study Chess Strategy will enjoy many enjoyable hours. Plus, they’ll discover new perspectives and significantly improve their playing strength.
The author says in his preface that he appeals to the intelligence and not the memory of his readers. In my opinion, too, the student should above all try to improve his judgment of position.
The author mentions in his preface that he aims to engage the intelligence of his readers rather than their memory. I also believe that students should primarily focus on sharpening their sense of judgment regarding situations.
Than the playing over of games contested by experts I can hardly imagine a greater or purer form of enjoyment. Yet I must at the outset sound a note of warning against its being done superficially, and with a feverish expectation of something happening. Every move or combination of moves should be carefully weighed, and the student should draw his own conclusions and compare them with what actually happens in the game under examination.
Than the enjoyment found in games played by experts, I can hardly think of anything greater or more pure. However, I need to start by warning against approaching it superficially or with an anxious expectation for something to happen. Every move or combination of moves should be carefully considered, and the learner should form their own conclusions and compare them with what actually occurs in the game being analyzed.
This applies particularly to some of the critical positions set out in diagrams in the course of the exposition of the several games.
This is especially true for some of the key positions shown in the diagrams throughout the explanation of the various games.
The reader would derive the greatest possible benefit from a prolonged study of such positions before seeking to know how the games proceed. After having formed his own opinion about the merits of a particular position, he should compare the result with the sequel in the game in question, and thus find out where his judgment has been at fault.
The reader will gain the most from spending more time studying these positions before trying to understand how the games unfold. After forming their own opinion on the strengths of a particular position, they should compare their conclusion with what happens next in the game, and in doing so, discover where their judgment may have been wrong.
The deeper study of the theory of the openings is of course a necessity to the student who wishes to become an expert, but the development of his judgment must precede it. To him Griffith & White’s admirable book, Modern Chess Openings, will be a perfect mine of information. There are thousands of variations, and in most of them the actual game in which they were first tried by masters is named, thus adding to the interest and value of the work.
The deeper study of opening theory is definitely essential for anyone looking to become an expert, but developing good judgment has to come first. For that, Griffith & White’s excellent book, Modern Chess Openings, will be an invaluable resource. There are thousands of variations, and most include the actual games where they were first used by masters, which makes the book even more interesting and valuable.
I must not omit to mention the invaluable help afforded me by my friend Mr. John Hart, to whom my warmest thanks are due.
I must mention the invaluable help I received from my friend Mr. John Hart, to whom I owe my deepest thanks.
JULIUS DU MONT.
Julius Du Mont.
AUTHOR’S PREFACE
The large majority of chess players who would like to improve their game, have not the necessary opportunity of pitting themselves against players of master-strength, or at least of obtaining the desired instruction from personal intercourse with them. It is for such players that the present work is intended. The books on which the learner has to rely hardly ever serve his purpose, being mostly little more than a disjointed tabulation of numberless opening variations, which cannot be understood without preliminary studies, and consequently only make for confusion. In the end the connection between the various lines of play may become clear, after the student has made an exhaustive study of the subject, but very few would have either the time or the inclination for such prolonged labour.
Most chess players who want to improve their game lack the opportunity to compete against strong players or to get the guidance they need through personal interaction with them. This work is aimed at those players. The books that learners typically rely on rarely meet their needs, often being little more than a random collection of countless opening variations, which can’t be understood without prior study and just lead to confusion. Eventually, the links between different lines of play might become clear after the student conducts extensive research on the topic, but very few people have the time or desire for such a lengthy effort.
Therefore another shorter and less empirical way must be found in which to acquire the understanding of sound play. My system of teaching differs from the usual ones, in that it sets down at the outset definite elementary principles of chess strategy by which any move can be gauged at its true value, thus enabling the learner to form his own judgment as to the manœuvres under consideration. In my opinion it is absolutely essential to follow such strategical principles, and I go so far as to assert that such principles are in themselves sufficient for the development and conduct of a correct game of chess.
So, a shorter and less hands-on approach needs to be found to understand sound play. My teaching method is different from the usual ones because it starts with clear, fundamental principles of chess strategy that help evaluate any move at its true value. This allows the learner to make their own judgments about the possible maneuvers. I believe it is absolutely essential to adhere to these strategic principles, and I even assert that these principles are themselves sufficient for developing and playing a proper game of chess.
Even though instruction in chess is possible on very general lines alone, yet I think it advisable and indeed necessary to explain the application of such principles to the various phases of each game of chess. Otherwise the learner might unduly delay his progress, and lose valuable time in finding out for himself certain essentials that could more profitably be pointed out to him.
Even though teaching chess can be done in a very general way, I believe it’s important and actually necessary to explain how those principles apply to different parts of each chess game. Otherwise, the learner might slow down their progress and waste valuable time figuring out certain essentials that could be better highlighted for them.
With regard to the way in which I have arranged my subject and the form of its exposition in detail, I have thought out the following plan.
Regarding how I've organized my topic and the detailed format of its presentation, I've developed the following plan.
After discussing at length the leading principles underlying sound play, I have first treated of the openings, in which such principles are of even more deciding influence than in any other stage of the game, as far as could be done on broad lines without having to pay attention to middle and end-game considerations.
After thoroughly discussing the main principles of good play, I first focused on the openings, where these principles have an even greater impact than in any other stage of the game, as much as it could be done in general terms without considering middle and end-game strategies.
I proceeded as follows, by taking as my starting-point the “pawn skeleton” which is formed in the opening, and round which the pieces should group themselves in logical fashion. As a consequence of the pawns having so little mobility, this “pawn skeleton” often preserves its shape right into the end-game. Applying the general strategical principles to the formation of the pawn skeleton, the learner acquires the understanding of the leading idea underlying each opening without having to burden his memory. Not only that, he will also be able to find a correct plan of development when confronted with unusual forms of opening.
I started by looking at the "pawn structure" that forms in the opening and how the pieces should be aligned logically around it. Because pawns are so limited in movement, this "pawn structure" often maintains its shape all the way into the endgame. By applying general strategic principles to the pawn structure, the learner gains insight into the main idea behind each opening without needing to memorize too much. Additionally, they'll be able to create a solid development plan when faced with unusual opening setups.
The most important result of this system of teaching is that the learner does not lose his way in a maze of detail, but has in view at the very outset, the goal which the many possible variations of the openings are intended to reach.
The key outcome of this teaching method is that the student doesn't get lost in a tangle of details but keeps the end goal in sight from the very beginning, which is what the various opening options are meant to achieve.
Before I could proceed to the discussion of the middle game, I found it necessary to treat of the principles governing the end-game. For in most cases play in the middle game is influenced by end-game considerations. Here also it has been my endeavour as far as possible to reduce my subject to such principles as are generally applicable.
Before I could move on to discussing the middle game, I felt it was important to cover the principles that guide the end-game. This is because, in many situations, middle game play is shaped by end-game factors. I've also tried to limit my discussion to principles that are broadly applicable.
Finally, as regards the middle game, to which the whole of Part II is devoted, I have again made the handling of pawns, the hardest of all problems of strategy, the starting-point for my deliberations. I have shown at length how the various plans initiated by the various openings should be developed further. To ensure a thorough understanding of the middle game, I have given a large number of games taken from master play, with numerous and extensive notes. Thus the student has not to rely only on examples taken haphazard from their context, but he will at the same time see how middle-game positions, which give opportunities for special forms of attack, are evolved from the opening.
Finally, regarding the middle game, which is the focus of Part II, I have once again used the management of pawns—the most challenging strategic issue—as the foundation for my discussions. I've thoroughly explained how the different strategies that arise from various openings should be further developed. To ensure a solid understanding of the middle game, I've included a large number of games from master players, complete with detailed notes. This way, the student won't have to rely solely on randomly selected examples, but will also see how middle-game positions, which create opportunities for specific types of attacks, evolve from the opening.
It has been my desire to make the subject easily understandable and at the same time entertaining, and to appeal less to the memory of my readers than to their common sense and intelligence. I hope in that way not to have strayed too far from the ideal I had in mind when writing this book, namely, to apply to chess the only method of teaching which has proved productive in all branches of science and art, that is, the education of individual thought.
It’s been my goal to make the topic easy to understand and enjoyable, focusing more on my readers’ common sense and intelligence than on memorization. I hope I haven’t wandered too far from the ideal I envisioned when writing this book, which is to apply to chess the one teaching method that has been effective across all areas of science and art: fostering independent thinking.
If I have succeeded in this, I shall have the satisfaction of having contributed a little to the furthering, in the wide circles in which it is played, of the game which undoubtedly makes the strongest appeal to the intellect.
If I have achieved this, I will feel satisfied knowing I’ve helped promote, in the broad circles where it’s played, the game that clearly has the greatest appeal to the mind.
EDWARD LASKER.
EDWARD LASKER.
CHAPTER I.
INTRODUCTORY
I. RULES OF THE GAME
A GAME of chess is played by two opponents on a square board consisting of sixty-four White and Black squares arranged alternately. The forces on each side comprise sixteen units, namely a King, a Queen, two Rooks, two Bishops, two Knights, and eight Pawns. All units move according to different laws, and the difference in their mobility is the criterion of their relative value and of the fighting power they contribute towards achieving the ultimate aim, namely, the capture of the opposing King. Before I can explain what is meant by the capture of the King, I must set out the rules of the game in full.
A game of chess is played by two players on a square board made up of sixty-four alternating black and white squares. Each side has sixteen pieces: one King, one Queen, two Rooks, two Bishops, two Knights, and eight Pawns. Each piece moves differently, and their varying mobility determines their relative value and the overall strength they provide in achieving the main goal, which is to capture the opposing King. Before I can explain what capturing the King means, I need to lay out the rules of the game in detail.
Diagram 1 shows the position the forces take up for the contest. The board is so placed that there is a white square at the top left-hand corner. The Rooks take up their positions at the corner squares, and next to them the Knights. Next to those again are the Bishops, and in the centre the King and Queen, the White Queen on a White square, and the Black Queen on a Black square. The eight pawns occupy the ranks immediately in front of the pieces. From this initial position, White begins the game in which the players must move alternately.
Diagram 1 shows the arrangement of the pieces for the game. The board is set up with a white square in the top left corner. The Rooks are positioned in the corner squares, followed by the Knights. Next to them are the Bishops, and in the center are the King and Queen, with the White Queen on a White square and the Black Queen on a Black square. The eight pawns fill the ranks right in front of the pieces. From this starting position, White starts the game, and the players take turns making moves.
The pieces move in the following way: The Rook can move from any square it happens to be on, to any other square which it can reach in a straight line, either perpendicularly or horizontally, unless there is another piece of the same colour in the way, in which case it can only move as far as the square immediately in front of that piece. If it is an opposing piece which blocks the way, he can move on to the square that piece occupies, thereby capturing it. The piece thus captured is removed from the board. The Bishop can operate along either of the diagonals of which the square on which he is standing forms part. A Bishop on a White square can therefore never get on to a Black one.
The pieces move like this: The Rook can go from any square it's on to any other square it can reach in a straight line, either vertically or horizontally, unless there's another piece of the same color blocking the way. In that case, it can only move as far as the square directly in front of that piece. If an opponent's piece is in the way, the Rook can move to the square that piece occupies, capturing it. The captured piece is then removed from the board. The Bishop can move along either of the diagonals associated with the square it's on. A Bishop on a White square can never reach a Black one.
![[Illustration]](images/diag01.jpg)
Diag. 1
Diag. 1
The Queen commands both the straight and the oblique lines which start from the square she stands on, and therefore unites the power of both Rook and Bishop in her movements.
The Queen controls both the straight and diagonal lines that begin from the square she occupies, which means she combines the abilities of both the Rook and Bishop in her movements.
The King has similar powers to the Queen, but curtailed, inasmuch as he can only move one step at a time. He therefore only controls one neighbouring square in any direction.
The King has similar powers to the Queen, but limited, since he can only move one square at a time. He can only control one adjacent square in any direction.
The Knight plays and captures alternately on White and Black squares, and only reaches such squares as are nearest to him without being immediately adjacent; his move is as it were composed of two steps, one square in a straight line, and one in an oblique direction. Diagram 2 will illustrate this.[1]
The Knight moves and captures on alternating White and Black squares, only landing on squares that are closest to him without being right next door; his move can be seen as consisting of two steps—one square straight ahead and one square diagonally. Diagram 2 will illustrate this.[1]
[1] I should like to quote my friend Mr. John Hart’s clever definition of the Knight’s move, though it may not be new. If one conceives a Knight as standing on a corner square of a rectangle three squares by two, he is able to move into the corner diagonally opposite.
[1] I want to share my friend Mr. John Hart's smart definition of the Knight’s move, even if it’s not original. If you imagine a Knight on one corner of a rectangle that’s three squares by two, he can move to the diagonally opposite corner.
The pawns only move straight forward, one square at a time, except at their first move, when they have the option of moving two squares. In contrast to the pieces, the pawns do not capture in the way they move. They move straight forward, but they capture diagonally to the right and left, again only one square, and only forward. Therefore a pawn can only capture such pieces or pawns as occupy squares of the same colour as the square on which it stands. If, in moving two squares, a pawn traverses a square on which it could have been captured by a hostile pawn, that pawn has the right to capture it, as if it had moved only one square. This is called capturing en passant. However, this capture can only be effected on the very next move, otherwise the privilege of capturing en passant is lost.
Pawns only move straight ahead, one square at a time, except for their first move when they can choose to move two squares. Unlike other pieces, pawns don't capture in the same way they move. They advance straight forward but capture diagonally to the right and left, again just one square and only forward. So, a pawn can only capture pieces or other pawns that are on squares of the same color as the one it stands on. If a pawn moves two squares and lands on a square where it could have been captured by an opposing pawn, that pawn has the right to capture it as if it had moved only one square. This is called capturing en passant. However, this capture can only happen on the very next move; otherwise, the opportunity to capture en passant is lost.
![[Illustration]](images/diag02.jpg)
Diag. 2
Diag. 2
If a player succeeds in reaching the eighth rank with one of his pawns he is entitled to call for any piece of higher grade, with the exception of the King, in place of such pawn.
If a player manages to reach the eighth rank with one of their pawns, they can request any higher-ranking piece, except for the King, to replace that pawn.
Each move in a game of chess consists of the displacement of one piece only, with the exception of what is termed “castling,” in which the King and either Rook can be moved simultaneously by either player once in a game. In castling, the King moves sideways to the next square but one, and the Rook to which the King is moved is placed on the square which the King has skipped over. Castling is only allowed if neither the King nor the Rook concerned have moved before, and if there is no piece between the Rook and King.
Each move in a game of chess involves moving just one piece, except for a move called “castling,” where the King and one Rook can be moved at the same time by either player once per game. During castling, the King shifts sideways to the square next to the one it skips over, and the Rook that the King is moved to takes the square that the King passed over. Castling is allowed only if neither the King nor the Rook has moved before and if there are no pieces between the Rook and the King.
Diagram 3 shows a position in which White has castled on the Queen’s side, and Black on the King’s side. Castling is not permitted if the King in castling must pass over a square attacked by a hostile piece. A square (or a piece) is said to be “attacked” when the square (or the piece) is in the line of action of a hostile unit. A square (or a piece) is said to be covered or protected if an opposing piece occupying that square (or capturing the piece) could itself be captured.
Diagram 3 shows a situation where White has castled on the Queen's side and Black on the King's side. Castling is not allowed if the King has to move over a square that is under attack by an enemy piece. A square (or a piece) is considered "attacked" when it is in the line of action of an opponent's unit. A square (or a piece) is referred to as covered or protected if an opposing piece on that square (or capturing the piece) could also be captured.
When attacking the King it is customary to call “check,” to notify the opponent of the fact; for the attack on the King
When you attack the King, it's common to say "check" to let your opponent know about it; because the attack on the King
![[Illustration]](images/diag03.jpg)
Diag. 3
Diag. 3
must be met in some way or other. This can be done by capturing the attacker or by interposing a piece (this is not possible in case of attack by a Knight or a pawn), or lastly by moving the King to a square which is not attacked. The latter must not be done by castling. If it is impossible by any of the three methods above mentioned to avoid the attack upon the King, the King is said to be checkmated, and the game is ended.
must be addressed in some way. This can be achieved by capturing the attacker or by placing a piece in the way (this isn't possible if the attacker is a Knight or a pawn), or finally by moving the King to a square that isn’t under attack. The last option cannot be done by castling. If none of the three methods mentioned above can prevent the attack on the King, the King is considered checkmated, and the game is over.
If a King is unable to move, though not attacked, and none of his remaining pieces can move, the King is said to be stale-mated, and the game is drawn. A game is also drawn when neither side has sufficient material left to enforce a mate. (Compare page 63.)
If a King can't move, even though it's not under attack, and none of the other pieces can move either, the King is considered stalemated, and the game is a draw. The game is also a draw when neither side has enough material left to checkmate the other. (Compare page 63.)
If a player resigns his game before he is actually mated, he acknowledges that in the end mate is unavoidable, and the game is counted as a loss to him.
If a player resigns from the game before actually being checkmated, he admits that being checkmated in the end is unavoidable, and the game is recorded as a loss for him.
A game is null and void if it is shown that a mistake was made in setting the board or men. The same applies when in the course of the game the position and number of pieces have been altered in a manner not in accordance with the proper course of play, and the latter cannot be re-constructed from the point where the error was made.
A game is invalid if it's proven that there was a mistake in setting up the board or pieces. The same goes for when, during the game, the arrangement and count of pieces have been changed in a way that doesn't follow the rules of play, and it's impossible to go back to the point where the mistake occurred.
If a player having the move touches one of his pieces he is under compulsion to move it; if he touches a hostile piece he must capture it, provided that the piece can be properly moved or captured in either case. This rule is of no effect if the piece so touched cannot be moved or captured, as the case may be. So long as the hand has not left the piece to be moved, the latter can be placed on any accessible square. If a player touches a piece with the sole object of adjusting its position, he must apprise his opponent of his intention by saying “J’adoube” beforehand. It is best to move the King first when castling. If the Rook is moved first, and unless the King is played almost simultaneously, a doubt might arise whether castling or a Rook’s move only was intended.
If a player whose turn it is touches one of their pieces, they have to move it; if they touch an opponent's piece, they must capture it, as long as the piece can be legally moved or captured in that situation. This rule doesn’t apply if the touched piece can’t be moved or captured. As long as the hand hasn’t left the piece to be moved, it can be placed on any available square. If a player touches a piece just to adjust its position, they must inform their opponent by saying “J’adoube” beforehand. It's recommended to move the King first when castling. If the Rook is moved first, and unless the King is moved almost at the same time, there may be confusion about whether castling or just a Rook's move was intended.
If a player has castled illegally, Rook and King must be moved back, and the King must make another move, if there is a legal one. If not, any other move can be played. A player who makes an illegal move with a piece must retract that move, and make another one if possible with the same piece. If the mistake is only noticed later on, the game should be restarted from the position in which the error occurred.
If a player has castled illegally, the Rook and King must be moved back, and the King must make a different move if there's a legal one available. If not, any other move can be played. A player who makes an illegal move with a piece must take that move back and make another move with the same piece if possible. If the mistake is noticed later, the game should restart from the position where the error happened.
II. NOTATION
A special notation has been adopted to make the study of games and positions possible, and it is necessary for students of the game to become thoroughly conversant with it. The original and earliest notation is still in use in English, French, and Spanish speaking countries. It is derived from the original position in the game, in that the squares take the names of the pieces which occupy them. Thus the corner squares are called R 1 (Rook’s square or Rook’s first), and to distinguish them from one another QR1 or KR 1 (Queen’s or King’s Rook’s square). The squares immediately in front are called QR2 or KR2. A distinction is made between White and Black, and White’s R 1 is Black’s R 8, Black’s R 2 is White’s R 7, White’s K B 3 is Black’s KB6, and so on. K stands for King; Q for Queen; B for Bishop; Kt for Knight; R for Rook; and P for Pawn. In describing a capture, only the capturing and the captured pieces are mentioned, and not the squares.
A specific notation has been adopted to facilitate the study of games and positions, and it's essential for students of the game to become well-acquainted with it. The original and earliest notation is still used in English, French, and Spanish-speaking countries. It comes from the initial position in the game, where the squares are named after the pieces that occupy them. For example, the corner squares are referred to as R1 (Rook’s square or Rook’s first), and to differentiate between them, they're called QR1 or KR1 (Queen’s or King’s Rook’s square). The squares right in front are named QR2 or KR2. A distinction is made between White and Black, where White’s R1 is Black’s R8, Black’s R2 is White’s R7, White’s KB3 is Black’s KB6, and so forth. K stands for King; Q for Queen; B for Bishop; N for Knight; R for Rook; and P for Pawn. When describing a capture, only the capturing piece and the captured piece are mentioned, without referencing the squares.
When confusion is possible, it is customary to add whether King’s side or Queen’s side pieces are concerned, e.g. KR×Q Kt. In this notation it is necessary to bear in mind which Kt is the Q Kt, which R is the KR. This becomes increasingly difficult as the game goes on and pieces change their places. Many sets of chessmen have one Rook and one Knight stamped with a special sign, to show they are King’s side pieces. This is not necessary in the case of Bishops: a white KB is always on white squares, a white QB on black squares.
When confusion arises, it's common to specify if the pieces are from the King's side or the Queen's side, for example, KR×Q Kt. In this notation, it's important to remember which Knight is the Queen's Knight and which Rook is the King's Rook. This becomes harder as the game progresses and pieces move around. Many chess sets have one Rook and one Knight marked with a distinct symbol to indicate they are King’s side pieces. This isn't necessary for Bishops: a white King's Bishop is always on white squares, while a white Queen's Bishop is on black squares.
A more modern notation is the algebraic notation, which has been adopted in most countries. It has the advantage of being unmistakably clear, and also more concise. Here the perpendicular lines of squares (called files) are named with the letters a-h, from left to right, always from the point of view of White, and the horizontal lines of squares (called ranks) with numbers 1-8 as before, only with the distinction that the rank on which the White pieces stand is always called the first; thus the square we named White’s QB2 or Black’s QB7 is now called c2 in both cases. Black’s QB2 (White’s QB7) is always c7. In capturing, the square on which the capture takes place and not the piece captured is noted, for the sake of uniformity. In the case of pawn moves, the squares only are noted.
A more modern way to write this is called algebraic notation, which most countries now use. It’s clearly understandable and also more concise. Here, the vertical columns of squares (called files) are labeled with the letters a-h from left to right, always from White's perspective, and the horizontal rows of squares (called ranks) are numbered 1-8 as before, with the distinction that the rank where the White pieces are placed is always referred to as the first; so the square we used to call White’s QB2 or Black’s QB7 is now simply c2 in both scenarios. Black’s QB2 (White’s QB7) is always c7. When capturing, the square where the capture happens is noted, not the piece that’s captured, for the sake of consistency. For pawn moves, only the squares are recorded.
O—O stands for castles on the King’s side; O—O—O stands for castles on the Queen’s side; : or × stands for captures; + for check.
O—O stands for castling on the King’s side; O—O—O stands for castling on the Queen’s side; : or × stands for captures; + for check.
In the following opening moves, both notations are used for the purpose of comparison:
In the upcoming opening moves, both notations will be used for comparison:
1. P—Q 4 | P—Q4 | 1. d4 | d5 |
2. P—QB4 | P—K3 | 2. c4 | e6 |
3. Kt—QB3 | P—QB4 | 3. Ktc3 | c5 |
4. P×QP | KP×P | 4. cd: | ed: |
5. P—K4 | QP×P | 5. e4 | de: |
6. P—Q5 | Kt—KB3 | 6. d5 | Ktf6 |
7. B—KKt5 | B—K2 | 7. Bg5 | Be7 |
8. K Kt—K2 | Castles | 8. Ktge2 | O—O |
In most books in which the algebraic notation is used, both squares of a move are written out for the benefit of the student. The moves above would then look like this:
In most books that use algebraic notation, both squares of a move are written out to help the student. The moves above would then look like this:
1. d2—d4 | d7—d5 |
2. c2—c4 | e7—e6 |
3. Ktb1—c3 | c7—c5 |
4. C4 × d5 | e6×d5 |
5. e2—e4 | d5×e4 |
6. d4—d5 | Ktg8—f6 |
7. Bc1—g5 | Bf8—e7 |
8. Ktg1—e2 | O—O |
To conclude: I will give the denomination of the pieces in various languages:
To wrap up: I will provide the names of the pieces in different languages:
English | K | Q | R | B | Kt | P | Castles |
French | R | D | T | F | C | P | Roq |
Spanish | R | D | T | A | C | P | Enrog |
German and Austrian | K | D | T | L | S | O—O (O) | |
Italian | R | D | T | A | C | O—O (O) | |
Russian | KP | F | L | C | K | O—O (O) | |
Dutch | K | D | T | L | P | O—O (O) | |
Scandinavian | K | D | T | L | S | O—O (O) | |
Bohemian | K | D | V | S | J | O—O (O) | |
Hungarian | K | V | B | F | H | O—O (O) |
CHAPTER II
HINTS FOR BEGINNERS—ELEMENTARY COMBINATIONS
THE mental development of the chess player is a gradual struggle from a state of chaos to a clear conception of the game. The period required for such development largely depends upon the special gifts the learner may possess, but in the main the question of methods predominates. Most beginners do not trouble very much about any particular plan in their study of chess, but as soon as they have learnt the moves, rush into the turmoil of practical play. It is self-evident that their prospects under such conditions cannot be very bright. The play of a beginner is planless, because he has too many plans, and the capacity for subordinating all his combinations to one leading idea is non- existent. Yet it cannot be denied upon investigation that a certain kind of method is to be found in the play of all beginners, and seems to come to them quite naturally. At first the pawns are pushed forward frantically, because there is no appreciation of the power and value of the pieces. Conscious of the inferiority of the pawns, the beginner does not conclude that it must be advantageous to employ the greater power of the pieces, but is chiefly concerned with attacking the opposing pieces with his pawns in the hope of capturing them. His aim is not to develop his own forces, but to weaken those of his opponent. His combinations are made in the hope that his adversary may not see through them, nor does he trouble much about his opponent’s intentions. When most of his pawns are gone, then only do his pieces get their chance. He has a great liking for the Queen and the Knight, the former because of her tremendous mobility, the latter on account of his peculiar step, which seems particularly adapted to take the enemy by surprise. When watching beginners you will frequently observe numberless moves by a peripatetic Queen, reckless incursions by a Knight into the enemy’s camp, and when the other pieces join in the fray, combination follows combination in bewildering sequence and fantastic chaos. Captures of pieces are planned, mating nets are woven, perhaps with two pieces, against a King’s position, where five pieces are available for defence. This unsteadiness in the first childish stages of development makes it very difficult for the beginner to get a general view of the board. Yet the surprises which each move brings afford him great enjoyment.
THE mental growth of a chess player is a gradual journey from confusion to a clear understanding of the game. The time needed for this development mostly depends on the unique abilities the learner has, but overall, the choice of methods is what matters most. Most beginners don’t focus much on any specific strategy in their chess study; instead, once they learn the moves, they dive straight into the chaos of practical play. It’s clear that their chances of success in such conditions aren’t very promising. A beginner's play lacks a plan because they have too many ideas, and they struggle to streamline all their combinations into a single, clear goal. However, upon closer examination, it's evident that there is a certain kind of method in the play of all beginners, and it seems to come to them quite instinctively. Initially, they push their pawns forward frantically, as they don’t fully grasp the strength and value of the pieces. Aware of the limitations of their pawns, beginners don’t realize that they should use the more powerful pieces, but they are primarily focused on attacking the opponent’s pieces with their pawns in hopes of capturing them. Their aim isn’t to develop their own forces but to undermine those of their opponent. They create combinations hoping their opponent won’t notice them, and they don’t pay much attention to what their opponent is planning. Only when most of their pawns are gone do their pieces get a chance to play. They prefer the Queen and the Knight, the former for her incredible mobility and the latter for his unique movement, which seems especially suited to surprise the enemy. When observing beginners, you’ll often see countless moves by an active Queen, daring advances by a Knight into the enemy's territory, and when the other pieces join the fray, combinations unfold in a confusing series of actions and chaotic patterns. Plans to capture pieces are made, mating traps are set, sometimes involving two pieces against a King protected by five. This instability in the early, naive phases of development makes it very hard for beginners to gain an overall view of the board. Still, the surprises that each move brings provide them with great enjoyment.
A few dozen such games are by no means wasted. After certain particular dispositions of pieces have proved his undoing, the beginner will develop the perception of threats. He sees dangers one or two moves ahead, and thereby reaches the second stage in his development.
A few dozen of these games are definitely not wasted. After specific arrangements of pieces have led to his defeat, the beginner will start to notice threats. He sees dangers one or two moves ahead, and in doing so, he reaches the second stage of his development.
His combinations will become more and more sound, he will learn to value his forces more correctly, and therefore to husband his pieces and even his pawns with greater care. In this second stage his strength will increase steadily, but, and this is the drawback, only as far as his power of combination is concerned. Unless a player be exceptionally gifted, he will only learn after years of practice, if at all, what may be termed “positional play.” For that, it is necessary to know how to open a game so as to lay the foundation for a favourable middle game, and how to treat a middle game, without losing sight of the possibilities of the end-game. It is hopeless to try to memorise the various openings which analysis have proved correct, for this empirical method fails as soon as the opponent swerves from the recognised lines of play. One must learn to recognise the characteristics of sound play. They apply to all and any position, and the underlying principles must be propounded in a manner generally applicable. And this brings me to the substance of my subject, round which I will endeavour to build up a system compatible with common sense and logic.
As he develops, his combinations will become more reliable, and he will learn to assess his strengths more accurately, allowing him to manage his pieces and even his pawns more carefully. In this second phase, his strength will steadily increase, but here's the downside: it will largely be limited to his ability to combine moves. Unless a player is exceptionally talented, it can take years of practice to grasp what can be called "positional play." For that, it's essential to understand how to open a game in a way that sets up a strong middle game, and how to handle the middle game while keeping an eye on the potential of the end-game. Trying to memorize the various openings that analysis has deemed effective is pointless, as this approach fails once the opponent deviates from the established strategies. One must learn to identify the hallmarks of solid play. These principles apply to any position, and they need to be presented in a way that is broadly applicable. This leads me to the core of my topic, around which I will aim to develop a system that aligns with common sense and logic.
Before I proceed to develop my theme, I shall set down a number of elementary rules which will facilitate the understanding of such simple combinations as occur at every step in chess.
Before I dive into my topic, I’m going to lay out some basic rules that will help make sense of the simple combinations that come up at every turn in chess.
If we ignore the comparatively small proportion of games in which the mating of the opponent’s King is accomplished on a full board, we can describe a normal, average game of chess in the following way. Both sides will employ their available forces more or less advantageously to execute attacking and defensive manœuvres which should gradually lead to exchanges. If one side or the other emerges from the conflict with some material gain, it will generally be possible to force a mate in the end-game, whilst if both sides have succeeded by careful play to preserve equality of material, a draw will generally ensue.
If we overlook the relatively small number of games where the opponent's King is checkmated on a full board, we can describe a typical game of chess like this. Both players will use their pieces more or less effectively to carry out attacking and defensive moves that should gradually lead to exchanges. If one player gains an advantage, they will usually be able to checkmate in the endgame. However, if both players manage to maintain equal material through careful play, the game will typically end in a draw.
It will be found a little later that a single pawn may suffice, with some few exceptions, to achieve a victory, and we shall adopt the following leading principle for all combinations, viz. loss of material must be avoided, even if only a pawn. It is a good habit to look upon every pawn as a prospective Queen. This has a sobering influence on premature and impetuous plans of attack.
It will be found a little later that a single pawn may be enough, with a few exceptions, to secure a victory, and we will adopt the following key principle for all combinations: the loss of material must be avoided, even if it’s just a pawn. It's a good practice to view every pawn as a potential Queen. This encourages more cautious and measured plans of attack rather than hasty ones.
On the other hand, victory is often brought about by a timely sacrifice of material.
On the other hand, victory often comes from a timely sacrifice of resources.
But in such cases the sacrificing of material has its compensation in some particular advantage of position. As principles of position are difficult for beginners to grasp, I propose to defer their consideration for the present and to devote my attention first to such combinations as involve questions of material. Let us master a simple device that makes most combinations easy both for attack and defence. It amounts merely to a matter of elementary arithmetic, and if the beginner neglects it, he will soon be at a material disadvantage.
But in these situations, giving up material has its benefits in terms of positioning. Since understanding positioning can be tough for beginners, I suggest we put that aside for now and focus on combinations that involve material questions. Let’s start with a straightforward technique that simplifies most combinations for both offense and defense. It’s essentially basic arithmetic, and if beginners ignore it, they’ll quickly find themselves at a material disadvantage.
Diagram 4 may serve as an example:
Diagram 4 can serve as an example:
![[Illustration]](images/diag04.jpg)
Diag. 4
Diag. 4
It is Black’s move, and we will suppose he wishes to play P-K4. A beginner will probably calculate thus: I push on my pawn, he takes with his pawn, my Knight takes, so does his, then my Bishop takes, and so on. This is quite wrong, and means waste of time and energy.
It’s Black’s turn to move, and let’s say he wants to play P-K4. A beginner might think like this: I move my pawn, he captures with his pawn, my Knight takes, his Knight takes, then my Bishop takes, and so on. This is totally wrong and just wastes time and energy.
When the beginner considers a third or fourth move in such a combination, he will already have forgotten which pieces he intended to play in the first moves. The calculation is perfectly simple upon the following lines: I play P-K4, then my pawn is attacked by a pawn and two Knights, a Bishop and two Rooks, six times in all. It is supported by a Bishop, two Knights, two Rooks and a Queen, six times in all. Therefore I can play P-K4, provided the six units captured at K4 are not of greater value than the six white units which are recaptured. In the present instance both sides lose a pawn, two Knights, two Rooks, and a Bishop, and there is no material loss. This established, he can embark on the advance of the KP without any fear.
When a beginner thinks about a third or fourth move in a combination, they will likely forget which pieces they planned to use in the first moves. The calculation is quite straightforward: I play P-K4, and then my pawn is attacked by a pawn, two Knights, a Bishop, and two Rooks, totaling six attackers. It's backed up by a Bishop, two Knights, two Rooks, and a Queen, totaling six defenders. So, I can play P-K4, as long as the six pieces captured at K4 aren’t worth more than the six white pieces that will be regained. In this case, both sides lose a pawn, two Knights, two Rooks, and a Bishop, resulting in no material loss. With that established, they can push forward with the KP without any worry.
Therefore: in any combination which includes a number of exchanges on one square, all you have to do is to count the number of attacking and defending units, and to compare their relative values; the latter must never be forgotten. If Black were to play KtxP in the following position, because the pawn at K 5 is attacked three times, and only supported twice, it would be an obvious miscalculation, for the value of the defending pieces is smaller.[2]
Therefore: in any combination that involves multiple exchanges on one square, all you need to do is count the number of attacking and defending units and compare their relative values; this should never be overlooked. If Black played KtxP in the following position, it would be a clear mistake because the pawn at K5 is attacked three times and only defended twice, making the value of the defending pieces weaker. [2]
[2] It is difficult to compare the relative value of the different pieces, as so much depends on the peculiarities of each position, but, generally speaking, minor pieces, Bishop and Knight, are reckoned as equal; the Rook as equal to a minor piece and one or two pawns (to have a Rook against a minor piece, is to be the “exchange” ahead). The Queen is equal to two Rooks or three minor pieces.
[2] It's hard to judge the value of the different pieces because it really depends on the unique situations of each game. However, in general terms, minor pieces like the Bishop and Knight are considered equal. The Rook is valued the same as a minor piece plus one or two pawns (having a Rook against a minor piece means you're "ahead in exchange"). The Queen is worth two Rooks or three minor pieces.
![[Illustration]](images/diag05.jpg)
Diag. 5
Diag. 5
Chess would be an easy game if all combinations could be tested and probed exhaustively by the mathematical process just shown. But we shall find that the complications met with are extremely varied. To give the beginner an idea of this, I will mention a few of the more frequent examples. It will be seen that the calculation may be, and very frequently
Chess would be an easy game if all combinations could be tested and explored thoroughly by the mathematical process just described. However, we will discover that the complications encountered are highly diverse. To give beginners an idea of this, I'll mention a few of the more common examples. It will be evident that the calculations can be, and very often are,
![[Illustration]](images/diag06.jpg)
Diag. 6
Diag. 6
is, upset by one of the pieces involved being exchanged or sacrificed. An example of this is found in Diagram 6; KtxP
is, upset by one of the pieces being traded or lost. An example of this is found in Diagram 6; KtxP
![[Illustration]](images/diag07.jpg)
Diag. 7
Diag. 7
fails on account of R X B; this leaves the Knight unprotected, and White wins two pieces for his Rook. Neither can the Bishop capture on K5 because of R X Kt. leaving the Bishop unprotected, after which BxKt does not retrieve the situation because the Rook recaptures from B6.
fails because of R x B; this leaves the Knight unprotected, and White wins two pieces for the Rook. The Bishop also cannot capture on K5 because of R x Kt, leaving the Bishop unprotected. After that, BxKt doesn't fix the situation because the Rook recaptures from B6.
A second important case, in which our simple calculation is of no avail, occurs in a position where one of the defending pieces is forced away by a threat, the evasion of which is more important than the capture of the unit it defends. In Diagram 7, for instance, Black may not play KtxP, because White, by playing P- Q6, would force the Bishop to Kt4 or B1, to prevent the pawn from Queening and the Knight would be lost. A further example of the same type is given in Diagram 8. Here a peculiar mating threat, which occurs not
A second important case, where our simple calculation doesn't help, happens when one of the defending pieces is forced to move due to a threat that needs to be avoided more than capturing the piece it defends. In Diagram 7, for example, Black cannot play KtxP, because if White plays P-Q6, it would force the Bishop to Kt4 or B1 to stop the pawn from promoting, and then the Knight would be lost. Another example of this type is shown in Diagram 8. Here, there’s a unique mating threat that occurs not
![[Illustration]](images/diag08.jpg)
Diag. 8
Diag. 8
infrequently in practical play, keeps the Black Queen tied to her KB2 and unavailable for the protection of the B at BI.
infrequently in practical play, keeps the Black Queen tied to her KB2 and unable to protect the B at BI.
White wins as follows:
White wins like this:
1. KtxB, KtxKt; 2. RxKt, QxR; 3. Kt-B7ch, K-Kt1; 4. Kt-R6 double ch, K-R1; 5 Q-Kt8ch, RxQ; 6. Kt-B7 mate.
1. KtxB, KtxKt; 2. RxKt, QxR; 3. Kt-B7ch, K-Kt1; 4. Kt-R6 double check, K-R1; 5 Q-Kt8ch, RxQ; 6. Kt-B7 checkmate.
We will now go a step further and turn from “acute” combinations to such combinations as are, as it were, impending. Here, too, I urgently recommend beginners (advanced players do it as a matter of course) to proceed by way of simple arithmetical calculations, but, instead of enumerating the attacking and defending pieces, to count the number of possibilities of attack and defence.
We will now take a step further and move from “acute” combinations to those that are, so to speak, looming. Again, I strongly advise beginners (experienced players do this automatically) to rely on straightforward arithmetic, but instead of counting the attacking and defending pieces, focus on the number of potential attacks and defenses.
Let us consider a few typical examples. In Diagram 9, if Black plays P-Q5, he must first have probed the position in the following way. The pawn at Q5 is attacked once and supported once to start with, and can be attacked by three more White units in three more moves (1. R-Q1, 2. R(B2)-Q2, 3. B-B2) Black can also mobilise three more units for the defence in the same number of moves (1. Kt-B4 or K3, 2. B-Kt2, 3. R-Q1). There is, consequently, no immediate danger, nor is there anything to fear for some time to come, as White has no other piece which could attack the pawn for the fifth time.
Let’s look at a few typical examples. In Diagram 9, if Black plays P-Q5, he must have assessed the position like this. The pawn at Q5 is attacked once and backed up once to start, and it can be attacked by three more White pieces in three additional moves (1. R-Q1, 2. R(B2)-Q2, 3. B-B2). Black can also bring in three more pieces for defense in the same number of moves (1. Kt-B4 or K3, 2. B-Kt2, 3. R-Q1). Therefore, there’s no immediate threat, and there’s nothing to worry about for a while, since White has no other piece that could attack the pawn for the fifth time.
![[Illustration]](images/diag09.jpg)
Diag. 9
Diag. 9
It would be obviously wrong to move the pawn to Q6 after White’s R-Q1, because White could bring another two pieces to bear on the P, the other Rook and the Knight, whilst Black has only one more piece available for the defence, namely, his Rook.
It would clearly be a mistake to move the pawn to Q6 after White’s R-Q1, because White could bring two more pieces to attack the pawn, the other Rook and the Knight, while Black has only one additional piece available for defense, which is his Rook.
The following examples show typical positions, in which simple calculation is complicated by side issues.
The following examples illustrate typical situations where straightforward calculations are complicated by additional factors.
In Diagram 10, the point of attack, namely, the Black Knight at KB3, can be supported by as many Black units as White can bring up for the attack, but the defensive efficiency of one of Black’s pieces is illusory, because it can be taken by a White piece. The plan would be as follows: White threatens Black’s Knight for the third time with Kt-K4, and Black must reply QKt-Q2, because covering with R-K3 would cost the “exchange,” as will appear from a comparison of the value of the pieces concerned. The “exchange” is, however, lost for Black on the next move, because
In Diagram 10, the point of attack, which is the Black Knight at KB3, can be backed up by as many Black pieces as White can bring to the assault, but the defensive strength of one of Black’s pieces is misleading because it can be captured by a White piece. The plan would be this: White threatens Black’s Knight for the third time with Kt-K4, and Black must respond with QKt-Q2, because defending with R-K3 would result in losing the “exchange,” as will be clear from comparing the value of the pieces involved. However, Black loses the “exchange” on the next move, because
![[Illustration]](images/diag10.jpg)
Diag. 10
Diag. 10
White’s further attack on the Knight by Q-B3 forces the Rook to defend on K3, where it gets into the diagonal of the Bishop, which at present is masked by White’s Knight. The sequel would be 3. QKtxKtch, RxKt (not BxKt on account of BxR winning a whole Rook), 4. BxR, and so on. A similar case is shown in Diagram 11.
White's additional attack on the Knight with Q-B3 forces the Rook to defend on K3, where it ends up in the Bishop's diagonal, which is currently blocked by White's Knight. The continuation would be 3. QKtxKtch, RxKt (not BxKt because BxR wins a whole Rook), 4. BxR, and so on. A similar situation is illustrated in Diagram 11.
![[Illustration]](images/diag11.jpg)
Diag. 11
Diag. 11
Here, too, there is a flaw in the simple calculation, because the defending units are not secure. Beginners should devote special attention to this position, which is in practice of frequent occurrence.
Here, too, there’s a flaw in the straightforward calculation because the defending units aren’t secure. Beginners should pay special attention to this situation, which often comes up in practice.
It can be easily perceived that the Bishop cannot capture the pawn at B7 on account of P-QR3. But to take with the Knight would also be an error, because Black would then keep chasing away the covering Bishop.
It’s easy to see that the Bishop can’t take the pawn at B7 because of P-QR3. However, taking with the Knight would also be a mistake, because then Black would just continue to drive away the protecting Bishop.
1. P-Kt4; 2. B-Q6, K-B3; 3. Kt-K8, B-B2; and wins one of the pieces.
1. P-Kt4; 2. B-Q6, K-B3; 3. Kt-K8, B-B2; and wins one of the pieces.
Finally, one more example, in which one of the defending pieces being pinned makes simple calculation impracticable.
Finally, here’s another example where one of the defending pieces being pinned makes straightforward calculation impossible.
In Diagram 12 it seems at first sight as if Black could play KtxP: although White can pin the Knight with R-K1
In Diagram 12, it initially looks like Black could play KtxP; however, White can pin the Knight with R-K1.
![[Illustration]](images/diag12.jpg)
Diag. 12
Diag. 12
and then attack it once more with his Knight, Black would appear to have sufficient protection available, with his Kt and B. White has no time to double Rooks, because if he does so, after his R- K2 Black would play the King away from his file and allow the Knight to escape.
and then attack it again with his Knight. Black seems to have enough defense with his Knight and Bishop. White doesn't have time to double his Rooks because if he does, after moving his Rook to K2, Black would move his King away from that file and let the Knight escape.
But White can, by a simple sacrifice, bring the slumbering R at R1 into sudden action:
But White can, with a quick sacrifice, wake up the dormant R at R1 and get it moving suddenly:
1. … KtxP; 2 R-K1, B-B4; 3. Kt-B3, Kt-Q3; 4. RxKt, KtxR; 5. R- K1, and White wins two pieces for his Rook.
1. … KtxP; 2 R-K1, B-B4; 3. Kt-B3, Kt-Q3; 4. RxKt, KtxR; 5. R-K1, and White gains two pieces for his Rook.
These illustrations will be sufficient to give the beginner an understanding of economy of calculation in all kinds of combinations. His power of combining will grow speedily on this basis, and thrive in the fire of practical experience. Where an opponent is missing, the gap must be filled by reference to such books as treat of the science of combination and give examples taken from actual play.
These illustrations will be enough to help a beginner understand efficient calculation across various combinations. Their ability to combine will develop quickly from this foundation and improve through practical experience. When an opponent is absent, that gap should be filled by consulting books that discuss the science of combinations and provide examples from real gameplay.
CHAPTER III
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CHESS STRATEGY
In bringing the teachings of this book under the collective heading “Chess Strategy,” it was not in any way my intention to draw anything like an exact parallel between the manœuvres on the chess-board and military operations in actual warfare. In trying to seek such analogies there is great danger of being led astray, and little likelihood of gaining knowledge that might be of use in practical play. Plain common-sense will give us all we need, without our being influenced by those tactical and strategical considerations that have been found useful in war.
In categorizing the lessons of this book as “Chess Strategy,” I didn't mean to suggest that there’s a direct comparison between the moves on a chessboard and military actions in real battles. Trying to find those kinds of similarities can easily mislead us and is unlikely to provide useful insights for actual gameplay. Simple common sense will give us everything we need, without the influence of tactics and strategies that are effective in warfare.
The following definition may not be out of place: Strategy sets down the whole of the problems which must be solved in war, in order to attain the ultimate result aimed at; tactics solve such problems in various ways, and according to the conditions prevailing in the particular case. Sound strategy, when setting the task, must never lose sight of tactical practicability, and only a thorough knowledge of tactical resources makes correct strategy possible.
The following definition might be useful: Strategy outlines all the issues that need to be tackled in war to achieve the ultimate goal; tactics address those issues in different ways based on the specific circumstances. Effective strategy, when defining the goal, must always consider what is practically achievable in terms of tactics, and having a solid understanding of tactical options is essential for developing a sound strategy.
Now we shall not under any circumstances, as unfortunately even great chess masters have done, seek in outward similarities justification for transferring to chess the teachings of the strategy and tactics of war. It sounds pretty enough to say: Chess is a game of war—the various pieces represent the various kinds of forces: the pawns represent the infantry, the Knights take the place of cavalry, the Rooks do the work of heavy artillery, sweeping broad lines; the different ways in which the pieces move find a parallel in the topography of the theatre of war, in that the various battle-fields are more or less easy of access. But it is quite unjustifiable to assign to the Knights the functions of scouts, and to say that Rooks should stay in the background, as heavy artillery, and so on. Such pronouncements would not have the slightest practical value. What we take from the science of warfare is merely the definition. In each game the strategy of chess should set us the tasks which must be accomplished (in order to mate the opponent’s King), and tactics point the way in which it is possible to solve such problems. Correct chess strategy will only set such tasks as are tactically possible, and, if we wish to expound the principles of chess strategy, we cannot exclude chess tactics from the field of our observations. If here and there the results of our deliberations bear some analogy to actual warfare, we may certainly give way to a kind of aesthetic satisfaction in that our own occupation has some parallel in real life, but we must never fashion our principles in accordance with such fortuitous circumstances.
Now, we should never, under any circumstances, like many great chess masters have done, look for justification in outward similarities to apply the lessons of war strategy and tactics to chess. It sounds appealing to say: Chess is a game of war—the different pieces symbolize various forces: pawns represent infantry, Knights symbolize cavalry, Rooks act as heavy artillery, sweeping along broad lines; the ways the pieces move are similar to the battlefield topography, where different battlefields have varying levels of accessibility. However, it's completely unjustifiable to claim that Knights serve as scouts or that Rooks should remain in the background like heavy artillery, and so on. Such statements would have no practical value whatsoever. What we take from military science is just the definition. In each game, chess strategy should set us the tasks that need to be achieved (to checkmate the opponent’s King), and tactics show the path to solve these problems. Correct chess strategy will only set tasks that are tactically achievable, and if we want to explain the principles of chess strategy, we cannot ignore chess tactics in our analysis. If occasionally our discussions resemble actual warfare, we can certainly find some aesthetic pleasure in our activity having a parallel in real life, but we must never shape our principles based on such random circumstances.
Having surveyed the problems we have to solve, we can now plunge into our subject.
Having looked at the issues we need to address, we can now dive into our topic.
In the first chapter, when considering special cases in elementary combinations, we have already noticed the important part played in each skirmish by the balance between the attacking and defending units. Speaking quite generally, common-sense will tell us that, in all operations on the chess-board, the main consideration for the defence will be to maintain that balance, and that there is only justification for an attack when it is possible to concentrate more forces on the strategic point than can be mustered by the defence. However, one very important point must not be neglected, though I did not touch upon it when discussing elementary combinations for fear of complicating matters for beginners: the balance between the contending forces is by no means established by their numerical equality. A paramount factor is the mobility of such forces, and as soon as it is no longer one of the elementary cases of capture and recapture described previously, this factor must be taken into account in order to decide, on a general survey, whether there is a sufficient defence to an impending attack, or whether one’s own intended attack is likely to prevail. That mobility is the first and foremost consideration should be self-evident, since the relative value of the pieces can only make itself felt by their greater or lesser mobility.
In the first chapter, when looking at special cases in basic combinations, we've already seen how crucial the balance between attacking and defending units is in each skirmish. Generally speaking, common sense tells us that in all chess operations, the main focus for defense should be to keep that balance, and an attack is only justified when you can gather more forces at a strategic point than the defense can muster. However, there's one very important aspect that shouldn't be overlooked, even though I didn’t mention it when discussing basic combinations for fear of making things too complicated for beginners: the balance between the opposing forces isn't just about their numbers. A key factor is the mobility of those forces, and as soon as it goes beyond the basic cases of capture and recapture I mentioned earlier, this factor needs to be considered to determine whether there’s enough defense against an impending attack or if your own planned attack is likely to succeed. The importance of mobility should be obvious since the relative value of the pieces can only be realized through their greater or lesser mobility.
Except in certain positions, which are brought about by some particular array of the pieces, the intrinsic value of a Rook is greater than that of a Bishop, because it can command all the squares on the board, whilst a Bishop is tied to its own colour; Knight and Bishop are considered equivalent, because the Knight’s advantage in being able to act on all the squares of either colour is balanced by the fact that the Bishop can sweep long diagonals. Two Bishops are, generally speaking, of greater value than two Knights, because together they also act on all the squares, and their command of long diagonals is a clear advantage. The whole of this valuation, however, comes to nought when the pieces are hindered in their mobility by the peculiarity of any particular position.
Except in certain situations caused by specific arrangements of the pieces, a Rook is generally more valuable than a Bishop because it can control all the squares on the board, while a Bishop is restricted to its own color. Knights and Bishops are considered to have equal value because the Knight’s ability to move to any square of either color is offset by the Bishop's long diagonal range. Generally, two Bishops are more valuable than two Knights because they can control all the squares together, and their ability to cover long diagonals gives them a clear edge. However, this entire evaluation can become irrelevant if the pieces are limited in their movement due to the specific characteristics of a particular position.
We will consider one instance from end-game play, and one from the openings.
We will look at one example from endgame play and one from the openings.
In Diagram 13, White derives no advantage from being
In Diagram 13, White gains no benefit from being
![[Illustration]](images/diag13.jpg)
Diag. 13
Diag. 13
the exchange to the good, for the Rook has no file which could be used to break into the Black camp.
the exchange is advantageous, because the Rook has no file that could be used to infiltrate the Black camp.
In Diagram 14, the numerical equality of forces will not save Black, because bad development reduces the mobility of his pieces to such an extent that he has no resources with which he can parry the impending attack.
In Diagram 14, the equal number of forces won't help Black, because poor development limits the movement of his pieces so much that he has no options to defend against the upcoming attack.
![[Illustration]](images/diag14.jpg)
Diag. 14
Diag. 14
White will assail the Black King’s position on the Queen side, and Black is unable to concentrate his forces quickly enough for the defence of the jeopardised entrenchments. Let us therefore bear in mind that the mobility of the pieces is the deciding factor of their efficiency, and that mobility is the highest criterion by which to judge the merits (or demerits) of their operations.
White will attack the Black King’s position on the Queen side, and Black can't regroup his forces quickly enough to defend the vulnerable positions. So, let’s remember that how mobile the pieces are is the key factor in their effectiveness, and that mobility is the best way to evaluate the strengths (or weaknesses) of their actions.
We will now consider this principle in its application to the three stages of play, namely, the opening, the middle-game, and the ending.
We will now look at this principle as it applies to the three stages of play: the opening, the middle game, and the endgame.
CHAPTER IV
THE OPENING
The only pieces available on the first move are the Knights. In order to develop other pieces as well, it is necessary to move pawns first, and such pawn moves will be best as give an outlet to as many pieces as possible. For quick development is of the utmost importance, and he who succeeds first in placing all his pieces, from their initial awkward positions, to such places as give them command of the greatest possible number of squares, has the better chance of concentrating a superior force on some important point.
The only pieces you can move first are the Knights. To develop other pieces, you need to move some pawns first, and the best pawn moves are those that free up as many pieces as possible. Fast development is crucial, and the player who first manages to reposition all their pieces from their initial awkward spots to places where they can control the most squares has a better chance of focusing a stronger force on a key area.
It follows that White, having the first move, is, so to speak, always morally justified in attacking, whilst Black should assume the defensive. It is a step in the right direction, to appreciate the truth of this proposition. Unfortunately most beginners fail to realise it, and so pave the way, from the first, to the loss of the game.
It follows that White, having the first move, is, in a way, always morally justified in attacking, while Black should take on a defensive role. It's a positive step to recognize the truth in this statement. Unfortunately, most beginners don't understand it, which often leads them to lose the game right from the start.
There are not many developing pawn moves to choose from. Apparently from the point of view of quick development only P-K4 and P-Q4 need be considered, since they free both Bishop and Queen, whilst other pawn moves liberate one piece only. Generally speaking it is only required to move two or three pawns to allow all pieces to be developed, and it is good, on principle, to make only such pawn moves in the opening, which are necessary for the development of pieces. To play other pawns really means the loss of a move. To “lose a move” means to make a move which is not essential to the attainment of a desired position. Thus the “loss of a move” results also from playing a piece to a given square in more moves than necessary.
There aren’t many pawn moves for development to consider. From the perspective of quick development, only P-K4 and P-Q4 should really be thought about, since they open up both the Bishop and the Queen, while other pawn moves only free up one piece. Generally, you only need to move two or three pawns to enable all your pieces to be developed, and it's best to make only those pawn moves in the opening that are essential for developing your pieces. Making unnecessary pawn moves effectively means losing a move. To “lose a move” means making a move that isn’t essential to getting to a desired position. So, the “loss of a move” can also occur from moving a piece to a specific square in more moves than necessary.
I shall now give a few games showing the far-reaching consequences of losing moves. The first one is a typical though glaring example, which is very instructive and came to my notice some time ago:
I will now provide a few games that demonstrate the significant impact of losing moves. The first one is a typical yet obvious example that is very educational and caught my attention some time ago:
1. P—K4 | P—K4 |
2. P—Q4 | P×P |
3. Q×P | Kt—QB3 |
4. Q—K3 | Kt—B3 |
5. P—KR3? |
I will not discuss the system of development adopted by White in his first four moves. The last move, however, can at once be recognised as faulty. It is the loss of a move such as occurs in the vast majority of games played by beginners. It was unnecessary to prevent KKt-Kt5, since the Knight could not hold that square permanently. In any case B-K2 would have had the same effect, and developed a piece at the same time.
I won't go into the development strategy that White used in his first four moves. However, the final move is clearly a mistake. It's similar to the common errors made by beginners where they lose a move. There was no need to block KKt-Kt5 because the Knight couldn't stay on that square for long anyway. Besides, B-K2 would have achieved the same result while also developing a piece.
5. … | B—K2 |
6. P—QR3?? |
This, of course, is very bad. The consequences of this loss of a second move are swift and deadly.
This is definitely not good. The results of losing that second move are quick and severe.
6. … | Castles |
7. B-B4 |
At last a developing move.
Finally, a developing move.
7. … | R-K1 |
8. Q-QKt3 |
Another Queen’s move. The attack on the Bishop’s Pawn may be very tempting, but must necessarily be incorrect—and why? Because White is much behind with his development. It is useless to analyse any kind of attack in face of this fact. The beginner finds it hard to get used to this way of thinking. He prefers to try to unravel a long string of variations and combinations, in which he will mostly lose his bearings. Even stronger players obstruct their own powers by refusing to see the value of judging a position on general merits. They lose valuable time in thinking out endless variations, to maintain positions which could be proved valueless by general and logical deductions.
Another Queen's move. The attack on the Bishop’s Pawn might seem really appealing, but it’s definitely the wrong choice—and why? Because White is significantly behind in development. It’s pointless to analyze any kind of attack when faced with this fact. Beginners often struggle to adopt this mindset. They tend to get caught up in a long sequence of variations and combinations, which usually leaves them confused. Even stronger players hinder their own abilities by refusing to recognize the importance of evaluating a position based on overall qualities. They waste valuable time calculating endless variations to support positions that could be shown to be useless through straightforward and logical reasoning.
![[Illustration]](images/diag15.jpg)
Diag. 15
Diag. 15
Then, as in the present position, retribution comes swiftly.
Then, just like now, punishment arrives quickly.
8. … | P-Q4 |
White should have considered this move. It was obvious, since the opening of the K file for the Rook is most dangerous, for the White King.
White should have thought about this move. It was clear that opening the K file for the Rook poses the most significant danger to the White King.
9. BxP | KtxB |
Black could have played QxB at once.
Black could have played QxB right away.
10. QxKt | QxQ |
11. PxQ | B-Kt5 double ch |
12. K-Q1 | R-K8 mate |
A further example in which the loss of moves occurs, though not so glaringly, is the following famous game, which Morphy played against the Duke Karl of Brunswick and Count Isouard in the Royal box at the Paris opera-house.
A further example where the loss of moves happens, though not as obviously, is the famous game that Morphy played against Duke Karl of Brunswick and Count Isouard in the Royal box at the Paris opera house.
1. P-K4 | P-K4 |
2. Kt-KB3 | P-Q3 |
According to the principles set out above, Kt-QB3 would have been better, since the text move shuts out the King’s Bishop.
According to the principles mentioned earlier, Kt-QB3 would have been a better move, as this text move blocks the King's Bishop.
3. P-Q4 |
Now the King’s Pawn is attacked twice. It would be bad to support it with Kt-QB3, as White would exchange pawns and then Queens. Black would thus forfeit his chance of castling and lose much time in bringing the King into safety and the Rooks into play. P- KB3, of course, is impossible, as it is not a developing move, and moreover blocks the natural development of the King’s Knight. Protecting the pawn with the Queen would also block other pieces, and QKt-Q2 cannot be good, as it blocks the Queen’s Bishop.
Now the King's Pawn is under attack from two pieces. It wouldn't be wise to defend it with Kt-QB3, since White would trade pawns and then Queens. This would cause Black to miss the opportunity to castle and waste a lot of time getting the King to safety and bringing the Rooks into play. P-KB3 is also not an option, as it's not a developing move and also hinders the natural advancement of the King's Knight. Defending the pawn with the Queen would also obstruct other pieces, and QKt-Q2 can't be a good move, as it blocks the Queen's Bishop.
Since it seems impossible to protect the King’s Pawn, the only alternative would be to exchange it; indeed it is on the whole the best course, although it allows a White piece to take up a dominating position in the centre. Wishing to avoid this, Black plays
Since it seems impossible to protect the King’s Pawn, the only option is to exchange it; in fact, that's the best move overall, even though it lets a White piece take a strong position in the center. Wanting to avoid this, Black plays
3. … | B-Kt5 |
and, by pinning the opponent’s Knight, indirectly protects the King’s Pawn. This manœuvre is, however, ill-advised, as Black is forced to exchange the Bishop for the Knight. The Bishop will have moved twice, the Knight only once, therefore White will have gained a move for his development.
and, by pinning the opponent’s Knight, indirectly protects the King’s Pawn. This maneuver is, however, a bad idea, as Black is forced to trade the Bishop for the Knight. The Bishop will have moved twice, the Knight only once, so White will have gained a move for their development.
4. PxP | BxKt |
Should Black play PxP at once, White would exchange Queens, release the pin, and win the pawn.
Should Black play PxP immediately, White would trade Queens, lift the pin, and capture the pawn.
5. QxB | PxP |
6. B-QB4 |
White has now two pieces more in play than Black, instead of only one, and the mobility of the White Queen, which Black himself has brought out, begins to have a threatening effect on Black’s game.
White now has two more pieces in play than Black, instead of just one, and the mobility of the White Queen, which Black himself has brought out, starts to pose a threat to Black’s game.
6. … | Kt-KB3 |
7. Q-QKt3 | Q-K2 |
Black cannot cover his King’s Bishop’s Pawn with Q-Q2 because 8. QxP wins the Rook, whilst now Black could play 8. … Q-Kt5ch in reply, forcing the exchange of Queens. The text move, which is forced, blocks the Bishop, and at the same time prevents the development of the King’s Rook, all of which is the direct consequence of the loss of one move.
Black cannot protect his King’s Bishop’s Pawn with Q-Q2 because 8. QxP wins the Rook, while now Black could respond with 8. … Q-Kt5ch, forcing the exchange of Queens. The current move, which is required, blocks the Bishop and simultaneously stops the King’s Rook from developing, all of which is a direct result of losing one move.
8. Kt-B3 |
White rightly disdains the gain of the Knight’s Pawn, but prevents the exchange of Queens in developing a piece. He proves the superiority of his position much more convincingly in that way. Black must now lose yet another move to protect his Knight’s Pawn.
White correctly looks down on the gain of the Knight’s Pawn, but avoids exchanging Queens to develop a piece. He shows the strength of his position much more clearly this way. Black now has to waste another move to defend his Knight’s Pawn.
8. … | P-B3 |
9. B-KKt5 | P-Kt4 |
Black must try to develop his Queen’s Knight at last. He cannot play QKt-Q2 at once, since his Knight’s Pawn would again be unprotected; therefore he plays the move in the text, probably thinking that now White also must lose a move to withdraw his Bishop. But in view of the fact that Black’s game is wholly undeveloped, and that he plays practically several pieces down, White sacrifices his Knight for two pawns: he foresees the position which occurs a few moves later, when Black is hemmed in on all sides.
Black needs to finally develop his Knight on the Queen's side. He can't move QKt-Q2 right away because that would leave his Knight’s Pawn vulnerable again; instead, he plays the move mentioned in the text, likely thinking that now White will also have to make a move to pull back his Bishop. However, considering that Black's position is completely undeveloped and that he is essentially playing with a few pieces down, White sacrifices his Knight for two pawns: he anticipates the situation that unfolds a few moves later, when Black is trapped on all sides.
10. KtxP | PxKt |
11. BxKtPch | QKt-Q2 |
12. Castles QR | R-Q1 |
This is the only piece available to cover Q2, for the King’s Knight is pinned. White has another piece in reserve, his King’s Rook, and against this Black is defenceless.
This is the only move available to cover Q2 because the King’s Knight is pinned. White has another piece in reserve, his King’s Rook, and against this, Black has no defense.
![[Illustration]](images/diag16.jpg)
Diag. 16
Diag. 16
13. RxKt
13. RxKt
compare Diag. 12.
compare Diag. 12.
13. … RxR 14. R-Q1 Q-K3
13. … RxR 14. R-Q1 Q-K3
This releases the King’s Knight. Now White could win by playing BxKt and BxRch, but he prefers to end up with a magnificent sacrifice.
This releases the King’s Knight. Now White could win by playing BxKt and BxRch, but he prefers to finish with an impressive sacrifice.
15. BxRch KtxB 16. Q-Kt8ch!! KtxQ 17. R-Q8 mate
15. BxRch KtxB 16. Q-Kt8ch!! KtxQ 17. R-Q8 checkmate
The final position shows in a striking manner how a few well- developed pieces can be worth more than many undeveloped ones, and the whole game is an example of the fatal consequences which can follow the loss of a move, since it often leads to the compulsory loss of further moves in the course of the game.
The final position clearly illustrates how a few strong pieces can be more valuable than many weak ones, and the entire game demonstrates the serious consequences that can result from missing a move, as it often leads to the unavoidable loss of additional moves throughout the game.
“This is the curse of every evil deed
That propagating still it brings forth evil.”
“This is the curse of every bad action
That, continuing on, it produces more evil.”
The logical sequence of the moves in this game, as pointed out in the commentaries to it, is borne out by the curious coincidence that I once had the opportunity of playing a game in exactly the same sequence of moves, against a player to whom Morphy’s “brilliancy” was unknown.
The logical order of the moves in this game, as noted in the commentaries, is supported by the interesting coincidence that I once played a game with exactly the same sequence of moves against a player who was unaware of Morphy's "brilliance."
The leading principle of all opening moves is made clear by the foregoing pages, namely, rapid development of pieces, and consequently the avoidance of the loss of a move in any shape or form.
The main rule for all opening moves is clear from the previous pages: quickly develop your pieces and avoid losing a move in any way.
Before treating of the various systems of openings, I will say a few words on the principles of PAWN PLAY.
Before discussing the different types of openings, I want to say a few words about the principles of PAWN PLAY.
Each opening is characterised by a well-defined pawn formation, and concurrently a certain method in the development of the pieces. Naturally the formation of a pawn skeleton is not an independent factor, but must be evolved with a view to facilitating the favourable development of pieces. But when considering the form of a pawn position and that of the pieces, we cannot shut our eyes to the fact that pawn formation must necessarily be the dominant consideration in our mind. Pawn formation is of a more permanent character than that of the pieces, in consequence of the latter’s greater mobility. When we have made a rash move with a piece, to which our attacking disposition may have tempted us, we may still have a chance of retrieving the position by timely retreat. Once a pawn has moved it cannot turn back, and only after the greatest deliberation should we embark on changes in our pawn formation in order not to disturb the balance of this “static element” of the game. But we shall see that the pawn skeleton which was formed in the opening often weathers the storm and stress of the middle game, and frequently preserves its character right up to the end-game. I will therefore make pawn formation my starting-point in an attempt to show the way through the maze of the openings on the basis of general strategical principles.
Each opening is marked by a clear pawn structure and a specific approach to piece development. Of course, creating a pawn structure isn’t an isolated action; it should be developed to support the effective growth of pieces. However, when we think about the shape of a pawn position and the arrangement of pieces, we can't ignore the fact that pawn structure needs to be our primary focus. Pawn structure is more permanent than the pieces, due to the mobility of the latter. If we've made a hasty move with a piece, which our aggressive mindset might have encouraged, we might still have a chance to recover the position by pulling back. Once a pawn has moved forward, it can't go back, and we should think very carefully before making changes to our pawn structure to avoid disrupting the balance of this "static element" of the game. Yet, we will see that the pawn structure established in the opening often withstands the challenges of the middle game and frequently retains its form right through to the endgame. Therefore, I will use pawn structure as my starting point in an effort to navigate the complexity of openings based on general strategic principles.
If our pawn skeleton is to promote the freedom of all the pieces, we must not build it up with the narrow view of developing minor pieces only, but must consider from the very first in which way it will enable the Rooks to get into action. We can unite these tendencies in making the CENTRE OF THE BOARD the main field of action for all our forces. This means for both sides K4 and Q4, and also in a lesser degree QB4 and KB4. We shall get a clear insight into the positional advantage of having command of the centre later on, when discussing the middle game. At present I will only touch the subject in a general way, explaining it in an elementary form, which will be sufficient to develop an understanding for pawn strategy in the opening. In the course of further deductions, after the grasp of this difficult stage of the game has become stronger, I will go into details which will allow the subject to be stated in a more precise form.
If our pawn structure is meant to support the freedom of all the pieces, we can't just focus on developing the minor pieces. We need to think from the start about how it will help the Rooks get into play. We can combine these ideas by making the CENTER OF THE BOARD the main battleground for all our forces. This means targeting K4 and Q4 for both sides, and to a lesser extent, QB4 and KB4. We’ll understand the positional advantage of controlling the center better later when we discuss the middle game. For now, I’ll just touch on the topic in a general way, explaining it simply enough to grasp pawn strategy in the opening. As we progress, and once your understanding of this challenging phase of the game improves, I’ll go into more detail, allowing for a clearer presentation of the topic.
Placing the pieces in the centre is of value, because there they have more mobility than near the edge, which, of course, limits their range of action, and also because from the centre a concentration of forces on a given point can generally be effected in the quickest way.
Putting the pieces in the center is important because they can move around more freely than if they're near the edge, which limits what they can do. Additionally, from the center, it's usually faster to concentrate forces on a specific point.
In most cases two centre squares become inaccessible at once, through the opponent placing one of his pawns in the centre; therefore it would seem a good plan to lure that pawn away, and this is rendered feasible by playing P-K4 or P-QB4 when the opponent has a pawn on his Q4, and P-Q4 or P-KB4 when he has a pawn on K4. In the following we will consider such manœuvres as could apply either to White or Black, from the point of view of White, to whom the initiative is, as pointed out above, a sort of birth-right. Naturally, should White lose a move, as, for instance, 1. P-K4, P-K4; 2. Kt-KB3, Kt-QB3; 3. P-QR3? the position is reversed, and Black is bound to obtain the initiative which is White’s birthright.
In most cases, two center squares become inaccessible at the same time when the opponent places one of their pawns in the center. Therefore, it seems like a good strategy to lure that pawn away. This can be done by playing P-K4 or P-QB4 when the opponent has a pawn on their Q4, and P-Q4 or P-KB4 when they have a pawn on K4. Next, we will look at maneuvers that could apply to either White or Black from White's perspective, as the initiative is, as mentioned earlier, like a birthright for White. Of course, if White loses a turn, such as in 1. P-K4, P-K4; 2. Kt-KB3, Kt-QB3; 3. P-QR3? the position is flipped, and Black will definitely gain the initiative that is White’s birthright.
The pawn moves mentioned above also have the tendency of giving the Rooks an opportunity for action. A Rook standing behind an advanced pawn may support its further advance, or, if the pawn should be exchanged, might get an open file.
The pawn movements mentioned above also create opportunities for the Rooks to take action. A Rook positioned behind an advanced pawn can help it move forward, or if the pawn is exchanged, it may gain an open file.
The damage we wish to inflict on our opponent we must, of course, try to avoid ourselves. Thus we will not easily give up a centre pawn unless we can obtain some other advantage in doing so. This advantage may be, that in exchanging the centre pawn we open up lines of attack for our pieces, or that we are able to place one of our pieces in a commanding position in the centre of the board.
The damage we want to do to our opponent is something we should try to avoid for ourselves. Therefore, we won't easily give up a central pawn unless we gain some other benefit from it. This benefit could be that by exchanging the central pawn, we open up avenues for our pieces to attack, or that we can position one of our pieces in a strong spot in the center of the board.
The following example may serve as an illustration. Supposing White plays after
The following example can serve as an illustration. Assuming White plays after
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. P-QB4
His aim is to tempt Black’s centre pawn away and to make his QB4 and K4 accessible for his own forces. Black might be justified in taking the pawn, if he really could hold the pawn thus gained. We shall show later on that this is not so, and that White can win it back easily and advantageously. Therefore Black is more likely to play 2. P-K3. Not 2. … Kt-KB3; for after 3. PxP, KtxP; 4. P-K4 would open White’s game and drive the Knight away at once, gaining a move. Supposing, however, Black plays 2. … B-B4; should White now think mechanically, “I will take his centre pawn and consequently have the better game,” his deduction would be wrong. For after exchanging his Bishop for the Knight, which otherwise would drive his Queen away, Black brings the latter into a dominating square in the centre.
His goal is to lure Black's center pawn away and make his QB4 and K4 reachable for his own pieces. Black might have a good reason to capture the pawn if he could actually hold onto it afterward. We'll show later that this isn’t the case, as White can easily and advantageously win it back. Therefore, Black is more likely to play 2. P-K3. Not 2. … Kt-KB3; because after 3. PxP, KtxP; 4. P-K4 would open White's game and force the Knight away immediately, gaining a move. However, if Black plays 2. … B-B4; and if White thinks mechanically, “I will take his center pawn and therefore have the better game,” he would be mistaken. Because after trading his Bishop for the Knight, which would otherwise push his Queen away, Black can place the Queen in a strong position in the center.
![[Illustration]](images/diag17.jpg)
Diag. 17
Diag. 17
3. PxP BxKt 4. RxB QxP
3. PxP BxKt 4. RxB QxP
Black’s Queen cannot easily be driven away from her commanding position, particularly as White must lose a move to save his QRP. Meanwhile Black gains time for concentrating his forces for an attack which wins the Queen’s Pawn.
Black's Queen can't be easily forced away from her strong position, especially since White has to waste a move to protect his Queen's Rook Pawn. In the meantime, Black has time to focus his forces for an attack that will capture the Queen's Pawn.
5. P-QKt3 Kt-QB3 6. P-K3 Castles QR 7. Kt-B3 P-K4
5. P-QKt3 Kt-QB3 6. P-K3 Castles QR 7. Kt-B3 P-K4
and wins the QP, or
and wins the QP, or
5. P-QR3 Kt-QB3 6. P-K3 Castles QR
5. P-QR3 Kt-QB3 6. P-K3 Castles QR
and P-K4 is again a threat hard for white to meet.
and P-K4 is once again a challenge that's tough for white to handle.
This position shows, that to bring one’s opponent’s centre pawn away and to keep one’s own, does not under all circumstances mean the command of the centre, but that the opening up of files and diagonals for one’s pieces towards the centre is an important moment in the fight for positional advantage.
This position demonstrates that moving your opponent's central pawn away while keeping your own doesn't always mean you control the center. Instead, the opening of files and diagonals for your pieces towards the center is a crucial aspect in the battle for positional advantage.
Considerations of this kind will help to improve our judgment in many of the various openings treated in the following pages.
Considerations like these will enhance our judgment on many of the different openings discussed in the pages that follow.
We will class the openings in this way:
We will categorize the openings like this:
A. White 1. P-K4.
A. White 1. e4.
(a) Black 1. P-K4 (b) Black 1. Any other move
(a) Black 1. E4 (b) Black 1. Any other move
B. White 1. P-Q4.
B. White 1. d4.
(a) Black 1. P-Q4 (b) Black 1. Any other move
(a) Black 1. Pawn to Q4 (b) Black 1. Any other move
C. White 1. Any other move
C. White 1. Any other move
We shall find that openings classed under C generally lead to positions treated under A and B.
We’ll find that situations categorized under C typically lead to positions discussed under A and B.
A. We have already come to the conclusion that after 1. P-K4, P- K4 White does well to try to force the exchange of Black’s centre pawn on Q4 or KB4, and that Black will try to counteract this, unless by allowing the exchange he gets a chance of exerting pressure in the centre by means of his pieces.
A. We’ve already concluded that after 1. P-K4, P-K4, White should aim to force the exchange of Black’s central pawn on Q4 or KB4, and that Black will try to counter this unless allowing the exchange gives him a chance to apply pressure in the center using his pieces.
We will first see what happens when White undertakes the advance in question on his second move. Superficially the difference between 2. PQ4 and 2. P-KB4 is that in the first case the pawn thus advanced is covered, while in the second it is not. An opening in which a pawn sacrifice is offered, is called a “gambit”; 2. P-KB4 is therefore a gambit.
We will first look at what happens when White makes the advance in question on his second move. On the surface, the difference between 2. PQ4 and 2. P-KB4 is that in the first case, the pawn that advances is protected, while in the second it is not. An opening that offers a pawn sacrifice is called a “gambit”; therefore, 2. P-KB4 is a gambit.
2. P-Q4 is only a gambit if after 2. … PxP White does not recapture the pawn. Nevertheless this opening has been called the “centre gambit,” and though the denomination is not correct we will adhere to it, as it is in general use.
2. P-Q4 is only a gambit if after 2. … PxP White doesn’t take back the pawn. Still, this opening is known as the “center gambit,” and even though that name isn’t technically accurate, we’ll stick with it since it's widely used.
A very considerable difference between the centre gambit and the King’s gambit lies in the fact that in the former acceptance is compulsory, whilst in the second it may be declined.
A significant difference between the center gambit and the King's gambit is that in the former, accepting is mandatory, while in the latter, it can be refused.
For: 2. P-Q4 threatens to take the King’s Pawn. To defend it by means of 2. … P-Q3 is unwise, since White exchanges pawns and then Queens, by which Black loses his chance of castling and impedes the development of his Rooks. 2. … Kt-QB3 is also bad, since after 3. PxP, KtxP; 4 P-KB4, White drives the Knight away, gaining a strong hold on the centre, and Black has no compensation for giving up his centre pawn. It may be mentioned here that after 2. … Kt-QB3, 3. P-Q5 would be a useless move, as to begin with it would be inconsequent, since P-Q4 was played in order to clear the centre, and moreover it would block up a diagonal which could be most useful to the King’s Bishop.
For: 2. P-Q4 threatens to take the King's Pawn. Defending it with 2. ... P-Q3 is a bad idea since White can trade pawns and then exchange Queens, which makes it impossible for Black to castle and hinders the development of his Rooks. 2. ... Kt-QB3 is also not a good move, because after 3. PxP, KtxP; 4. P-KB4, White pushes the Knight away, gaining a strong grip on the center, and Black has no compensation for losing his center pawn. It's worth mentioning that after 2. ... Kt-QB3, 3. P-Q5 would be a pointless move, as it would be inconsistent since P-Q4 was played to clear the center, and it would also block a diagonal that could be very useful for the King's Bishop.
We conclude now that Black cannot hold his pawn at K4. He must relinquish the centre by 2. … PxP. He will now either attempt to bring away White’s King’s Pawn by advancing his own QP to Q4, or try to utilise the King’s file, which was opened by his second move, and operate against White’s KP. The Rooks are indicated for this task. We shall refer to the execution of these plans later on.
We conclude now that Black can't keep his pawn at K4. He has to give up the center by 2. … PxP. He will either try to get rid of White’s King’s Pawn by moving his own QP to Q4 or use the King’s file, which was opened by his second move, to put pressure on White’s KP. The Rooks are meant for this task. We’ll discuss the execution of these plans later on.
In the King’s gambit, White’s attempt to bring away Black’s King’s Pawn may be safely ignored.
In the King’s Gambit, White's effort to move Black's King's Pawn can be safely ignored.
The move 2. P-KB4 does not threaten to take the King’s Pawn, as Black would win White’s KP by Q-R5ch. Black can therefore develop in security with 2. … B-B4, and if then White prevents the Q check by Kt-KB3, there is no objection to Black protecting his King’s Pawn with P-Q3, as the King’s Bishop is already developed. After 4. B-B4, Black has still no need to protect his KP with Kt- QB3, but can play Kt-KB3 first, because after 5. PxP, PxP; 6. KtxP would be answered by 6. … Q-Q5 winning a piece. Black keeps the upper hand in these early encounters because he has made a developing move with a piece, whilst White has played a pawn move which is useless for the purpose of development.
The move 2. P-KB4 doesn't threaten to take the King’s Pawn, since Black would respond with Q-R5ch and win White’s King Pawn. Black can, therefore, develop safely with 2. … B-B4. If White then tries to block the Queen's check with Kt-KB3, Black can protect his King’s Pawn with P-Q3, especially since the King’s Bishop is already developed. After 4. B-B4, Black still doesn’t need to guard his King Pawn with Kt-QB3; he can play Kt-KB3 first because if 5. PxP, then PxP; 6. KtxP would lead to 6. … Q-Q5, which wins a piece for Black. Black maintains the advantage in these early moves because he has made a developing move with a piece, while White has only moved a pawn, which doesn’t help with development.
![[Illustration]](images/diag18.jpg)
Diag. 18
Diag. 18
Diagram 18 shows the position which results from the following plausible moves:
Diagram 18 shows the position that results from the following possible moves:
2. P-KB4 B-B4 3. Kt-KB3 P-Q3 4. B-B4 Kt-KB3 5. P-Q3 Kt-B3 6. Kt-B3 B-KKt5
2. Pawn to King’s Bishop 4 Bishop to Bishop 4 3. Knight to King’s Bishop 3 Pawn to Queen 3 4. Bishop to Bishop 4 Knight to King’s Bishop 3 5. Pawn to Queen 3 Knight to Bishop 3 6. Knight to Bishop 3 Bishop to Knight 5
If White wishes to castle on the K side, which must have been his intention when playing 2. P-KB4, he will have to play Kt-QR4 and KtxB.
If White wants to castle on the kingside, which must have been his plan when he moved 2. P-KB4, he will need to play Kt-QR4 and KtxB.
Though this is of no disadvantage to Black, he could avoid the exchange of his KB by playing 2. … P-QR3 instead of B-KKt5. If then White plays P-B5 in order to hinder the development of Black’s QB and to bring out his own, the pressure on Black’s KP is relieved permanently, and sooner or later Black will break through on the Q file, as his QP is no longer needed at Q3 for the support of the centre pawn.
Though this doesn't hurt Black, he could skip trading his knight by playing 2. … Pawn to QR3 instead of Bishop to KKt5. If White then plays Pawn to B5 to block the development of Black’s bishop and move out his own, the pressure on Black’s king's pawn is eased permanently, and eventually, Black will make progress on the queen's file since his queen's pawn is no longer needed at Q3 to support the center pawn.
A different pawn formation is the result if White enforces the exchange of Black’s centre pawn at once. This he can do by playing P-Q4, e.g.:
A different pawn structure results if White quickly forces the exchange of Black’s center pawn. He can do this by playing P-Q4, for example:
2. P-KB4 B-B4 or 4. P-B3 Kt-KB3 3. Kt-KB3 P-Q3 5. P-Q4 PxQP 4. P-Q4 PxQP 6. PxP B-Kt3 5. KtxP
2. P-KB4 B-B4 or 4. P-B3 Kt-KB3 3. Kt-KB3 P-Q3 5. P-Q4 PxQP 4. P-Q4 PxQP 6. PxP B-Kt3 5. KtxP
Here Black can get an early advantage by attacking White’s KP, taking possession of the K file after castling on the K side.
Here Black can gain an early advantage by attacking White's king pawn, claiming the king file after castling on the king side.
All things considered, the student should in my opinion decline the gambit, as in doing so he can get an easy and satisfactory development. The treatment of the “King’s Gambit accepted,” which aims at holding the gambit pawn, is most difficult and leads early in the game to such complications as none but an expert can hope to master.
All things considered, I think the student should pass on the gambit, as doing so allows for an easy and satisfactory improvement. The strategy of the “King’s Gambit accepted,” which focuses on keeping the gambit pawn, is quite challenging and quickly leads to complexities that only an expert can hope to handle.
[Footnote: As an example of the difficult play which ensues when Black defends the pawn in the King’s Gambit, I give the latest variation of an attack introduced by Professor I. L. Rice, and called the “Rice Gambit”:
[Footnote: As an example of the challenging gameplay that occurs when Black defends the pawn in the King’s Gambit, I'll present the latest variation of an attack introduced by Professor I. L. Rice, known as the “Rice Gambit”:
1. P-K4, P-K4; 2. P-KB4, PxP; 3. Kt-KB3, P-KKt4; 4. P-KR4, P-Kt5; 5. Kt-K5, Kt-KB3; 6. B-B4, P-Q4; 7. PxP, B-Q3; 8. Castles! BxKt; 9. R-K1, Q-K2; 10. P-B3, Kt-R4; 11. P-Q4, Kt-Q2; 12. PxB, KtxP; 13. P-QKt3, Castles; 14. B-R3, Kt-B6ch!; 15. PxKt, QxP; 16. R-K5! B-B4!!; 17. Kt-Q2! Q-Kt6ch; 18. K-B1, Q-R7; 19. BxR, P-Kt6; 20. B-B5, P-Kt7ch; 21. K-K1, Q-R5ch; 22. K-K2, Kt-Kt6ch; 23. K-B2, Kt-K5ch; 24. KxP, B-R6ch; 25. K-R1, K-R1; 26. KtxKt, R-KKt1; 27. R-Kt5, with interesting possibilities.
1. P-K4, P-K4; 2. P-KB4, PxP; 3. Kt-KB3, P-KKt4; 4. P-KR4, P-Kt5; 5. Kt-K5, Kt-KB3; 6. B-B4, P-Q4; 7. PxP, B-Q3; 8. Castles! BxKt; 9. R-K1, Q-K2; 10. P-B3, Kt-R4; 11. P-Q4, Kt-Q2; 12. PxB, KtxP; 13. P-QKt3, Castles; 14. B-R3, Kt-B6ch!; 15. PxKt, QxP; 16. R-K5! B-B4!!; 17. Kt-Q2! Q-Kt6ch; 18. K-B1, Q-R7; 19. BxR, P-Kt6; 20. B-B5, P-Kt7ch; 21. K-K1, Q-R5ch; 22. K-K2, Kt-Kt6ch; 23. K-B2, Kt-K5ch; 24. KxP, B-R6ch; 25. K-R1, K-R1; 26. KtxKt, R-KKt1; 27. R-Kt5, with interesting possibilities.
Numberless interesting variations are possible, but their discussion does not lie within the scope of this work. They will be found in books treating of the analysis of the openings.]
Countless interesting variations are possible, but discussing them isn't the focus of this work. You'll find them in books that cover the analysis of the openings.
It is therefore unwise for the beginner to accept the gambit, unless there be a chance of compensation for the disappearance of his centre pawn, by forcing the exchange of White’s centre pawn as well. The following line of play would fulfil this condition:
It is therefore unwise for a beginner to accept the gambit, unless there’s a chance to make up for losing their center pawn by forcing the exchange of White’s center pawn as well. The following line of play would meet this condition:
1. P-K4, P-K4; 2. P-KB4, PxP; 3. Kt-KB3, Kt-KB3; 4. Kt-B3, P-Q4! Black thereby abandons the gambit pawn.
1. P-K4, P-K4; 2. P-KB4, PxP; 3. Kt-KB3, Kt-KB3; 4. Kt-B3, P-Q4! Black is giving up the gambit pawn.
On principle, and when he has the choice, the beginner should give preference to simple and clear development in the opening, rather than to the gain of a pawn, when this involves difficult and intricate play. This principle must also guide us in other openings.
On principle, and when he has the choice, the beginner should prioritize simple and clear development in the opening instead of going for a pawn, especially if that means dealing with complex and tricky play. This principle should also guide us in other openings.
A good example is to be found in the so-called “Danish gambit,” [Footnote: The names of the various openings, which I mention for the sake of completeness, are generally derived from towns or countries in which they were first extensively played and analysed.] which will lead us back to those openings in which White plays P-Q4 on his second move. After 2. P-Q4, PxP, White has the option of sacrificing two pawns to obtain a very rapid development 3. P-QB3, PxP; 4. B-QB4, PxP; 5. QBxP. It may now be just possible for Black to avoid the many threats which White can bring to bear with his beautifully placed forces, perhaps by giving back one or both of the pawns gained. But this question can only be of interest to us if there is no opportunity of adopting a simple line of development at the outset. As it is, this opportunity is not wanting. All that Black needs to do is to push on his Queen’s Pawn as soon as possible, thus freeing his own Queen’s Bishop.
A good example can be found in the so-called “Danish gambit,” [Footnote: The names of the various openings, which I mention for the sake of completeness, are generally derived from towns or countries where they were first widely played and analyzed.] which leads us back to those openings where White plays P-Q4 on his second move. After 2. P-Q4, PxP, White can choose to sacrifice two pawns to get very quick development: 3. P-QB3, PxP; 4. B-QB4, PxP; 5. QBxP. It may now be possible for Black to avoid the many threats that White can create with his well-placed pieces, perhaps by giving back one or both of the pawns gained. But this question is only relevant if there isn't an opportunity to adopt a straightforward development from the start. Fortunately, that opportunity exists. All Black needs to do is push his Queen’s Pawn as soon as possible, freeing his own Queen’s Bishop.
2. P-Q4 PxP 3. P-QB3 P-Q4
2. pawn to q4 pawn takes pawn 3. pawn to qb3 pawn to q4
![[Illustration]](images/diag19.jpg)
Diag. 19
Diag. 19
After 4. KPxP, QxP, Black’s position is at least as easy of development as White’s. In the position set out in Diagram 19, White cannot play P-K5, because Black wins a pawn by PxP without hindering his own development in the least. The equalising power of Black’s P-Q4 in all KP openings where White has played P-Q4 can be noticed in many variations. I shall now give a few typical examples, which will show the line of play that can be adopted in many similar cases, and which can often be evolved one from the other by altering the order of the moves.
After 4. KPxP, QxP, Black's position is at least as easy to develop as White's. In the setup shown in Diagram 19, White can’t play P-K5 because Black will win a pawn with PxP without causing any issues for their own development. The equalizing strength of Black’s P-Q4 in all King Pawn openings where White has also played P-Q4 can be seen in many variations. I will now provide a few typical examples that demonstrate the line of play that can be used in many similar situations, which can often be derived from each other by changing the order of the moves.
I. CENTRE GAMBIT
2. P-Q4 PxP 3. QxP Kt-QB3 4. Q-K3 Kt-B3 5. Kt-QB3 B-K2 6. B-Q2 P-Q4!
2. P-Q4 PxP 3. QxP Kt-QB3 4. Q-K3 Kt-B3 5. Kt-QB3 B-K2 6. B-Q2 P-Q4!
II. KING’S BISHOP’S OPENING
2. P-Q4 PxP 3. B-QB4 Kt-KB3 4. P-K5 P-Q4!
2. P-Q4 PxP 3. B-QB4 Kt-KB3 4. P-K5 P-Q4!
III. SCOTCH GAMBIT
2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. P-Q4 PxP 4. B-B4 Kt-B3 4. P-B3 P-Q4! 5. P-K5 P-Q4!
2. Nc3 Nf3 3. d4 exd4 4. Bb4 Nf6 4. b3 d5! 5. f5 d5!
IV. SCOTCH GAME
2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. P-Q4 PxP 4. KtxP Kt-B3 5. Kt-QB3 B-Kt5 6. KtxKt KtPxKt 7. B-Q3 P-Q4!
2. Knight to KB3 Knight to QB3 3. Pawn to Q4 Pawn takes Pawn 4. Knight takes Pawn Knight to B3 5. Knight to QB3 Bishop to Knight 5 6. Knight takes Knight Knight takes Knight 7. Bishop to Q3 Pawn to Q4!
In no case should Black forfeit his chance of playing P-Q4. It is tempting after 2. P-Q4, PxP; 3. Kt-KB3 to cover the pawn at Q5 by P-QB4, but in that case White would sacrifice a pawn by P-QB3, by this means opening the Queen’s file for himself, and so preventing Black from ever playing P-Q4. Thus, for the loss of a pawn, White has a paramount advantage in position.
In no case should Black give up the chance to play P-Q4. After 2. P-Q4, PxP; 3. Kt-KB3, it may seem tempting to protect the pawn at Q5 by playing P-QB4, but that would allow White to sacrifice a pawn with P-QB3, opening the Queen’s file for himself and stopping Black from ever playing P-Q4. So, by losing a pawn, White gains a significant advantage in position.
For after 4. … PxP, 5. KtxP (Diagram 20) White has developed both Knights, and his Bishops are free, whilst Black has none of his pieces out. P-Q3 must also be played in order to mobilise the Queen’s Bishop, leaving K2 as the only square for the King’s Bishop; finally the “backward” pawn [Footnote: A pawn is said to be “backward,” when it cannot move into cover by another pawn.] at Q3 is open to constant attacks and is difficult to defend.
For after 4. … PxP, 5. KtxP (Diagram 20), White has developed both Knights, and his Bishops are free, while Black has none of his pieces out. P-Q3 also needs to be played to get the Queen’s Bishop moving, leaving K2 as the only square for the King’s Bishop; finally, the “backward” pawn [Footnote: A pawn is said to be “backward” when it cannot move into cover by another pawn.] at Q3 is open to constant attacks and is hard to defend.
![[Illustration]](images/diag20.jpg)
Diag. 20
Diag. 20
The best plan for Black is to decline the doubtful gift of the pawn and to bring about one of the positions, as sketched above, in which, by playing P-Q4 early in the game, Black is sure of the free development of all his forces.
The best move for Black is to refuse the risky pawn and aim for one of the positions outlined above, where playing P-Q4 early in the game guarantees the smooth development of all his pieces.
Black is able to play P-Q4 early in all such openings, where White does not force the defensive move P-Q3 by attacking Black’s King’s Pawn. For instance, in the King’s gambit, since the move 2. P-KB4 does not threaten PxP, Black can reply at once by 2. … P-Q4 (Falkbeer Counter Gambit). After 3. PxQP, P-K5 (to permit of Kt-KB3, which at present is not feasible on account of 4. PxP); 4. P-Q3, PxP; 5. QxP, White is a pawn ahead, but his Queen obstructs his KB; therefore Black has better developing chances and should be able to win the pawn back at the very least.
Black can play P-Q4 early in all these openings where White doesn’t have to force the defensive move P-Q3 by attacking Black’s King’s Pawn. For example, in the King’s Gambit, since the move 2. P-KB4 doesn’t threaten PxP, Black can immediately respond with 2. … P-Q4 (Falkbeer Counter Gambit). After 3. PxQP, P-K5 (to allow Kt-KB3, which isn't possible right now because of 4. PxP); 4. P-Q3, PxP; 5. QxP, White is a pawn ahead, but his Queen blocks his KB. Therefore, Black has better chances for development and should at least be able to win back the pawn.
A second example is the Vienna game, which proceeds as follows:
A second example is the Vienna game, which goes like this:
2. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 3. P-B4 P-Q4 (Diagram 21)
2. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 3. P-B4 P-Q4 (Diagram 21)
If White plays 4. PxQP, Black can play P-K5, as in the Falkbeer gambit mentioned just now. In answer to 4. PxKP, on the other hand, Black can play KtxP without having the slightest difficulty with his development. For instance,
If White plays 4. PxQP, Black can play P-K5, like in the Falkbeer gambit we just talked about. In response to 4. PxKP, however, Black can play KtxP without any trouble with their development. For example,
5. Kt-KB3 B-K2 6. P-Q4 P-KB3 7. B-Q3 KtxKt 8. PxKt Castles 9. Castles Kt-B3 or B-KKt5
5. Kt-KB3 B-K2 6. P-Q4 P-KB3 7. B-Q3 KxN 8. PxN Castles 9. Castles N-B3 or B-N5
and Black also will soon have an open file for his Rook, with no disadvantage in position.
and Black will soon have an open file for his Rook, with no disadvantage in position.
![[Illustration]](images/diag21.jpg)
Diag. 21
Diag. 21
There is, however, one opening in which Black has the utmost difficulty in preventing White from getting a positional advantage in the centre. It is called the Ruy Lopez, and is held by many to be the strongest opening for White. The initial moves are: 1. P-K4, P-K4; 2. Kt-KB3, Kt-QB3; 3. B-Kt5. With this move White at once attacks the Black KP, though indirectly, by threatening to exchange the B for the Kt. To make the capture effective, however, White must first protect his own King’s Pawn, which would otherwise be lost after 4. BxKt, QPxB; 5. KtxP, Q- Q5!. At first, therefore, Black need not provide against the threatened exchange.
There is, however, one opening where Black really struggles to stop White from gaining a positional advantage in the center. It’s called the Ruy Lopez, and many consider it the strongest opening for White. The initial moves are: 1. e4, e5; 2. Nf3, Nc6; 3. Bb5. With this move, White immediately attacks the Black e-pawn, though indirectly, by threatening to trade the bishop for the knight. To make that capture effective, though, White must first protect his own e-pawn, which would otherwise be lost after 4. BxN, QxB; 5. NxP, Q- Q5!. Therefore, at first, Black doesn’t need to worry about the threatened exchange.
I shall treat at some length the various defences from which Black can choose, and in studying this most important King’s side opening, we shall have occasion to note many points of general interest for operations in the centre.
I will discuss in detail the different defenses that Black can choose from, and while examining this crucial King's side opening, we’ll highlight several points of general interest for maneuvering in the center.
Broadly speaking, two entirely different systems of defence can be distinguished: either Black will try to maintain his centre pawn, or else, giving up the centre, try to gain some other advantage as compensation.
In general, there are two completely different defensive strategies: Black can either try to keep control of the center pawn or, by giving up the center, seek to gain some other advantage as compensation.
Black can only maintain his centre pawn if he can prevent his QKt from being exchanged. As is readily seen, White can attack Black’s KP a second time with P-Q4, whilst after Black’s P-Q3 any other defensive move would hinder development. These considerations lead to the first main line of defence in which Black plays 3. … P-QR3. After 4. B-R4 Black has the option of releasing the pin by playing P-QKt4 at some opportune moment. If White elects to exchange his Bishop for the Kt forthwith, he can remove the Black centre pawn after 4. … QPxB by playing 5. P- Q4, but the exchange of the B for the Kt gives Black a free development and in consequence a good game. (Compare note to move 4 in Game No. 12.)
Black can only keep his center pawn if he can stop his knight from being traded. As you can easily see, White can attack Black’s king pawn again with pawn to queen four. After Black plays pawn to queen three, any other defensive move would slow down development. These points lead to the first main line of defense where Black plays 3. … pawn to rook three. After 4. bishop to rook four, Black can choose to break the pin by playing pawn to knight four at an appropriate time. If White decides to trade his bishop for the knight right away, he can capture the Black center pawn after 4. … queen takes bishop by playing 5. pawn to queen four, but trading the bishop for the knight allows Black to develop freely and ultimately gives him a good position. (See note to move 4 in Game No. 12.)
Diagram 22 reproduces a typical position in this defence. The more usual continuation for White is 4. B-R4, Kt-B3;
Diagram 22 shows a standard position in this defense. The more common move for White is 4. B-R4, Kt-B3;
![[Illustration]](images/diag22.jpg)
Diag. 22
Diag. 22
5. Castles; he does not trouble to protect his KP as its capture would allow his Rook an open file on which to act against the opposing King (compare Games Nos. 14 and 17) 5. … B-K2. Now Black can capture the KP without much risk, as the Bishop is on the King’s file. 6. R-K1, White covers his pawn, and thereby threatens to win a pawn by BxKt. Therefore Black must not delay playing 6. … P-QKt4.
5. Castles; he doesn’t bother protecting his KP since capturing it would give his Rook an open file to attack the opposing King (see Games Nos. 14 and 17). 5. … B-K2. Now Black can take the KP without much risk since the Bishop is on the King’s file. 6. R-K1, White protects his pawn and threatens to win a pawn with BxKt. So, Black needs to play 6. … P-QKt4 without delay.
After 7. B-Kt3, P-Q3; (Diagram 22) White cannot yet execute the manœuvre which underlies the whole tendency of the Ruy Lopez, namely P-Q4, maintaining the pressure in the centre, because after KtxQP, 9. KtxKt, PxKt; 10. QxP? White loses a piece through 10. … P-B4, etc. It is therefore necessary to play P- QB3 first. White could also obtain a rapid development by Kt-B3, P-Q3, B-K3 or Kt5, but this arrangement is not popular, because Black can play Kt-QR4 and exchange the valuable KB. The pawn at QB3 supports an advance in the centre, and also provides a retreat for the KB. The QKt can be developed in this way: Kt-Q2- B1-Kt3 or K3. Black, however, must try to round off his pawn position on the Queen’s side, by moving his QBP into line. Black’s pawns at K4 and QB4 then exert a pressure on White’s Q4. And this pressure threatens to be reinforced by B-Kt5. From these considerations the following development seems to be natural: 8. P-B3, Kt-QR4; 9. B-B2, P-B4; 10. P-Q4, Q-B2 (to support the KP); it leads to the position in Diagram 23.
After 7. B-Kt3, P-Q3; (Diagram 22) White can't yet carry out the strategy behind the Ruy Lopez, which is P-Q4, to keep pressure in the center, because after KtxQP, 9. KtxKt, PxKt; 10. QxP? White loses a piece due to 10. … P-B4, etc. So, it’s essential to play P-QB3 first. White could also develop quickly with Kt-B3, P-Q3, B-K3, or Kt5, but this setup isn’t popular because Black can play Kt-QR4 and trade the valuable Bishop on the King's side. The pawn at QB3 helps support a central advance and also gives the Bishop a retreat option. The Knight can be developed like this: Kt-Q2-B1-Kt3 or K3. However, Black must work on solidifying his pawn structure on the Queen’s side by moving his QBP into line. Black’s pawns at K4 and QB4 then apply pressure on White’s Q4, and this threat can be increased by B-Kt5. From these ideas, the following development seems natural: 8. P-B3, Kt-QR4; 9. B-B2, P-B4; 10. P-Q4, Q-B2 (to support the KP); leading to the position in Diagram 23.
![[Illustration]](images/diag23.jpg)
Diag. 23
Diag. 23
11. P-KR3
One of the few instances in which this pawn move is justified. It deprives Black’s QB of its only good square, and saves the K Kt, the co-operation of which is urgently needed in the centre.
One of the few times this pawn move makes sense. It takes away Black’s queen bishop's only good square and protects the king's knight, which is needed in the center.
This system of opening will receive more exhaustive treatment under the heading of “Middle Game.” (Compare Game No. 12.)
This method of opening will be explored in more detail under the section titled “Middle Game.” (See Game No. 12.)
In the second main line of defence, of which I shall treat now, Black renounces the maintenance of his KP, and makes an attempt to find compensation by attacking White’s King’s Pawn. The King’s file, opened by the disappearance of the Black pawn, offers opportunities for that purpose. After the first few moves we arrive at the following position, which
In the second main line of defense, which I will discuss now, Black gives up trying to keep his KP and looks for compensation by attacking White’s King’s Pawn. The King’s file, opened up by the removal of the Black pawn, provides chances for that. After the initial few moves, we reach the following position, which
![[Illustration]](images/diag24.jpg)
Diag. 24
Diag. 24
may be reached thus: 3. B-Kt5, P-Q3; 4. P-Q4, B-Q2; 5. Kt-B3, Kt- B3; 6. Castles, B-K2; 7. R-K1, PxP; 8. KtxP, Castles. The exchange on the seventh move is compulsory, because the loss of a pawn after BxKt is in effect threatened, now that the White KP is supported by the Rook.
may be reached this way: 3. Knight to B5, Pawn to Q3; 4. Pawn to Q4, Bishop to Q2; 5. Knight to B3, Knight to B3; 6. Castles, Bishop to K2; 7. Rook to K1, Pawn takes Pawn; 8. Knight takes Pawn, Castles. The exchange on the seventh move is mandatory because losing a pawn after Bishop takes Knight is effectively threatened now that the White King Pawn is supported by the Rook.
Black’s intention of exerting pressure on the KP is now difficult of execution, because his pieces are very cramped and hinder one another in a restricted area. The KB in particular cannot be brought into action without great difficulty, for instance by: R- K1, B-KB1, P-KKt3, and B-Kt2. It is therefore advisable for White to develop his QB at Kt2 instead of at Kt5, in order not to give Black a chance of exchanging his troublesome Bishop. (In a game Bernstein-Emanuel Lasker, Moscow, 1914, there happened 9. BxKt, PxB; 10. B-Kt5, P-KR3; 11. B-R4, Kt-R2; 12. BxB, QxB with a good game for Black.)
Black’s aim to pressure the king’s position is proving difficult because his pieces are cramped and blocking each other in a small space. The king's bishop, in particular, cannot be activated without considerable trouble, for example: R-K1, B-KB1, P-KKt3, and B-Kt2. Therefore, it's better for White to develop his queen's bishop to Kt2 instead of Kt5 to avoid giving Black an opportunity to trade his annoying bishop. (In a game between Bernstein and Emanuel Lasker in Moscow, 1914, the moves went 9. BxKt, PxB; 10. B-Kt5, P-KR3; 11. B-R4, Kt-R2; 12. BxB, QxB resulting in a favorable position for Black.)
The defence has a totally different trend, if Black gives up his own KP, but captures the White KP at once. I have already pointed out that White would not mind his KP being taken, in view of the attack on the open King’s file. Let us now consider in which way this attack can be planned. There are two essentially different lines, according to whether Black interpolates P-QR3 or not.
The defense takes a completely different direction if Black sacrifices his own king's pawn but immediately captures the white king's pawn. I've already mentioned that White would be fine with losing his pawn because of the attack on the open king's file. Now, let's look at how this attack can be strategized. There are two fundamentally different approaches, depending on whether Black plays P-QR3 or not.
After 3. B-Kt5, Kt-B3; 4. Castles, KtxP; 5. R-K1, Black gets out of it comfortably by playing Kt-Q3, B-K2 and Castles, and White cannot permanently prevent Black’s game from being freed by the advance of the QP. P-Q4 for White on the fifth move is therefore stronger. Black cannot very well exchange the pawns, leaving the King’s file quite exposed, and must submit to White playing PxP, maintaining the pawn at K5 and preventing Black’s P-Q4 for some time to come.
After 3. B-Kt5, Kt-B3; 4. Castles, KtxP; 5. R-K1, Black comfortably escapes by playing Kt-Q3, B-K2, and Castles. White can't permanently stop Black’s game from opening up with the advance of the QP. So, P-Q4 for White on the fifth move is a better option. Black can’t really exchange the pawns because that would leave the King’s file quite exposed, and must allow White to play PxP, keeping the pawn at K5 and delaying Black’s P-Q4 for a while.
The opening might continue in this way: 5. P-Q4, B-K2; 6. Q-K2, Kt-Q3; 7. BxKt, KtPxB (to make room for the Kt); 8. PxP, Kt-Kt2 (Diagram 25).
The opening might continue like this: 5. P-Q4, B-K2; 6. Q-K2, Kt-Q3; 7. BxKt, KtPxB (to make space for the Kt); 8. PxP, Kt-Kt2 (Diagram 25).
![[Illustration]](images/diag25.jpg)
Diag. 25
Diag. 25
The whole of the manœuvres now centre round Black’s endeavours to force his P-Q4, and White’s attempt to prevent it. Black ultimately gains his point, as will be seen, but at the expense of such disadvantages in the pawn position that it is questionable whether the whole variation (called the Rio de Janeiro Defence) is playable.
The entire game now focuses on Black’s efforts to push his P-Q4 and White’s attempts to block it. In the end, Black achieves his goal, as you’ll see, but at the cost of creating significant weaknesses in the pawn structure that raise doubts about whether the whole line (called the Rio de Janeiro Defence) is viable.
9. Kt-B3, Castles; 10. R-K1, Kt-B4 (the Knight is to be posted at K3 to bring the White KKt away from his Q4, whence he prevents the advance of Black’s QP by attacking QB6); 11. Kt-Q4, Kt-K3; 12. B-K3, KtxKt; 13. BxKt, P-B4; 14. B-K3, P-Q4; 15. PxP e.p., BxP. This is the critical position in the Rio de Janeiro defence. Black has succeeded in eliminating the White centre pawn, and sweeps long diagonals with his Bishops, but the advantage cannot be maintained. White exchanges the Bishop at Q6, and there remains a backward pawn, which Black will hardly be able to hold permanently. In practice it has been shown that the end-game should be won by White in spite of Bishops of opposite colours, as Black’s pawn at his QB4 is difficult to defend.
9. Kt-B3, Castles; 10. R-K1, Kt-B4 (the Knight is positioned at K3 to move the White KKt away from Q4, where it stops Black’s QP from advancing by attacking QB6); 11. Kt-Q4, Kt-K3; 12. B-K3, KtxKt; 13. BxKt, P-B4; 14. B-K3, P-Q4; 15. PxP e.p., BxP. This is the crucial position in the Rio de Janeiro defense. Black has managed to eliminate the White center pawn and extends their Bishops across long diagonals, but the advantage can't be maintained. White captures the Bishop at Q6, leaving a backward pawn, which Black will struggle to hold onto. In practice, it has been demonstrated that White should win the endgame despite the Bishops being of opposite colors, as Black’s pawn at QB4 is hard to defend.
16. Kt-K4, B-Kt2; 17. KtxB (not BxP because of BxB; 18. KtxB, BxP followed by Q-Kt4ch), PxKt; 18. Q R-Q1 and P-QB4.
16. Knight to K4, Bishop to K2; 17. Knight takes Bishop (not Bishop takes Pawn because of Bishop takes Bishop); 18. Knight takes Bishop, Bishop takes Pawn followed by Queen to Knight4 check), Pawn takes Knight; 18. Queen to R1 and Pawn to QB4.
The game is much more favourable for Black if he first plays 3. … P-QR3, and retains the option of driving the White KB away by P-QKt4, after which P-Q4 can be enforced very soon. 3. B-Kt5, P- QR3; 4. B-R4, Kt-B3; 5. Castles, KtxP; 6. P-Q4, P-QKt4; 7. B-Kt3, P-Q4; 8. PxP, B-K3, 9. P-B3.
The game is much better for Black if he plays 3. … P-QR3 first and keeps the option of pushing the White knight away with P-QKt4, after which P-Q4 can be played very quickly. 3. B-Kt5, P-QR3; 4. B-R4, Kt-B3; 5. Castles, KtxP; 6. P-Q4, P-QKt4; 7. B-Kt3, P-Q4; 8. PxP, B-K3; 9. P-B3.
Now Black’s pieces are more mobile, and that is the reason why this system of defence is becoming more popular than any other.
Now Black's pieces are more agile, and that's why this defensive strategy is becoming more popular than any other.
On the other hand, it cannot be denied that Black’s pawn formation on the Q side is weak, and that his centre is less secure. Whilst White has a pawn firmly posted in the centre, Black has a Knight there which will soon be driven away. White’s Q4, the basis of his centre, is entirely in his hands, whilst Black’s Q4 is exposed to a steady pressure by the White pieces. Finally Black’s QKt is unfavourably placed, obstructing as it does the QBP and preventing its falling into line with its fellows.
On the other hand, it’s clear that Black's pawn structure on the queen side is weak, and his center is less stable. While White has a pawn firmly positioned in the center, Black has a Knight that will soon be pushed away. White’s pawn on the queen side is completely under his control, whereas Black's pawn is under constant pressure from White's pieces. Finally, Black's Knight is poorly positioned, blocking the pawn in front of it and preventing it from aligning with the others.
Diagram 26 shows the position after 9. P-B3. The latter move prevents the exchange of the B after Black’s Kt-R4, an exchange which would allow Black to round up his pawn formation with P- QB4. The experts are not yet agreed as to the best continuation for Black in this critical position. To be considered are the moves B-QB4, B-K2 and Kt-B4. B-K2 is preferred nowadays to B- QB4, as QB4 should be kept free for the KKt in case the latter is driven from his dominating position, e.g. 10. R-K1 and 11. Q Kt- Q2. For if in that case Black exchanges the Knights, he only furthers White’s development without doing anything towards strengthening his Q4.
Diagram 26 shows the position after 9. P-B3. This move stops the exchange of the bishop after Black’s Kt-R4, which would allow Black to consolidate his pawn structure with P-QB4. Experts still haven't agreed on the best way for Black to continue in this crucial position. Possible moves to consider are B-QB4, B-K2, and Kt-B4. B-K2 is now preferred over B-QB4, as QB4 should be kept available for the KKt if it gets pushed out of its strong position, for instance, 10. R-K1 and 11. Q Kt-Q2. If Black exchanges the Knights in that situation, it only helps White’s development without improving the strength of his Q4.
If Black covers the Knight with P-B4, White plays PxP e.p. and Kt-Kt5, rids himself of Black’s QB, and thereby weakens Black’s QP still more.
If Black covers the Knight with P-B4, White plays PxP e.p. and Kt-Kt5, gets rid of Black’s QB, and further weakens Black’s QP.
Kt-B4 would therefore seem to be the best choice, as the QB becomes mobile again after White’s B-B2, nor can White
Kt-B4 would seem to be the best choice, as the QB becomes mobile again after White’s B-B2, nor can White
![[Illustration]](images/diag26.jpg)
Diag. 26
Diag. 26
play P-Q4 as yet. The position in the diagram therefore leads to the following variations:
play P-Q4 yet. The position in the diagram leads to the following variations:
A. 9. … B-K2; 10. R-K1, Castles; 11. QKt-Q2, Kt-B4; 12. B-B2, B-KKt5. This manœuvre was introduced by Em. Lasker (Petrograd, 1909. For further particulars see Game No. 15).
A. 9. … B-K2; 10. R-K1, Castles; 11. QKt-Q2, Kt-B4; 12. B-B2, B-KKt5. This move was introduced by Em. Lasker (Petrograd, 1909). For more details, see Game No. 15.
B. 9. … Kt-B4; 10. QKt-Q2, P-Q5 (Capablanca-Em. Lasker, Petrograd, 1914); or 9. … B-K2; 10. R-K1, Castles; 11. QKt-Q2, Kt-B4; 12. B-B2, P-Q5 (Em. Lasker-Tarrasch, Petrograd, 1914).
B. 9. … Kt-B4; 10. QKt-Q2, P-Q5 (Capablanca-Em. Lasker, Petrograd, 1914); or 9. … B-K2; 10. R-K1, Castles; 11. QKt-Q2, Kt-B4; 12. B-B2, P-Q5 (Em. Lasker-Tarrasch, Petrograd, 1914).
Capablanca believes that the early advance of P-Q5 can be refuted by Kt-K4, e.g. 9. … B-K2; 10. QKt-Q2, Kt-B4; 11. B-B2, P-Q5; 12. Kt-K4, PxP; 13. KtxKt, BxKt; 14. B-K4, Q-Q2; 15. Q-B2 or PxP.
Capablanca thinks that the early move of pawn to Q5 can be countered by knight to K4, for example: 9. … bishop to K2; 10. knight to Q2, knight to B4; 11. bishop to B2, pawn to Q5; 12. knight to K4, pawn takes pawn; 13. knight takes knight, bishop takes knight; 14. bishop to K4, queen to Q2; 15. queen to B2 or pawn takes pawn.
The openings as sketched out up to this point give a sufficiently clear idea of the possibilities of combining sound development with an attempt to capture the centre after the opening moves 1. P-K4, P-K4. In most cases, Black’s centre pawn being open to attack by White’s P-Q4, we find an early break-up of the centre, and concurrently the opening of the Ks or Qs file for the Rooks. That is why games opened in this fashion have been classed very generally as “open,” whilst all the other openings are called “close games.” Lately the distinction has been abandoned, and very rightly, since in the latter openings, too, the centre can be cleared occasionally. We attain typical close positions when Black does not play 1. … P-K4 in answer to 1. P-K4, but relinquishes all claim on his K4 and takes possession of his Q4 instead, leaving White the option of interlocking the pawns in the centre with P-K5.
The openings discussed so far give a clear idea of the potential for combining solid development with the intention of controlling the center after the initial moves 1. e4, e5. In most situations, Black’s center pawn is vulnerable to attack from White’s d4, leading to an early breakdown of the center and simultaneously opening up the kingside or queenside files for the rooks. This is why games that start this way have often been classified as “open,” while other openings are labeled “closed games.” Recently, this distinction has been set aside, and rightly so, as even in the latter openings, the center can sometimes be opened up. We reach typical closed positions when Black does not respond to 1. e4 with 1. ... e5, but instead gives up control of the e4 square and occupies the d4 square instead, allowing White the opportunity to lock the pawns in the center with 2. e5.
On principle it does not seem advisable for Black to play P-Q4 on the first move in reply to 1. P-K4. Although White’s centre pawn disappears after 2. PxP, QxP, Black loses a move through 3. Kt- QB3, and his Queen has no place from which it cannot be driven away very soon, unless it be at Q1. This, however, would amount to an admission of the inferiority of the whole of Black’s plan.
On principle, it doesn't seem wise for Black to play pawn to d4 as a response to White's pawn to e4. Even though White's center pawn is taken after 2. pawn takes pawn, queen takes pawn, Black loses a move with 3. knight to b3, and his queen has nowhere safe to go that won't be challenged soon, unless it's on a1. However, that would mean acknowledging that Black's entire strategy is weaker.
There are two moves which deserve consideration as a preliminary to P-Q4, namely, 1. … P-K3 (French Defence)
There are two moves worth considering before P-Q4, namely, 1. … P-K3 (French Defence)
![[Illustration]](images/diag27.jpg)
Diag. 27
Diag. 27
and P-QB3 (Caro-Kann defence). After 2. P-Q4, P-Q4, we attain the positions set out in the Diagrams 27 and 28, to which we must devote a good deal of attention.
and P-QB3 (Caro-Kann defense). After 2. P-Q4, P-Q4, we reach the positions shown in Diagrams 27 and 28, which we need to focus on a lot.
These openings are worthy of study as being especially interesting examples of the struggle for the centre.
These openings are worth studying as particularly intriguing examples of the struggle for the center.
As early as the third move, White has to take an important decision. Is he to play P-K5 and prevent the opening of
As early as the third move, White has to make an important decision. Should he play P-K5 and stop the opening of
![[Illustration]](images/diag28.jpg)
Diag. 28
Diag. 28
the K or Q file for a long time to come, or should he proceed to develop his pieces, and leave Black the option of anticipating the blocking of the centre by playing PxP himself?
the K or Q file for a while longer, or should he go ahead and develop his pieces, leaving Black the chance to anticipate the blocking of the center by playing PxP himself?
I shall first turn my attention to those games in which White plays P-K5, starting with the French Defence, after which the Caro-Kann Defence will be easily understood.
I will first focus on the games where White plays P-K5, beginning with the French Defense, after which the Caro-Kann Defense will be easy to understand.
The position which ensues in the centre after 1. P-K4, P-K3; 2. P-Q4, P-Q4; 3. P-K5, divides the board diagonally, and it is easy to recognise roughly the main lines of play which will govern the game. White has more scope on the King’s side, where his pieces will have greater mobility, and prospects of attack. Black’s chances are on the Queen’s side. Both sides will have to advance more pawns in order to obtain openings for their Rooks, and use them for the attack, since they have no future on the K and Q files, as was the case in the openings mentioned hitherto.
The position that arises in the center after 1. P-K4, P-K3; 2. P-Q4, P-Q4; 3. P-K5 divides the board diagonally, making it easy to see the main lines of play that will guide the game. White has more options on the King's side, where his pieces will be more mobile and have better chances for an attack. Black's opportunities lie on the Queen's side. Both players will need to push more pawns to create openings for their Rooks and use them for the attack, since they won’t be effective on the K and Q files, unlike in previous openings discussed.
The obvious moves to this end are: for White the advance of the KBP, for Black that of the QBP and sometimes even of the QKtP, that is when the QBP has not been exchanged for the opposing QP, but has pushed on to B5.
The clear steps towards this goal are: for White, moving the KBP forward, for Black, moving the QBP and sometimes even the QKtP, which happens when the QBP hasn't been traded for the other side's QP but has advanced to B5.
In Diagrams 29 and 30 we see the chains of pawns formed by these manœuvres.
In Diagrams 29 and 30, we can see the chains of pawns created by these moves.
White’s pawn attack is more dangerous than Black’s,
White’s pawn attack is riskier than Black’s,
![[Illustration]](images/diag29.jpg)
Diag. 29
Diag. 29
because it involves a direct assault on the King. And we shall see that Black will usually be compelled to suspend operations on the Queen’s side temporarily, to ward off the storm by the
because it involves a direct attack on the King. And we will see that Black will typically have to pause activities on the Queen’s side for a bit, to defend against the oncoming threat by the
![[Illustration]](images/diag30.jpg)
Diag. 30
Diag. 30
White Pawns on the King’s side. He will attempt this either by P- KB3 attacking White’s centre or by P-KB4 preventing White from playing P-B5. In the latter case White can only make a breach in the Black barrier by playing P-KKt4 as well. These manœuvres result in the pawn formations given in Diagrams 31 and 32.
White Pawns on the King’s side. He will try this either by playing P-KB3 to attack White’s center or by playing P-KB4 to stop White from playing P-B5. In the second case, White can only break through the Black barrier by playing P-KKt4 as well. These maneuvers lead to the pawn formations shown in Diagrams 31 and 32.
![[Illustration]](images/diag31.jpg)
Diag. 31
Diag. 31
We must now turn to the development of the pieces corresponding to these pawn skeletons. If White plays P-K5
We must now focus on the development of the pieces that correspond to these pawn structures. If White plays P-K5
![[Illustration]](images/diag32.jpg)
Diag. 32
Diag. 32
on his third move, he prevents the Black KKt from reaching KB3, whence he might have moved to Q2. This is a desirable position, from which he could support the advance of P-QB4. But the Knight has other chances of development, to KR3 and B4, whence he can take his share in the attack on the White Pawn at Q4. In consequence White must postpone P-KB4 in order not to intercept the action of the QB on R6. Now, in that case White’s Pawn at his K5 has not sufficient support against the attack by Black’s P-KB3 (Diagram 31), and the latter move gives Black the advantage. The two main variations illustrative of these considerations are:
on his third move, he stops the Black Knight from getting to King's Bishop 3, where it could have moved to Queen 2. This is a good position, from which it could support the push of Pawn to Queen's Bishop 4. But the Knight has other options for development, to King’s Rook 3 and Bishop 4, where it can contribute to the attack on the White Pawn at Queen 4. As a result, White has to delay Pawn to King’s Bishop 4 so it doesn't block the Bishop's action on R6. Now, in that situation, White’s Pawn at King 5 doesn’t have enough support against Black’s Pawn to King’s Bishop 3 (Diagram 31), and that last move gives Black the advantage. The two main variations that illustrate these ideas are:
I
3. P-K5 P-QB4 4. P-QB3 Kt-QB3 5. P-KB4 PxP 6. PxP Q-Kt3 7. Kt-KB3 Kt-R3
3. Pawn to King 5 Pawn to Queen Bishop 4 4. Pawn to Queen Bishop 3 Knight to Queen Bishop 3 5. Pawn to King Bishop 4 Pawn takes Pawn 6. Pawn takes Pawn Queen to Knight 3 7. Knight to King Bishop 3 Knight to Rook 3
II
3. P-K5 P-QB4 4. P-QB3 Kt-QB3 5. Kt-B3 P-B3
3. Pawn to K5 Pawn to QB4 4. Pawn to QB3 Knight to QB3 5. Knight to B3 Pawn to B3
In both cases the initiative falls to Black, in the first through the attack on White’s Q4, the mainstay of White’s centre; in the second through attack on White’s K5, the White centre itself. We must therefore consider White’s advance of P-K5 on the third move as premature. Let us now find out whether it is advantageous to effect the same subsequently. A developing move can be interpolated, e.g. 3. Kt-QB3, Kt-KB3. If White plays P-K5 now he gains time for his advance of P-KB4, as Black’s Knight must retreat. On the other hand he cannot now maintain his pawn at Q4, as he has blocked his QBP. We arrive at the following plan of development:
In both situations, the initiative goes to Black; in the first case by attacking White's Q4, which is the backbone of White's center, and in the second case by attacking White's K5, the center itself. We should consider White's advance of P-K5 on the third move to be premature. Now, let's see if it's beneficial to play the same move later. A developing move can be inserted, for example, 3. Kt-QB3, Kt-KB3. If White plays P-K5 now, he gains time to push P-KB4 since Black's Knight has to retreat. However, he can't hold onto his pawn at Q4 anymore because he has blocked his QBP. This leads us to the following development plan:
3. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 4. P-K5 KKt-Q2 5. P-B4 P-QB4 6. PxP Kt-QB3
3. Knight to QB3 Knight to KB3 4. Pawn to K5 King Knight to Q2 5. Pawn to B4 Pawn to QB4 6. Pawn takes Pawn Knight to QB3
If Black were to play BxP at once, White could play Q-Kt4 with an attack on the Knight’s Pawn. That is the object of Black’s waiting move. White must either play 7. Kt-B3, which prevents his Q-Kt4, or 7. B-Q3, after which Black would take the pawn on B4 with his Knight, getting rid of the White Bishop. 7. Q-Kt4 at once would be answered by P-B4.
If Black were to immediately play BxP, White could respond with Q-Kt4, attacking the Knight’s Pawn. That’s the reason for Black’s waiting move. White must either play 7. Kt-B3, which blocks his Q-Kt4, or 7. B-Q3, after which Black would capture the pawn on B4 with his Knight, eliminating the White Bishop. If White plays 7. Q-Kt4 right away, Black would respond with P-B4.
7. Kt-B3 BxP 8. B-Q3 P-B4
7. Kt-B3 BxP 8. B-Q3 P-B4
Black cannot castle yet, on account of the following threat, which I give in full because it occurs frequently in practice: 8. … Castles; 9. BxPch, KxB; 10. Kt-Kt5ch, K-Kt1: 11. Q-R5, R- K1; 12. QxPch; 13. Q-R5ch; 14. Q-R7ch; 15. Q-R8ch; 16. QxP mate.
Black can't castle yet because of the following threat, which I’ll explain fully since it happens often in practice: 8. … Castles; 9. BxPch, KxB; 10. Kt-Kt5ch, K-Kt1: 11. Q-R5, R-K1; 12. QxPch; 13. Q-R5ch; 14. Q-R7ch; 15. Q-R8ch; 16. QxP mate.
![[Illustration]](images/diag33.jpg)
Diag. 33
Diag. 33
The position in the diagram seems favourable to Black as White cannot castle for some time.
The position in the diagram looks good for Black since White can't castle for a while.
For that reason another line of play has come to the fore in which White exchanges his inactive QB for Black’s troublesome KB.
For that reason, another strategy has emerged where White trades his inactive queen's bishop for Black's problematic king's bishop.
3. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 4. B-Kt5 B-K2 5. P-K5 KKt-Q2 6. BxB QxB
3. Nf3 Nf6 4. Bf4 Bc5 5. d4 Bxd4 6. Bxf7 Qxf7
![[Illustration]](images/diag34.jpg)
Diag. 34
Diag. 34
White has now the choice of two lines of development. He can either prepare for P-QB3 to support his QP. or he can develop his King’s side, holding the P at K5 only
White now has two options for how to proceed. He can either prepare to move his pawn to QB3 to support his queen's pawn, or he can develop his king's side, keeping the pawn at K5 only.
I
7. Kt-Kt5 Kt-Kt3
8. P-QB3 P-QR3
9. Kt-QR3 P-QB4
10. P-KB4 Kt-B3
11. Kt-B2 Castles
12. Kt-B3 B-Q2
13. B-Q3 P-B4
7. Knight to Knight 5 Knight to Knight 3
8. Pawn to Queen's Bishop 3 Pawn to Queen's Rook 3
9. Knight to Queen's Rook 3 Pawn to Queen's Bishop 4
10. Pawn to King's Bishop 4 Knight to Bishop 3
11. Knight to Bishop 2 Castles
12. Knight to Bishop 3 Bishop to Queen 2
13. Bishop to Queen 3 Pawn to Bishop 4
The sacrifice BxPch, as mentioned above, was threatened.
The sacrifice BxPch, as mentioned above, was at risk.
14. Castles Kt-R5 15. R-Kt1 P-QKt4
14. Castles Kt-R5 15. R-Kt1 P-QKt4
If White does not wish to lose so many moves with his Kt, he can effect the intended protection of his QP as follows:
If White wants to avoid losing so many moves with his knight, he can achieve the intended protection of his pawn as follows:
7. Q-Q2 P-QR3
not P-QB4 at once, because of Kt-Kt5.
not P-QB4 at once, because of Kt-Kt5.
8. Kt-Q1 P-QB4 9. P-QB3
8. Kt-Q1 P-QB4 9. P-QB3
II
7. P-B4 Castles
8. Kt-B3 P-QB4
9. B-Q3 P-B4
10. Castles Kt-QB3
7. P-B4 Castles
8. Kt-B3 P-QB4
9. B-Q3 P-B4
10. Castles Kt-QB3
and so on.
etc.
In both cases White has an easy development, whilst Black has no convenient square for his Queen’s Bishop.
In both cases, White can develop easily, while Black has no good spot for his Queen’s Bishop.
To avoid this drawback Rubinstein has evolved the following variation, in which provision is made from the first for the freedom of action of the Queen’s Bishop:
To avoid this issue, Rubinstein has developed the following variation, which allows for the Queen’s Bishop to move freely from the start:
3. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 4. B-Kt5 PxP
3. Knight to Queen's Bishop 3 Knight to King's Bishop 3 4. Bishop to Knight 5 Pawn takes Pawn
to open the diagonal for the Bishop at QKt2, e.g.:
to open the diagonal for the Bishop at Knight to c2, for example:
5. KtxP QKt-Q2 6. Kt-KB3 B-K2
5. KtxP QKt-Q2 6. Kt-KB3 B-K2
followed by P-QKt3 and B-Kt2.
followed by P-QKt3 and B-Kt2.
We will now leave the French defence and turn our attention to the Caro-Kann, of which the initial position was shown in Diagram 28. Here also we find two essentially different systems of development, according to whether White plays P-K5 or gives Black the option of exchanging pawns by 3. Kt-QB3. In the first case a very noticeable difference from the French defence is, that Black can bring out his Queen’s Bishop. Here the process of development may be:
We will now move away from the French defense and focus on the Caro-Kann, which was illustrated in Diagram 28. In this opening, we also see two fundamentally different development systems, depending on whether White plays P-K5 or gives Black the chance to exchange pawns with 3. Kt-QB3. In the first case, a significant difference from the French defense is that Black can develop his Queen’s Bishop. The development process may be:
3. P-K5 B-B4 4. B-Q3 BxB
3. P-K5 B-B4 4. B-Q3 BxB
Not B-Kt3, because White could play P-K6! and paralyse the whole of Black’s game by preventing his playing the King’s Pawn.
Not B-Kt3, because White could play P-K6! and completely disable Black’s game by blocking him from playing the King’s Pawn.
5. QxB P-K3
6. Kt-K2 or KR3
5. QxB P-K3
6. Kt-K2 or KR3
Through this the move P-KB4, which fits into this pawn formation, is kept in reserve.
Through this move P-KB4, which fits into this pawn formation, is held in reserve.
While White’s development is easy and natural, Black has difficulty in finding good places for his King’s side pieces. The game can proceed generally speaking on the lines of the French defence. Only Black can hardly attack White’s centre with P-B3, since the Pawn at K3 would be weak in the absence of the Queen’s Bishop. On the other hand, Black would be a move behind with an attack on the Queen’s side, since to reach QB4 his pawn would have made two moves instead of one as in the French defence. A certain compensation lies in the fact that White’s attacking King’s Bishop has been exchanged.
While White's development is straightforward and natural, Black struggles to find good spots for his King's side pieces. The game can generally follow the lines of the French defense. However, Black can hardly attack White's center with P-B3, as the Pawn at K3 would be vulnerable without the Queen's Bishop. Additionally, Black would be a move behind in attacking the Queen's side, since to reach QB4, his pawn would need to make two moves instead of one as in the French defense. There is some compensation in the fact that White's attacking King's Bishop has been exchanged.
In practical play it has nevertheless been shown that White’s attack is more likely to succeed, and for this reason a variation introduced by Niemzowitsch has been tried several times; it aims at the exchange of Queens in order to weaken and retard White’s threatened attack, and to gain time for Queen’s side operations.
In actual gameplay, it has been shown that White’s attack is more likely to succeed, and for this reason, a variation introduced by Niemzowitsch has been tried several times. This variation aims to exchange Queens to weaken and slow down White’s impending attack and to buy time for operations on the Queen’s side.
6. … Q-Kt3 7. Castles Q-R3 or Kt4
6. … Q-Kt3 7. Castles Q-R3 or Kt4
But after 8. Kt-B4, QxQ; 9. KtxQ, White is so much ahead with his development that Black’s chance of equalising the game would seem questionable.
But after 8. Kt-B4, QxQ; 9. KtxQ, White is so far ahead in development that Black's chances of equalizing the game seem doubtful.
If White plays Kt-KR3 on his sixth move, he foils at once Black’s attempt of forcing an exchange of Queens, as he could play 8. Q- KKt3.
If White plays Knight to King's Rook 3 on his sixth move, he immediately blocks Black's attempt to force a Queen exchange, since he could then play 8. Queen to King Knight 3.
On the whole we can conclude that in the Caro-Kann defence White obtains a good game by 3. P-K5.
On the whole, we can conclude that in the Caro-Kann defense, White gets a solid game with 3. P-K5.
A line of play which used to be in vogue, namely, 3. Kt-QB3, PxP; 4. KtxP, Kt-B3; 5. KtxKtch, KPxKt or KtPxKt, gives Black an even chance, for although he loses his centre pawn he obtains a good development, and later in the game he has opportunities of exercising pressure on White’s QP through his open Q file.
A popular strategy in the past was 3. Kt-QB3, PxP; 4. KtxP, Kt-B3; 5. KtxKtch, KPxKt or KtPxKt, which gives Black a decent shot. Even though he loses the center pawn, he gains good development, and later in the game, he has chances to put pressure on White's QP through his open Q file.
Except the French defence and the Caro-Kann, there is no game in which an irregular reply to White’s 1. P-K4 necessitates any special considerations either in development of pieces or pawn formation. In all such cases it is sufficient to maintain the pawn centre and to occupy such squares with the pieces, whence they cannot be driven away with the loss of a move. Just one example: If Black plays 1. … P-QB4 (Sicilian defence), White will not play his King’s Bishop to B4, because Black can reply P- K3, and gain a move by P-Q4.
Except for the French defense and the Caro-Kann, there isn't any situation where an unusual response to White’s 1. P-K4 requires any special attention regarding piece development or pawn structure. In these cases, it’s enough to maintain the pawn center and position pieces on squares where they can’t be forced away without losing a turn. For example: If Black plays 1. … P-QB4 (Sicilian defense), White won’t move his King’s Bishop to B4 because Black can respond with P-K3, gaining a turn by playing P-Q4.
B. Let us now consider the openings in which the first move is 1. P-Q4 on either side. Here the centre cannot be cleared as early as in the openings beginning with 1. P-K4, P-K4. The advance of a second centre pawn, which there led to a clearance, is not feasible in this case. White does not command his K4, and for some time to come he will be unable to advance the K pawn beyond K3. In consequence the K file does not seem a likely opening for the Rooks, and another file must be found for them. The conclusions arrived at for Black in the French defence hold good for both sides in the opening now under consideration, and accordingly the QB file is that most advantageous for the Rooks. The advance of the QBP strikes at the opposing centre, and, that being of paramount importance, the Queen’s Knight must not be developed at B3 before the QBP has been pushed on. Another development might be conceivable for the Rooks; viz. on the KB file, and also the KKt or KR file; here, as we shall see, an occasion may arise for storming the opposing King’s side by a pawn attack. But in this case, too, although it seems unnecessary to play the QBP, it is advisable to develop the Knight via Q2, as there is a constant threat of the QB file being forced open subsequently by the opposing forces.
B. Let’s now look at the openings where the first move is 1. P-Q4 on either side. In this case, the center can't be cleared as early as in openings that start with 1. P-K4, P-K4. Advancing a second center pawn, which led to a clearance there, isn’t possible here. White doesn’t control his K4, so for a while he won’t be able to move the K pawn beyond K3. As a result, the K file doesn’t seem like a promising spot for the Rooks, and they need to find another file. The conclusions for Black in the French defense apply to both sides in this opening, so the QB file is the best option for the Rooks. Advancing the QBP targets the opposing center, and since that’s key, the Queen’s Knight shouldn’t be developed to B3 before the QBP has moved forward. It’s also possible to develop the Rooks on the KB file or the KKt or KR file; here, as we’ll see, there could be an opportunity to launch a pawn attack on the opposing King’s side. However, even in this case, while it might seem unnecessary to play the QBP, it’s wise to develop the Knight to Q2, as there’s always a threat of the QB file being opened up later by the opposing forces.
We will start with the games in which the QB Pawns are played in the earliest stages of the opening, so that the pawn skeleton in Diagram 35 forms the basis of development. The sequence of moves is of moment, because the advance of the KP, whether forced or not, determines the possibility of bringing out the Q Bishops. The simplest process of development based on Diagram 35 is the following, in which both sides block up the QB.
We will begin with the games where the QB Pawns are played in the initial stages of the opening, so that the pawn structure in Diagram 35 sets the foundation for development. The order of moves is important because the advancement of the KP, whether necessary or not, affects the ability to bring out the Q Bishops. The simplest development process based on Diagram 35 is as follows, in which both sides block the QB.
![[Illustration]](images/diag35.jpg)
Diag. 35
Diag. 35
2. P-K3 P-K3 3. Kt-KB3 Kt-KB3 4. P-B4 P-B4 5. Kt-B3 Kt-B3 6. B-Q3 B-Q3 7. Castles. Castles
2. P-K3 P-K3 3. Kt-KB3 Kt-KB3 4. P-B4 P-B4 5. Kt-B3 Kt-B3 6. B-Q3 B-Q3 7. Castles. Castles
The only useful square for the QB’s on either side is now at Kt2, and 8. P-QKt3, P-QKt3 are indicated. To play P-QKt3 before castling is very dangerous, because Black can play PxQP and pin the White QKt with B-Kt5, forcing B-Q2, when B-Kt2 was the move intended, e.g. 6. P-QKt3, BPxP; 7. KPxP, B-Kt5; 8. B-Kt2, Kt-K5; 9. Q-B2, Q-R4; 10. R-QB1, QxP.
The only useful square for the Knights on either side is now at Kt2, and 8. P-QKt3, P-QKt3 are suggested. Playing P-QKt3 before castling is very risky because Black can respond with PxQP and pin the White Knight with B-Kt5, forcing B-Q2 when B-Kt2 was the intended move, for example, 6. P-QKt3, BPxP; 7. KPxP, B-Kt5; 8. B-Kt2, Kt-K5; 9. Q-B2, Q-R4; 10. R-QB1, QxP.
In order not to relinquish the square at QKt4 to Black, White can also try the following manœuvre:
To avoid giving up the square at QKt4 to Black, White can also attempt this move:
6. PxBP BxP 7. P-QR3 Castles 8. P-QKt4 B-Q3 9. B-Kt2
6. PxBP BxP 7. P-QR3 Castles 8. P-QKt4 B-Q3 9. B-Kt2
If Black imitates White’s moves, viz. 9. … PxP; 10. BxP, P-QR3; 11. Castles, P-QKt4; 12. B-Q3, B-Kt2, the result is the symmetrical position in Diagram 36.
If Black copies White’s moves, for example, 9. … PxP; 10. BxP, P-QR3; 11. Castles, P-QKt4; 12. B-Q3, B-Kt2, the outcome is the symmetrical position in Diagram 36.
![[Illustration]](images/diag36.jpg)
Diag. 36
Diag. 36
When treating of the middle game, we shall find that even in this apparently fully equalised position the influence of the first move is still at work.
When discussing the middle game, we'll see that even in this seemingly balanced position, the impact of the first move is still present.
In order to obtain a more thorough understanding of the Queen’s Pawn game, we must now turn our attention very closely to the opening moves. Already on the second move White can play 2. P-QB4 and turn the game into a Queen’s gambit, which Black can either accept or decline. Black would be justified in playing 2. … PxP, and so furthering White’s object of getting his (Black’s) Queen’s Pawn away, if he could permanently hold the gambit pawn, or if the giving up of the square at Q4 fits into a reasoned system of development. The latter was, for instance, the case in the play leading to the position shown in the Diagram 36. But Black is well advised to wait until White has moved the King’s Bishop before taking the pawn on his QB5. This forces the Bishop to move twice, and Black regains the move he lost in his development, when he played PxP.
To gain a better understanding of the Queen’s Pawn game, we need to closely examine the opening moves. Already on the second move, White can play 2. P-QB4 and turn the game into a Queen’s Gambit, which Black can either accept or decline. Black would be justified in playing 2. … PxP, advancing White’s goal of getting his (Black’s) Queen’s Pawn off the board, if he could keep the gambit pawn permanently, or if giving up the square at Q4 fits into a thoughtful development strategy. The latter was the case in the play leading to the position shown in Diagram 36. However, Black should wait until White has moved the King’s Bishop before taking the pawn on QB5. This forces the Bishop to move twice, allowing Black to make up for the lost tempo in his development when he played PxP.
It would be quite incorrect to try to hold the pawn by P-QKt4 as follows:
It would be completely wrong to try to hold the pawn by moving it to QKt4 like this:
2. P-QB4 PxP 3. Kt-KB3 Kt-KB3 4. P-K3 P-QKt4 5. P-QR4
2. P-QB4 PxP 3. Kt-KB3 Kt-KB3 4. P-K3 P-QKt4 5. P-QR4
![[Illustration]](images/diag37.jpg)
Diag. 37
Diag. 37
If now Black answers PxP, White simply plays BxP and the P at R5 is lost very soon. If Black plays instead: 5. … P-B3, White wins back his pawn with 6. P-QKt3, PxKt P; 7. PxP, PxP; 8. BxPch by QxP, and moreover is much ahead with his development.
If Black responds with PxP, White just plays BxP and the pawn at R5 is lost really quickly. If Black plays instead: 5. … P-B3, White takes back his pawn with 6. P-QKt3, PxKt P; 7. PxP, PxP; 8. BxPch by QxP, and is also way ahead in development.
These considerations point to the conclusion that after 2. P-QB4 there is no inducement for Black to take the pawn. On the contrary, he will cover his centre pawn, which White wishes to tempt away, either with P-K3 or P-QB3. The attempt to develop the Queen’s Bishop before playing P-K3 is not to be recommended, because the Q Kt’s pawn remains unprotected and open to an immediate attack by 3. Q-Kt3. Of the two remaining replies, 2. … P-K3 and 2. … P-QB3, I will first discuss the former, as being the more natural of the two, since P-QB3 does not fit into the scheme for opening the QB file for the Rooks. White, on the other hand, can bring out his QB before playing P-K3, in this way:
These points lead to the conclusion that after 2. P-QB4, there's no reason for Black to take the pawn. Instead, he will reinforce his center pawn, which White is trying to lure away, either with P-K3 or P-QB3. Trying to develop the Queen’s Bishop before playing P-K3 isn't advisable because the Q Kt’s pawn remains unprotected and vulnerable to an immediate attack by 3. Q-Kt3. Among the two remaining responses, 2. … P-K3 and 2. … P-QB3, I will first discuss the former, as it's the more intuitive choice, since P-QB3 doesn’t align with the plan of opening the QB file for the Rooks. On the flip side, White can develop his QB before playing P-K3, like this:
2. P-QB4, P-K3; 3. Kt-QB3, Kt-KB3; 4. B-Kt5, and the game might proceed as follows: 4. … Q Kt-Q2. (Diagram 38.)
2. P-QB4, P-K3; 3. Kt-QB3, Kt-KB3; 4. B-Kt5, and the game could go on like this: 4. … Q Kt-Q2. (Diagram 38.)
No fault can be found with this move, although it blocks the Bishop, since the latter can only be developed effectively at Kt2. Moreover, the Knight at Q2 supports the projected P-B4. White cannot win a pawn now with 5. PxP, PxP; 6. KtxP, because of KtxKt; 7. BxQ, B-Kt5ch. Therefore 5. P-K3 must be played first, and after B-K2; 6. Kt-B3, Castles; 7. R-B1, P-QKt3; 8. PxP, PxP; 9. B-Q3, B-Kt2, all the pieces have found rational development.
No issue can be found with this move, even though it blocks the Bishop, since the Bishop can only be effectively developed at Kt2. Additionally, the Knight at Q2 supports the planned P-B4. White cannot capture a pawn now with 5. PxP, PxP; 6. KtxP, because of KtxKt; 7. BxQ, B-Kt5ch. Therefore, 5. P-K3 must be played first, and after B-K2; 6. Kt-B3, Castles; 7. R-B1, P-QKt3; 8. PxP, PxP; 9. B-Q3, B-Kt2, all the pieces have achieved reasonable development.
![[Illustration]](images/diag38.jpg)
Diag. 38
Diag. 38
Quite a different system of opening ensues, when Black does not delay pushing the P to QB4 until after his pieces are developed, but makes the advance on his third move.
A completely different opening system occurs when Black doesn't wait to push the pawn to QB4 until after developing his pieces, but instead makes that advance on his third move.
Here Black has the advantage of being able to avoid the pinning of his Knight by the opposing QB.
Here, Black has the advantage of being able to avoid having his Knight pinned by the opposing Queen.
2. P-QB4 P-K3 3. Kt-QB3 P-QB4 4. Kt-B3 Kt-QB3!
2. P-QB4 P-K3 3. Kt-QB3 P-QB4 4. Kt-B3 Kt-QB3!
Now Black threatens QPxP with an attack on White’s Queen’s Pawn. If White plays P-K3 we get the position mentioned in connection with Diagram 35. If he wishes to bring out his QB first, he must anticipate Black’s threat by BPxP.
Now Black threatens QPxP with an attack on White’s Queen’s Pawn. If White plays P-K3, we reach the position mentioned in relation to Diagram 35. If he wants to bring out his QB first, he needs to counter Black’s threat by playing BPxP.
After
After
5. BPxP KPxP
5. BPxP KPxP
the third of the typical main positions in the Queen’s gambit ensues, and is given in Diagram 39. Two continuations must now be considered. White can either develop his KB at Kt2, and concentrate on the Black QP, which is somewhat weak, or he can place the KB on one of the available squares between B1 and R6. In the first instance, the KP need not be played at all, and the QB
the third of the typical main positions in the Queen’s gambit follows, as shown in Diagram 39. Two options must now be considered. White can either develop his bishop to knight 2 and focus on the black queen pawn, which is a bit weak, or he can place the bishop on one of the available squares between bishop 1 and rook 6. In the first case, the king pawn doesn’t even have to be played.
![[Illustration]](images/diag39.jpg)
Diag. 39
Diag. 39
retains the option of developing at Kt5, B4, and even K3. In the second, where the K must make room for the KB, White must decide at once between B-B4 or Kt5, and only B4 can be seriously considered on account of
retains the option of advancing at Kt5, B4, and even K3. In the second, where the K has to accommodate the KB, White must quickly choose between B-B4 or Kt5, and only B4 can be seriously considered because of
6. B-Kt5 B-K2 7. BxB KtxB
6. B-Kt5 B-K2 7. BxB KtxB
which only furthers Black’s development. White would only be justified in this course if he could now win a pawn with 8. PxP, but Black would win it back and have the superior game after
which only furthers Black’s development. White would only be justified in this move if he could now win a pawn with 8. PxP, but Black would take it back and have the upper hand afterwards.
8. … P-Q5 9. Kt-K4 Castles
8. … P-Q5 9. N-K4 Castles
followed by B-B4 and Q-R4ch. The correct move in this variation is consequently 6. B-B4, and a possible continuation would be: Kt-KB3; 7. P-K3, B-K3; 8. R-QB1 or B-QKt5 or B-Q3.
followed by B-B4 and Q-R4ch. The right move in this variation is therefore 6. B-B4, and a possible continuation could be: Kt-KB3; 7. P-K3, B-K3; 8. R-QB1 or B-QKt5 or B-Q3.
With this we will close the discussion of the variations initiated by 2. P-QB4, P-K3, and study the reply 2. … P-QB3. The first question which arises in our mind is: Which file will Black be able to utilise for his Rooks? An attempt to free the King’s file through P-K4 is conceivable. But White can prevent this by simply playing Kt-KB3.
With this, we will wrap up the discussion of the variations started by 2. P-QB4, P-K3, and examine the response 2. … P-QB3. The first question that comes to mind is: Which file will Black be able to use for his Rooks? An attempt to open up the King's file by playing P-K4 is possible. However, White can stop this by simply playing Kt-KB3.
Two other possibilities present themselves: after playing P-K3, Kt-B3 and QKt-Q2, Black could steer into a line similar to the Queen’s gambit accepted with PxP and P-QB4, or he could keep the centre closed with P-KB4 and Kt-B3, with the intention of playing Kt-K5 and using the KB file for activating his Rook via KB3. Diagram 40 gives the position reached after:
Two other options are available: after playing P-K3, Kt-B3, and QKt-Q2, Black could go for a variation similar to the Queen’s Gambit Accepted with PxP and P-QB4, or he could maintain a closed center with P-KB4 and Kt-B3, planning to play Kt-K5 and activate his Rook via KB3 on the KB file. Diagram 40 shows the position reached after:
3. Kt-KB3 P-K3
4. P-K3 Kt-KB4
5. Kt-K5 Kt-B3
3. Knight to King's 3 Pawn to King's 3
4. Pawn to King's 3 Knight to King's Bishop 4
5. Knight to King's 5 Knight to Bishop 3
![[Illustration]](images/diag40.jpg)
Diag. 40
Diag. 40
White would not accomplish much with 6. P-KB4. The more or less symmetrical lineup of the pieces would most likely lead to a draw after Black properly prepares freeing his hemmed-in Bishop with P-QKt3 and B-Kt2. A better plan would be 6. P-B3, preventing Kt- K5 and preparing the eventual advance of the King’s Pawn to K4. In reply to 6. … , QKt-Q2 White would then rather play 7. Kt-Q3 than exchange Knights, as after this exchange it would not be too difficult for Black to bring his Bishop into play on the King’s wing via K1. Both of White’s Bishops would be best placed on Kt2.
White wouldn't achieve much with 6. P-KB4. The somewhat symmetrical arrangement of the pieces would likely lead to a draw after Black properly frees his trapped Bishop with P-QKt3 and B-Kt2. A better strategy would be 6. P-B3, blocking Kt-K5 and preparing to push the King’s Pawn to K4. If White plays 6. …, QKt-Q2, then White would prefer to play 7. Kt-Q3 instead of exchanging Knights, because after that exchange, it would be fairly easy for Black to activate his Bishop on the King’s side via K1. Both of White’s Bishops would be ideally positioned on Kt2.
This “Stonewall” opening can also be played by White, who is then a move to the good in the variation just shown. But this opening has practically disappeared from modern tournament games, simply because the QB cannot easily be brought into play.
This “Stonewall” opening can also be played by White, who is then ahead by one move in the variation just shown. But this opening has almost completely vanished from modern tournament games, mainly because the queen's bishop can’t be easily activated.
The following variation is reminiscent of the “Stonewall” in the formation of the centre pawns. White develops his Queen’s side just as Black did in the opening shown in connection with Diagram 38.
The following variation is similar to the “Stonewall” in the setup of the center pawns. White develops the queenside just like Black did in the opening shown with Diagram 38.
2. Kt-KB3 P-QB4 3. P-K3 Kt-QB3 4. B-Q3 Kt-B3 5. P-QKt3 P-K3 6. B-Kt2 B-Q3 7. QKt-Q2 PxP 8. PxP Castles
2. Nc3 d5 3. f4 Nf6 4. Bc4 Nbd7 5. Nf3 e5 6. Bb3 c6 7. Nc3 dxe4 8. Nxe4 O-O
![[Illustration]](images/diag41.jpg)
Diag. 41
Diag. 41
White can now settle his Knight at K5, and initiate a violent King’s side attack after castling, by P-KB4, Q-B3, which could be continued with P-KKt4, K-R1, R-KKt1, and so on. Once the position in Diagram 41 has been reached, Black’s resources against the dangerous onslaught of the White forces are scanty. Yet he can retaliate, not by making the simplest and most obvious developing moves, as mentioned before, but in the following way:
White can now place his Knight at K5 and start a fierce King's side attack after castling, using P-KB4, Q-B3, which could continue with P-KKt4, K-R1, R-KKt1, and so on. Once the position in Diagram 41 is reached, Black has limited options against the dangerous assault from the White forces. However, he can respond, not by making the simplest and most obvious developing moves, as mentioned earlier, but in this way:
If White plays 5. P-QKt3 before castling, Black exchanges pawns and checks with the Queen. Now White has the disagreeable choice between B-Q2 and P-B3. The former must be bad, being contrary to the plan of development as intended by P-QKt3. The latter blocks the very diagonal on which the Bishop was meant to operate. White can open up the diagonal by playing P-QB4 after castling, nor would it really imply the loss of a move to have played the BP twice, since Black must move his Queen again from R4, where she has no future. But in any case there remains the disadvantage that White was forced to play the BP, whilst before he had the option of withholding its advance until a more opportune moment.
If White plays 5. P-QKt3 before castling, Black trades pawns and checks with the Queen. Now White faces the unpleasant choice between B-Q2 and P-B3. The first option is definitely bad because it goes against the development plan intended by P-QKt3. The latter option blocks the diagonal where the Bishop was supposed to move. White can open up the diagonal by playing P-QB4 after castling, and it wouldn't really mean losing a move to have played the BP twice, since Black has to move his Queen again from R4, where she has no future. But still, there’s the downside that White was forced to play the BP, whereas before he could have held off on its advance until a better time.
Another possible subtlety in Black’s sequence of developing moves would be to withhold the advance of his KP until White has played P-QKt3, and then to play the QB to Kt5. For, as I have already remarked, the objection to developing Black’s Queen’s Bishop lies in White’s threat to attack Black’s QKtP with Q-Kt3. That possibility disappears after P-QKt3.
Another possible nuance in Black’s series of developing moves could be to delay the advance of his King’s Pawn until White has played Pawn to Knight 3, and then play the Queen’s Bishop to Knight 5. As I’ve already mentioned, the issue with developing Black’s Queen’s Bishop is White’s threat to attack Black’s Knight Pawn with Queen to Knight 3. That option disappears after Pawn to Knight 3.
Before bringing the discussion of the Queen’s Pawn opening to a close, I may remark that in tournaments it has become usual for White not to play P-QB4 at once, but to play Kt-KB3 as a preliminary, in order to avoid the complications of the Queen’s counter gambit: 2. P-QB4, P-K4.
Before wrapping up the discussion on the Queen’s Pawn opening, I want to point out that in tournaments, it’s now common for White not to play P-QB4 right away, but instead to play Kt-KB3 first. This is done to steer clear of the complexities of the Queen’s counter gambit: 2. P-QB4, P-K4.
If White plays 3. PxKP, Black’s reply is P-Q5, and the obvious move 4. P-K3 fails on account of the following pretty combination: B—Kt5ch; 5. B—Q2, PxP; 6. BxB, PxPch; 7. K-K2, PxKtch!!; 8. RxKt, B-Kt5ch, etc.
If White plays 3. PxKP, Black responds with P-Q5, and the obvious move 4. P-K3 doesn't work because of the following clever combination: B—Kt5ch; 5. B—Q2, PxP; 6. BxB, PxPch; 7. K-K2, PxKtch!!; 8. RxKt, B-Kt5ch, etc.
Instead of 4. P-K3, White should play P-KKt3 and develop his KB at Kt2. Black could now try to regain his pawn with Kt-K2-Kt3, but he can also sacrifice a pawn by P-KB3, with a view to rapid development.
Instead of 4. P-K3, White should play P-KKt3 and develop his Bishop to Kt2. Black could now try to get his pawn back with Knight to K2 to Knight to 3, but he can also sacrifice a pawn by pushing P-KB3, aiming for quick development.
It now only remains for us to discover whether Black has any other answer to P-Q4 which would necessitate close analysis on White’s part.
It now just remains for us to find out if Black has any other response to P-Q4 that would require careful examination on White’s part.
Here must be mentioned: 1. … Kt-KB3, 1. … P-QB4, and 1. … P-KB4. The former move prepares P-Q3, followed by P-K4. In this opening there is no reason why White should play P-QB4, as there is no prospect of opening the QB file for the Rooks. Furthermore, Black has relinquished the square Q4 and made K4 the basis of operations. It will be more advisable to prevent Black from playing P-K4 as far as this can be achieved in conformity with a logical development, e.g. 1. P-Q4, Kt-KB3; 2. Kt-KB3. Not 2. Kt- QB3, because Black could then lead into the Queen’s gambit by playing P-Q4 and P-QB4, after which White has the disadvantage of not being able to open the QB file. 2. … P-Q3; 3. B-B4, QKt-Q2; 4. P-K3. Now Black can only enforce P-K4 after P-B3 and QB2. Meanwhile White mobilises all his pieces, whilst Black’s QB remains blocked and the Kt must remain at Q2 to cover the KP. If, on the other hand, Black exchanges pawns in order to free the Knight, there is no Black centre left.
Here it should be noted: 1. … Nf3, 1. … d5, and 1. … e5. The first move sets up d4, followed by e5. In this opening, White has no reason to play d3, as there’s no chance of opening the rook file. Moreover, Black has given up the d4 square and made e4 their base of operations. It would be wiser to block Black from playing e5 as much as possible while still following a logical development, for example, 1. d4, Nf6; 2. Nf3. Not 2. Nc3, because then Black could lead into the Queen’s Gambit by playing d5 and c6, after which White would be at a disadvantage since they wouldn’t be able to open the rook file. 2. … d6; 3. Bb2, Qd7; 4. e3. Now Black can only push e5 after ...d5 and ...Bb7. Meanwhile, White mobilizes all of their pieces, while Black’s bishop remains blocked, and the knight must stay at d7 to cover the pawn. If, on the other hand, Black decides to trade pawns to free the knight, there’s no Black center left.
With regard to the second irregular reply to 1. P-Q4, namely, 1. … P-QB4, two ways are open to White. One is to turn the opening into an ordinary Queen’s gambit by playing P-K3, on which Black can play P-Q4. The second is to play 2. P-Q5. Black will then develop his King’s side with P-KKt3 and B-Kt2. The Bishop is well posted here, and can frequently take up an attacking position at K4 or Q5. (See Game No. 45, Rubinstein v. Spielmann.)
Regarding the second unusual response to 1. P-Q4, which is 1. … P-QB4, White has two options. One is to transform the opening into a standard Queen’s Gambit by playing P-K3, after which Black can respond with P-Q4. The second option is to play 2. P-Q5. Black will then develop his kingside with P-KKt3 and B-Kt2. The bishop is well positioned here and can often move into an attacking role at K4 or Q5. (See Game No. 45, Rubinstein v. Spielmann.)
If White plays 2. PxP, we have after 2. … P-K3 a Queen’s gambit accepted by White, and, as pointed out before, this line of play is not commendable.
If White plays 2. PxP, after 2. … P-K3 we have a Queen’s Gambit accepted by White, and as mentioned earlier, this way of playing is not advisable.
The last of the three irregular answers mentioned above: 1. … P-KB4 leads to two entirely different plans, according to the second move chosen by White.
The last of the three irregular answers mentioned above: 1. … P-KB4 results in two completely different strategies, depending on the second move selected by White.
White can confine himself to a simple development such as: Kt- KB3, B-Kt5, P-K3, QKt-Q2 (Kt-B3 would only be good if preceded by P-B4, because Black would again lead into a Queen’s gambit with P-Q4 and P-QB4). The other possibility is the following: in view of the fact that 1. … P-KB4 does absolutely nothing to aid development, White can initiate a violent attack by giving up his King’s Pawn (P-K4) and thus accelerate his own development. The play might be as follows: 2. … PxP; 3. Kt-QB3, Kt-KB3; 4. B- KKt5, P-B3 (P-Q4? 5. BxKt followed by Q-R5ch); 5. P-B3. If Black takes the pawn he lays himself open to an attack hard to meet. It seems best to play 5. … P-K6, which calls back the White QB and leaves White’s BP as a hindrance to the development of the KKt.
White can stick to a simple strategy like: Knight to KB3, Bishop to Kt5, Pawn to K3, Queen's Knight to Q2 (Knight to B3 would only work if it’s preceded by Pawn to B4, because Black would lead into a Queen’s Gambit with Pawn to Q4 and Pawn to QB4). The other option is this: since 1. … Pawn to KB4 doesn’t help development at all, White can start an aggressive attack by giving up his King’s Pawn (Pawn to K4) and speeding up his own development. The moves could go like this: 2. … Pawn takes Pawn; 3. Knight to QB3, Knight to KB3; 4. Bishop to KKt5, Pawn to B3 (Pawn to Q4? 5. Bishop takes Knight, followed by Queen to R5 check); 5. Pawn to B3. If Black takes the pawn, he opens himself up to a tough attack. The best move seems to be 5. … Pawn to K6, which brings back the White QB and makes White’s BP a block to the development of the KKt.
IRREGULAR OPENINGS
Many openings in which neither P-K4 nor P-Q4 is the first move lead to well-known positions by a simple transposition of moves. For instance, a Queen’s gambit may well have the following opening moves: 1. P-QB4, Kt-KB3; 2. Kt-KB3, P-K3; 3. Kt-B3, P-B4; 4. P-K3, P-Q4; 5. P-Q4, or a French defence these: 1. Kt-QB3, P- Q4; 2. P-Q4, Kt-KB3; 3. B-Kt5, P-K3; 4. P-K4.
Many openings where neither 1. e4 nor 1. d4 is the first move can lead to well-known positions through a simple rearrangement of moves. For example, a Queen’s Gambit may have the following opening moves: 1. b4, Nf6; 2. Nf3, e5; 3. Nc3, b5; 4. e3, d5; 5. d4, or a French Defense could go like this: 1. Nf3, e6; 2. d4, Nc6; 3. Bc4, e5; 4. e4.
There are, of course, systems of opening which deviate absolutely from those which have been proved sound and are in general use, and it is those openings that puzzle the beginner most of all. He says: What is the good of learning correct openings, if my opponent plays incorrectly and wins all the same? This line of thought is wrong from its inception. The student is not supposed to “learn” openings by heart, but to UNDERSTAND how the general principles of Chess Strategy are applied to any opening. Such knowledge can never be obtained from a tabulated analysis, but can only be arrived at by the application of common sense. If a player succeeds in winning in spite of an inferior opening, it only proves that subsequently he has played a stronger game than his opponent, who, after playing the opening according to the book, did not know how to proceed further. And herein lies the weakness, and not in the absence of knowledge of the analysis of openings. The latter is rated far too highly. Any player will hold his own in the opening, as soon as he has grasped the real meaning of those principles which I cannot repeat often enough, viz.: 1st, quick development of pieces and avoidance of lost moves; 2nd, the maintenance of a pawn centre, hampering the development of the opposing forces, and the avoidance of pawn moves that do not contribute to the development of pieces.
There are definitely opening systems that completely differ from the established strategies that have been proven effective and are widely used, and it’s those openings that confuse beginners the most. They often wonder: What’s the point of learning proper openings if my opponent plays incorrectly and still wins? This way of thinking is flawed from the start. The student isn’t meant to simply memorize openings but to UNDERSTAND how the basic principles of Chess Strategy apply to any opening. This understanding can’t be gained from a list of analyses; it requires the use of common sense. If a player manages to win despite starting with a poor opening, it just shows that they played a stronger game afterward than their opponent, who may have followed the opening theory but didn’t know how to continue effectively. The real weakness lies there, not in the lack of knowledge about opening analysis, which is often overvalued. Any player will perform adequately in the opening once they grasp the true meaning of the principles I can’t emphasize enough: first, develop your pieces quickly and avoid unnecessary moves; second, maintain a pawn center to hinder your opponent’s development, and avoid pawn moves that don’t help with piece development.
How to conduct the middle game and end-game is not entirely a matter of deduction from such general rules. In order to play the end-game correctly, one must know certain things and positions which arise from and may be said to be peculiar to the purely arbitrary rules of chess. The same applies to the middle game, as in most cases it must be played with a view to the end-game which ensues, unless there be a chance of mating the opponent before. The student should have, therefore, a knowledge of the end-game before he can hope to be able to conduct the middle game efficiently. For this reason I have decided to treat of the end- game first.
How to play the middle game and endgame isn’t just about following general rules. To play the endgame correctly, you need to understand specific roles and positions that are unique to the specific rules of chess. The same goes for the middle game, as it often needs to be played with the endgame in mind, unless there's a chance to checkmate the opponent first. Therefore, a student should understand the endgame before they can effectively play the middle game. For this reason, I've chosen to focus on the endgame first.
CHAPTER V
THE END-GAME
JUST as it is difficult to state the exact point at which an opening ends, so is it equally difficult to say where the end- game may be said to commence. One of the main characteristics of end-games is the active part taken by the King. Clearly the King cannot venture out into the field of operations until there has been an exchange of the majority of the pieces, so that there can be no danger of his being mated. As soon as a player has attained some advantage in material which ensures the victory in the end- game, he will try to bring about the end-game by exchanging pieces, for there the lines on which to push home his advantage are clearly set out.
JUST as it's hard to pinpoint exactly when an opening ends, it's equally tough to define when the endgame begins. One of the key features of endgames is the active role of the King. Obviously, the King can’t move into the action until most of the pieces have been exchanged, ensuring there’s no risk of being checkmated. Once a player has gained a material advantage that guarantees victory in the endgame, they will aim to reach that stage by trading pieces, as there are clear pathways to capitalize on their advantage.
It is first necessary to know what surplus of forces is the minimum required in order to force a mate. The positions in which the mate can be forced may be shown by a few typical examples. But I shall lay stress mainly on one point. That is the ability to judge whether an end-game which could be brought about by exchanges is won or not; in other words, whether it can be reduced to one of the typical positions referred to above.
It’s essential to understand what surplus of forces is the minimum needed to force a mate. The positions where a mate can be forced can be illustrated by a few typical examples. However, I want to emphasize one key point: the ability to determine whether an endgame resulting from exchanges is won or not; in other words, whether it can be simplified to one of the typical positions mentioned earlier.
It is obvious that the end-game is the particular demesne of pawn strategy. Nearly always one or more pawns survive the exchange of pieces, and the knowledge of the end-game will be invaluable for gauging the consequences of pawn moves in the course of the middle game. The latter represents probably the most difficult aspect of the strategy of chess.
It’s clear that the endgame is all about pawn strategy. Almost always, one or more pawns remain after the pieces are traded, and understanding the endgame is crucial for assessing the impact of pawn moves during the middle game. The middle game is likely the toughest part of chess strategy.
In order to enable beginners to grasp the following chapters, I must again point out a few elementary considerations.
To help beginners understand the upcoming chapters, I need to highlight a few basic points again.
Simple end-games, that is, end-games without pawns, are comparatively easy to understand. Let us first consider the case of a King denuded of all his troops. In order to force the mate it is necessary to obtain command of four squares, namely, those four squares which he controls after he has been driven into a corner. Supposing the Black King has been driven to QR1, the White King can prevent him from reaching two squares of different colour, namely, QR2 and QKt2. Therefore it is necessary for White still to have such forces as can command two more squares of different colour, namely, QR1 and QKt1. As can readily be seen, it will be essential to have at least the Queen or a Rook or two Bishops, or a Knight and Bishop, or two Knights. [Footnote: How the King can be driven into a corner will be shown subsequently.]
Simple endgames, which are endgames without pawns, are relatively easy to grasp. Let’s first look at the situation where a King has no pieces left. To force a checkmate, you need to control four squares, specifically the four squares that the King controls after being pushed into a corner. If the Black King is forced to QR1, the White King can block him from reaching two squares of different colors, specifically QR2 and QKt2. So, White still needs to have forces that can control two more squares of different colors, which are QR1 and QKt1. Clearly, it's crucial to have at least a Queen, a Rook, two Bishops, a Knight and a Bishop, or two Knights. [Footnote: How the King can be driven into a corner will be shown subsequently.]
We shall see that in the latter case it is impossible to drive the King into a corner without bringing about a stalemate. The mates by a Queen or Rook are so simple that I only give an example of each for the sake of completeness.
We’ll see that in this situation, it’s impossible to corner the King without causing a stalemate. The checkmates with a Queen or Rook are so straightforward that I’ll only provide one example of each to be thorough.
Position 1.—White: K at QR1, Q-KR1
Black: K at K4
Position 1.—White: King at Queen's Rook 1, Queen at King's Rook 1
Black: King at King 4
1. K-Kt2, K-Q5; 2. K-Kt3, K-K4; 3. K-B4, K-Q3; 4. Q-K4, K- Q2; 5. K-B5, K-B1; 6. K-B6, K-Kt1; 7. Q-QR4, or Kt4ch, or K7, or R7 and mate next move.
1. K-Kt2, K-Q5; 2. K-Kt3, K-K4; 3. K-B4, K-Q3; 4. Q-K4, K-Q2; 5. K-B5, K-B1; 6. K-B6, K-Kt1; 7. Q-QR4, or Kt4ch, or K7, or R7 and mate next move.
Position 2.—White: K at QKt3, RKR2
Black: K at K4
Position 2.—White: King at Knight 3, Rook at King Rook 2
Black: King at King 4
1. K-B4, K-Q3; 2. R-K2, K-B3; 3. R-K6ch, K-Q2; 4. K-Q5, K- B2; 5. K-B5, K-Q2; 6. R-K1, K-B2; 7. R-K7ch, K-Q1; 8. K-Q6, K-B1; 9. K-B6, K-Kt1; 10. R-K1, K-R7; 11. R-K8, K-R3; 12. R-R8 mate.
1. K-B4, K-Q3; 2. R-K2, K-B3; 3. R-K6 check, K-Q2; 4. K-Q5, K-B2; 5. K-B5, K-Q2; 6. R-K1, K-B2; 7. R-K7 check, K-Q1; 8. K-Q6, K-B1; 9. K-B6, K-Knight1; 10. R-K1, K-R7; 11. R-K8, K-R3; 12. R-R8 checkmate.
Position 3.—White: K at QRsq, B at KKtsq, BatKKt2
Black: K at KRsq
Position 3.—White: King at Queenside Rook square, Bishop at Kingside Knight square, Bishop at Kingside Knight 2
Black: King at Kingside Rook square
1. K-Kt2, K-Kt2; 2. K-B3, K-B3; 3. K-Q4, K-K3; 4. B-R2, K- B3; 5. K-Q5, K-B4; 6. B-K5, K-Kt4; 7. K-K6, K-Kt5; 8. B- QR8, K-Kt4; 9. B-B3, K-Kt3; 10. B-KB6, K-R3; 11. K-B7, K- R2; 12. B-Kt5, K-R1; 13. B-Q1, K-R2; 14. B-B2ch, K-R1; B-B6 mate.
1. K-Kt2, K-Kt2; 2. K-B3, K-B3; 3. K-Q4, K-K3; 4. B-R2, K-B3; 5. K-Q5, K-B4; 6. B-K5, K-Kt4; 7. K-K6, K-Kt5; 8. B-QR8, K-Kt4; 9. B-B3, K-Kt3; 10. B-KB6, K-R3; 11. K-B7, K-R2; 12. B-Kt5, K-R1; 13. B-Q1, K-R2; 14. B-B2ch, K-R1; B-B6 mate.
It is more difficult to mate with KNIGHT AND BISHOP. It is only possible to mate on a corner square commanded by the Bishop, as the following argument shows clearly. A mating position in the corner which the Bishop does not command would have to be of the type set out in Diagram 42. Here the Bishop plays on White squares, and the Knight in order to checkmate must move on to a White square; in other words, he must come from a Black one. Therefore, when the Bishop checked on the previous move and drove the King away, the King had the option of two black squares, and had no need to go into the corner one. He is only mated in consequence of a wrong move.
It’s harder to checkmate with a KNIGHT AND BISHOP. You can only checkmate in a corner square controlled by the Bishop, as the following explanation makes clear. A checkmate position in a corner where the Bishop isn’t in control would look like what’s shown in Diagram 42. Here, the Bishop is on White squares, and for the Knight to deliver checkmate, it has to land on a White square; in other words, it must come from a Black square. So, when the Bishop checked on the last move and forced the King to move away, the King had two Black square options and didn’t have to go to the corner square. He’s only checkmated because of a bad move.
![[Illustration]](images/diag42.jpg)
Diag. 42
Diag. 42
As stated above, however, it is possible in all cases to mate in the corner square which is of the same colour as the Bishop. The King is driven into the corner in this way: the Knight cuts him off such squares as the Bishop does not command. Diagram 43 will serve as an illustration.
As mentioned earlier, it's possible in all situations to checkmate in the corner square that matches the Bishop's color. The King is forced into the corner this way: the Knight blocks the squares that the Bishop does not control. Diagram 43 will illustrate this.
1. K-Kt2, K-Kt2; 2. K-B3, K-B3; 3. K-Q4, K-K3; 4. Kt-Kt3, K-B3; 5. B-B3, K-Kt4; 6. K-K5, K-Kt3; 7. Kt-K4, K-Kt2; 8. K-B5, K-R1; 9. K-B6, K-Kt1; 10. Kt-Kt5, K-R1; 11. Kt-B7ch, K-Kt1; 12. B-K4, K-B1; 13. B-R7, K-K1; 14. Kt-K5, K-Q1; 15. Kt-B4, K-B2; 16. B-K4, K-Q2; 17. K-B7, K-B2; 18. K-K7, K-B1; 19. K-Q6, K-Q1; 20. B-Kt6, K-B1; 21. Kt-R5, K-Q1; 22. Kt-Kt7ch, K-B1; 23. K-B6, K-Kt1; 24. K-Kt6, K-B1; 25. B-B5ch, K-Kt1; 26. Kt-B5, K-R1; 27. B-K6, K-Kt1; 28. Kt-R6ch, K-R1; 29. B-Q5 mate.
1. K-Kt2, K-Kt2; 2. K-B3, K-B3; 3. K-Q4, K-K3; 4. Kt-Kt3, K-B3; 5. B-B3, K-Kt4; 6. K-K5, K-Kt3; 7. Kt-K4, K-Kt2; 8. K-B5, K-R1; 9. K-B6, K-Kt1; 10. Kt-Kt5, K-R1; 11. Kt-B7ch, K-Kt1; 12. B-K4, K-B1; 13. B-R7, K-K1; 14. Kt-K5, K-Q1; 15. Kt-B4, K-B2; 16. B-K4, K-Q2; 17. K-B7, K-B2; 18. K-K7, K-B1; 19. K-Q6, K-Q1; 20. B-Kt6, K-B1; 21. Kt-R5, K-Q1; 22. Kt-Kt7ch, K-B1; 23. K-B6, K-Kt1; 24. K-Kt6, K-B1; 25. B-B5ch, K-Kt1; 26. Kt-B5, K-R1; 27. B-K6, K-Kt1; 28. Kt-R6ch, K-R1; 29. B-Q5 mate.
![[Illustration]](images/diag43.jpg)
Diag. 43
Diag. 43
It is impossible to force a mate with the KING AND TWO KNIGHTS. On the same grounds as given with respect to Diagram 42, the mate can only be attained through the opponent making a bad move. But a mate can be forced if the weaker side has a spare move which prevents the stalemate, e.g. Diagram 44.
It’s impossible to force a checkmate with the KING AND TWO KNIGHTS. Similar to what was explained in Diagram 42, you can only achieve checkmate if your opponent makes a bad move. However, checkmate can be forced if the weaker side has an extra move that avoids stalemate, like in Diagram 44.
![[Illustration]](images/diag44.jpg)
Diag. 44
Diag. 44
1. Kt(K3)-Q5, K-Kt2; 2. K-B5, K-R3; 3. K-Kt4, K-Kt2; 4. K-Kt5, K- R2; 5. Kt-B7, K-Kt2; 6. Kt(B7)-K8, K-R2; 7. Kt-Q6, K-Kt1; 8. K- Kt6, K-R1; 9. Kt-Q7, P-B4; 10. Kt-Kt5, P-B5; 11. Kt-B7 mate.
1. Knight to Queen 5, King to Knight 2; 2. King to Bishop 5, King to Rook 3; 3. King to Knight 4, King to Knight 2; 4. King to Knight 5, King to Rook 2; 5. Knight to Bishop 7, King to Knight 2; 6. Knight to Bishop 7, King to Rook 2; 7. Knight to Queen 6, King to Knight 1; 8. King to Knight 6, King to Rook 1; 9. Knight to Queen 7, Pawn to Bishop 4; 10. Knight to Knight 5, Pawn to Bishop 5; 11. Knight to Bishop 7 checkmate.
Having decided as to the smallest amount of material advantage with which it is possible to force a mate, we will now turn our attention to simple game endings (still without pawns). To judge such endings correctly, it will only be necessary to find out whether it is possible to obtain the minimum advantage mentioned. It is sufficient to discuss cases in which a piece on the one side plays against a stronger one on the other, because in endings where several pieces are left on either side, fortuitous circumstances are generally the deciding factors, and it would be impossible to characterise and classify positions of that kind, by giving typical illustrations. Besides, they are reduced sooner or later by exchanges to such end-games as have been treated already, or are going to be shown now.
Having determined the smallest amount of material advantage needed to force a mate, we will now focus on simple endgames (still without pawns). To accurately assess these endgames, we just need to see if it's possible to achieve the mentioned minimum advantage. It's enough to look at scenarios where one side has a piece against a stronger one on the other, because in endgames where there are multiple pieces on either side, random factors usually play a crucial role. It would be impossible to describe and categorize those types of positions with typical examples. Moreover, they eventually reduce to the endgames we've already discussed or will discuss now.
The Queen wins against any other piece; the Rook alone may give trouble. In Diagram 45 we illustrate a
The Queen beats any other piece, except for the Rook, which can be tricky. In Diagram 45, we show a
![[Illustration]](images/diag45.jpg)
Diag. 45
Diag. 45
position which is one of the most favourable to the weaker side.
position that is one of the most advantageous for the weaker side.
1. Q-R6 leads to nothing, as R-B2ch follows, and after 2. K-Kt6 Black forces a stalemate with R-B3ch.
1. Q-R6 leads to nothing, as R-B2ch follows, and after 2. K-Kt6 Black forces a stalemate with R-B3ch.
It is necessary for White to gain a move in this position; in other words, White must try to transfer to the other side the onus of having to move. If then the Rook moves away from the King, it gets lost after a few checks, or if Black’s King plays to B1, the Rook is equally lost through Q-R6.
It’s essential for White to make a move in this position; in other words, White needs to shift the responsibility of moving to the other side. If the Rook moves away from the King, it will be lost after a few checks, or if Black’s King goes to B1, the Rook will also be lost through Q-R6.
White plays therefore: 1. Q-K5ch, K-R1; 2. Q-R1ch, K-Kt1; 3. Q- R5, and wins. For example, 3. … R-B2; 4. Q-K5ch, K-R2; 5. Q- K3ch, K-R1; 6. Q-K8ch, and so on.
White plays then: 1. Q-K5ch, K-R1; 2. Q-R1ch, K-Kt1; 3. Q-R5, and wins. For instance, 3. … R-B2; 4. Q-K5ch, K-R2; 5. Q-K3ch, K-R1; 6. Q-K8ch, and so on.
The Rook can win against a minor piece in exceptional cases only. In endings of ROOK AGAINST BISHOP the weaker King must take refuge in a corner square of different colour from that of his Bishop. For instance, Diagram 46:
The Rook can only win against a minor piece in rare situations. In endgames of ROOK AGAINST BISHOP, the weaker King must seek safety in a corner square that is a different color from that of his Bishop. For example, Diagram 46:
![[Illustration]](images/diag46.jpg)
Diag. 46
Diag. 46
1. R-Q5, B-B5 (or R2); 2. R-Q8ch, B-Kt1, and Black is stalemate unless the Rook leaves the eighth Rank. Any outside square which is not of the same colour as that of the Bishop is dangerous for the King. Imagine the pieces in Diagram 46 shifted two squares towards the centre of the board, as in Diagram 47, and White wins with
1. R-Q5, B-B5 (or R2); 2. R-Q8ch, B-Kt1, and Black is stalemate unless the Rook leaves the eighth Rank. Any outside square that is not the same color as the Bishop is dangerous for the King. Imagine the pieces in Diagram 46 moved two squares towards the center of the board, as in Diagram 47, and White wins with
1. R-QKt5 B-R5 2. R-Kt8ch B-K1 3. R-R8
1. R-QKt5 B-R5 2. R-Kt8ch B-K1 3. R-R8
The Bishop is lost, as it is Black’s move.
The Bishop is lost since it's Black's turn to move.
In endings of ROOK AGAINST KNIGHT, the weaker side loses, where the Knight is cut off from his King.
In the ending of ROOK AGAINST KNIGHT, the weaker side loses, with the Knight being separated from his King.
For instance, in Diagram 48, 1. R-Q5! In this “oblique opposition” the Rook takes four of the Knight’s squares: 1. … Kt-K8; 2. K-B5, Kt-B7; 3. K-K4, Kt-R6 (Kt-Kt5?; 4. R-Kt5ch! wins the Knight). In this ending there is always a fatal check at some point, and the position in the
For instance, in Diagram 48, 1. R-Q5! In this “oblique opposition,” the Rook controls four of the Knight’s squares: 1. … Kt-K8; 2. K-B5, Kt-B7; 3. K-K4, Kt-R6 (Kt-Kt5?; 4. R-Kt5ch! captures the Knight). In this ending, there will always be a decisive check at some point, and the position in the
![[Illustration]](images/diag47.jpg)
Diag. 47
Diag. 47
diagram is not in any way a chance win. 4. K-Q3, K-B2; 5. R-QR5, Kt-Kt8; 6. R-R1, and wins.
diagram is not at all a lucky win. 4. K-Q3, K-B2; 5. R-QR5, Kt-Kt8; 6. R-R1, and wins.
![[Illustration]](images/diag48.jpg)
Diag. 48
Diag. 48
As soon as the Knight can obtain the King’s support the game is drawn even when the King is already forced on to the edge of the board.
As soon as the Knight gets the King’s support, the game is considered a draw even if the King is already pushed to the edge of the board.
Position—White: K at K6, R at K5
Black: K at K1, Kt at QR2
Position—White: K at K6, R at K5
Black: K at K1, Kt at QR2
1. R-QB5, K-Q1; 2. K-Q6, Kt-B1ch; 3. K-B6, Kt-K2ch, draw. In this case the King must avoid the corners, as the Knight would be bereft of his efficiency.
1. R-QB5, K-Q1; 2. K-Q6, Kt-B1ch; 3. K-B6, Kt-K2ch, draw. In this situation, the King should stay away from the corners, since the Knight would lose its effectiveness.
Position—White: K at KR6, R at KR4
Black: K at KR1, Kt at K2
Position—White: King at King Rook 6, Rook at King Rook 4
Black: King at King Rook 1, Knight at King 2
1. R-K4, Kt-Kt1ch; 2. K-Kt6 and wins.
1. R-K4, N-Nf1; 2. K-Nf6 and wins.
We come now to the more interesting part of end-game play, namely, PAWN ENDINGS. The best course will be first to study how to turn a material superiority in pawns to decisive advantage, after which we shall note particular positions, in which a win is possible with an equality or even an inferiority in pawns.
We now arrive at the more engaging part of end-game play, specifically, PAWN ENDINGS. The best approach will be to first examine how to convert an advantage in pawns into a winning position, after which we will look at specific scenarios where a victory is achievable even with an equal or smaller number of pawns.
The ending of KING AND PAWN AGAINST KING is one of the simplest albeit one of the most important of elementary cases. The stronger side will evidently try to queen the pawn. But generally this is not possible if the adverse King has command of the queening square. One important condition, though, must be complied with: the weaker King must move into “opposition,” and “opposition” is one of the characteristic and deciding factors in most pawn endings. It is absolutely necessary for the learner to understand fully the meaning of the term “opposition,” and its value in elementary cases This knowledge is of far reaching influence in end-games.
The ending of KING AND PAWN AGAINST KING is one of the simplest yet most crucial basic scenarios. The stronger side will obviously try to promote the pawn. However, this is usually not possible if the opposing King controls the promotion square. One important condition must be met: the weaker King needs to move into "opposition," and "opposition" is one of the key deciding factors in most pawn endings. It's essential for learners to fully grasp the meaning of the term "opposition" and its importance in basic situations. This understanding has a significant impact on endgames.
![[Illustration]](images/diag49.jpg)
Diag. 49
Diag. 49
In Diagram 49 White seeks to queen his pawn.
In Diagram 49, White aims to promote his pawn to a queen.
1. K-Q4, K-K2; 2. K-K5
With this move White assumes the opposition. That is, he moves into the same rank or file, separated by one square only, so that both Kings stand on squares of the same colour. White has moved last, it is Black’s turn to move; it is said in this case that “White has the opposition.” We shall soon see that Black is only able to draw the game, if he succeeds in assuming the opposition himself (which means that, having the move, he should step into opposition). 2. … K-Q 2; 3 P-Q6 (Diagram 50).
With this move, White takes the opposition. This means he moves into the same rank or file, just one square apart, so both Kings are on squares of the same color. Since White moved last, it’s now Black’s turn to move; in this situation, we say that “White has the opposition.” Soon we’ll see that Black will only be able to draw the game if he manages to take the opposition himself (which means that, having the move, he should step into opposition). 2. … K-Q 2; 3 P-Q6 (Diagram 50).
![[Illustration]](images/diag50.jpg)
Diag. 50
Diag. 50
I propose now to recapitulate.
I propose to summarize now.
This is the critical moment, namely, when the pawn reaches the sixth rank. If now Black plays K-K1 he is lost, for White playing K-K6 has the opposition. After 4. … K-Q1, 5. P-Q7, Black is forced to allow the White King to move to K7, covering the queening square; 5. … K-B2, 6. K-K7, any; 7. P queens. But Black has a draw in the position of Diagram 50, by playing 3. … K-Q1!! (not K1). Now after 4. K-K6 he keeps the opposition himself with K-K1; and after 5. P-Q7ch, K-Q1; 6. K-Q6, he is stalemated, or else wins the pawn if White plays differently on his sixth move. The King draws against King and pawn if he commands the queening square, and if he can retain the opposition on the first rank as soon as the pawn moves into his sixth.
This is the critical moment, specifically when the pawn reaches the sixth rank. If Black plays K-K1 now, he is lost because White can play K-K6 and gain the opposition. After 4. … K-Q1, 5. P-Q7, Black is forced to let the White King move to K7, blocking the queening square; 5. … K-B2, 6. K-K7, any; 7. P queens. However, Black can draw in the position shown in Diagram 50 by playing 3. … K-Q1!! (not K1). Now, after 4. K-K6, he keeps the opposition himself with K-K1; and after 5. P-Q7ch, K-Q1; 6. K-Q6, he is stalemated, or else wins the pawn if White plays differently on his sixth move. The King draws against a King and pawn if he controls the queening square and can retain the opposition on the first rank as soon as the pawn moves into his sixth.
It is of the utmost importance that the pawn should be at his sixth; if the pawn is still further back, the opposition on the first rank is of no avail.
It is extremely important for the pawn to reach the sixth rank; if the pawn is still further back, having opposition on the first rank is useless.
Diagram 51 will serve as an example. Having the move,
Diagram 51 will serve as an example. With the move,
![[Illustration]](images/diag51.jpg)
Diag. 51
Diag. 51
White would only draw with P-B5, because Black’s K-B2 wins the pawn.
White would only draw by moving the pawn to B5, because Black's king on B2 captures the pawn.
But White wins as follows: 1. K-Kt6, K-B1; 2. K-B6, K-K1; 3. K- K6, K-Q1; 4. K-Q6, K-B sq:
But White wins like this: 1. K-Kt6, K-B1; 2. K-B6, K-K1; 3. K-K6, K-Q1; 4. K-Q6, K-B sq:
![[Illustration]](images/diag52.jpg)
Diag. 52
Diag. 52
5. P-B5, K-Q sq. We see: Black has just assumed the opposition, but the pawn has not yet crossed to his sixth square, and White, by playing P-B6, again forces Black to give up the opposition. It might be more clear to put it in this way: with P-B6 White wins the opposition, in that he brings about a position with Black to move. Therefore the game is won for White. Since the opposition on the outside rank is of no avail, when the pawn has not yet played to his sixth square, the weaker side must try to keep away the opposing King from the sixth rank until the pawn has reached that rank. This is possible in positions such as that in Diagram 53, where the stronger
5. P-B5, K-Q sq. We see: Black has just taken the opposition, but the pawn hasn't moved to the sixth square yet, and by playing P-B6, White forces Black to give up the opposition again. It might be clearer to say that with P-B6, White wins the opposition because it puts Black in a position where they have to move. Therefore, the game is won for White. Since the opposition on the outside rank doesn't help when the pawn hasn’t moved to the sixth square, the weaker side must try to keep the opposing King away from the sixth rank until the pawn reaches that rank. This is possible in situations like the one shown in Diagram 53, where the stronger
![[Illustration]](images/diag53.jpg)
Diag. 53
Diag. 53
King is not more than one rank ahead of his pawn, and the weaker King can assume the opposition. In the position in Diagram 53 Black plays K-Q4 and maintains the opposition until the pawn moves, after which a typical position, similar to the one treated in connection with Diagram 50 is brought about.
King is just one rank ahead of his pawn, and the weaker King can take the opposition. In the position in Diagram 53, Black plays K-Q4 and keeps the opposition until the pawn moves, after which a typical position similar to the one discussed in relation to Diagram 50 occurs.
If White has the move, however, he wins easily by 1. K-B4, thus:
If it's White's turn to move, he wins easily with 1. K-B4, like this:
1. … K-Q3 2. K-Kt5 K-B2 3. K-B5 K-Kt2 4. K-Q6 K-B1 5. K-B6
1. … K-Q3 2. K-Kt5 K-B2 3. K-B5 K-Kt2 4. K-Q6 K-B1 5. K-B6
and there is opposition on the eighth rank whilst the pawn has not reached the sixth.
and there is a block on the eighth rank while the pawn hasn’t made it to the sixth.
If the King is more than one rank ahead of his pawn, as in Diagram 54, the end-game can always be won, for if Black
If the King is more than one rank ahead of his pawn, like in Diagram 54, the end-game can always be won, because if Black
![[Illustration]](images/diag54.jpg)
Diag. 54
Diag. 54
takes the opposition with K-Q3, White deprives him of it again, winning a move by P-B3, and the position is similar to that in Diagram 53, with White to move.
takes the opposition with K-Q3, White takes it back again, winning a move by P-B3, and the position is similar to that in Diagram 53, with White to move.
1. … K-Q3 2. P-B3 K-B3 3. K-B4 and wins.
1. … K-Q3 2. P-B3 K-B3 3. K-B4 and wins.
This settles all typical end-games of King and pawn against King. There is, however, one exception to the rules set out, namely, when a ROOK’S PAWN is concerned. Here the isolated King always succeeds in drawing if he can reach the corner where the pawn has to queen, for he cannot be driven out again. The Rook’s pawn affords another opportunity for the weaker side to draw. Diagram 55 will illustrate this, and similar positions are of frequent occurrence in practice. Here Black draws with 1. … K-B5. As he threatens to capture the pawn, White must play 2. P-R4. Then after the reply K-B4, White is still unable to cut the opponent off from the corner with K-Kt7, as the loss of the pawn is still threatened through K-Kt5. And after 3. P-R5 Black attains the position which is typical for this end-game, namely the opposition against the King on the Rook’s file. The latter cannot escape without giving up the contested corner, and the game is drawn. 3. … K-B3; 4. K-R7, K-B2; 5. K-R8, K-B1; 6. P-R6, K-B2; 7. P-R7, K-B1: and White is stalemated.
This covers all standard endgames of King and pawn against King. However, there is one exception to the rules mentioned, specifically when a ROOK’S PAWN is involved. In this case, the isolated King can always manage to draw if he can get to the corner where the pawn is promoted, since he cannot be forced out again. The Rook’s pawn gives the weaker side another chance to draw. Diagram 55 will show this, and similar situations often occur in practice. Here, Black draws with 1. … K-B5. Since he threatens to take the pawn, White must play 2. P-R4. After the reply K-B4, White still can’t cut off the opponent from the corner with K-Kt7 without risking the loss of the pawn via K-Kt5. Then after 3. P-R5, Black reaches the typical position for this endgame, which is opposing the King on the Rook’s file. The Rook cannot escape without surrendering the contested corner, resulting in a draw. 3. … K-B3; 4. K-R7, K-B2; 5. K-R8, K-B1; 6. P-R6, K-B2; 7. P-R7, K-B1: and White ends up stalemated.
![[Illustration]](images/diag55.jpg)
Diag. 55
Diag. 55
End-games with a majority of one pawn, when both sides still have pawns, are much more simple to manipulate.
Endgames with a one-pawn advantage, when both sides still have pawns, are much easier to manage.
Such games result in positions of which Diagram 56 is a
Such games lead to positions like the one shown in Diagram 56.
![[Illustration]](images/diag56.jpg)
Diag. 56
Diag. 56
typical instance. Here White does not even need to Queen his passed pawn. The mere threat forces the win. For the pawn at Kt4 reduces the mobility of the Black King, in so far as the latter must at all times be ready to reach the queening square in as few moves as the pawn, or else the pawn would queen unmolested. The White King can therefore capture the opposing Bishop’s pawn in peace and then queen his own.
typical instance. Here White doesn't even need to promote his passed pawn. The simple threat guarantees the win. The pawn on Kt4 limits the Black King's movement because he always has to be ready to get to the promotion square in as few moves as the pawn, or else the pawn would promote without interference. The White King can then safely capture the opposing Bishop’s pawn and promote his own.
1. K-K4, K-K3; 2. P-Kt5, K-K2; 3. K-K5, K-B2; 4. K-Q6, and so on; or 1. … K-Kt4 KxP; 3. K-Q6, K-B4; 4. KxP, K-K3; 5. K-Kt7, and so on.
1. K-K4, K-K3; 2. P-Kt5, K-K2; 3. K-K5, K-B2; 4. K-Q6, and so on; or 1. … K-Kt4 KxP; 3. K-Q6, K-B4; 4. KxP, K-K3; 5. K-Kt7, and so on.
Such positions as Diagram 56 are also reached when there are several pawns on each wing. The stronger side exchanges pawns on the wing where there is a majority until the extra pawn is passed.
Such positions as Diagram 56 can also occur when there are multiple pawns on each side. The stronger side trades pawns on the side where they have more until the extra pawn is advanced.
The winning process is not quite so simple when all the pawns are on the same wing, because exchanges are of no use unless the King can assume the opposition in front of the last remaining pawn (compare notes to Diagram 53).
The winning process isn't as straightforward when all the pawns are on the same side, because trading pieces doesn't help unless the King can take the opposition in front of the last remaining pawn (see Diagram 53).
In Diagram 57, for instance, White must not play P-B4. Therefore he can only win by gaining the Knight’s Pawn,
In Diagram 57, for example, White should not play P-B4. So, he can only win by capturing the Knight’s Pawn.
![[Illustration]](images/diag57.jpg)
Diag. 57
Diag. 57
that is, by bringing his King to B5. This he achieves by forcing the Black King to relinquish the opposition with 1. P-B3.
that is, by moving his King to B5. He does this by making the Black King give up the opposition with 1. P-B3.
1. … K-B3; 2. K-K5, K-Kt2; 3. K-Q6, K-Kt3; 4. K-Q5, K-Kt2; 5. K-B5, K-R3; 6. K-B6, and wins, as Black must abandon the pawn.
1. … K-B3; 2. K-K5, K-Kt2; 3. K-Q6, K-Kt3; 4. K-Q5, K-Kt2; 5. K-B5, K-R3; 6. K-B6, and wins, as Black must abandon the pawn.
This position, being of frequent occurrence, is most important, and I recommend it as a valuable study in the use of the opposition.
This position happens often and is really important, so I recommend it as a valuable study in using opposition.
Before I discuss positions of greater complexity, in which the only way to win is by sacrificing the extra pawn, I shall treat of end-games in which positional advantages ensure the victory although the pawns are equal. Here we shall find simple cases in which pawn manœuvres bring about the win, and more intricate ones in which King moves are the deciding factor.
Before I talk about more complex positions, where the only way to win is by sacrificing an extra pawn, I will cover endgames where having positional advantages guarantees victory even when the pawns are equal. Here, we’ll see straightforward situations where pawn maneuvers lead to a win, along with more complicated ones where King movements become the key factor.
Of the former the most important type is the end-game with the “distant passed pawn.” A typical example is the position in Diagram 58, in which Black wins.
Of the former, the most important type is the endgame with the “distant passed pawn.” A typical example is the position in Diagram 58, in which Black wins.
![[Illustration]](images/diag58.jpg)
Diag. 58
Diag. 58
The King’s moves are outlined by the necessity of capturing the opposing passed pawn, after which the Black King is two files nearer the battle-field (the Queen’s side), so that the White pawns must fall.
The King’s moves are based on the need to capture the opposing passed pawn, after which the Black King is two files closer to the battlefield (the Queen’s side), making it so that the White pawns must fall.
1. K-Kt2, K-Kt2; 2. K-Kt3, K-B3; 3. K-Kt4, K-K4; 4. P-B4ch, K-B3; 5. K-Kt3, P-R4; 6. K-R4, K-B4; 7. KxP, KxP; 8. K-Kt6, K-K4, and so on.
1. K-Kt2, K-Kt2; 2. K-Kt3, K-B3; 3. K-Kt4, K-K4; 4. P-B4ch, K-B3; 5. K-Kt3, P-R4; 6. K-R4, K-B4; 7. KxP, KxP; 8. K-Kt6, K-K4, and so on.
For similar reasons the position in Diagram 59 is lost for Black. White obtains a passed pawn on the opposite wing to that of the King. He forces the Black King to abandon his King’s side pawns, and these are lost. I give the moves in full, because this is another important example characteristic of the ever recurring necessity of applying our arithmetical rule. By simply enumerating the moves necessary for either player to queen his pawn—SEPARATELY for White and Black—we can see the result of our intended manœuvres, however far ahead we have to extend our calculations.
For similar reasons, the position in Diagram 59 is a losing one for Black. White gets a passed pawn on the opposite side of the King. He forces the Black King to give up his King’s side pawns, which are then lost. I’ll list the moves in full, because this is another important example of the ongoing need to use our numerical rule. By simply counting the moves needed for either player to promote their pawn—SEPARATELY for White and Black—we can anticipate the outcome of our planned strategies, no matter how far we need to project our calculations.
1. P-R4, K-K3; 2. P-R5, PxP; 3. PxP, K-Q3
1. P-R4, K-K3; 2. P-R5, PxP; 3. PxP, K-Q3
Now the following calculations show that Black is lost. White needs ten moves in order to queen on the King’s side, namely, five to capture the Black King’s side pawns (K-K4, B5, Kt6, R6, Kt5), one to free the way for his pawn, and four moves with the pawn. After ten moves, Black only
Now the following calculations show that Black is lost. White needs ten moves to promote a pawn on the King’s side: five to capture the Black King’s side pawns (K-K4, B5, Kt6, R6, Kt5), one to clear the path for the pawn, and four moves to advance the pawn. After ten moves, Black only
![[Illustration]](images/diag59.jpg)
Diag. 59
Diag. 59
gets his pawn to B6. He requires six moves to capture the White Queen’s side pawns, one to make room for his pawn at B3, and after three moves the pawn only gets to B6. White then wins by means of many checks, forcing the Black King to block the way of his own pawn, thus gaining time for his King to approach. As we shall see later on (p. 97), if the pawn had already reached B7, whilst under protection by his K, the game would be drawn.
gets his pawn to B6. He needs six moves to capture the White Queen’s side pawns, one to create space for his pawn at B3, and after three moves the pawn only reaches B6. White then wins by delivering multiple checks, forcing the Black King to block his own pawn, thus giving time for his King to get closer. As we will see later on (p. 97), if the pawn had already reached B7 with the protection of his King, the game would be a draw.
It is necessary to make it a rule to examine positions in which each side has a passed pawn, by counting the moves in the way first shown. It is just because end-games can be calculated to a nicety, there being no moves of which the consequences cannot be foreseen, that we note in contemporary master play a tendency to simplify the middle-game by exchanging pieces, as soon as there is an infinitesimal advantage in the pawn position (compare the game Charousek-Heinrichsen, p. 108).
It’s essential to adopt a practice of analyzing positions where each side has a passed pawn by counting the moves as previously demonstrated. The reason endgames can be calculated precisely, with every move's outcome being predictable, is why we observe a trend in modern master play to simplify the middlegame by trading pieces as soon as there’s even the slightest advantage in the pawn structure (see the game Charousek-Heinrichsen, p. 108).
We will now turn our attention to positions in which the pawns opposed on each wing are of equal number and no passed pawn can be forced through. Everything depends on the relative position of the Kings. The deciding factor in valuing the King’s position is whether pawn moves are possible, or whether they are already entirely or nearly exhausted, so that only manœuvres by the King are possible. The following illustrations make the position clear. We shall see that the importance of getting the opposition is paramount. Diagram 60 shows a simple instance in which there are no
We will now focus on situations where the pawns on both sides are equal in number and no passed pawn can be created. Everything relies on the relative positions of the Kings. The key factor in assessing the King’s position is whether pawn moves are available or if they have been mostly or completely used up, leaving only maneuvers by the King. The following examples clarify the situation. We will observe that gaining the opposition is crucial. Diagram 60 presents a straightforward case where there are no
![[Illustration]](images/diag60.jpg)
Diag. 60
Diag. 60
more pawn moves. Whoever has the move wins by assuming the opposition. The opposing King must then give the way free to one of the pawns.
more pawn moves. Whoever has the move wins by taking the opposition. The opposing King must then clear the way for one of the pawns.
The state of affairs in Diagram 61 is similar to that in Diagram 60. Having the move, White plays into opposition and forces his way to Q5, after which Black’s Bishop’s pawn is lost.
The situation in Diagram 61 is like that in Diagram 60. With the move, White takes the opposition and pushes to Q5, after which Black’s Bishop’s pawn is lost.
1. K-K4, K-Q3; 2. K-B5, K-Q2; 3. K-K5, K-B3; 4. K-K6, K-B2; 5. K- Q5, K-Kt3; 6. K-Q6, and so on (compare Diagram 57). If Black has the move he can only draw, because the White Bishop’s pawn is covered even though Black gains the square at Q5.
1. K-K4, K-Q3; 2. K-B5, K-Q2; 3. K-K5, K-B3; 4. K-K6, K-B2; 5. K-Q5, K-Kt3; 6. K-Q6, and so on (compare Diagram 57). If Black has the turn, he can only force a draw because the White Bishop's pawn is protected, even though Black controls the square at Q5.
1. … K-K4; 2. K-Q3, K-B5; 3. K-Q2!! and whatever Black plays White wins the opposition, so that the Black King’s ingress is stopped; 2. K-K2 loses the game because of 3. … K-K5; 4. K-Q2, K-Q5; 5. K-B2, K-K6; 6. K-B1, K-Q6; 7. K-Kt2, K-Q7; 8. K-Kt1, K- B6; 9. K-R2, K-B7, and wins.
1. … K-K4; 2. K-Q3, K-B5; 3. K-Q2!! and no matter what Black plays, White wins the opposition, preventing the Black King from entering; 2. K-K2 loses the game because of 3. … K-K5; 4. K-Q2, K-Q5; 5. K-B2, K-K6; 6. K-B1, K-Q6; 7. K-Kt2, K-Q7; 8. K-Kt1, K-B6; 9. K-R2, K-B7, and wins.
![[Illustration]](images/diag61.jpg)
Diag. 61
Diag. 61
I shall take this opportunity of explaining what is called “distant opposition.” In Diagram 62, White with the move wins by 1. K-K2, thus assuming “distant opposition” (squares of the same colour!!). If Black now enters his second rank, White immediately plays into opposition on his third rank, e.g. 1. … K-Q2; 2. K- Q3, and still maintains it by 3. K-K3 if Black plays a waiting move such as 2. … K-K2. Now Black has no further waiting moves, as White threatens to capture one of the pawns. But playing into the third rank is of no use, as White then assumes the direct opposition, and wins as in Diagram 60. Black must allow White access to one side or the other. He could not have remained on the first rank at the outset either, for after 1. … K-Q1, White advances through a square, to which Black cannot assume the opposition, namely, 2. K-B3. If now Black wishes to answer the threat of K-B 4-Kt5 and plays K-K2, White answers 3. K-K3 as before.
I will take this chance to explain what’s known as “distant opposition.” In Diagram 62, White wins by playing 1. K-K2, putting themselves in “distant opposition” (squares of the same color!!). If Black then moves to their second rank, White immediately takes opposition on their third rank, for example, 1. … K-Q2; 2. K-Q3, and maintains it with 3. K-K3 if Black plays a waiting move like 2. … K-K2. Now Black has no more waiting moves because White threatens to capture one of the pawns. But moving to the third rank doesn’t help, as White then takes direct opposition and wins, as shown in Diagram 60. Black has to let White have access to one side or the other. They couldn’t stay on the first rank from the beginning either, because after 1. … K-Q1, White advances through a square where Black can’t take opposition, specifically 2. K-B3. If Black wants to respond to the threat of K-B4-Kt5 and plays K-K2, White responds with 3. K-K3 as before.
2. K-K3 or KQ3 would be wrong, as Black would then succeed in assuming the opposition at K2 or Q2, and would be able to maintain it. White would be unable to circumvent this or to attack the pawns.
2. K-K3 or KQ3 would be incorrect, as Black would then manage to take the opposition at K2 or Q2 and would be able to hold it. White wouldn’t be able to get around this or to attack the pawns.
![[Illustration]](images/diag62.jpg)
Diag. 62
Diag. 62
In this position, too, there is ample scope for the study of the opposition.
In this role, there's plenty of opportunity to examine the opposition.
If the pawns are still standing behind, the King who has the most advanced position has always the advantage, because he threatens to attack the opposing pawns should they leave their base. White has more pawn moves at his disposal, and will nearly always succeed in assuming the opposition. For instance, in Diagram 63, White, having the move, wins because his King gets first into the centre of the board.
If the pawns are still behind, the King in the most advanced position always has the advantage because he can threaten to attack the opposing pawns if they move out of their base. White has more pawn moves available and will almost always succeed in taking the opposition. For example, in Diagram 63, White, having the turn, wins because his King reaches the center of the board first.
1. K-K3, K-Q2; 2. K-B4, K-K2; 3. K-Kt5 K-B2; 4. K-R6, K-Kt1; 5. P-KB4, K-R1; 6. P-B5, PxP; 7. K-Kt5, K-Kt2; 8. KxP, K-B2. Black has now the opposition but cannot maintain it, having no pawn moves available. The White King threatens to capture any pawn that ventures forward.
1. K-K3, K-Q2; 2. K-B4, K-K2; 3. K-Kt5 K-B2; 4. K-R6, K-Kt1; 5. P-KB4, K-R1; 6. P-B5, PxP; 7. K-Kt5, K-Kt2; 8. KxP, K-B2. Black now has the opposition but can’t hold onto it since there are no pawn moves available. The White King is threatening to take any pawn that moves forward.
9. K-K5, K-K2; 10. K-Q5, K-Q2; 11. P-B4, P-B3ch; 12. K-K5, K-K2; 13. P-B5, and wins, as Black will soon be compelled to play K-Q2, after which a manœuvre shown previously gives White the Queen’s Bishop’s pawn.
9. K-K5, K-K2; 10. K-Q5, K-Q2; 11. P-B4, P-B3ch; 12. K-K5, K-K2; 13. P-B5, and wins, as Black will soon have to play K-Q2, after which a move shown earlier gives White the Queen’s Bishop’s pawn.
l3. … P-KR4; 14. P-KR4, P-R4; 15. P-R4! K-Q2; 16. K-B6, K-O1: 17. K-K6, and so on.
l3. … P-KR4; 14. P-KR4, P-R4; 15. P-R4! K-Q2; 16. K-B6, K-O1: 17. K-K6, and so on.
If in Diagram 63 the King stood at Q2 instead of B1, he could just manage to draw. White takes eleven moves to capture the Black King’s side pawns, and to queen one of
If in Diagram 63 the King stood at Q2 instead of B1, he could just manage to draw. White takes eleven moves to capture the Black King’s side pawns and to promote one of
![[Illustration]](images/diag63.jpg)
Diag. 63
Diag. 63
his own, as can be easily seen. In eleven moves Black captures the opposing QBP and queens his own. We see here how the King’s position can be counterbalanced by the weakness of a pawn, and lead to a draw. If the White QBP was not isolated but standing, for instance, at QKt2, Black would be lost, as calculation easily shows.
his own, as can be easily seen. In eleven moves, Black captures the opposing QBP and queens his own. We can see how the King’s position can be offset by a weak pawn, leading to a draw. If the White QBP wasn't isolated but, for example, was at QKt2, Black would be lost, as the calculations clearly indicate.
The strength or weakness of a pawn position, which, as we saw, had so deciding an influence in the end-game position just treated, is one of the most important factors in a game of chess, and should have full consideration in the middle game. A pawn, when isolated, is naturally weaker than when it is or can be protected by another. It may easily lead to the loss of a game, as the mobility of the King or a piece is reduced by having to protect the pawn (compare End-game, p. 102).
The strength or weakness of a pawn position, which, as we saw, had such a significant impact on the endgame we just discussed, is one of the most important factors in a game of chess and should be fully considered in the middlegame. A pawn is naturally weaker when it is isolated than when it is protected by another pawn. This can easily lead to losing a game, as the mobility of the King or a piece is diminished by the need to defend the pawn (see Endgame, p. 102).
It is frequently and erroneously thought that DOUBLED pawns as such are a weakness. Doubled pawns are weak when ISOLATED, for they cannot support each other. But if doubled pawns can be supported by a pawn on the next file they need not by any means be at a disadvantage against three united single pawns on the opposite side. For instance, in Diagram 64, if Black had a pawn at QKt3 instead of R2, White would have no winning chances. He could not attack the pawns, nor would any kind of manœuvres force a passed pawn through. In the diagram, however, White wins through
It’s commonly and mistakenly believed that doubled pawns are inherently a weakness. Doubled pawns are weak when they are isolated, as they can’t support one another. However, if doubled pawns can be backed by a pawn on the next file, they may not be at a disadvantage compared to three connected single pawns on the other side. For example, in Diagram 64, if Black had a pawn on QKt3 instead of R2, White wouldn’t have any winning chances. He wouldn’t be able to attack the pawns, nor would any maneuvers be able to push a passed pawn through. In the diagram, though, White wins through.
![[Illustration]](images/diag64.jpg)
Diag. 64
Diag. 64
1. K-B5; Black cannot then hold the pawn at B3. 1. … P-R3; 2. P-Kt4.
1. K-B5; Black can't hold the pawn at B3 then. 1. … P-R3; 2. P-Kt4.
In this particular case the win is made easy by the fact that the White King is able to attack the Black pawn at once. But even without this advantage, the weakness of
In this situation, the win is straightforward because the White King can immediately threaten the Black pawn. However, even without this benefit, the vulnerability of
![[Illustration]](images/diag65.jpg)
Diag. 65
Diag. 65
doubled pawns usually entails the loss of the game. Diagram 65 may serve as an example.
Doubled pawns usually mean losing the game. Diagram 65 may serve as an example.
1. K-Q4, P-B4ch; 2. K-B4, K-B3; 3. P-B3 K-Kt3; 4. K-Q5, P-B3ch; 5. K-B4, and wins.
1. K-Q4, P-B4ch; 2. K-B4, K-B3; 3. P-B3 K-Kt3; 4. K-Q5, P-B3ch; 5. K-B4, and wins.
Doubled pawns are a drawback, even when not isolated, should there be no way of obtaining a passed pawn by exchanging them against a smaller number of single pawns. This is illustrated in Diagram 66, in which Black wins because the three pawns on the King’s side hold up the four White pawns and the Black King can assail the White pawns from the rear,
Doubled pawns are a disadvantage, even if they're not isolated, especially if there's no way to create a passed pawn by trading them for fewer single pawns. This is shown in Diagram 66, where Black wins because the three pawns on the kingside block the four White pawns, and the Black King can attack the White pawns from behind.
![[Illustration]](images/diag66.jpg)
Diag. 66
Diag. 66
the White King being fettered by the necessity of capturing the QBP. The proper formation for the Black pawns would be at B3, Kt2, R3, after which White cannot force a pawn through by playing P-B4 and P-Kt5, as Black can refrain from making any exchange. Black could not afford to leave the pawns where they are, because even if there were no White pawn at B2, White would, by playing P-Kt5, threaten to win in the following way:
the White King is restricted by the need to capture the QBP. The ideal setup for the Black pawns would be at B3, Kt2, R3, after which White can’t push a pawn through by playing P-B4 and P-Kt5, as Black can avoid making any exchanges. Black can't just let the pawns stay where they are because even if there wasn't a White pawn at B2, White could threaten to win by playing P-Kt5:
1. P-Kt6, BPxP; 2. P-R6, and P-B6, etc.; or 1. … RPxP; 2. P- B6, with P-R6, etc. In a game Ed. Lasker-Moll (Berlin championship, 1904), from which the position is taken, Black played P-R3 in order to obtain the formation mentioned above, and White resigned after 2. P-B4? P-B3, P-Kt5, K-Q5. There was, however, a pretty win after Black’s P-R3, namely: 2. P-B6, PxP; 3. P-B4, K-Q5; 4. P-Kt5, BPxP; 5. PxP, K-K4; 6. PxP, K-B6; 7. K- B2 and Black is lost, because his own pawn obstructs the square B2, and the King must release the square Kt2, after which the White pawn queens.
1. P-Kt6, BPxP; 2. P-R6, and P-B6, etc.; or 1. … RPxP; 2. P-B6, with P-R6, etc. In a game between Ed. Lasker and Moll (Berlin championship, 1904), from which the position is taken, Black played P-R3 to achieve the formation mentioned above, and White resigned after 2. P-B4? P-B3, P-Kt5, K-Q5. However, there was an elegant win after Black’s P-R3, specifically: 2. P-B6, PxP; 3. P-B4, K-Q5; 4. P-Kt5, BPxP; 5. PxP, K-K4; 6. PxP, K-B6; 7. K-B2, and Black is lost, because their own pawn blocks the square B2, forcing the King to vacate the Kt2 square, after which the White pawn promotes.
This winning combination, however, is only an interesting exception to the rule that positions of this kind are generally won by the side which possesses the passed pawn. In this particular case Black could have made the position secure by obtaining the ideal position of B3 Kt2 R3 for his pawns earlier, before the White pawns could advance so far. In the position of Diagram 66 Black could still have won by playing P-B3. After 2. P-R6, PxP; 3. P-B4, K-Q4; the Black King has time to overtake the passed pawn which results on the Bishop’s file.
This winning combination, however, is just an unusual exception to the rule that positions like this are usually won by the side with the passed pawn. In this case, Black could have secured the position by getting the ideal setup of B3 Kt2 R3 for his pawns earlier, before the White pawns advanced too far. In the position shown in Diagram 66, Black could still have won by playing P-B3. After 2. P-R6, PxP; 3. P-B4, K-Q4; the Black King has enough time to catch up with the passed pawn that results on the Bishop’s file.
To conclude the study of pawn endings with an equal number of pawns on either side, we will discuss Diagram 67,
To wrap up our study of pawn endings where both sides have the same number of pawns, we'll talk about Diagram 67,
![[Illustration]](images/diag67.jpg)
Diag. 67
Diag. 67
which illustrates a curious position occurring from time to time in practice. Whoever has the move wins by moving into distant opposition. White, therefore, should play K-K5 K-Q5 would lose, as Black would play K-Kt5, protecting his pawn and attacking the White pawn, the protection of which White has to give up next move. In the same way Black with the move cannot play K-Kt5 because White wins the pawn with K-Q5. After 1. K-K5 Black cannot avoid the loss of the game, e.g. K-R3; 2. K-Q5, K-Kt3; 3. K-Q6, and so on. Black with the move wins similarly with K-R5.
which shows a strange situation that happens from time to time in play. Whoever has the move wins by moving into distant opposition. White should play K-K5; K-Q5 would lose since Black would play K-Kt5, protecting his pawn and attacking the White pawn, which White will have to give up on the next turn. Similarly, Black, having the move, cannot play K-Kt5 because White would win the pawn with K-Q5. After 1. K-K5, Black can't avoid losing the game, for example, K-R3; 2. K-Q5, K-Kt3; 3. K-Q6, and so on. Black with the move wins in the same way with K-R5.
We have still to consider end-games in which a draw results in spite of a majority of pawns, or where a win can only be achieved by the sacrifice of an extra pawn.
We still need to look at end-games where a draw happens despite having more pawns, or situations where winning can only be achieved by giving up an extra pawn.
Diagram 68 shows the latter case. Here White can only win in the following manner: 1. P-Kt4ch, PxPch; 2. K-Kt3, K any; 3. KxP, and wins. Any other way would allow
Diagram 68 shows the latter case. Here White can only win in the following way: 1. P-Kt4ch, PxPch; 2. K-Kt3, K any; 3. KxP, and wins. Any other method would allow
![[Illustration]](images/diag68.jpg)
Diag. 68
Diag. 68
Black to assume the opposition and to force the draw, e.g. 1. K- B2, K-B3! 2. K-Q3, K-Q4, etc.
Black takes the opposition to secure a draw, for example, 1. K-B2, K-B3! 2. K-Q3, K-Q4, etc.
Not 1. K-B2, K-Kt5? 2. K-Kt2, K-B4, 3. K-B3, etc., as in Diagram 57.
Not 1. K-B2, K-Kt5? 2. K-Kt2, K-B4, 3. K-B3, etc., as in Diagram 57.
![[Illustration]](images/diag69.jpg)
Diag. 69
Diag. 69
A counterpart to this position is found in Diagram 69, which shows one of the few cases in which the possession of an extra pawn does not force a win. It seems at first sight as if White could win by simply assuming the opposition with 1. K-K4 continued: … K-K2; 2. K-Q5, K-Q2; 3. P-B5, K-K2; 4. K-B6, etc. But Black would reply 1. … P-B4ch! and after 2. PxPch, K-B3 followed by KxP ensure the draw.
A counterpart to this position is shown in Diagram 69, which illustrates one of the few situations where having an extra pawn doesn't guarantee a win. At first glance, it looks like White could win by taking the opposition with 1. K-K4 followed by: … K-K2; 2. K-Q5, K-Q2; 3. P-B5, K-K2; 4. K-B6, and so on. However, Black would counter with 1. … P-B4ch! and after 2. PxPch, K-B3 followed by KxP, this leads to a draw.
We come now to those end-games in which pieces as well as pawns are left on the board.
We now arrive at those endgames where both pieces and pawns remain on the board.
As it is my aim to give typical examples, I shall confine myself to positions where there is only one piece besides the King. Most end-games with several pieces can be reduced to that.
As my goal is to provide typical examples, I will stick to situations where there is only one piece besides the King. Most endgames with multiple pieces can be simplified to that.
In nearly all end-games with pieces the King’s manœuvres used in pawn endings are of no avail, as far as opposition is concerned, as the advantage of opposition means that the opponent is forced to move his King, and as long as there are pieces on the board, such “forced move” positions are infrequent. However, the strength of the pawn position is of the same importance as in pawn endings, just as the command of as many squares as possible is essential for the King. A third and very important factor is again the mobility of pieces.
In almost all endgames with pieces, the King’s moves in pawn endings are not effective for gaining opposition, since having the advantage of opposition forces the opponent to move their King. However, as long as there are pieces on the board, these “forced move” situations are rare. Still, the strength of the pawn position is just as crucial as it is in pawn endings, and controlling as many squares as possible is important for the King. A third vital factor is the mobility of the pieces.
A good example is found in Diagram 70, a position from a game Post-Leonhardt (Berlin Jubilee Tournament, 1907).
A good example is found in Diagram 70, a position from a game Post-Leonhardt (Berlin Jubilee Tournament, 1907).
![[Illustration]](images/diag70.jpg)
Diag. 70
Diag. 70
Black’s pawn position is weaker, because the White pawns, being on Black squares, cannot be attacked by the Bishop, whilst Black has two isolated pawns on White squares. Furthermore the Black Bishop has less mobility than the White one, and finally the Black King is tied to his Q3, to prevent White’s entry at B5 or K5. These drawbacks decide the issue. 1. … B-R2; 2. P-R4, B- Kt3; 3. B-B2, P-R4. (After B-R2 White would command the square at Kt6 through P-R5); 4. B-Q3, B-R2; 5. B-B1, and Black resigns, for White threatens to establish his Bishop at B3, where the pawns at Q5 and R5 are both attacked, whilst the Black Bishop is at once forced to occupy the only square from which both pawns are covered, namely B2. As this square must be abandoned in the next move, Black loses a pawn and the game.
Black's pawn position is weaker because the white pawns, being on black squares, can’t be attacked by the bishop, while Black has two isolated pawns on white squares. Additionally, the Black bishop has less mobility than the White one, and the Black king is stuck on his Q3 to prevent White from entering at B5 or K5. These disadvantages decide the outcome. 1. … B-R2; 2. P-R4, B-Kt3; 3. B-B2, P-R4. (After B-R2, White would control the square at Kt6 by playing P-R5); 4. B-Q3, B-R2; 5. B-B1, and Black resigns because White threatens to position his bishop at B3, where the pawns at Q5 and R5 are both under attack, while the Black bishop is forced to cover the only square where both pawns are protected, which is B2. Since this square must be vacated on the next move, Black loses a pawn and the game.
5. … B-Kt1; 6. B-K2, B-B2; 7. B-B3, and wins, or 5. … B-Kt3; 6. B-Kt2, B-B2; 7. B-B3, and wins.
5. … Bishop to Knight one; 6. Bishop to King two, Bishop to Bishop two; 7. Bishop to Bishop three, and wins, or 5. … Bishop to Knight three; 6. Bishop to Knight two, Bishop to Bishop two; 7. Bishop to Bishop three, and wins.
A corresponding instance of KNIGHT V. BISHOP is the end-game Blackburne-Schlechter (p. 102).
A similar example of KNIGHT V. BISHOP is the endgame Blackburne-Schlechter (p. 102).
It is difficult to gauge the relative value of Bishop and Knight in the end-game. The Knight has the advantage of access to all squares; against that the Bishop is able to fight at long range, and offers opportunities of gaining moves in certain positions where there is a “forced move” (compare p. 90).
It’s hard to determine the relative value of a Bishop and a Knight in the endgame. The Knight has the benefit of reaching all squares; on the other hand, the Bishop can attack from a distance and creates chances for gaining moves in specific situations where there is a “forced move” (see p. 90).
As already stated, two Bishops are superior to two Knights because the limitation of the colour of squares ceases. A Rook generally wins against a Bishop or a Knight, sometimes even against a majority of one or two pawns, provided, of course, that there are still pawns on the Rook’s side, and that their exchange cannot be forced. The following position (Diagram 71), from a game Moll-Post, shows how to proceed in such cases.
As mentioned before, two Bishops are stronger than two Knights because the limitation of the square colors no longer applies. A Rook usually beats a Bishop or a Knight, and can sometimes even win against one or two pawns, as long as there are still pawns on the Rook’s side and their exchange cannot be forced. The following position (Diagram 71), from a game Moll-Post, illustrates how to handle these situations.
Here White can force a win in the following way: 1. RxP, P-Kt6; 2. R-R6, PxP; 3. RxP, K-B2; 4. R-B2, B-Kt5; 5. R-B4, B-R4; 6. P- B4! The Black pawn position must first be torn up, if it is to be attacked successfully.
Here, White can secure a win by following these moves: 1. RxP, P-Kt6; 2. R-R6, PxP; 3. RxP, K-B2; 4. R-B2, B-Kt5; 5. R-B4, B-R4; 6. P-B4! The Black pawn structure must first be dismantled before it can be attacked effectively.
Now Black’s defeat is inevitable, whether the pawn is taken or not. The sequel would be 6. … PxP; 7. RxP, after which the Rook goes to KR5 and the Rook’s pawn must fall, or: 6. … K-Kt3; 7. PxP, PxP; 8. R-B6ch, K-Kt2; 9. R-B5, and the Bishop’s pawn is lost, unless Black gives up his passed pawn. In this case Black loses also: 9. R-B5, B-Q1; 10. KxP, K-Kt3; 11. K-Q3, B-B3; 12. R- B6, K-Kt2; 13. K-K4, K-Kt3; 14. R-R6, K-B2; 15. K-B5, B-Q1; 16. R-KKt6, followed by RxP, etc.
Now Black’s defeat is unavoidable, whether the pawn is captured or not. The following moves would be 6. … PxP; 7. RxP, after which the Rook moves to KR5, and the Rook’s pawn must be taken, or: 6. … K-Kt3; 7. PxP, PxP; 8. R-B6ch, K-Kt2; 9. R-B5, and the Bishop’s pawn is lost, unless Black gives up his passed pawn. In that case Black loses as well: 9. R-B5, B-Q1; 10. KxP, K-Kt3; 11. K-Q3, B-B3; 12. R-B6, K-Kt2; 13. K-K4, K-Kt3; 14. R-R6, K-B2; 15. K-B5, B-Q1; 16. R-KKt6, followed by RxP, etc.
The Queen against a minor piece wins so easily that it is not necessary to give an example. It only remains to discuss end-
The Queen against a minor piece wins so easily that it isn't necessary to provide an example. It only remains to discuss end-
![[Illustration]](images/diag71.jpg)
Diag. 71
Diag. 71
games of QUEEN V. QUEEN, ROOK V. ROOK, AND MINOR PIECE V. MINOR PIECE, in which one player has a majority of pawns, or an equal number of pawns, one of which is passed. As a rule the extra
games of QUEEN VS. QUEEN, ROOK VS. ROOK, AND MINOR PIECE VS. MINOR PIECE, where one player has more pawns, or both players have the same number of pawns, with one being passed. Generally, the extra
![[Illustration]](images/diag72.jpg)
Diag. 72
Diag. 72
pawn leads to a win. There are, however, exceptions frequently recurring in practice to which I must refer specially.
pawn leads to a win. There are, however, exceptions that often occur in practice that I need to point out specifically.
Diagram 72 shows an end-game with a Rook’s pawn and a Bishop “of the wrong colour.”
Diagram 72 shows an endgame with a rook's pawn and a bishop "of the wrong color."
White draws with 1. Kt-Q2, P-B7; 2. Kt-K4ch, K-Kt7; 3. KtxP, and draws, as Black, in order to capture the White pawn, after KxKt must give the White King access to the Rook’s square, from which he could not be dislodged except by a Bishop on White squares.
White draws with 1. Knight to Queen 2, Pawn to Bishop 7; 2. Knight to King 4 check, King to Knight 7; 3. Knight takes Pawn, and draws as Black to capture the White pawn. After King takes Knight, it allows the White King access to the Rook’s square, which could only be disrupted by a Bishop on White squares.
In Diagram 73 White cannot win although his Bishop is of the “right colour” by 1. P-B7, KtxP; 2. BxKt, and White cannot win the Rook’s pawn. He can only attack the pawn from Kt7 or Kt8, both of which are inaccessible as the Black King gets to Kt1. It is a stalemate position. If the White
In Diagram 73, White can't win even though his Bishop is on the "right color." With 1. P-B7, KtxP; 2. BxKt, White can't capture the Rook’s pawn. He can only attack the pawn from Kt7 or Kt8, but both are blocked since the Black King can reach Kt1. It's a stalemate situation. If the White
![[Illustration]](images/diag73.jpg)
Diag. 73
Diag. 73
pawn were still at R5, White’s King could attack the pawn from R6 and secure the win.
pawn were still at R5, White’s King could attack the pawn from R6 and secure the win.
In the position given, White could only win by keeping his passed pawn, and indeed it is possible to win by gaining a move with the Bishop. In the diagram it is White’s move. Black with the move could not play K-B2 because K-Q6 would follow. The Knight would have to move, allowing the pawn to queen. Therefore White must try to bring about the same position with Black to move. He can do this, for instance, in the following way:
In the situation described, White can only win by maintaining his passed pawn, and it is indeed possible to secure victory by gaining a move with the Bishop. In the diagram, it’s White’s turn to move. If it were Black’s turn, Black couldn't play K-B2 because K-Q6 would follow. The Knight would have to move, allowing the pawn to promote. Therefore, White needs to try to create the same position but with Black to move. He can accomplish this, for example, in the following way:
1. B-Kt3, K-B2 (now 2. K-Q6 would be bad on account of Kt-Q5, 3. P-B7, Kt-Kt5ch, and KtxP); 2. B-R2, K-K2; 3. B-K5. Now White’s plan has succeeded; the same position has occurred, and it is Black’s move. As mentioned before, the King must not move, but Knight’s moves are of no avail. If 3. … Kt-Kt4; 4. B-B6ch, the Knight is lost, or alternatively the pawn queens. On 3. … Kt- B1, B-Q6ch decides, and on 3. … Kt-Q1; 4. B-B6ch, K-K1; 5. BxKt would follow.
1. B-Kt3, K-B2 (now 2. K-Q6 would be a bad move because of Kt-Q5, 3. P-B7, Kt-Kt5ch, and KtxP); 2. B-R2, K-K2; 3. B-K5. Now White’s plan has worked; the same position has occurred, and it is Black’s turn. As mentioned before, the King must not move, but the Knight’s moves won't help. If 3. … Kt-Kt4; 4. B-B6ch, the Knight is lost, or alternatively the pawn will promote. On 3. … Kt-B1, B-Q6ch decides the game, and on 3. … Kt-Q1; 4. B-B6ch, K-K1; 5. BxKt would follow.
On this occasion I should like to point out that it is impossible to gain a move with a Knight, as a square which is accessible to him in an odd number of moves cannot be reached by him in an even number. A simple instance is Diagram 74.
On this occasion, I want to highlight that it's impossible to move a Knight in chess, as a square that he can reach in an odd number of moves cannot be accessed in an even number of moves. A simple example is Diagram 74.
![[Illustration]](images/diag74.jpg)
Diag. 74
Diag. 74
White loses, having the move. 1. K-R8, Kt-K4; 2. K-R2, Kt-Q2; 3. K-R8, Kt-B1; 4. P-R7, Kt-Kt3 mate.
White loses, having the move. 1. K-R8, Kt-K4; 2. K-R2, Kt-Q2; 3. K-R8, Kt-B1; 4. P-R7, Kt-Kt3 mate.
Black with the move cannot win, as he cannot bring about the same position with White to move.
Black with the move can't win, as he can't create the same position with White to move.
In end-games of BISHOP V. BISHOP, of which we have already had an example in Diagram 70, an extra pawn wins in most cases if the Bishops are of the same colour. It is generally possible to force an exchange of Bishops and obtain one of the well-known pawn endings.
In endgames of BISHOP vs. BISHOP, as shown in Diagram 70, having an extra pawn usually leads to a win if the Bishops are the same color. It’s typically possible to force an exchange of Bishops and reach one of the well-known pawn endgames.
On the other hand an ending with Bishops of different colour leads mostly to a draw, frequently even against a majority of two pawns. The position in Diagram 75 is a draw, because it is impossible for the White King to get round his Kt pawn to drive off the Bishop.
On the other hand, an ending with bishops of different colors usually results in a draw, often even against a two-pawn majority. The position in Diagram 75 is a draw because the White King cannot get around his knight pawn to chase off the bishop.
![[Illustration]](images/diag75.jpg)
Diag. 75
Diag. 75
With two passed pawns distant from each other, a win can generally be forced, as in the following position (Diagram 76).
With two passed pawns far apart, a win can usually be achieved, as shown in the following position (Diagram 76).
![[Illustration]](images/diag76.jpg)
Diag. 76
Diag. 76
The King moves up to the pawn, the progress of which is barred by the Bishop (not the King). He thereby forces the sacrifice of the Bishop. If the Black King comes to the rescue of the Bishop, the other pawn proves Black’s downfall.
The King advances toward the pawn, which is blocked by the Bishop (not the King). This forces the Bishop to be sacrificed. If the Black King tries to save the Bishop, the other pawn leads to Black’s defeat.
1. K-K4, K-K2; 2. K-Q5, K-Q2; 3. B-K4, B-K2; 4. P-Kt6, B-Q1; 5. P-Kt7, K-B2; 6. K-K6, and wins; or 5. … B-B2; 6. P-B6, B-R7; 6. B-B2, K-K1; 8. K-K6, B-Kt1; 9. B-Kt6ch, K-B1; 10. K-Q7, and wins.
1. K-K4, K-K2; 2. K-Q5, K-Q2; 3. B-K4, B-K2; 4. P-Kt6, B-Q1; 5. P-Kt7, K-B2; 6. K-K6, and wins; or 5. … B-B2; 6. P-B6, B-R7; 6. B-B2, K-K1; 8. K-K6, B-Kt1; 9. B-Kt6ch, K-B1; 10. K-Q7, and wins.
When the pawns are united, one should observe this rule: if they are attacked, they should, if possible, move to squares of the colour of the opposing Bishop.
When the pawns are together, you should follow this rule: if they are attacked, they should, if possible, move to squares of the color of the opposing Bishop.
Therefore in the position set out in Diagram 77 White should not play P-B5, but P-K5. After 1. P-B5 there is no possible chance for White to assume the command of the Black squares, and in order to advance the pawns it is necessary
Therefore in the position shown in Diagram 77, White should not move P-B5, but rather P-K5. After 1. P-B5, there is no way for White to take control of the Black squares, and to push the pawns forward, it is necessary
![[Illustration]](images/diag77.jpg)
Diag. 77
Diag. 77
to force access to both White and Black squares. In the present instance play would proceed on these lines:
to make sure there’s access to both the White and Black squares. In this case, play would continue along these lines:
1. P-K5, B-R4; 2. K-K3, K-B2; 3. K-K4, K-K2; 4. P-B5, B-Kt5; 5. P-B6ch, K-B1; 6. P-K6, B-R6; 7. B-R4, B-Kt5. White can only get through with the King’s Pawn, as P-B7 is unavailing on the grounds set out above. But in order to play P-K7, the square K7 must first be covered a second time, so that the Bishop cannot be given up for the two pawns. Therefore: 8. K-Q5, B-R6 (B-B6; P- K7ch); 9. K-B6, K-K1; 10. K-B7ch, K-B1; 11. K-Q7, and wins.
1. P-K5, B-R4; 2. K-K3, K-B2; 3. K-K4, K-K2; 4. P-B5, B-Kt5; 5. P-B6ch, K-B1; 6. P-K6, B-R6; 7. B-R4, B-Kt5. White can only advance with the King’s Pawn, since P-B7 won’t work for the reasons given above. However, to play P-K7, the K7 square needs to be covered again so the Bishop can't be sacrificed for the two pawns. Therefore: 8. K-Q5, B-R6 (B-B6; P-K7ch); 9. K-B6, K-K1; 10. K-B7ch, K-B1; 11. K-Q7, and wins.
In end-games with one Knight on each side, an extra pawn usually decides the game much in the same way as in end-games with Bishops of the same colour; frequently even with equal pawns, the possession of a passed pawn is sufficient, as it keeps either the King or the Knight busy, so that there is only one piece available for the defence of the pawns. An instructive example is the end-game Ed. Lasker-Rotlevi on p. 100.
In endgames with one Knight on each side, having an extra pawn usually determines the outcome much like in endgames with Bishops of the same color. Often, even with equal pawns, owning a passed pawn is enough, as it forces either the King or the Knight to stay occupied, leaving only one piece available to defend the pawns. A helpful example is the endgame Ed. Lasker-Rotlevi on p. 100.
End-games with Rook against Rook are the most frequent, as well as the most difficult. Here the possession of an extra pawn is seldom sufficient for a win, unless the stronger side has also an advantage in the greater mobility of the Rook. Diagram 78 is typical of such cases, frequent in practice, in
Endgames with a Rook against a Rook are the most common and also the most challenging. In these situations, having an extra pawn usually isn't enough to secure a win, unless the player with the advantage also benefits from greater mobility of their Rook. Diagram 78 is a typical example of these scenarios, which occur frequently in practice, in
![[Illustration]](images/diag78.jpg)
Diag. 78
Diag. 78
which the greater mobility is the deciding factor. Although White has one pawn more, he can only win by reducing the mobility of the Black Rook through the following manœuvre: 1. R-B2, R-Q2; 2. R-R2, R-R2. Now the Black Rook has only one move left, whilst the White Rook has the freedom of the Rook’s file. For instance, the Rook can be posted at R5 and prevent the Black King from attacking White’s King’s side pawns, whilst the White King makes for the R at R7 and effects its capture. If, on the other hand, the Black King tries to obstruct the way to the Queen’s side, White penetrates into the Black pawn position. Black cannot maintain the opposition because the White Rook has spare moves, the Black Rook none. e.g. 3. K-B3, K-Kt3; 4. R-R5, K-B3; 5. K-K4, K-K3; 6. R-R4, P-Kt3; 7. R-R5, K-Q3; 8. K-Q4, K-B3; 9. K-K5, and wins the pawns.
which the greater mobility is the deciding factor. Although White has one extra pawn, he can only win by limiting the mobility of the Black Rook with the following moves: 1. R-B2, R-Q2; 2. R-R2, R-R2. Now the Black Rook has only one move left, while the White Rook has the freedom of its file. For example, the Rook can be positioned at R5 to prevent the Black King from attacking White’s King's side pawns, while the White King moves to R at R7 and captures it. If, on the other hand, the Black King tries to block access to the Queen’s side, White will penetrate into the Black pawn position. Black cannot maintain opposition because the White Rook has available moves, while the Black Rook does not. e.g. 3. K-B3, K-Kt3; 4. R-R5, K-B3; 5. K-K4, K-K3; 6. R-R4, P-Kt3; 7. R-R5, K-Q3; 8. K-Q4, K-B3; 9. K-K5, and wins the pawns.
Having the move, Black would draw the game by: 1. … R-Q7ch; 2. K-R3, R-R7. By placing his Rook behind the passed pawn he condemns the opposing Rook to inactivity, whilst his own is free to move on the Rook’s file. If now the White King comes up, he will in the end force the sacrifice of the Black Rook for the pawn, but meanwhile the Black King captures the White pawns, and with passed pawns on the King’s side might get winning chances.
Having the move, Black would draw the game by: 1. … R-Q7+; 2. K-R3, R-R7. By placing his Rook behind the passed pawn, he forces the opposing Rook to become inactive, while his own can move freely along the Rook’s file. If the White King advances, it will eventually lead to the sacrifice of the Black Rook for the pawn, but in the meantime, the Black King can capture the White pawns, and with passed pawns on the King’s side, he might have a chance to win.
When there is only one pawn left in endings of R against R, the weaker side maintains the draw, if the King can command the queening square. Diagram 79 shows a position favourable to the stronger side, and which can mostly be obtained in this end-game. But here, too, Black forces a draw with a pretty manœuvre: 1. … R-B2; 2. R-KKt2, R-Q2ch; 3. PXR, and Black is stalemate.
When there's only one pawn left in endings of R vs. R, the weaker side can hold a draw if the King controls the queening square. Diagram 79 shows a position that favors the stronger side and is often seen in this endgame. However, in this case, Black can force a draw with a clever move: 1. ... R-B2; 2. R-KKt2, R-Q2 check; 3. PXR, and Black is in stalemate.
![[Illustration]](images/diag79.jpg)
Diag. 79
Diag. 79
The chances of a draw are even greater in endings of Q against Q, as the King on the stronger side can seldom evade perpetual check. For the sake of completeness I will show a few cases in which Q or R cannot win against an advanced pawn.
The chances of a draw are even higher in endgames of Q against Q, as the King on the stronger side can rarely escape perpetual check. To be thorough, I will show a few cases where Q or R cannot win against an advanced pawn.
In Diagram 80 White can still draw, for in five moves the pawn reaches Kt7, supported by the King at R7, and in that time Black cannot come up with his King, so that he must give up the Rook for the pawn. Two passed pawns win, even when the King is away from them, if they have reached their sixth square. In Diagram 81, for instance, White is lost,
In Diagram 80, White can still win because in five moves the pawn gets to Kt7, backed up by the King at R7, and during that time Black can't bring his King over, so he has to give up the Rook for the pawn. Two passed pawns are enough to win, even if the King isn't close, as long as they've reached their sixth square. In Diagram 81, for example, White is in a losing position,
![[Illustration]](images/diag80.jpg)
Diag. 80
Diag. 80
as Black gives up his Rook at Q7 and plays P-Kt6, after which one of the pawns queens.
as Black gives up his rook at Q7 and plays P-Kt6, after which one of the pawns promotes.
The Queen wins against an advanced pawn, even when the latter is supported by the King; only the R or B pawn can
The Queen beats an advanced pawn, even when it has the King behind it; only the R or B pawn can
![[Illustration]](images/diag81.jpg)
Diag. 81
Diag. 81
draw sometimes, when the pawn is on the seventh supported by the King, and the opposing Q cannot move to the queening square.
draw sometimes, when the pawn is on the seventh rank supported by the King, and the opposing Queen cannot move to the queening square.
The following illustrates the three principal cases:
The following shows the three main cases:
A. Position—White: K at QKt8, P at QR7
Black: K at QR8, Q at QB3
A. Position—White: K at QKt8, P at QR7
Black: K at QR8, Q at QB3
Black must stop the pawn and plays Q-Kt3ch. White answers with K- R sq and is stalemate unless White lets the Kt’s file free again. This end-game can only be won if the stronger King can assume the opposition in two moves. Therefore, if in the above example the Black King was standing at Q5, Black would win as follows: 1. … Q-K1ch; 2. K-Kt7, Q-K2ch; 3. K-Kt8, K-B4; 4. P-R8 = Q, K-Kt3. and White cannot cover the mate.
Black must stop the pawn and plays Q-Kt3 check. White responds with K-R square and it's a stalemate unless White frees the Kt’s file again. This endgame can only be won if the stronger King can take the opposition in two moves. So, if in the previous example the Black King was at Q5, Black would win like this: 1. … Q-K1 check; 2. K-Kt7, Q-K2 check; 3. K-Kt8, K-B4; 4. P-R8 = Q, K-Kt3, and White can't prevent the checkmate.
B. Position—White: K at QKt8, P at QB7
Black: K at Q5, Q at QB3
B. Position—White: K at QKt8, P at QB7
Black: K at Q5, Q at QB3
White draws: 1. … Q-Kt3ch; 2. K-R8, QxP stalemate.
White plays: 1. … Q-Kt3 check; 2. K-R8, Q takes Pawn stalemate.
C. Position—White: K at QKt8, P at QKt7
Black: K at Q5, Q at QB3 White loses.
C. Position—White: K at Kt8, P at Kt7
Black: K at Q5, Q at B3 White loses.
1. K-R7, Q-R5ch; 2. K-Kt6, Q-Kt5ch; 3. K-B7, Q-B4ch; 4. K-Q8, Q- Q3ch; 5. K-B8, Q-B3ch; 6. K-Kt8, K-B4; 7. K-R7, Q-R5ch; 8. K-Kt8, K-B3; 9. K-B8, Q-R3, etc.
1. K-R7, Q-R5ch; 2. K-Kt6, Q-Kt5ch; 3. K-B7, Q-B4ch; 4. K-Q8, Q- Q3ch; 5. K-B8, Q-B3ch; 6. K-Kt8, K-B4; 7. K-R7, Q-R5ch; 8. K-Kt8, K-B3; 9. K-B8, Q-R3, etc.
END-GAMES FROM MASTER PLAY
In the following pages I give some instructive examples taken from tournament play. Step by step we will find how very important is the knowledge of the simple endings treated in the last chapter. We shall see that it is often necessary to consider many moves ahead to find the correct line, but that it is nearly always possible to foresee every consequence with unfailing certainty. Moreover, because of the reduction of forces there is no call to take very many variations into consideration. This explains why there is a tendency in modern master play to enforce the exchange of pieces, as soon as there is the slightest advantage sufficient to bring about one of the elementary end- game positions, in which the win can be forced.
In the following pages, I’ll share some helpful examples from tournament play. Step by step, we’ll see how crucial it is to understand the basic endings discussed in the last chapter. We’ll discover that it’s often essential to think several moves ahead to find the right strategy, but it’s almost always possible to predict every outcome with complete certainty. Additionally, because the number of pieces is reduced, there’s no need to consider too many variations. This is why there’s a trend in modern master play to push for piece exchanges as soon as there is even a slight advantage that can lead to one of the basic endgame positions where a win can be guaranteed.
1. FROM A GAME TEICHMANN-BLACKBURNE (BERLIN, 1897).
![[Illustration]](images/diag82.jpg)
Diag. 82
Diag. 82
Black has an extra pawn on the Queen’s side. But as it is doubled, the material superiority is of no account. A perceptible advantage, however, lies in the fact that White cannot bring about a “forced move” position, as Black has the move P-QB4 in reserve. White has also an infinitesimal weakness on the King’s side, the Rook’s pawn having advanced two squares and being therefore an easy mark. This disadvantage soon becomes apparent.
Black has an extra pawn on the queen side. However, since it's doubled, that material advantage doesn’t mean much. A noticeable benefit, though, is that White can’t create a “forced move” scenario because Black has the move P-QB4 saved up. White also has a tiny weakness on the king side, as the rook’s pawn has moved up two squares, making it an easy target. This disadvantage soon becomes clear.
1. P-B3 K-B4 2. K-B2 P-R4 3. K-Kt2 P-Kt4 4. K-R3 K-K4
1. P-B3 K-B4 2. K-B2 P-R4 3. K-knight2 P-knight4 4. K-R3 K-K4
With this move advantage is taken of one of White’s weaknesses. White must exchange pawns. If the King moves, Black captures, freeing B 5 for his King, from where he can later on get to K6 or Kt6. But after the exchange at Kt4, Black has the chance of obtaining a “distant passed pawn” on the Rook’s file.
With this move, one of White’s weaknesses is exploited. White has to exchange pawns. If the King moves, Black captures, opening up B5 for his King, from where he can later move to K6 or Kt6. However, after the exchange at Kt4, Black gets the opportunity to create a “distant passed pawn” on the Rook’s file.
5. PxP PxP 6. K-Kt2 K-B4 7. K-R2 K-B3
5. PxP PxP 6. K-Kt2 K-B4 7. K-R2 K-B3
If Black were to play P-R5 at once, White would reply with 8. K- R3, and after PxP, 9. KxP. Black would have to give up the spare move P-B4, to gain the square at B5 for his King. The game then would be drawn after 10. K-Kt2! K-B5, 11. K-B2, because White maintains the opposition, and Black cannot get through at K6 or Kt6. Black therefore manœuvres his King first in such a way that the square at his B4 is only reached when the White King is at Kt3.
If Black were to move the pawn to R5 right away, White would respond with 8. K-R3, and after PxP, 9. KxP. Black would need to give up the extra move P-B4 to secure the square at B5 for his King. The game would then end in a draw after 10. K-Kt2! K-B5, 11. K-B2, because White keeps the opposition, and Black can't advance at K6 or Kt6. Therefore, Black first maneuvers his King so that the square at B4 is only reached when the White King is at Kt3.
8. K-Kt2 K-Kt3 9. K-R2 P-R5
8. K-Kt2 K-Kt3 9. K-R2 P-R5
Now neither PxP nor P-B4 is of any use. In the first case Black obtains the distant passed pawn. In the second White obtains the distant passed pawn after 10. P-B4, PxBP; 11. PxRP, but loses it again after K-R4; 12. K-R3, P-B4.
Now neither PxP nor P-B4 is useful. In the first case, Black gets the distant passed pawn. In the second, White gets the distant passed pawn after 10. P-B4, PxBP; 11. PxRP, but loses it again after K-R4; 12. K-R3, P-B4.
10. K-R3 PxP 11. KxP K-B4
10. K-R3 PxP 11. KxP K-B4
At last Black has captured the coveted square, whilst keeping the spare move in hand.
At last, Black has taken the prized square while still having an extra move available.
12. K-B2 K-B5
The White King cannot move to Kt2 now, because in that case Black would move the King to the White QBP and queen in seven moves, and White, after seven moves, would only have the KB pawn at B7.
The White King can’t move to Kt2 now, because if it did, Black would move the King to the White QBP and promote it to a queen in seven moves. By that time, White would only have the KB pawn at B7 left.
13. K-K2 K-Kt6 14. K-K3 P-B4
13. K-K2 K-Kt6 14. K-K3 P-B4
and wins, for White cannot hold the KBP now, but must capture the KtP in exchange for it, after which the Black King reaches the Queen’s side two moves ahead, e.g.:
and wins, because White can't keep the KBP now, but has to take the KtP in exchange, after which the Black King gets to the Queen’s side two moves ahead, for example:
15. K-K2 K-Kt7 16. K-K3 K-B8! 17. K-K4 K-B7 18. K-B5 KxP 19. KxP K-K6, etc.
15. K-K2 K-Kt7 16. K-K3 K-B8! 17. K-K4 K-B7 18. K-B5 KxP 19. KxP K-K6, etc.
Black would have forced a win also if White had played K-Kt2 on his twelfth move thus: 12. K-Kt2, K-B5; 13. K-B2.
Black would have forced a win even if White had played K-Kt2 on his twelfth move like this: 12. K-Kt2, K-B5; 13. K-B2.
Now White has the opposition, and after Black wrings it from him by playing the spare move P-B4, he assumes it again with 14. K- K2, K-Kt6; 15. K-K3. But he cannot maintain it after Black’s K-R6 because the square at Q3 for distant opposition is not accessible. After 16. K-Q2, K-R7!; 17. K-K3, K-Kt6; 18. K-K2, K- Kt7; 19. K-K3, K-B8 we get the same result as before.
Now White has the opposition, and after Black takes it away by playing the extra move P-B4, he gets it back with 14. K-K2, K-Kt6; 15. K-K3. But he can't hold onto it after Black’s K-R6 because the square at Q3 for distant opposition is not available. After 16. K-Q2, K-R7!; 17. K-K3, K-Kt6; 18. K-K2, K-Kt7; 19. K-K3, K-B8 we see the same outcome as before.
II. FROM A GAME ED. LASKER-ROTLEVI (HAMBURG, 1910).
![[Illustration]](images/diag83.jpg)
Diag. 83
Diag. 83
White has the advantage, because Black must keep either his King or his Knight permanently near the passed pawn, guarding against its advance, whilst both White’s King and Knight can attack the Black pawns. As yet they stand so far in the rear that the White King cannot approach them Therefore White must first try to force their advance.
White has the advantage because Black needs to keep either his King or his Knight close to the passed pawn to prevent it from moving forward, while both White’s King and Knight can threaten the Black pawns. Currently, those pawns are positioned far enough back that the White King can't get close to them. So, White must first work on pushing those pawns forward.
1. Kt-B5 P-Kt3 2. Kt-Q3 P-R4
1. Knight to B5 Pawn to K3 2. Knight to Q3 Pawn to R4
This is now necessary, because the square B3 is weak after P-Kt3 and the White Knight threatens to win the Rook’s pawn eventually with a check at B6. For this reason Kt-Q 2, for instance, could not be played instead of the move in the text, because 3. Kt-K5 would follow. Black now cannot exchange, of course, otherwise the position would resolve itself to an easy end game win similar to the one in Diagram 56. There would be nothing left but Kt-Kt1 to oppose the threat of Kt-B6ch, and this would get the Knight entirely out of play, so that White could queen the passed pawn easily after 4. K-Kt6.
This is now necessary because the square B3 is weak after P-Kt3, and the White Knight threatens to win the Rook’s pawn eventually with a check at B6. For this reason, Kt-Q2, for example, couldn’t be played instead of the move in the text because 3. Kt-K5 would follow. Black cannot exchange now, of course; otherwise, the position would turn into an easy endgame win similar to the one in Diagram 56. There would be nothing left but Kt-Kt1 to counter the threat of Kt-B6ch, and that would completely take the Knight out of play, allowing White to promote the passed pawn easily after 4. K-Kt6.
3. K-K5 P-B3
The King was threatening to enter via Q5 and B6.
The King was threatening to move through Q5 and B6.
4. K-B5 Kt-K3
4. K-B5 Kt-K3
If Black wishes to obviate the threat: Kt-K5-B4, and plays P-Kt4, the White King goes to QB5 and wins all the pawns easily. Therefore Black endeavours to sacrifice a pawn in order to exchange the two others, after which a draw could be forced by exchanging the Knight for the remaining White pawn.
If Black wants to eliminate the threat: Kt-K5-B4, and plays P-Kt4, the White King moves to QB5 and easily wins all the pawns. So, Black tries to sacrifice a pawn to exchange the other two, after which a draw could be achieved by trading the Knight for the last White pawn.
5. Kt-K5 P-B4 6. Kt-B4 P-Kt4 7. KtxP P-B5
5. Knight to King 5 Pawn to Bishop 4 6. Knight to Bishop 4 Pawn to Knight 4 7. Knight takes Pawn Pawn to Bishop 5
![[Illustration]](images/diag84.jpg)
Diag. 84
Diag. 84
8. K-K5 Kt-B4 9. Kt-B6ch K-B1!
8. K-K5 N-B4 9. N-B6 check K-B1!
Not K-B2, because of 10. K-Q4, Kt-Q6; 11. Kt-K5ch.
Not K-B2, because of 10. K-Q4, Kt-Q6; 11. Kt-K5ch.
10. Kt-R7
10. Kt-R7
Here White had only considered the following answer:
Here White had only thought about the following answer:
Kt-Q6ch; 11. K-Q4, KtxKtP; 12. KtxP, Kt-Q6; 13. P-B5, Kt-Kt5; 14. Kt-B3, Kt-B7ch: 15. KxP, Kt-K6ch; 16. K-B5, KtxP; 17. P-R4, Kt- K2; 18. Kt-Q5, Kt-B1; 19. K-B6, K-K1; 20. K-B7, Kt-R7; 21. K-Kt7, and wins the Knight.
Kt-Q6ch; 11. K-Q4, KtxKtP; 12. KtxP, Kt-Q6; 13. P-B5, Kt-Kt5; 14. Kt-B3, Kt-B7ch: 15. KxP, Kt-K6ch; 16. K-B5, KtxP; 17. P-R4, Kt-K2; 18. Kt-Q5, Kt-B1; 19. K-B6, K-K1; 20. K-B7, Kt-R7; 21. K-Kt7, and wins the Knight.
Black however draws, through a pretty combination:
Black, however, captures the moment with a nice combination:
10. … P-Kt5 11. K-Q4 P-B6 12. K-B4 PxP 13. KxP KtxP
10. … P-Kt5 11. K-Q4 P-B6 12. K-B4 PxP 13. KxP KtxP
and White cannot prevent the ultimate exchange of Kt for P. The last winning chance would have been: 10. K-Q4!, Kt-Q; 11. K-B3. This is in any case the more plausible line, because now White can attack the pawns with both King and Knight, as both the Black pieces are away from the field of operations. The sequel could be: 11. KtxBP; 12. P-R3 (Kt-R7 would only draw: Kt-K7ch; 13. K- Kt4, Kt-B8 14. P-R3, Kt-R7ch; 15. KxP, P-B6); 12. Kt-Q4ch 13. K- Q4, Kt-B5; 14. K-K4 (Kt-R7 ?, Kt-K7ch!!; 15 K-K3, P-B6), Kt-Q6; 15. P-Kt4, Kt-Kt7 16 Kt-Q4, and wins
and White can't stop the final exchange of Knight for Pawn. The last winning chance would have been: 10. K-Q4!, Kt-Q; 11. K-B3. This is definitely the more believable line, because now White can attack the pawns with both the King and the Knight, since both Black pieces are away from the battlefield. The continuation could be: 11. KtxBP; 12. P-R3 (Kt-R7 would only result in a draw: Kt-K7ch; 13. K-Kt4, Kt-B8 14. P-R3, Kt-R7ch; 15. KxP, P-B6); 12. Kt-Q4ch 13. K-Q4, Kt-B5; 14. K-K4 (Kt-R7 ?, Kt-K7ch!!; 15 K-K3, P-B6), Kt-Q6; 15. P-Kt4, Kt-Kt7 16 Kt-Q4, and wins.
III. From a game Blackburne-Schlechter (Vienna, 1898).
III. From a game between Blackburne and Schlechter (Vienna, 1898).
![[Illustration]](images/diag85.jpg)
Diag. 85
Diag. 85
White has just played Q-B4. P-B5 is threatened, and Black is forced to exchange Queens. The ensuing end-game, however, is inferior for Black, because the QP is weak and White threatens eventually to force his Queen’s Pawn through.
White has just moved the queen to b4. The pawn to b5 is threatened, and Black has to exchange queens. However, the resulting endgame is not good for Black because the queen's pawn is weak, and White is threatening to push his queen's pawn through.
1. … Q-B4 2. QxQ BxQ 3. Kt-Q4 B-Kt3 4. RxR RxR 5. R-K1 RxR
1. … Q-B4 2. QxQ BxQ 3. Kt-Q4 B-Kt3 4. RxR RxR 5. R-K1 RxR
If Black wants to avoid the exchange, he must yield up the King’s file to White, and that would surely spell disaster, as the Black Rook would have no field of action, and would have to go to Q1 to avoid the loss of a pawn through Kt-Kt5ch, after which the White Rook would take possession of the seventh rank, fettering the action of the Bishop into the bargain.
If Black wants to avoid the exchange, he has to give up the King's file to White, and that would definitely lead to trouble. The Black Rook would have no space to move and would have to go to Q1 to prevent losing a pawn due to Kt-Kt5ch. After that, the White Rook would control the seventh rank, restricting the Bishop's movement as well.
6. KxR B-Q6 7. P-QKt3 K-Q2
6. KxR B-Q6 7. P-QKt3 K-Q2
Black is condemned to inactivity, and White can quietly set to work to force his pawn through.
Black is stuck in a passive position, while White can calmly focus on pushing their pawn forward.
8. K-Q2 B-K5
9. P-Kt3 B-Kt8
10. P-QR3 B-K5
11. K-K3 B-Kt8
12. Kt-B3
8. K-Q2 B-K5
9. P-Kt3 B-Kt8
10. P-QR3 B-K5
11. K-K3 B-Kt8
12. Kt-B3
In order to play P-QKt4 and P-B5, then to force Black to exchange at B5, White must first have the opportunity of bearing a second time on Black’s Queen’s Pawn. Therefore he prepares the manœuvre Kt-B3-Q2-B4.
To play P-QKt4 and P-B5, and then force Black to exchange at B5, White needs to first have a chance to attack Black's Queen's Pawn again. So, he sets up the maneuver Kt-B3-Q2-B4.
12. … K-K2 13. P-QKt4 B-B4 14. P-B5 B-Q2 15. K-Q4 B-K1 16. Kt-Q2 B-Q2 17. Kt-B4 PxPch 18. PxP P-B3
12. … K-K2 13. P-QKt4 B-B4 14. P-B5 B-Q2 15. K-Q4 B-K1 16. Kt-Q2 B-Q2 17. Kt-B4 PxPch 18. PxP P-B3
It is not yet easy to materialise the advantage in position The advance P-Q6ch would be very bad, as B6 and K6 would be made accessible for Black. White starts by tempting the pawns forward and thus systematically creates points of attack.
It’s still not easy to make the most of the position. Moving the pawn to Q6 would be a terrible mistake, as it would expose B6 and K6 to Black. White begins by encouraging the pawns to move forward, systematically creating points to attack.
19. Kt-Kt2 B-B4 20. P-QR4 K-Q2 21. P-R5 P-QR3
19. Kt-Kt2 B-B4 20. P-QR4 K-Q2 21. P-R5 P-QR3
The Queen’s side is paralysed. The text move is forced, as P-R6 would give White yet another passed pawn. Now White turns his attention to the King’s side.
The Queen’s side is paralyzed. The text move is forced, as P-R6 would give White yet another passed pawn. Now White focuses on the King’s side.
22. Kt-B4 K-B2 23. Kt-Q6 B-Q2 24. K-K4 B-R5 25. P-Kt4 B-B7ch 26. K-Q4 B-Kt3
22. Nf4 Kb2 23. Nf6 Bc2 24. Kf4 Bf5 25. g5 Bxh7+ 26. Kf4 Bb3
Black wishes to play P-R4, in order to get a passed pawn too, the only chance of saving the game.
Black wants to move P-R4 to create a passed pawn as well, which is their only chance to save the game.
27. P-R3 K-Kt1
27. P-R3 K-Kt1
Now P-R4 would be countered by Kt-B5, forcing the exchange and leaving a backward pawn at Kt2 and the Rook’s pawn would be bound to fall.
Now P-R4 would be countered by Kt-B5, forcing the exchange and leaving a backward pawn at Kt2, and the Rook’s pawn would be bound to fall.
28. Kt-B5 BxKt 29. PxB K-B2
28. Kt-B5 BxKt 29. PxB K-B2
![[Illustration]](images/diag86.jpg)
Diag. 86
Diag. 86
It would now seem as if Black might have played P-KKt4 here, securing a passed pawn, and forcing a draw. After 30. P-R4 Black would play P-R3, and it is not evident how White is to win. But 29. … P-KKt4 is parried by PxP e.p. The difference in the pawn positions, which decides the issue for White, is found in the fact that the White passed pawn at Q5 is unassailable because the support of the BP cannot be taken away by Black’s P-Kt3, whilst Black’s passed pawn at his B3 can be isolated at any time through P-R4-R5. White would take up a position on the Knight’s file with the King, and push on the Rook’s pawn. The isolated pawns are then an easy prey. On the text move White also pushes the Rook’s pawn on to compel P-R3 and reduce Black to moves by the King. The passed Queen’s pawn decides the game.
It now appears that Black could have played P-KKt4 here, securing a passed pawn and forcing a draw. After 30. P-R4, Black would respond with P-R3, and it’s not clear how White can win. However, 29. … P-KKt4 is countered by PxP e.p. The difference in the pawn positions that determines the outcome for White lies in the fact that the White passed pawn at Q5 is secure because Black’s P-Kt3 can’t eliminate the support from the BP, while Black’s passed pawn at B3 can be isolated at any moment with P-R4-R5. White would position the King on the Knight’s file and advance the Rook’s pawn. The isolated pawns are then easy targets. In the current move, White also advances the Rook’s pawn to force P-R3 and limit Black to moves by the King. The passed Queen’s pawn clinches the game.
30. K-K4 K-Q2 31. K-B4 K-K2 32. K-Kt4 K-Q2 33. P-R4 K-B1 34. P-R5 P-R3
30. K-K4 K-Q2 31. K-B4 K-K2 32. K-Kt4 K-Q2 33. P-R4 K-B1 34. P-R5 P-R3
Otherwise there follows: P-R6, K-R5, etc.
Otherwise there follows: P-R6, K-R5, etc.
35. K-B4 K-Q2 36. K-K4 K-B2 37. P-Q6ch K-B1 38. K-Q5 K-Q2 39. P-B6ch PxPch
35. K-B4 K-Q2 36. K-K4 K-B2 37. P-Q6ch K-B1 38. K-Q5 K-Q2 39. P-B6ch PxPch
(compare Diagram 68)
(compare Diagram 68)
40. K-B5 Resigns
K-B5 Resigns
IV. FROM A GAME BIRD-JANOWSKI.
![[Illustration]](images/diag87.jpg)
Diag. 87
Diag. 87
In spite of the preponderance of material, the win is not an easy one for Black, because of White’s alarming pawn array on the Queen’s side. The King must first make use of his great power as an end-game piece.
Despite the overwhelming amount of material, the win isn't easy for Black because of White's concerning pawn formation on the Queen's side. The King must first utilize its strong position as an end-game piece.
1. … K-B2 2. P-Kt5 K-K3 3. P-Kt6 PxP 4. PxP K-Q2 5. B-K5
1. … K-B2 2. P-Kt5 K-K3 3. P-Kt6 PxP 4. PxP K-Q2 5. B-K5
threatens P-Kt7. But as White must first move his Bishop to cover his pawn, the Rook’s pawn is lost, and the manœuvre therefore unsound. P-R3 was indicated; it threatens the break-up of the Black pawns by P-Kt4 and their capture by the King.
threatens P-Kt7. But since White has to move his Bishop to protect his pawn first, the Rook’s pawn is lost, making the maneuver unsound. P-R3 was suggested; it threatens to break up the Black pawns with P-Kt4 and allows the King to capture them.
5. … K-B3 6. B-Q4 R-R2ch 7. K-K3 RxP 8. K-B4 R-Q7! 9. P-Kt4 RxB
5. … K-B3 6. B-Q4 R-R2ch 7. K-K3 RxP 8. K-B4 R-Q7! 9. P-Kt4 RxB
Black reduces the position to an elementary ending, which is theoretically a win. Whilst the two White passed pawns are isolated and fall singly, Black obtains two passed pawns, which are united and unassailable.
Black simplifies the position to a basic ending, which is theoretically a win. While the two passed pawns of White are isolated and fall one by one, Black gets two passed pawns that are together and impossible to stop.
10. PxR P-K6 11. KxKP PxP 12. K-B4 P-R4 13. P-Q5ch KxKtP 14. K-K5 K-B2 Resigns.
10. PxR P-K6 11. KxKP PxP 12. K-B4 P-R4 13. P-Q5ch KxKtP 14. K-K5 K-B2 Resigns.
V. FROM A GAME STEINER-FORGACZ (SZEKESFEHERVAR, 1907).
![[Illustration]](images/diag88.jpg)
Diag. 88
Diag. 88
White has an advantage in the greater mobility of his Rook, and makes the most of it in an instructive fashion.
White has an advantage because his Rook can move more freely, and he takes full advantage of this in a helpful way.
1. R-Kt4 P-Kt3
R-Knight4 P-Knight3
White provokes this move in order to produce a weakness at KB6.
White makes this move to create a weakness at KB6.
2. K-K2 K-K3 3. R-KB4 R-KB1
Black naturally dare not allow the Rook to penetrate into the seventh.
Black naturally cannot allow the Rook to break into the seventh rank.
4. P-Q4 P-QB4
This move would win the game, if the Rooks had been exchanged, because in that case the distant passed pawn which Black could obtain on the QKt file would decide the issue. But, supported by the mobile Rook, the centre pawns become irresistible. Instead of the text move, P-KB4 was necessary in order to release the Rook.
This move would win the game if the Rooks had been traded, because in that case the faraway passed pawn that Black could get on the QKt file would determine the outcome. But, backed by the active Rook, the center pawns become unstoppable. Instead of the current move, P-KB4 was needed to free the Rook.
5. P-B3 PxP
6. PxP P-KB4
5. P-B3 PxP
6. PxP P-KB4
If it were not for the Rooks, the centre pawns would not help White, because Black would obtain a passed pawn on either wing.
If it weren't for the Rooks, the center pawns wouldn't assist White, because Black would get a passed pawn on either side.
7. K-Q3 P-KKt4 8. R-B2 R-B1 9. P-Kt4 P-B5
7. K-Q3 P-KKt4 8. R-B2 R-B1 9. P-Kt4 P-B5
If PxP, 10. R-B6ch, K-K2; 11. R-R6 wins.
If PxP, 10. R-B6ch, K-K2; 11. R-R6 wins.
10. P-KR4 P-KR3 11. PxP PxP 12. R-R2 R-B1 13. R-R6ch K-K2 14. P-Q5 P-B6 15. R-K6ch K-Q2 16. R-B6! Resigns.
10. P-KR4 P-KR3 11. PxP PxP 12. R-R2 R-B1 13. R-R6ch K-K2 14. P-Q5 P-B6 15. R-K6ch K-Q2 16. R-B6! Resigns.
For after RxR, 17. PxR, White captures the BP, and still overtakes the passed pawn which Black obtains on the Queen’s wing; the pawns at Q5 and B6 are unassailable (K-K8, P-Q6, K-B7, P-Q7, etc.). The consequences of 16. R-B6 had to be calculated to a nicety. If, for instance, the QKtP were already at his fourth, White would lose. In four moves Black would have one of his pawns at his R6, the other at Kt5. In the meantime White would have taken the BP and come back to the Q file. Now Black would win with P-Kt6, because after PxP the RP queens unmolested.
For after RxR, 17. PxR, White captures the BP and still overtakes the passed pawn that Black has on the Queen’s side; the pawns at Q5 and B6 are secure (K-K8, P-Q6, K-B7, P-Q7, etc.). The impact of 16. R-B6 had to be calculated precisely. If, for example, the QKtP were already at its fourth, White would be in trouble. In four moves, Black would have one of his pawns at R6 and the other at Kt5. Meanwhile, White would have taken the BP and returned to the Q file. Now Black would win with P-Kt6, because after PxP, the RP promotes without interference.
VI. FROM A GAME CHAROUSEK-HEINRICHSEN (COLOGNE, 1898).
![[Illustration]](images/diag89.jpg)
Diag. 89
Diag. 89
White’s position is superior; firstly, because the only open file on the board is his, and secondly, because the Black Queen’s side pawns are advanced, and therefore weak for a King’s ending. After exchanging the Queen and one Rook, the possession of the King’s file ensures the advance of the King to K4 and from there to Q5. Then the weakness of Black’s pawns decides the game.
White's position is better; first, because the only open file on the board is his, and second, because Black's pawns on the Queen's side are pushed up, making them vulnerable in a King’s endgame. After trading the Queen and one Rook, controlling the King’s file allows the King to move to K4 and then to Q5. At that point, Black's pawn weakness will determine the outcome of the game.
1. QxQ RxQ 2. R-K8ch RxR 3. RxRch K-R2 4. K-R2 P-KKt3 5. K-Kt3
1. QxQ RxQ 2. R-K8ch RxR 3. RxRch K-R2 4. K-R2 P-KKt3 5. K-Kt3
PxP is no threat, because White wins the pawn back at once with R-K5. By capturing, Black would only dislocate his pawns.
PxP is no threat because White immediately wins the pawn back with R-K5. By capturing, Black would just mess up his pawns.
5. … KKt2 6. K-B4 K-B3 7. R-K5 P-Kt3 8. K-K4 R-Q3 9. P-KB4 R-K3
5. … KKt2 6. K-B4 K-B3 7. R-K5 P-Kt3 8. K-K4 R-Q3 9. P-KB4 R-K3
Black probably hopes for a counter chance by getting a distant passed pawn on the KRook’s file. But he underrates the weakness of the Queen’s side pawns, and even without the exchange of Rooks, White would win, by settling the King’s side first and then tearing up the Queen’s side, as in the game: 10. P-KKt4, R- K2; 11. PxP, PxP; 12. P-Kt5ch, PxP; 13. PxPch.
Black likely hopes for a counter opportunity by creating a distant passed pawn on the kingside file. However, he underestimates the weakness of the queenside pawns, and even without exchanging rooks, White would win by securing the kingside first and then dismantling the queenside, as demonstrated in the game: 10. P-KKt4, R-K2; 11. PxP, PxP; 12. P-Kt5ch, PxP; 13. PxPch.
10. PxP PxP 11. K-Q5 RxR 12. PxRch K-K2 13. P-QKt4 Resigns
10. PxP PxP 11. K-Q5 RxR 12. PxRch K-K2 13. P-QKt4 Resigns
Black must capture, as he needs seven moves in which to ex change the Knight’s pawn and queen his Rook’s pawn, whilst in that time White can win the QP after PxP, and yet arrive in time with his King to stop the pawn from queening.
Black has to capture, since he needs seven moves to exchange the Knight’s pawn and promote his Rook’s pawn, while in that time White can win the QP after PxP, and still reach his King in time to stop the pawn from promoting.
After l3. … PxP, however, there follows 14. KxP. Then White covers his passed pawn with P-Q4, and his King, having full freedom, captures all the Black pawns.
After l3. … PxP, however, there follows 14. KxP. Then White protects his passed pawn with P-Q4, and his King, having complete freedom, takes all the Black pawns.
CHAPTER VI
THE MIDDLE GAME
GENERAL REMARKS
HAVING now a fair knowledge of the end-game, we should be in a position to appreciate how the middle game should be conducted. We must throughout maintain a favourable pawn formation, in view of the end-game which might be forced on us by exchanges. On the other hand, as soon as we have gained an advantage sufficient to secure the victory in the end-game, we must ourselves, by the exchange of pieces, try to reduce the position to one of the typical elementary cases which we have discussed. Now it will invariably be found that beginners are unwilling to make these essential exchanges. This is explained by the attraction which combinations involving the action of many pieces have for them. They assume that exchanges, particularly of the Queens, make the games dull. Such ideas only prove that the beginner has not grasped the nature of chess, the essence of which is stern logic and uncompromising conclusions, and this demands the shortest and clearest way leading to a mate. To the strong player, able to play logically, logic will always be inseparable from beauty in chess.
HAVING now a good understanding of the endgame, we should be able to appreciate how the middle game should be played. We must consistently maintain a favorable pawn structure, considering the endgame that may arise from exchanges. On the other hand, as soon as we gain an advantage that should secure a win in the endgame, we should initiate exchanges of pieces to simplify the position into one of the basic scenarios we have discussed. It will often be observed that beginners are reluctant to make these important exchanges. This is due to the appeal of combinations involving many pieces. They think that exchanges, especially of the Queens, make the game less exciting. Such thoughts only show that the beginner hasn't understood the nature of chess, which is fundamentally about strict logic and clear-cut conclusions, demanding the most direct route to checkmate. For the strong player, who can think logically, beauty and logic in chess are always intertwined.
To play logically means to subordinate all combinations to a leading plan of campaign, but there is difficulty in finding the latter. An unsound scheme, even if worked out to its logical conclusion, can of course be of no value. All the same it is better than no plan at all. And in time one gains by experience, and develops a sort of instinct for rejecting from the large number of possible operations all those which, properly countered, cannot bring any advantage.
Playing logically means putting all combinations under a main strategy, but it can be tough to identify that strategy. A flawed plan, even if taken to its logical end, is definitely not useful. Still, it’s better than having no plan at all. Over time, you gain experience and develop an instinct for filtering out the many possible moves that won’t offer any benefit if faced with the right counter.
Beside practical play, which is essential in order to gain this instinct, a methodical theoretical instruction is of inestimable value, and accelerates the development of the student’s mind. Now the instruction I wish to give in the THEORY of chess will not take the form of an ANALYSIS, brought up right into the middle game, of the various openings, tested and found correct in master play. Such collections erroneously bear the title of “Theory of the Openings,” and are, besides, quite useless at this stage, since they only embody the results of ANALYSIS.
Alongside practical play, which is crucial for developing this instinct, systematic theoretical instruction is incredibly valuable and speeds up the growth of the student’s mindset. The instruction I want to provide on the THEORY of chess won't be an ANALYSIS that goes straight into the middle game, detailing the various openings that have been tested and proven effective in master play. These compilations mistakenly carry the title of “Theory of the Openings” and are, in fact, quite useless at this stage, as they merely represent the outcomes of ANALYSIS.
It is first necessary to ascertain a few leading principles, which can be taught in a most simple manner, by the exercise of common sense, rather than by applying oneself to the study of long-winded analysis. The student will no longer need to discover time-worn maxims in the light of his own weary experience, and on the other hand, these principles will help him to understand analysis, and to keep clearly before his mind’s eye the common and principal lines of play, of which he might easily lose sight in the labyrinth of suggested variations.
It’s important to identify a few key principles that can be taught in a straightforward way, using common sense instead of getting lost in lengthy analysis. The student won't have to rely on outdated maxims based on their own tiring experiences, and these principles will aid in understanding analysis and help them clearly see the main strategies of play, which they could easily overlook in the maze of suggested variations.
I propose to show the application of such principles to master play, and this will give us a further opportunity of deeper study, both of the rules set out in the first part for conducting the opening correctly, and of the end-game principles, which should be well considered.
I suggest demonstrating how these principles apply to mastering the game, which will provide us with a chance to dive deeper into both the rules laid out in the first part for making the right opening moves and the principles of the endgame that deserve careful consideration.
I have made the pawn skeleton with its attendant grouping of pieces the main consideration in the study of the opening; now in the investigation of the problems of the middle game, I will start from the TRANSFORMATION which the pawn skeleton has to undergo in the course of further operations. In my opinion this is the best starting-point for the choice of effective manœuvres of the different pieces.
I have focused on the pawn structure and the pieces that go along with it in studying the opening; now, as I explore the challenges of the middle game, I will begin with the TRANSFORMATION that the pawn structure must go through as the game progresses. I believe this is the best starting point for choosing effective maneuvers for the different pieces.
Before we are able to evolve a practical scheme we must have under consideration the following important points: How do we know if an attack is likely to succeed? In other words: On what point should I concentrate the attack? It should be clear to all that it is of no possible use to direct an attack on anything that can move away. Yet beginners frequently infringe this obvious rule, and I have often witnessed manœuvres such as these (Diagram 90):
Before we can develop a practical plan, we need to consider the following important points: How can we determine if an attack is likely to succeed? In other words, where should I focus the attack? It should be obvious to everyone that it's pointless to attack something that can move away. Yet, beginners often ignore this clear rule, and I've frequently seen maneuvers like these (Diagram 90):
![[Illustration]](images/diag90.jpg)
Diag. 90
Diag. 90
1. P-QR3, 2. P-QKt4, and then, after the B has retired to his Kt3 even, 3. R-QKt1, 4. P-QR4, 5. P-R5. Meanwhile Black will have played P-QR3, to make a loophole for his B at R2, and what is the result? The Black Bishop is as effectual at R2 as at B4, but White has advanced his pawns, and weakened them, as they are now more liable to attack. Moreover, White has used up five moves to achieve his aim, whilst Black only needed three. Therefore Black has gained two moves, which he can use for the development of his pieces.
1. P-QR3, 2. P-QKt4, and then, after the Bishop has moved back to his Kt3 square, 3. R-QKt1, 4. P-QR4, 5. P-R5. Meanwhile, Black will have played P-QR3 to create a gap for his Bishop at R2, and what’s the outcome? The Black Bishop is just as effective at R2 as it is at B4, but White has pushed forward his pawns, making them weaker as they are now more vulnerable to attacks. Additionally, White has used up five moves to achieve this goal, while Black only needed three. As a result, Black has gained two extra moves to develop his pieces.
Diagram 91 illustrates another mistake frequently made in the choice of an objective, and one which can utterly spoil the whole game, even in its earliest stage. Black has to
Diagram 91 shows another common mistake people often make when choosing an objective, which can completely ruin the entire game, even right from the start. Black has to
![[Illustration]](images/diag91.jpg)
Diag. 91
Diag. 91
move, and his game is somewhat hindered by the dominating position of the White Queen. The latter prevents the Bishop from occupying a desirable square at his QB4, and also makes the liberating move P-Q4 impossible. Therefore it would seem desirable to drive the Queen away. But this should only be done if it is not attended by some further disadvantage.
move, and his game is somewhat limited by the powerful position of the White Queen. The Queen stops the Bishop from taking a good spot at his QB4 and also makes the freeing move P-Q4 impossible. So, it seems wise to try to push the Queen away. However, this should only be done if it doesn’t lead to some other disadvantage.
Now the average player is not particularly fastidious in his methods. The Queen irritates him, therefore the Queen must be repelled one way or the other. He would probably try P-QB4. The result is that the Queen selects another good square, for instance at K3 or QR4, but Black has not improved matters, for he still can play neither B-B4 nor P-Q4. On the other hand, irredeemable harm has been done, inasmuch as the Black QP now remains “backward.” The attack on the Queen by P-QB4 must consequently be rejected. Sallies such as these, in which short- lived attacks are made by pawns upon pieces, are always of doubtful value. They must unquestionably be avoided if they break up the pawn skeleton, which is formed in the opening, and confine the mobility of the pieces.
Now, the average player isn't particularly meticulous in their methods. The Queen annoys him, so he feels the need to drive her away. He would probably try moving a pawn to QB4. As a result, the Queen just finds another good square, like K3 or QR4, but Black hasn’t changed his situation because he still can’t play B-B4 or P-Q4. On the other hand, irreversible damage has been done since the Black QP is now “backward.” Therefore, the attempt to attack the Queen with P-QB4 should be dismissed. Tactics like this, where pawns make temporary attacks on pieces, are always questionable. They should definitely be avoided if they disrupt the pawn structure established at the start and limit the mobility of the pieces.
Also with regard to manœuvres of PIECES, intended solely to drive away an opposing piece, it is obviously essential that the attacking pieces in effecting their purpose should not be made to stray too far afield, lest they become out of play.
Also regarding the movements of pieces intended solely to drive away an opposing piece, it is obviously crucial that the attacking pieces, while achieving their goal, do not stray too far from their position, or they risk becoming ineffective.
I shall delay dealing with the features underlying good forms of attack, both by pieces and pawns, until I have treated of the choice of an objective.
I will hold off on discussing the features of effective attacks, both with pieces and pawns, until I have covered how to choose a goal.
From what we have already expounded, it is clear that the subject of an attack should be incapable of evasion. Should it, in the course of attack, be desired to prevent a PIECE from being moved, that can only be effected by means of a “pin.” A PAWN, however, can be held in place either by occupying the square immediately in front of it, or by controlling the latter with more forces than the opponent can bring to bear upon it.
From what we've already explained, it's clear that the target of an attack should have no chance to escape. If, during the attack, the goal is to stop a PIECE from moving, this can only be done through a "pin." However, a PAWN can be held in place either by occupying the square directly in front of it or by having more control over that square than the opponent does.
![[Illustration]](images/diag92.jpg)
Diag. 92
Diag. 92
The last two diagrams exemplify this. If in Diagram 91 Black makes the mistake of playing P-QB4 as suggested, the backward QP becomes a welcome objective for White’s attack. White can keep that pawn back by playing P-Q B4 as soon as it threatens to advance, after which he would develop quietly, double his Rooks, and bring the Q and QB to bear in a concentrated attack on Q6. A position not unlike that in Diagram 92 will result ultimately, in which Black defends the pawn as many times as it is attacked, but in which White can bring up his KP to the attack, as the QP cannot move away, whilst Black has no further defensive move at his disposal. Play against a backward pawn nearly always develops on these lines, and is even easier when there is no defending B of the same colour as the pawn. (See p. 40, and Game No. 26.)
The last two diagrams illustrate this. In Diagram 91, if Black makes the mistake of playing P-QB4 as suggested, the backward QP becomes an easy target for White’s attack. White can hold that pawn back by playing P-QB4 as soon as it threatens to move forward, after which he would quietly develop, double his Rooks, and bring the Queen and Bishop into a focused attack on Q6. Eventually, a position similar to that in Diagram 92 will arise, where Black defends the pawn as many times as it is attacked, but White can move his KP into the attack since the QP can’t move away, while Black has no other defensive moves available. Play against a backward pawn almost always follows this pattern and is even easier when there isn’t a defending Bishop of the same color as the pawn. (See p. 40, and Game No. 26.)
Such manœuvres, in the course of which pieces are pinned and attacked, are illustrated in Diagram 90. The most obvious move, which initiates an attack and at the same time completes the development of the minor pieces, is B-Kt5. Attacks by means of such devices are so frequent and varied that it will be necessary to treat them at some length, which I now propose to do. I should also add that, with regard to Diagram 90, the student will derive lasting benefit from a thorough study of the position, and will thus improve his power to judge of the desirability, or otherwise, of obtaining open files, diagonals, doubled pawns, etc. After B-KKt5, the threat is to attack the Knight a second and third time with Kt-Q5, and Q-B3, after moving the KKt away. As Black’s KKt is only supported twice, and there is no chance of bringing up more forces for its defence, Black must undertake something to provide against the threatened onslaught.
Such maneuvers, where pieces are pinned and attacked, are shown in Diagram 90. The most obvious move that starts an attack and also develops the minor pieces is B-Kt5. Attacks using such tactics are so common and varied that it will be necessary to cover them in detail, which I intend to do now. I should also mention that, regarding Diagram 90, the student will gain lasting benefits from studying the position thoroughly, thereby enhancing their ability to assess the importance of gaining open files, diagonals, doubled pawns, etc. After B-KKt5, the threat is to attack the Knight a second and third time with Kt-Q5 and Q-B3, after moving the KKt away. Since Black’s KKt is only supported twice and there’s no opportunity to bring more forces to defend it, Black must take action to guard against the impending attack.
The most natural plan is to develop the QB at K3, from where it can be exchanged for the Knight should Kt-Q5 be played. The doubled pawn, which White could force by exchanging the Bishops, is in no way detrimental to Black’s game. On the contrary, the opening of the file for the Rook, with the attendant chance of playing P-Q4 supported by the doubled pawn, gives Black the advantage.
The best strategy is to develop the queen's bishop to square K3, so it can be swapped for the knight if Kt-Q5 is played. The doubled pawn that White can create by exchanging the bishops doesn't hurt Black's position at all. In fact, opening the file for the rook, along with the opportunity to play P-Q4 backed by the doubled pawn, gives Black the upper hand.
The doubled pawn which Black obtains after 2. Kt-Q5, BxKt; 3. PxB (or 3. BxB), Kt-K2; 4. BxKt, would also be of no help to White. The apparent weakness created in Black’s game at KB3 and KR3 by the disappearance of the KtP does not assist White in this case, because the pieces which could take advantage of such a weakness, the QB and the Kt at Q5, have been exchanged. There only remains the KKt and the Q for an immediate attack, whilst the Black Rook will soon get into effective action on the open Knight’s file, e.g. 5. Q-Q2, K-R1; 6. Q-R6, Kt-Kt3; 7. Kt-R4, KtxKt; 8. QxKt, Q- K2, followed by the doubling of the Rooks on the Kt file. Considerations of a similar nature would tend to show that 1. B- Kt5, Kt-K2; 2. BxKt, PxB is in favour of Black. The White QB, which is so effective in taking advantage of weaknesses at Black’s KB3 and R3, has been exchanged. The Queen’s Knight is not available for attack on the KBP, as it would be exchanged or else driven off in time by P-B3. Compared with the position considered above, which occurs after 1. … B-K3, 2. Kt-Q5, Black has the further advantage of maintaining his QB, which makes it possible to push the weak KBP on to his fourth, and either exchange it or push it still further to B5, a useful and secure position.
The doubled pawn that Black gets after 2. N-Q5, BxN; 3. PxB (or 3. BxB), N-K2; 4. BxN, wouldn't help White either. The apparent weakness in Black’s setup at KB3 and KR3 due to the loss of the Knight pawn doesn’t benefit White here, because the pieces that could exploit that weakness, the Bishop and the Knight at Q5, have been exchanged. The only pieces left for an immediate attack are the Knight and the Queen, while the Black Rook will soon be active on the open Knight’s file, for example, 5. Q-Q2, K-R1; 6. Q-R6, N-N3; 7. N-R4, N x N; 8. Q x N, Q-K2, followed by doubling the Rooks on the Knight file. Similar reasoning suggests that 1. B-N5, N-K2; 2. BxN, PxB benefits Black. The White Bishop, which is effective in targeting weaknesses at Black’s KB3 and R3, has been traded off. The Queen’s Knight can't attack the Knight pawn as it would either be exchanged or pushed back in time by P-B3. Compared to the earlier position that comes after 1. … B-K3, 2. N-Q5, Black has the added advantage of keeping his Bishop, allowing him to advance the weak Knight pawn to his fourth, where he can either exchange it or push it further to B5, which is a useful and secure spot.
Matters would be different were Black to allow his King’s wing to be broken up without getting rid of White’s dangerous pieces by exchanges. Let us consider what happens, if Black takes no measures against Kt-Q5, but only prevents White’s ultimate Q-B3 by pinning the Knight with B-KKt5. White gains a decisive advantage by bringing his Queen into play before Black is able to secure himself against the threatened combined attack of Q and B, or alternately Q and Kt by K-R1, R-Kt1-Kt3. I will give two examples of how the whole game now centres on the attack and defence of the points weakened by the disappearance of the KtP, and how White pushes home his advantage in the one instance with the help of the B, in the other by the co-operation of the Kt.
Things would be different if Black allowed his King’s side to be weakened without removing White’s threatening pieces through exchanges. Let’s look at what happens if Black makes no move against Kt-Q5 but instead stops White’s potential Q-B3 by pinning the Knight with B-KKt5. White gains a significant advantage by activating his Queen before Black can safeguard himself against the looming combined threat of Q and B, or alternatively Q and Kt with K-R1, R-Kt1-Kt3. I will provide two examples demonstrating how the entire game now revolves around the attack and defense of the points compromised by the loss of the KtP, and how White capitalizes on his advantage in one scenario with the help of the B and in the other through the collaboration of the Kt.
I. 1. B-KKt5, B-KKt5; 2. Kt-Q5, Kt-Q5; 3. Q-Q2, BxKt?; 4. BxKt, PxB; 5. Q-R6, and there is no reply to the threat of KtxPch and QxP mate, except through the sacrifice of the Q. Forcing the exchange of Knights is of no avail, for after 5. … Kt-K7ch; 6. K-R1, BxPch; 7. KxB, Kt-B5ch; 8. KtxKt, PxKt; 9. K-R1, White occupies the Kt file first and wins easily: 9. … K-R1; 10. R- KKt1, R-KKt1; 11. RxR, QxR; 12. R-KKt1 followed by mate or loss of the Queen.
I. 1. B-KKt5, B-KKt5; 2. Kt-Q5, Kt-Q5; 3. Q-Q2, BxKt?; 4. BxKt, PxB; 5. Q-R6, and there’s no answer to the threat of KtxPch and QxP mate, except by sacrificing the Q. Forcing the exchange of Knights doesn’t help, because after 5. … Kt-K7ch; 6. K-R1, BxPch; 7. KxB, Kt-B5ch; 8. KtxKt, PxKt; 9. K-R1, White takes the Kt file first and wins easily: 9. … K-R1; 10. R-KKt1, R-KKt1; 11. RxR, QxR; 12. R-KKt1 followed by a mate or losing the Queen.
II. 3. Q-Q2, P-B3; 4. KtxKtch, PxKt; 5. B-R4! BxKt; 6. Q- R6, Kt-K7ch; 7. K-R1, BxPch; 8. KxB, Kt-B5ch; 9. K-R1, Kt-Kt3. Now Black has succeeded in interrupting the White Queen’s action on the BP. But it has taken many moves, with the sole result that Black’s Queen’s Knight is better placed. All the other pieces, however, occupy the positions they took up in the opening. The Black Knight, moreover, is only supported by the RP until Black manages to block the White Bishop’s diagonal by P-Q4. Meanwhile White has gained a big start, and is ready to occupy the open file with his Rooks. The sequel might be: 10. P-Q4!, BxP (if PxP; 11. P-K5!!, QPxP; 12. R-KKt1, etc.); 11. P-B3, B-Kt3; 12. QR-Q1, K-R1; 13. R-KKt1, Q-K2; 14. R-Q3, R-KKt1; 15. R-R3, R-Kt2 (KtxB; 16. QxRPch!!); 16. R-B3, followed by BxP (B6).
II. 3. Q-Q2, P-B3; 4. KtxKtch, PxKt; 5. B-R4! BxKt; 6. Q-R6, Kt-K7ch; 7. K-R1, BxPch; 8. KxB, Kt-B5ch; 9. K-R1, Kt-Kt3. Now Black has successfully disrupted the White Queen’s attack on the BP. But it took many moves, resulting in the only improvement being the better position of Black's Queen's Knight. All other pieces, however, remain in their original positions from the opening. Additionally, the Black Knight is only supported by the RP until Black can block the White Bishop’s diagonal with P-Q4. Meanwhile, White has gained significant momentum and is ready to take control of the open file with their Rooks. The next moves could be: 10. P-Q4!, BxP (if PxP; 11. P-K5!!, QPxP; 12. R-KKt1, etc.); 11. P-B3, B-Kt3; 12. QR-Q1, K-R1; 13. R-KKt1, Q-K2; 14. R-Q3, R-KKt1; 15. R-R3, R-Kt2 (KtxB; 16. QxRPch!!); 16. R-B3, followed by BxP (B6).
Taking it all in all, we see from the foregoing that the pinning of the Black Knight can only be injurious to Black if he does not take timely measures to provide against White’s Kt-Q5, which threatens to concentrate more forces for the attack on KB6 than Black is able to mobilise for its defence.
Taking everything into account, we can see from the above that the pinning of the Black Knight can only hurt Black if he doesn’t act quickly to defend against White’s Kt-Q5, which threatens to gather more forces for the attack on KB6 than Black can rally for its defense.
Beginners, after having experienced frequent trouble through their inadequate defence of this kind of attack, try to avoid their recurrence by making such pinning moves impossible from the first and playing P-R3 on whichever side the pin is threatened. Apart from the loss of time, on which I remarked at length when discussing the opening, such pawn moves have various other drawbacks.
Beginners, after facing frequent issues due to their poor defense against this type of attack, try to prevent it from happening again by making pinning moves impossible from the start and playing P-R3 on whichever side the pin is threatened. Besides the loss of time, which I discussed in detail when talking about the opening, these pawn moves have several other disadvantages.
With every pawn move it should be considered whether the squares protected by the pawn before it has moved may not need the support of that pawn at a later stage. This is particularly the case with regard to squares in front of the castled King. If one of those pawns pushes on, the squares which have lost its protection frequently offer an opening for a direct attack by the enemy’s pieces on the King.
With every pawn move, you should think about whether the squares protected by the pawn before it moved might need that pawn's support later on. This is especially true for the squares in front of the castled King. If one of those pawns moves forward, the squares that have lost their protection often become openings for a direct attack by the enemy's pieces on the King.
A second consideration is the fact that the advancing pawn itself becomes a target for an assault in which the opponent, moving up a pawn on the next file, brings his Rooks into play, or in which he sacrifices a piece for the advanced pawn and the one that protects it, thus robbing the King of the protection he sought to obtain in castling.
A second consideration is that the advancing pawn itself becomes a target for an attack, where the opponent, moving a pawn up on the next file, brings his Rooks into action, or where he sacrifices a piece for the advanced pawn and the one protecting it, thus taking away the King's safety that he aimed to achieve by castling.
The following examples will contribute much to the understanding of this most important subject, the grasp of which will mean a great step forward for the student.
The following examples will greatly enhance the understanding of this crucial topic, which will be a significant advancement for the student.
The position in Diagram 93 is from a game v. Scheve-Teichmann (Berlin, 1907). White played 1. P-R3 in order to avoid the pinning of his Knight through B-Kt5. The move is not unjustified, as the Knight is required for the support of the square at Q4. The pawn move, however, has the drawbacks enumerated above, and White must think of keeping a sufficiency of pieces for the fight on the King’s wing, in order to prevent Black from utilising the weakness thus created for a combined assault by superior forces.
The position in Diagram 93 is from a game against Scheve-Teichmann (Berlin, 1907). White played 1. P-R3 to avoid having his Knight pinned by B-Kt5. This move makes sense since the Knight is needed to support the square at Q4. However, the pawn move has the drawbacks mentioned earlier, and White needs to ensure he has enough pieces for the fight on the King’s side to stop Black from taking advantage of the weakness created for a combined attack with superior forces.
![[Illustration]](images/diag93.jpg)
Diag. 93
Diag. 93
In this case White does not take precautionary measures, and succumbs in a surprisingly short time.
In this case, White doesn't take any precautions and ends up losing in a surprisingly short amount of time.
1. … Kt-B3; 2. PxP? With this move White opens the diagonal for Black’s KB for no apparent reason. 2. … QKtxP; 3. KtxKt? Instead of providing for the defence of his King’s wing, White exchanges one of the King’s side pieces, 3. … QxKt; 4. Kt-Q2, BxP! White has provoked this sacrifice by his last two moves. The KBP is pinned, and the Q enters by way of her Kt6, the protection of which was given up by pushing on the RP. The rest is easy; 5. PxB, Q-Kt6ch; 6. K-R1, QxPch; 7. K-Kt1, Kt-Kt5; 8. Kt-B3, Q- Kt6ch; 9. K-R1, BxP; 10. resigns.
1. … Kt-B3; 2. PxP? With this move, White opens the diagonal for Black’s bishop for no obvious reason. 2. … QKtxP; 3. KtxKt? Instead of helping to defend his king's side, White trades one of the king's side pieces. 3. … QxKt; 4. Kt-Q2, BxP! White has set up this sacrifice with his last two moves. The king's bishop pawn is pinned, and the queen enters via her knight6, the protection of which was lost by pushing the rook pawn. The rest is straightforward; 5. PxB, Q-Kt6 check; 6. K-R1, QxP check; 7. K-Kt1, Kt-Kt5; 8. Kt-B3, Q-Kt6 check; 9. K-R1, BxP; 10. resigns.
Diagram 94 shows a position from a game Marshall-Burn (Ostend, 1907). Strong in the knowledge that the Black Queen’s side pieces are not developed, and can only with difficulty be of assistance in the defence of the King’s side because of their limited mobility, White takes advantage of the weakness created by the advance of the Black KKt pawn to his third, and initiates an immediate assault on the King’s stronghold.
Diagram 94 shows a position from the game Marshall-Burn (Ostend, 1907). Knowing that the Black Queen’s side pieces are undeveloped and can hardly help defend the King’s side because of their limited movement, White capitalizes on the weakness created by the Black Knight pawn moving to its third rank and starts an immediate attack on the King’s defense.
![[Illustration]](images/diag94.jpg)
Diag. 94
Diag. 94
1. P-KR4, R-K1; 2. P-R5. This forces open the Rook’s file. If the pawn were still at Kt2, Black would simply let White push on to R6 and then reply with P-KKt3. 2. … KtxP; 3. RxKt, White concludes the game in brilliant style. Black’s wrong development has given a welcome opportunity for sacrificial combinations. Now the KB has an open diagonal, the pawn position is broken, and White’s Q and R have no difficulty in using the Rook’s file for a deadly attack. 3. … PxR; 4. BxPch, KxB; 5. Kt-Kt5ch, K-Kt3 (if K-Kt1, then 6. QxP, Kt-B3; 7. QxPch, K-R1; 8. Castles, etc.); 6. QKt-B3, P-K4; 7. Kt-R4ch, K-B3; 8. Kt-R7ch, K-K2; 9. Kt-B5ch, K- K3; 10. KtxBch, K-K2; 11. Kt-B5ch, K-K3; 12. P-Q5ch, KxKt; 13. QxPch, K-K5; 14. Castles, followed by P-B3 or R-Q4 mate.
1. P-KR4, R-K1; 2. P-R5. This opens up the Rook’s file. If the pawn were still at Kt2, Black would just let White advance to R6 and then respond with P-KKt3. 2. … KtxP; 3. RxKt, White wraps up the game in a brilliant way. Black’s poor development has created a great opportunity for sacrifices. Now the Bishop has an open diagonal, the pawn structure is disrupted, and White’s Queen and Rook can easily use the Rook’s file for a powerful attack. 3. … PxR; 4. BxPch, KxB; 5. Kt-Kt5ch, K-Kt3 (if K-Kt1, then 6. QxP, Kt-B3; 7. QxPch, K-R1; 8. Castles, etc.); 6. QKt-B3, P-K4; 7. Kt-R4ch, K-B3; 8. Kt-R7ch, K-K2; 9. Kt-B5ch, K-K3; 10. KtxBch, K-K2; 11. Kt-B5ch, K-K3; 12. P-Q5ch, KxKt; 13. QxPch, K-K5; 14. Castles, followed by P-B3 or R-Q4 mate.
In cases where both sides have already castled on the same wing, and the opponent has weakened his position by pushing on one of the pawns of that wing, it is seldom advisable to start an attack with the advance of one of the pawns in front of the King, as the latter’s position would be weakened. An attack of this kind is only justified if there is a prospect of concentrating with all speed a superior force before the opponent has time for a counter attack.
In situations where both players have castled on the same side and the opponent has weakened their position by pushing one of the pawns on that side, it’s usually not a good idea to start an attack by pushing one of the pawns in front of the King, as that would weaken the King’s position. This type of attack is only worth it if there’s a chance to quickly gather a stronger force before the opponent has time to counterattack.
The Black position in Diagram 95 illustrates one much favoured by “natural” players. Here the advance of the
The Black position in Diagram 95 shows a setup highly favored by "natural" players. Here, the push of the
![[Illustration]](images/diag95.jpg)
Diag. 95
Diag. 95
KRP would not be a suitable plan of attack for White as his Rook is no longer on the Rook’s file, nor could it be brought back in time. In this case White must endeavour to take advantage of the weaknesses at Black’s KB3 and KR3, produced by his move P-KKt3. This will be the modus operandi: Q-Q2 followed by B-R6, forcing the exchange of Black’s valuable KB. After that the Q in conjunction with one of the Knights will attempt to force an entry at KB6 or KR6, as for instance in the following, the moves of which are taken from a game I once watched and took note of as being most instructive.
KRP wouldn’t be a good strategy for White since his Rook is no longer on its original file, and he can't get it back in time. Instead, White needs to focus on exploiting the weaknesses at Black’s KB3 and KR3, created by the move P-KKt3. The plan will be: Q-Q2 followed by B-R6, compelling Black to exchange his valuable Bishop. After that, the Queen, along with one of the Knights, will try to gain entry at KB6 or KR6, as seen in the following moves from a game I observed and noted as highly instructional.
1. Q-Q2, P-Q3; 2. B-KR6, PxP; 3. BxB, KxB; 4. PxP, Q-Q2; 5. Kt- K4, Kt-Q4; 6. B-B4, QR-Q1; 7. BxKt, PxB; 8. Kt-B6, Q-K3; 9. Q- Kt5, B-B1 (to prevent Kt-Kt4); 10. QR-K1, Q-B4; 11. Q-R4, P-KR3; 12. Kt-Q4, KtxKt; 13. QxKt, P-B4; 14. Q-Q2, P-Q5; 15. P-KB4, P- B5; 16. P-KKt4, Q-K3; 17. P-B5, Q-B3; 18. R-K4, B-Kt2; 19. R-B3!, Q-B4; 20. QxPch, KxQ; 21. R-R3ch, followed by R-R7 or Kt-R7 mate.
1. Q-Q2, P-Q3; 2. B-KR6, PxP; 3. BxB, KxB; 4. PxP, Q-Q2; 5. Kt-K4, Kt-Q4; 6. B-B4, QR-Q1; 7. BxKt, PxB; 8. Kt-B6, Q-K3; 9. Q-Kt5, B-B1 (to stop Kt-Kt4); 10. QR-K1, Q-B4; 11. Q-R4, P-KR3; 12. Kt-Q4, KtxKt; 13. QxKt, P-B4; 14. Q-Q2, P-Q5; 15. P-KB4, P-B5; 16. P-KKt4, Q-K3; 17. P-B5, Q-B3; 18. R-K4, B-Kt2; 19. R-B3!, Q-B4; 20. QxPch, KxQ; 21. R-R3ch, followed by R-R7 or Kt-R7 mate.
A somewhat more difficult case is shown in Diagram 96.
A slightly more challenging case is shown in Diagram 96.
![[Illustration]](images/diag96.jpg)
Diag. 96
Diag. 96
Here the advance of the White King’s side pawns has undeniably produced weaknesses in the pawn skeleton, and these would be fatal had the Black pieces as much mobility as the White ones. But the congestion of Black’s pieces on the Queen’s side makes his defence unwieldy, and White has no difficulty in accumulating his forces on the King’s side for the final assault. The prospects are that White will be able to bring home his attack, before Black has a chance of forcing exchanges and of bringing about the end-game, which through the weakness of the White pawns would probably turn to his advantage. The play (E. Cohn-Ed. Lasker match, Berlin, 1909) is instructive, and shows how the attack should be conducted in such positions. 1. Kt-Kt3, B-Kt2; 2. K-R2, P-B3; 3. R-KKt1, Kt-Q2; 4. Kt-R4, K-B2. The concentration of the White pieces has become alarming, and threatens to be continued by Q-Q2, R-Kt2. QR-KKt1, and Kt-B5. So the Black King decides on flight, but he finds no peace on the Q side either, because there his advanced pawns soon allow White to make a breach in the Black position.
Here, the progress of the White King’s side pawns has clearly created weaknesses in the pawn structure, which would be disastrous if the Black pieces were as mobile as the White ones. However, the congestion of Black’s pieces on the Queen’s side makes their defense clumsy, allowing White to effortlessly gather forces on the King’s side for the final attack. The outlook is that White will likely launch his assault before Black can force exchanges and transition to the endgame, which, due to the weaknesses of the White pawns, would probably work in Black’s favor. The game (E. Cohn-Ed. Lasker match, Berlin, 1909) is educational and demonstrates how to conduct an attack in such situations. 1. Kt-Kt3, B-Kt2; 2. K-R2, P-B3; 3. R-KKt1, Kt-Q2; 4. Kt-R4, K-B2. The concentration of White’s pieces has become frightening, threatening to continue with Q-Q2, R-Kt2, QR-KKt1, and Kt-B5. So, the Black King decides to flee, but he finds no refuge on the Queen's side either, as his advanced pawns soon allow White to break through the Black position.
5. Kt-Kt2, K-K2; 6. Q-K2, Kt-Kt3; 7. KR-KB1, B-B1. It is Black’s intention to play P-B4 as soon as practicable, and to make an attempt at a counter demonstration on the King’s side, 8. P-K B4, K-Q1? (Black should have kept to his original intention and played P-B4); 9. PxP, QPxP; 10. Q-B2, Kt-Q2; 11. P-QR4; B-Kt2; 12. PxP, PxP; 13. RxR, BxR. Now White has achieved what he set out to do. He has opened up avenues of attack on the Queen’s side, and is ready to utilise the weakness of Black’s QBP by playing P-Kt4, on which Black must submit to opening the file for the White KR or the diagonal for the White QB. In either case White brings vastly superior forces to bear on the Black King’s position, and Black should lose. In this game Black escaped only through a mistake on the part of his opponent.
5. Nc3, N-K2; 6. Q-K2, N-N3; 7. R-KB1, B-B1. Black plans to play P-B4 as soon as possible and to try to create a counterplay on the King's side, 8. P-KB4, K-Q1? (Black should have stuck to his original plan and played P-B4); 9. PxP, QPxP; 10. Q-B2, N-Q2; 11. P-QR4; B-KN2; 12. PxP, PxP; 13. R-R, BxR. Now White has achieved his goals. He has opened up lines of attack on the Queen’s side and is ready to exploit the weakness of Black’s QBP by playing P-KN4, which forces Black to either open the file for White's Rook or the diagonal for White's Bishop. In either scenario, White can bring much stronger forces against the Black King’s position, and Black is likely to lose. In this game, Black only survived due to a mistake made by his opponent.
In the foregoing positions it was seen how fatal weaknesses can be, which are produced by the premature advance of the pawns in front of the King, on whom the opposing pieces can force their attack. When the pawns concerned are on the opposite wing to their King, the disadvantages of a premature advance are felt in a different way. The weakness concerns the pawns themselves and not the forces behind them, and is apt to cause the loss of the end-game, particularly of Rook end-games. Let us compare the positions in Diagrams 97
In the previous sections, we saw how critical weaknesses can arise from advancing the pawns in front of the King too soon, which allows the opposing pieces to launch their attack. When the pawns are on the opposite side from their King, the drawbacks of an early advance manifest differently. The weakness affects the pawns directly rather than the pieces behind them, and this often leads to losing the endgame, especially in Rook endgames. Let’s compare the positions in Diagrams 97.
![[Illustration]](images/diag97.jpg)
Diag. 97
Diag. 97
and 98. In the one case the chain of Black pawns is broken by the absence of K Kt P, in the other of the Q Kt P. The absence of the KKt pawn can lead to serious consequences in the middle game, because of the weakness of Black’s KB3 and KR3 (compare Diagram 90); it can, however, hardly become awkward in the end-game, as the pawns on the B and R files are within the protecting reach of their King.
and 98. In one case, the chain of Black pawns is interrupted by the missing K Kt P, and in the other by the missing Q Kt P. The lack of the KKt pawn can have serious repercussions in the middle game due to the vulnerability of Black’s KB3 and KR3 (see Diagram 90); however, it is unlikely to cause issues in the endgame, as the pawns on the B and R files are safely within the King's protective reach.
![[Illustration]](images/diag98.jpg)
Diag. 98
Diag. 98
On the other hand, the absence of the Q Kt P is of no consequence for the middle game. There is nothing behind it which could invite an attack. The QRP and QBP, however, are very weak for the end-game, as they are quite out of reach of the King (compare Game No. 19). I do not wish to imply that Black should have avoided the exchange at his QB3 at all cost; such an exchange has always the compensating advantage of opening a file for the Rooks, which advantage often means a favourable middle game, as will be readily understood. Further, it is often possible to get rid of the weak QRP by pushing it on, and eventually compelling the exchange of the opposing Kt P, an exchange which can usually be enforced if the Rooks have occupied the open Kt file. The pawn itself is often useful at B 3, in that it can support the advance of P-Q 4 in the centre, should it be desired, or it can, by pushing on, be brought to exercise further pressure on the opposing Kt P.
On the other hand, the lack of the Q Kt P doesn’t matter for the middle game. There’s nothing behind it to invite an attack. However, the QRP and QBP are very weak for the end game, as they are pretty far from the King (see Game No. 19). I’m not saying that Black should have avoided the exchange at his QB3 at all costs; such an exchange always has the benefit of opening a file for the Rooks, which can often lead to a better middle game, as is easily understood. Additionally, it’s often possible to eliminate the weak QRP by pushing it forward, eventually forcing the exchange of the opposing Kt P, which can usually be achieved if the Rooks have occupied the open Kt file. The pawn at B3 can be quite useful, as it can support the advance of P-Q4 in the center if needed, or it can push forward to apply more pressure on the opposing Kt P.
The break-up of the pawn position on the Q side can become awkward in the end-game and sometimes in the middle-game when the pawns can be attacked, and pieces brought to bear on the Queen’s side without leaving the King’s side denuded of forces.
The breakdown of the pawn structure on the queen's side can get tricky in the endgame and sometimes in the middlegame when the pawns are vulnerable to attack, and pieces can be focused on the queen's side without leaving the king's side weak.
This will be illustrated by the position in Diagram 99.
This will be illustrated by the position shown in Diagram 99.
![[Illustration]](images/diag99.jpg)
Diag. 99
Diag. 99
FROM A GAME FR. LAZARD-ED. LASKER (PARIS, 1914)
Here the pawn positions on both sides are broken, and the player that occupies the open files first, gets a decisive advantage. In this case it is Black’s move. We can conclude at once that White has played the opening badly. He must have lost two moves, for he has still to capture the BP and then, being White, it should be his move. This disadvantage, small as it may seem, with which White has emerged from the opening, is sufficient to bring him into the greatest difficulties. Black, of course, does not defend the pawn by B-Kt2 or B-Q2, as this would practically reduce the B to a P and, moreover, White, by R-Kt1 or Q1, would both attack the B and obtain an open file. Instead of that, Black utilises the two moves, which he has, as it were, as a gift in an otherwise equalised position, to bring both Rooks on the Kt file. This policy allows Black to occupy the seventh or eighth rank at will, and to attack the White pawns from the flank or rear, according to circumstances. This menace hampers the radius of action of the White pieces, as they must always be ready for the defence of the threatened pawns, and this gives Black by far the superior game.
Here, the pawn positions on both sides are broken, and the player who occupies the open files first gets a significant advantage. In this situation, it's Black's turn to move. We can immediately conclude that White has played the opening poorly. He must have lost two moves, because he still needs to capture the BP, and since he’s White, it should be his turn now. This disadvantage, though it may seem minor, puts White in a tough spot coming out of the opening. Black, of course, doesn’t defend the pawn with B-Kt2 or B-Q2, as that would effectively turn the B into a P. Plus, White could respond with R-Kt1 or Q1, both attacking the B and securing an open file. Instead, Black uses those two extra moves, which are a sort of gift in an otherwise equal position, to bring both Rooks to the Kt file. This strategy allows Black to control the seventh or eighth rank whenever he wants and to attack the White pawns from the side or behind, depending on the situation. This threat restricts the movement of the White pieces, as they have to stay prepared to defend the threatened pawns, giving Black a much stronger position.
The play was continued as follows: 1. … R-Kt1; 2. BxP, R-Kt7; 3. B-K4, B-K3; 4. P-QR3, KR-Kt1. The Knight’s file is now definitely in Black’s hands. White could occupy the Queen’s file, but the Black B at K3, which prevents the entry of the Rooks at Q7, makes the operation aimless. Therefore White is condemned to inactivity. On the contrary, Black’s line of action is clear. His entry on the seventh can only achieve something if White’s QBP can be deprived of its support. To do this Black has only to play P-QB4-B5 and P-KB4. This, of course, weakens Black’s KB, and the White Rooks might obtain an entry on the K file. Therefore Black will effect a timely exchange of one of his Rooks, after which his King alone will hold the K file. These considerations make the following moves clear: 5. KR-K1, P-QB4; 6. P-KR3, a further awkward necessity in positions of this kind. Before the Rook can venture out, a loophole must be provided for the King.
The game continued like this: 1. … R-Kt1; 2. BxP, R-Kt7; 3. B-K4, B-K3; 4. P-QR3, KR-Kt1. The Knight's file is now definitely under Black's control. White could take the Queen's file, but the Black Bishop at K3 prevents the Rooks from entering at Q7, making that move pointless. So, White is stuck in inaction. On the other hand, Black has a clear path ahead. His entry on the seventh rank can only be effective if he can cut off support for White's Queen's Pawn. To do this, Black just needs to play P-QB4-B5 and P-KB4. This will weaken Black’s King’s Bishop, and the White Rooks might get a chance to enter on the King’s file. That's why Black will make a timely exchange of one of his Rooks, after which his King will solely control the King’s file. These thoughts lead to the next moves: 5. KR-K1, P-QB4; 6. P-KR3, another awkward necessity in these kinds of positions. Before the Rook can move out, a safe spot must be made for the King.
6. … P-B5; 7. R-K3, R-Kt8ch; 8. RxR, RxRch; 9. K-R2, P-B4; 10. B-B3, K-B2; 11. B-K2 (threatening R-QB3), R-Kt2; 12. R-QB3, K-B3 (now BxP is not feasible on account of R-QB2); 13. P-B4. White wishes to keep the Black King from his Q5 but cannot do so permanently. Black, however, can occupy the Q file with his Rook, and confine the White King to his wing. 13. … R-Q2; 14. K-Kt3) R-Q5; 15. K-B3, K-K2; 16. R-K3, K-Q3; 17. K-Kt3, R-Q7; 18. P-B3, B-B2. R-R7 would be a mistake on account of RxBch, but the QRP cannot escape. 19. P-QR4, P-Kt3; 20. B-B3, R-R7; 21. B-Q1, B-Q4; 22. R-K2, R-R8; 23. R-Q2, R-R6; 24. R-QB2, RxRP. Now at last Black has obtained material gain, which was made possible by his command of the open Kt file. To convert it into a win by queening the extra pawn is only a matter of time.
6. … P-B5; 7. R-K3, R-Kt8ch; 8. RxR, RxRch; 9. K-R2, P-B4; 10. B-B3, K-B2; 11. B-K2 (threatening R-QB3), R-Kt2; 12. R-QB3, K-B3 (now BxP isn't possible because of R-QB2); 13. P-B4. White wants to keep the Black King from his Q5 but can't do it permanently. Black, however, can take control of the Q file with his Rook and restrict the White King to his side. 13. … R-Q2; 14. K-Kt3, R-Q5; 15. K-B3, K-K2; 16. R-K3, K-Q3; 17. K-Kt3, R-Q7; 18. P-B3, B-B2. R-R7 would be a mistake due to RxBch, but the QRP can't escape. 19. P-QR4, P-Kt3; 20. B-B3, R-R7; 21. B-Q1, B-Q4; 22. R-K2, R-R8; 23. R-Q2, R-R6; 24. R-QB2, RxRP. Now at last Black has gained material, which was made possible by his control of the open Kt file. Turning it into a win by promoting the extra pawn is just a matter of time.
We have now seen how the possession of open files reacts on the mobility of the opposing forces, forever increasing their difficulties until the positional advantage is converted into material gain. We shall meet with cases later on in which the greater mobility of minor pieces achieves the same result and find more and more proofs of the truth of the main general principles which I introduced at the outset.
We have now seen how having open files affects the movement of the opposing forces, constantly increasing their challenges until the positional advantage turns into actual benefit. We'll encounter cases later where the greater mobility of lesser pieces achieves the same outcome, and we'll find more and more evidence supporting the key general principles I introduced at the beginning.
Let us now recapitulate the chief points touched upon in the course of our deliberations:
Let’s now summarize the main points discussed during our conversations:
1. Generally speaking, attacks should only be directed to objects which cannot be moved away.
1. In general, attacks should only target objects that can't be moved away.
2. If in particular cases the attack is aimed at driving off an opposing piece from an especially favourable post that attack is unwise, if it involves the weakening the pawn position, or if pieces have to take up inferior positions in order to effect their purpose.
2. If in certain situations the attack is intended to force an opposing piece away from a particularly strong position, that attack is unwise, especially if it weakens the pawn structure or if pieces have to move to worse positions to achieve that goal.
3. Pawn moves always create weaknesses, either by leaving other unsupported pawns behind, or by giving opposing pieces access to squares formerly guarded by them, and this more specially so in front of the castled King.
3. Pawn moves always create weaknesses, either by leaving other pawns unsupported or by allowing opposing pieces to access squares that were previously protected by them, especially in front of the castled King.
4. Attacks which depend on pawn moves are only justified if overwhelming forces can be accumulated in support, as the advanced pawns might become the object of a counter attack.
4. Attacks that rely on pawn moves are only justified if you can gather overwhelming support, as the advanced pawns might become targets for a counterattack.
5. As pawn moves have very generally some drawbacks, the middle game is the pieces’ own hunting ground. As in the opening, the first consideration of sound play in the middle game is to make only such moves as do not reduce the mobility of the pieces.
5. Since pawn moves often have some downsides, the middle game is where the pieces can really thrive. Just like in the opening, the first rule of solid play in the middle game is to make moves that don't limit the pieces' mobility.
As illustrative of such manœuvres I shall now give examples from actual master play. In my annotations of these games I have tried to keep before the student’s mind constantly the main ideas underlying the different combinations which spring from general strategical principles. I thus avoid burdening his memory with a mass of detail, and bring into prominence the basic principle of each line of play, thereby developing his capacity for conducting a middle game, even after an unusual opening.
As examples of these strategies, I will now provide instances from real master games. In my notes on these matches, I've aimed to keep the key concepts in focus for the student's understanding of the various combinations that emerge from general strategic principles. This way, I don't overwhelm their memory with excessive detail, and I highlight the fundamental principle behind each line of play, thereby enhancing their ability to navigate a middle game, even after an unconventional opening.
I have fixed mainly upon such games as are illustrative of the openings treated in the first part of this book. In most cases the first moves will, therefore, not need any special remarks. The end-games, being typical examples, will only need reference to the chapters in which they have been respectively dealt with.
I focused mainly on games that illustrate the openings discussed in the first part of this book. In most cases, the initial moves won’t require any special comments. The endgames, being typical examples, will only need to refer to the chapters where they have been covered.
PART II
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES FROM MASTER TOURNAMENTS
GAME No. 1
White: Tartakower. Black: Burn.
White: Tartakower. Black: Burn.
King’s Gambit declined (compare p. 30).
King's Gambit declined (compare p. 30).
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. P-KB4 B-B4 3. Kt-KB3 P-Q3 4. PxP
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. P-KB4 B-B4 3. Kt-KB3 P-Q3 4. PxP
On principle this exchange cannot be commended, as the opening of the Queen’s file increases the Black Queen’s mobility. White derives no benefit from the KB file so long as the Black Bishop makes castling impossible. White intends to play P-B3 and P-Q4, but the manœuvre is doubtful, and the whole opening includes an inordinately large number of pawn moves. In the present game Black exposes the failings inherent to this system unequivocally.
On principle, this exchange isn’t advisable, as opening up the Queen’s file gives the Black Queen more freedom to move. White doesn't gain anything from the KB file as long as the Black Bishop prevents castling. White plans to play P-B3 and P-Q4, but this strategy is questionable, and the entire opening involves way too many pawn moves. In this game, Black clearly reveals the weaknesses of this approach.
4. … PxP 5. P-B3 Kt-QB3
4. … PxP 5. P-B3 N-QB3
Black cannot put off White’s P-Q4 by B-KKt5, for White can give a check with the Queen and unpin the Knight.
Black can't stop White's P-Q4 with B-KKt5, because White can check with the Queen and unpin the Knight.
6. P-QKt4
6. P-QKt4
The object of this move is not clear, as P-Kt5 does not win a pawn (Kt-R4; 8. KtxP; 9. Q-R5ch). It does not promote development either, and only compromises the QBP and QKtP.
The purpose of this move isn't clear, since P-Kt5 doesn't win a pawn (Kt-R4; 8. KtxP; 9. Q-R5ch). It doesn't help with development either and only weakens the QBP and QKtP.
6. … B-Kt3 7. B-Kt5 Kt-B3
6. … B-Knight3 7. B-Knight5 Knight-B3
This is aimed at the White King’s pawn, which is deprived of its natural support by the QKt. In this position Black does well to attack White’s KP rather than to defend his own, because an open King’s file can only benefit him. Being able to castle, he can occupy the file with his Rook before White has time to bring his King into safety.
This targets the White King's pawn, which is left without its usual support by the Knight. In this situation, Black is better off attacking White's King pawn instead of defending his own, since an open King’s file will work to his advantage. With the ability to castle, he can take control of the file with his Rook before White has a chance to secure his King.
8. KtxP
8. KtxP
It would have been better to protect the pawn by Q-K2 or P-Q3.
It would have been better to protect the pawn by moving the queen to King 2 or the pawn to Queen 3.
8. … Castles!
Castles!
![[Illustration]](images/diag100.jpg)
Diag. 100
Diag. 100
The beginning of a brilliant attack. Whether White exchanges the Bishop or the Knight, he is overwhelmed.
The start of a brilliant attack. No matter if White trades the Bishop or the Knight, he is at a disadvantage.
9. KtxKt
9. KtxKt
After 9. BxKt, PxB; 10. KtxP, Q-K1 wins; 10. P-Q4 would also lose because Black gains two pawns after KtxP; 11. O-O, KtxP. It is interesting to note how speedily the weakness at White’s QB3 is brought to book.
After 9. BxKt, PxB; 10. KtxP, Q-K1 wins; 10. P-Q4 would also lose because Black gains two pawns after KtxP; 11. O-O, KtxP. It’s interesting to see how quickly the issue at White’s QB3 is exposed.
9. … PxKt 10. BxP KtxP!!
9. … PxKt 10. BxP KtxP!!
Now White can neither take the Kt nor the R. In the first case Q- R5ch forces mate very soon, in the second B-B7ch, followed by B- Kt5ch or B-R3ch, wins the Queen.
Now White can’t take the knight or the rook. In the first case, moving the queen to rook 5 check quickly forces a checkmate. In the second case, bishop to bishop 7 check, followed by bishop to knight 5 check or bishop to rook 3 check, wins the queen.
11. P-Q4 Q-B3! 12. BxKt Q-R5ch 13. K-Q2 QxB 14. Q-B3 Q-R5! 15. P-Kt3
11. P-Q4 Q-B3! 12. BxKt Q-R5ch 13. K-Q2 QxB 14. Q-B3 Q-R5! 15. P-Kt3
Not QxR, because of Q-B7ch and the loss of the Queen by a discovered check by the Bishop.
Not QxR, due to Q-B7ch and the loss of the Queen from a discovered check by the Bishop.
Q-Kt4ch 16. Q-K3 Q-Q4 17. R-K1 B-Kt5 18. K-B2 P-QR4
Q-Kt4ch 16. Q-K3 Q-Q4 17. R-K1 B-Kt5 18. K-B2 P-QR4
Such is the price to pay for premature advances.
Such is the cost of jumping the gun.
19. PxP RxP 20. B-R3 P-QB4
19. PxP RxP 20. B-R3 P-QB4
Black shatters White’s pawn position, and his Bishops and Rooks have full play along open files and diagonals.
Black disrupts White’s pawn structure, and his Bishops and Rooks have complete freedom to operate along open files and diagonals.
21. PxP RxB! 22. KtxR
21. PxP RxB! 22. KtxR
or PxB, RxRPch; 23. RxR,QxRch; 24. K-Bl,B-B4.
or PxB, RxRPch; 23. RxR,QxRch; 24. K-Bl,B-B4.
22. … BxP
22. … BxP
The rest speaks for itself.
The rest is self-explanatory.
23. Q-K5 B-B4ch 24. K-Kt2 Q-Kt2ch 25. K-B1 BxKtch 26. K-Q2 R-Q1ch 27. K-K3 R-Q6ch 28. K-B2 Q-B6ch 29. K-Kt1 R-Q7 30. Q-Kt8ch B-KB1 Resigns.
23. Q-K5 B-B4ch 24. K-Kt2 Q-Kt2ch 25. K-B1 BxKtch 26. K-Q2 R-Q1ch 27. K-K3 R-Q6ch 28. K-B2 Q-B6ch 29. K-Kt1 R-Q7 30. Q-Kt8ch B-KB1 Resigns.
GAME No. 2
White: Leonhardt. Black: Marshall.
White: Leonhardt. Black: Marshall.
Falkbeer Counter Gambit (compare p. 35).
Falkbeer Counter Gambit (see p. 35).
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. P-KB4 P-Q4 3. PxQP P-K5 4. P-Q3 PxP 5. QxP Kt-KB3 6. Kt-QB3
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. P-KB4 P-Q4 3. PxQP P-K5 4. P-Q3 PxP 5. QxP Kt-KB3 6. Kt-QB3
It would be quite bad to play P-B4 and try to hold the extra pawn at the expense of development. Black would very soon occupy the King’s file with his Rook and there would be no time for White to bring his King into safety, e.g. 6. P-B4, B-QB4; 7. Kt-KB3, Castles; 8. B-K2, R-K1, and already now there are threats of Kt- K5 or Kt-Kt5 followed by B-B7ch or Kt-B7.
It would be a bad idea to play P-B4 and try to keep the extra pawn at the cost of development. Black would quickly take over the King’s file with their Rook, leaving White with no time to secure their King. For example: 6. P-B4, B-QB4; 7. Kt-KB3, Castles; 8. B-K2, R-K1, and at this point, there are already threats of Kt-K5 or Kt-Kt5 followed by B-B7ch or Kt-B7.
6. … B-QB4 7. B-Q2
White would of course like to continue with B-K3 in order to make a fight for the possession of the diagonal. He would, however, lose his chance of castling through Black’s Q-K2. This is detrimental in all such cases where the lines in the centre are open or likely to be forced open at any time.
White would definitely prefer to play B-K3 to contest the diagonal. However, this move would forfeit his opportunity to castle due to Black's Q-K2. This is disadvantageous in situations where the center lines are open or could be opened at any moment.
7. … Castles
8. Castles QKt-Q2
9. B-K2 Kt-Kt3
10. B-B3 B-KKt5
11. B-K3?
7. … Castles
8. Castles QKt-Q2
9. B-K2 Kt-Kt3
10. B-B3 B-KKt5
11. B-K3?
White has not yet completed his development, and his first care should be to bring out his KKt. This he could have done without difficulty, thus: 11. BxB, KtxB; 12. Kt-R3. After the move in the text, Black not only occupies the King’s file but gains a move in so doing.
White hasn't finished developing his pieces yet, and his first priority should be to play his KKt. He could have done this easily with: 11. BxB, KtxB; 12. Kt-R3. After the move in the text, Black not only controls the King’s file but also gets an extra move in the process.
11. … BxBch 12. QxB R-K1 13. Q-Q4 Q-Q3
11. … BxBch 12. QxB R-K1 13. Q-Q4 Q-Q3
Black’s course is obvious; he must win the QP. The forces will then be equal in material, but there will remain a
Black’s strategy is clear; he needs to win the QP. The material will then be equal, but there will still be a
![[Illustration]](images/diag101.jpg)
Diag. 101
Diag. 101
flaw in White’s position, namely the exposed KBP, and this tells in the ending.
flaw in White’s position, namely the exposed king’s bishop pawn, and this shows in the ending.
14. P-KR3
Now the square at KKt3 is unprotected, and this is serious in view of a probable Knight’s ending, where, moreover, it will sooner or later be necessary to play P-KKt3 in order to support the KBP. Both the KKtP and KBP would be weak, with the King on the other wing, and be under constant threat of being captured. The game does proceed as indicated, and the simple and logical manner in which Marshall brings home his advantage in a very short time shows convincingly how fatal a shattered pawn position can be for the end-game. Instead of the move in the text, White should have played BxB followed by Kt-B3, which would have completed his development without making another pawn move.
Now the square at KKt3 is unprotected, which is a big issue considering a likely Knight’s ending. Eventually, it will be necessary to play P-KKt3 to support the KBP. Both the KKtP and KBP would be weak, especially with the King on the other side, and they would constantly be at risk of being captured. The game progresses as expected, and the straightforward and logical way Marshall secures his advantage in a very short time clearly illustrates how damaging a broken pawn structure can be for the endgame. Instead of the move mentioned, White should have played BxB followed by Kt-B3, which would have completed his development without making another pawn move.
14. … BxB 15. KtxB QR-Q1 16. KR-KI RxR 17. RxR QKtxP 18. KtxKt KtxKt 19. P-KKt3 P-KR3
14. … BxB 15. KtxB QR-Q1 16. KR-KI RxR 17. RxR QKtxP 18. KtxKt KtxKt 19. P-KKt3 P-KR3
making a loophole for the King. In this case the move is correct, as the threat of mate ties the Black Rook to his rank. It is wrong to make a loophole, as weak players are fond of doing, as early as possible “in case,” before it is shown that there will be a need for it, or that there will be a Rook ending.
making a gap for the King. In this case, the move is right, as the threat of checkmate keeps the Black Rook tied to its rank. It’s a mistake to create a gap, as less experienced players tend to do, too early “just in case,” before it’s clear that it’s necessary or that there will be a Rook ending.
20. P-R3
White is afraid of playing 20. QxP on account of Kt-Kt5, which threatens KtxBP followed by Q-QB3. 21. QxP would not be a sufficient defence because of Q-B4 threatening mate, and on the other hand 21. Q-R4 would conjure up a dangerous attack, beginning with P-QKt4. When the players castle on different wings, there is always the danger of the opponent sacrificing pawns and opening up files for his Rooks and Q against the castled King. The game then assumes a wild character, and as matters are generally settled one way or another in the middle- game, end-game considerations, both with regard to number and position of pawns, can be disregarded. Experience has shown that the player who develops his attack first is likely to win, and that it is of little use to submit tamely to an assault of this kind without attempting a counter attack.
White is hesitant to play 20. QxP because of Kt-Kt5, which threatens KtxBP followed by Q-QB3. 21. QxP wouldn’t provide enough defense due to Q-B4 threatening checkmate, while on the other hand, 21. Q-R4 would create a dangerous attack starting with P-QKt4. When players castle on opposite sides, there’s always a risk of the opponent sacrificing pawns to open files for their Rooks and Queen against the castled King. The game then takes on a chaotic nature, and since outcomes are typically determined in the middle game, end-game factors, regarding both the number and position of pawns, can be ignored. Experience shows that the player who launches their attack first is more likely to win, and it’s generally ineffective to just accept this kind of assault without trying a counterattack.
Such games are very difficult for the beginner to understand. There is about them something violent and difficult to estimate, and years of practice are necessary in order to gain the judgment required for weighing up the possibilities of attack and counter attack, where the Kings have castled on opposite wings.
Such games are really hard for beginners to grasp. There’s something intense and hard to assess about them, and years of practice are needed to develop the judgment required to evaluate the chances of attack and counterattack when the Kings have castled on opposite sides.
20. … P-R3 21. R-Q1 Kt-B3 22. QxQ RxQ 23. RxR PxR 24. Kt-Q4 Kt-K5 25. Kt-K2 K-B1
20. … P-R3 21. R-Q1 Knight to B3 22. Queen takes Queen Rook takes Queen 23. Rook takes Rook Pawn takes Rook 24. Knight to Q4 Knight to K5 25. Knight to K2 King to B1
The Black King now pushes forward irresistibly, and attacks the weakened pawns on the King’s wing. The White King cannot get any nearer, as a check by the Black Kt would win a pawn at once. The end is easy.
The Black King now moves forward forcefully and targets the weakened pawns on the King's side. The White King can't get any closer, as a check from the Black Knight would capture a pawn immediately. The end is straightforward.
26. P-B3 K-K2 27. K-B2 K-K3 28. P-Kt3 Kt-B7 29. Kt-Q4ch K-B3 30. P-KR4 P-KR4
26. P-B3 K-K2 27. K-B2 K-K3 28. P-Kt3 Kt-B7 29. Kt-Q4ch K-B3 30. P-KR4 P-KR4
Now the P at Kt3 is “backward” and therefore lost.
Now the P at Kt3 is "backward" and therefore lost.
31. P-B4 Kt-K5 32. Kt-K2 K-B4 33. K-Q3 Kt-B7ch 34. K-B3 K-Kt5 35. P-Kt4 Kt-K5ch 36. K-Q4 KtxP Resigns.
31. P-B4 Kt-K5 32. Kt-K2 K-B4 33. K-Q3 Kt-B7ch 34. K-B3 K-Kt5 35. P-Kt4 Kt-K5ch 36. K-Q4 KtxP Resigns.
GAME No. 3
White: Spielmann. Black: Prokes.
White: Spielmann. Black: Prokes.
Vienna Game (compare p. 35).
Vienna Game (see p. 35).
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 3. P-B4 P-Q4 4. PxKP KtxP 5. Q-B3
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 3. P-B4 P-Q4 4. PxKP KtxP 5. Q-B3
It is contrary to the principles governing sound play to bring out the Queen early in the game. The opponent frequently has an opportunity of gaining a move by driving off the Queen, developing a minor piece at the same time. In the present case Black might have gained the advantage in the following way: 5. … Q Kt-B3. Now if: 6 KtxKt then Kt-Q5!; 7 Q-Q3?, PxKt; 8 QxP?, B-KB4. If, however, 6 B-Kt5, Black obtains the better game by playing 6. … KtxKt; 7 KtPxKt, Q-R5ch; 8 P-Kt3, Q-K5ch; 9 QxQ, PxQ; 10 BxKtch, PxB, with two Bishops on open diagonals. There is no harm in the doubled pawn, as White cannot attack it. Black’s immediate threat is B-R3 or KB4, which exerts pressure at Q6, and White will find it difficult to advance his QP.
It's not a good idea to bring out the Queen early in the game. The opponent often has a chance to gain a move by forcing the Queen back while simultaneously developing a minor piece. In this situation, Black could have gained the advantage like this: 5. … Q Kt-B3. Now if: 6 KtxKt then Kt-Q5!; 7 Q-Q3?, PxKt; 8 QxP?, B-KB4. However, if 6 B-Kt5, Black gets the better position by playing 6. … KtxKt; 7 KtPxKt, Q-R5ch; 8 P-Kt3, Q-K5ch; 9 QxQ, PxQ; 10 BxKtch, PxB, leaving Black with two Bishops on open diagonals. The doubled pawn isn't a problem, as White can't attack it. Black's immediate threat is B-R3 or KB4, which applies pressure on Q6, making it tough for White to push his QP forward.
5. … P-KB4
This move is open to discussion, as the Kt which it means to support can be driven away by P-Q3. On the other hand, if White does play his QP to Q3, Black can prevent its further advance by P-Q5, after which the White KP is insecure and the KB somewhat shut in.
This move is up for debate, as the knight that it supports can be pushed back by moving the pawn to Q3. On the flip side, if White does push his pawn to Q3, Black can block its progress by moving the pawn to Q5, after which White's king pawn is vulnerable and the king bishop is somewhat confined.
6. P-Q3 KtxKt 7. PxKt P-Q5 8. Q-B2!
6. P-Q3 KxK 7. PxK P-Q5 8. Q-B2!
White offers his QBP in order to be able to strengthen his centre by P-Q4, and to free his pieces. To protect his QBP would be inferior, e.g. 8 Kt-K2, Kt-B3 or 8 B-Kt2?, PxP; 9 BxP, B-Kt5!; 10 BxB, QxR5ch; 11 Q-B2, QxBch; 12 Q-Q2, Q-Q5.
White plays his pawn to strengthen his center with pawn to d4 and to free his pieces. Protecting his pawn would be a worse move, for example, 8 Knight to f2, Knight to b3 or 8 Bishop to knight 2?, pawn takes pawn; 9 Bishop takes pawn, Bishop to knight 5!; 10 Bishop takes Bishop, Queen takes rook on h5 check; 11 Queen to b2, Queen takes Bishop check; 12 Queen to queen 2, Queen to queen 5.
8. … PxP?
PxP?
It would have been better, of course, to continue developing with Kt-B3, which at the same time maintains the pressure on Q5.
It would have been better, of course, to keep developing with Kt-B3, which also puts pressure on Q5.
9. P-Q4 B-K3
10. Kt-R3
9. P-Q4 B-K3
10. N-R3
Intending Kt-B4 with a view to exchanging the Bishop. After that, Black’s position on White squares is weak specially on the diagonal QR7, KKt1, which was opened by Black’s fifth move, and on which the White Bishop can soon operate. The game is instructive in showing the development of that idea.
Intending Kt-B4 to swap the Bishop. After that, Black's position on the white squares is weak, especially on the diagonal QR7, KKt1, which opened up after Black's fifth move, and where the White Bishop can start to make a move. The game is a good lesson in demonstrating how that idea develops.
10. … B-K2 11. Kt-B4 Q-Q2 12. KtxB QxKt 13. B-Q3 P-KKt3
10. … B-K2 11. Kt-B4 Q-Q2 12. KtxB QxKt 13. B-Q3 P-KKt3
Black cannot prevent White’s threat of Q-K2 and B-B4.
Black can’t stop White’s threat of Q-K2 and B-B4.
14. Q-K2 Q-Q4
![[Illustration]](images/diag102.jpg)
Diag. 102
Diag. 102
15. Castles QxQPch
15. Castles
Black is obliging. The opening of files in the centre is favourable for White, as he can make use of his Rooks in the combined attack. Instead of the move in the text, development with Kt-B3 and Castles QR was the last, though slender, chance of saving the game.
Black is cooperative. The opening of files in the center is beneficial for White, as he can utilize his Rooks in a combined attack. Instead of the move mentioned, developing with Knight to Bishop 3 and castling queen’s side was the final, albeit slim, chance to save the game.
16. B-K3 Q-Q4
If QxP, Q-B2 followed by B-Q4, B-K4, KR-K1 and QR-Q1. Black has no sufficient means of defence to oppose this massing of forces.
If QxP, Q-B2 followed by B-Q4, B-K4, KR-K1 and QR-Q1. Black has no adequate way to defend against this buildup of forces.
17. QR-Q1 Q-R4 18. BxBP
17. QR-Q1 Q-R4 18. BxBP
The end is swift, and easy to understand.
The end is quick and easy to grasp.
18. … R-B1 19. Q-Kt4 PxB 20. Q-R5ch R-B2 21. P-K6 Resigns.
18. … R-B1 19. Q-Kt4 PxB 20. Q-R5ch R-B2 21. P-K6 Resigns.
GAME No. 4
White: Tarrasch. Black: Capablanca.
White: Tarrasch. Black: Capablanca.
Giuoco Piano
Italian Game
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-B4 B-B4 4. P-B3
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-B4 B-B4 4. P-B3
The beginning of interesting operations in the centre. The steady development with: 4. P-Q3, P-Q3; 5. Kt-B3, Kt-B3; 6. B-KKt5, B-K3 or Castles tends to a draw from the very first, and is thought dull.
The start of engaging moves in the center. The consistent progression with: 4. P-Q3, P-Q3; 5. Kt-B3, Kt-B3; 6. B-KKt5, B-K3 or Castles seems to lead to a draw from the outset and is considered boring.
4. … Kt-B3
4. … Kt-B3
Black can avoid the exchange of pawns, which White tries to bring about after P-Q4, by playing his Queen to K2. This covers his KP a second time, and White’s P-Q4 can be answered with B-Kt3. White’s QBP then obstructs the Kt’s natural development. In a game von Schewe-Teichmann (Berlin, 1907) the position discussed on p. 117 was reached after the following moves: 5. Castles, P- Q3; 6. P-Q4, B-Kt3; 7. P-QR4, P-QR3; 8. P-R5, B-R2.
Black can avoid trading pawns, which White is trying to achieve after moving P-Q4, by moving his Queen to K2. This protects his KP again, and White’s P-Q4 can then be countered with B-Kt3. White’s QBP blocks the Knight’s natural development. In a game between von Schewe and Teichmann (Berlin, 1907), the position discussed on p. 117 was reached after the following moves: 5. Castles, P-Q3; 6. P-Q4, B-Kt3; 7. P-QR4, P-QR3; 8. P-R5, B-R2.
5. P-Q4 PxP 6. PxP B-Kt5ch
5. P-Q4 PxP 6. PxP B-Kt5ch
![[Illustration]](images/diag103.jpg)
Diag. 103
Diag. 103
7. B-Q2
The pawn sacrifice by 7. Kt-B3, KtxKP; 8. Castles! is much more interesting and more in keeping with the spirit of the opening. [Footnote: The following two short games will give an idea of the various lines of attack which are to be found in this opening:
The pawn sacrifice with 7. Kt-B3, KtxKP; 8. Castles! is much more interesting and aligns better with the spirit of the opening. [Footnote: The following two short games will give an idea of the various lines of attack that can be found in this opening:
a. Howell-Michell (cable match, England—America, 1907): 8. … BxKt; 9. P-Q5 (Moller attack), B-B3; 10. R-K1, Kt-K2; 11. RxKt, P-Q3; 12. B-Kt5, BxB; 13. KtxB, B-B4 (the only chance of a draw would be this: Castles; 14. KtxRP, KxKt; 15. QR5ch, K-Kt1; 16. R- R4, P-KB4!; 17. B-K2, Kt-Kt3!; 18. Q-R7ch, K-B2; 19. R-R6, Kt-B5; 20. B-R5ch, KtxB; 21. Q-Kt6 with perpetual check); 14. Q-B3,Q-Q2 (BxR; 15. QxPch followed by Q-K6ch and QxB); 15. B-Kt5!, QxB; 16. QxB, P-KB3; 17. QR-K1, PxKt; 18. RxKtch and mate in a few moves.
a. Howell-Michell (cable match, England—America, 1907): 8. … BxKt; 9. P-Q5 (Moller attack), B-B3; 10. R-K1, Kt-K2; 11. RxKt, P-Q3; 12. B-Kt5, BxB; 13. KtxB, B-B4 (the only chance for a draw would be this: Castles; 14. KtxRP, KxKt; 15. QR5ch, K-Kt1; 16. R- R4, P-KB4!; 17. B-K2, Kt-Kt3!; 18. Q-R7ch, K-B2; 19. R-R6, Kt-B5; 20. B-R5ch, KtxB; 21. Q-Kt6 with perpetual check); 14. Q-B3, Q-Q2 (BxR; 15. QxPch followed by Q-K6ch and QxB); 15. B-Kt5!, QxB; 16. QxB, P-KB3; 17. QR-K1, PxKt; 18. RxKtch and mate in a few moves.
b. X v. Y, first 10 moves as before: 11. RxKt, Castles; 12. P-Q6, PxP 13. B-KKt5, Kt-B4; 14. Q-Q5!, BxB; 15. KtxB, Kt-R3 (QxKt; 16. QxPch); 16. Q R-K1, resigns.] White obtains a quick development and prevents Black from freeing his game by playing P-Q4. After 8. … BxKt; 9. P-Q5 follows (Moller attack), and after 9. … B- B3, White wins back his piece by R-K1 (10. PxKt would not be good, as Black could free his game by KtPxP and P-Q4). On the other hand, after 8. … KtxKt; PxKt, White in addition gains a move, as BxP is countered by Q-Kt3.
b. X v. Y, first 10 moves as before: 11. R takes Knight, castles; 12. Pawn to Q6, Pawn takes Pawn 13. Bishop to Knight 5, Knight to Bishop 4; 14. Queen to Queen 5!, Bishop takes Bishop; 15. Knight takes Bishop, Knight to R3 (Queen takes Knight; 16. Queen takes Pawn check); 16. Rook to King 1, resigns.] White gets a quick development and stops Black from freeing his game by playing Pawn to Q4. After 8. … Bishop takes Knight; 9. Pawn to Q5 follows (Moller attack), and after 9. … Bishop to Bishop 3, White gets his piece back by Rook to King 1 (10. Pawn takes Knight would not be good, as Black could free his game by Knight takes Pawn and Pawn to Q4). On the other hand, after 8. … Knight takes Knight; Pawn takes Knight, White also gains a move, as Bishop takes Pawn is countered by Queen to Knight 3.
As played here, Black succeeds in playing P-Q4, and the game is even. Indeed the isolated QP is a weakness in the White position.
As played here, Black manages to play P-Q4, and the game is balanced. In fact, the isolated QP is a weakness in the White position.
7. … BxBch
8. QKtxB P-Q4!
9. PxP KKtxP
10. Q-Kt3 QKt-K2
11. Castles KR Castles
12. KR-K1 P-QB3
7. … BxBch
8. QKtxB P-Q4!
9. PxP KKtxP
10. Q-Kt3 QKt-K2
11. Castles KR Castles
12. KR-K1 P-QB3
Now the Knight is securely posted in the centre, and Black can accumulate forces for the attack on the White QP, possibly by Q- Kt3, R-Q1 and Kt-B4.
Now the Knight is firmly positioned in the center, and Black can gather strength to attack the White Queen's Pawn, possibly with Queen to Knight 3, Rook to Queen 1, and Knight to Bishop 4.
13. P-QR4
in order to drive the Queen from her Kt3, but this advance is “three-edged,” as Master Gregory would say, and the pawn is sure to prove weak in the end-game.
in order to drive the Queen from her Kt3, but this advance is “three-edged,” as Master Gregory would say, and the pawn is sure to prove weak in the end-game.
13. … Q-Kt3 14. Q-R3 B-K3 15. P-R5 Q-B2 16. Kt-K4
13. … Q-Kt3 14. Q-R3 B-K3 15. P-R5 Q-B2 16. Kt-K4
Kt-KKt5 would seem to be stronger here. B-B4 would then be answered by 17. B-Q3. After BxB, 18. QxB, White obtains opportunities for a King’s side attack, in which the Rook could co-operate via K4 and Kt4 or R4.
Kt-KKt5 seems to be stronger here. B-B4 would then be met by 17. B-Q3. After BxB, 18. QxB, White gains chances for a King's side attack, where the Rook could support through K4 and Kt4 or R4.
16. … QR-Q1 17. Kt-B5 B-B1 18. P-KKt3?
16. … QR-Q1 17. Kt-B5 B-B1 18. P-KKt3?
This produces weak points at KB3 and KR3, and there being as yet no definite threat in Black’s Kt-B5, should have been avoided. It is of course difficult to formulate a plan of attack, for there is no weak place in Black’s armour. In any case White could safely have played QR-Q1 and Q2 in order to double the Rooks on the King’s file or Queen’s file according to circumstances. But now as soon as a Rook moves to Q1—and that will have to be done in the end, to support the weak QP—Black’s B-Kt5 might become awkward.
This creates vulnerabilities at KB3 and KR3, and since there's currently no clear threat from Black’s Kt-B5, this should have been avoided. It’s obviously tough to come up with a plan of attack, because there’s no weak spot in Black’s defense. In any case, White could have safely played QR-Q1 and Q2 to double the Rooks on either the King’s or Queen’s file depending on the situation. But now, as soon as a Rook moves to Q1—and that will have to happen eventually to support the weak QP—Black’s B-Kt5 could become problematic.
18. … Kt-B4 19. QR-Q1 Kt-Q3! 20. BxKt Kt-Kt4
18. … Kt-B4 19. QR-Q1 Kt-Q3! 20. BxKt Kt-Kt4
avoiding an isolated pawn in a subtle manner.
avoiding a lone pawn in a clever way.
![[Illustration]](images/diag104.jpg)
Diag. 104
Diag. 104
21. Q-Kt4 RxB 22. Kt-Q3 B-Kt5 23. QKt-K5 P-R4 24. KtxB PxKt 25. Kt-R4
21. Q-Kt4 RxB 22. Kt-Q3 B-Kt5 23. QKt-K5 P-R4 24. KtxB PxKt 25. Kt-R4
Kt-K5 would be answered by KR-Q1; 26. KtxP, KtxP threatening both Kt-B6ch and Kt-B7. If White stops both threats with Q-B3, Kt-K7ch wins.
Kt-K5 would be answered by KR-Q1; 26. KtxP, KtxP threatening both Kt-B6ch and Kt-B7. If White stops both threats with Q-B3, Kt-K7ch wins.
25. … KR-Q1 26. R-K7 Q-Q3
Now Black foregoes his well-earned advantage. He overlooks White’s subtle move 28. P-R6. 26 Q-B1 was indicated. White’s Queen’s Pawn could not escape, and there was time to dislodge the White Rook from the seventh by R-Q2, e g. 26. … Q-B1; 27. Q- Kt3!, QR-Q2; 28. Q-K3, RxR; 29. QxR, KtxP.
Now Black gives up his hard-earned advantage. He misses White’s clever move 28. P-R6. 26. Q-B1 was the better choice. White’s Queen’s Pawn couldn’t escape, and there was time to move the White Rook from the seventh rank by playing R-Q2, for example, 26. … Q-B1; 27. Q-Kt3!, QR-Q2; 28. Q-K3, RxR; 29. QxR, KtxP.
27. QxQ KtxQ 28. P-R6! PxP 29. RxRP Kt-Kt4 30. RxRP KtxP 31. K-B1 P-Kt4 32. Kt-Kt2 Kt-B6 33. RxR PxR!
27. QxQ KtxQ 28. P-R6! PxP 29. RxRP Kt-Kt4 30. RxRP KtxP 31. K-B1 P-Kt4 32. Kt-Kt2 Kt-B6 33. RxR PxR!
The pawn threatens to queen. Taking the Rook’s pawn would not be so good, as it would displace the Knight. White would not only regain the pawn easily with Kt-K3, but would also get his King into play.
The pawn is about to promote to a queen. Capturing the Rook’s pawn wouldn’t be a great move, as it would push the Knight out of position. White could not only quickly reclaim the pawn with Kt-K3 but also activate his King.
34. Kt-K1 R-K1
34. Kt-K1 R-K1
Here R-QB1 affords winning possibilities for Black. On account of the threat of R-B8, the exchange of Knights by White would be forced, and his game would have been badly cramped by the Black KBP, e.g. 34. … R-QB1; 35. KtxKt, PxKt; 36. R-R1 (K-K1?, R-B7; 37. R-Q6, R-K7ch; 38. K-B1, RxP; 39. K-K1, R-K7ch; 40. K-B1, R- K4), R-Kt1; 37. R-Kt1, R-Kt6. After the move in the text the game is drawn.
Here R-QB1 gives Black a chance to win. Because of the threat of R-B8, White would have to exchange Knights, and his position would be severely restricted by the Black KBP. For example, 34. … R-QB1; 35. KtxKt, PxKt; 36. R-R1 (K-K1?, R-B7; 37. R-Q6, R-K7ch; 38. K-B1, RxP; 39. K-K1, R-K7ch; 40. K-B1, R-K4), R-Kt1; 37. R-Kt1, R-Kt6. After the move in the text, the game ends in a draw.
35. KtxKt PxKt 36. R-Q6 R-QB1
35. KtxKt PxKt 36. R-Q6 R-QB1
There is nothing in this move, as the Black passed pawn is now attacked.
There’s nothing in this move since the Black passed pawn is now under attack.
37. K-K1 R-K1ch
38. K-B1 R-QB1
Drawn.
37. K-K1 R-K1ch
38. K-B1 R-QB1
Draw.
GAME No. 5
White: R. C. Griffith. Black: W. H. Gunston.
White: R. C. Griffith. Black: W. H. Gunston.
Giuoco Piano.
Giuoco Piano Opening.
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-B4 B-B4 4. P-B3 Kt-B3 5. P-Q3
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. N-KB3 N-QB3 3. B-B4 B-B4 4. P-B3 N-B3 5. P-Q3
P-Q4 would seem to be the logical consequence of P-B3, and therefore preferable. After the text move Black will sooner or later be able to enforce the advance of his own pawn to Q4, and his pieces will then have the greater mobility.
P-Q4 seems like the logical outcome of P-B3, so it's the better choice. After the text move, Black will eventually be able to push his pawn to Q4, and his pieces will then have more flexibility.
5. … P-Q3
Here Black might have played P-Q4 at once. For if White takes the pawn, he leaves Black in possession of the pawn in the centre. If he does not do so but plays B-QKt5 instead, Black’s reply would be Q-K2 and the exchange of pawns at K 5 would follow. White’s P- B3 is then clearly a lost move.
Here, Black could have played pawn to queen's four right away. If White takes the pawn, Black would then have a pawn in the center. If White decides not to take the pawn and instead plays bishop to queen's knight five, Black's response would be queen to king's two, leading to the exchange of pawns at king five. White's pawn to bishop three would then clearly be a bad move.
6. B-K3 B-Kt3 7. QKt-Q2 Kt-K2 8. Kt-B1 P-B3 9. Q-K2 Castles 10. Kt-Kt3 P-Q4 11. PxP PxP 12. B-Kt3 Kt-Kt3
6. B-K3 B-Kt3 7. QKt-Q2 Kt-K2 8. Kt-B1 P-B3 9. Q-K2 Castles 10. Kt-Kt3 P-Q4 11. PxP PxP 12. B-Kt3 Kt-Kt3
Black has now the superior position on account of his pawn centre.
Black now has the advantage due to his strong pawn center.
13. Castles KR B-B2 14. B-Kt5 P-KR3 15. BxKt PxB
13. Castles KR B-B2 14. B-Kt5 P-KR3 15. BxKt PxB
There is nothing in the weakness at Black’s KB3 and KR3 caused by the disappearance of his KKt Pawn, as White has lost his KB. On the contrary the open file should be a distinct asset, for, having a strong centre, Black’s pieces are more mobile and he is more likely to get an attack.
There’s nothing in the weakness at Black’s KB3 and KR3 caused by the loss of his KKt Pawn since White has lost his KB. In fact, the open file should be a clear advantage because, with a strong center, Black’s pieces are more mobile and he’s more likely to launch an attack.
16. Q-K3 K-R2 17. P-KR3
in order to play Kt-R5, which otherwise would be answered by B- Kt5.
in order to play Kt-R5, which would otherwise be answered by B-Kt5.
17. … KR-Kt1 18. K-R1 P-B4 19. Kt-R5 B-K3
17. … KR-Kt1 18. K-R1 P-B4 19. Kt-R5 B-K3
BxP was threatened.
BxP was under threat.
20. R-KKt1 P-B5
20. R-KKt1 P-B5
![[Illustration]](images/diag105.jpg)
Diag. 105
Diag. 105
P-K5 would seem to be better, as it opens a diagonal for the KB, and a diagonal, too, for the QB, as White has to exchange the pawns. Indeed Black would soon have obtained a winning advantage, e.g. 20. … P-K5; 21. PxP (Kt-R2, Q-R5; 22. Q-K2, Kt-K4), BPxP; 22. Kt-R2, Q-R5; 23. Q-K2 (P-KKt4 or B-Q1, P-B4), Kt-K4, threatening Kt-Kt5 and Kt-Q6. As it is, White gains a little time, although Black’s position still remains superior.
P-K5 seems to be a better move since it opens up a diagonal for the king’s bishop and also for the queen’s bishop, especially since White will have to exchange the pawns. In fact, Black would quickly gain a winning advantage, for example: 20. … P-K5; 21. PxP (Knight to R2, Queen to R5; 22. Queen to K2, Knight to K4), Black plays BPxP; 22. Knight to R2, Queen to R5; 23. Queen to K2 (with options of P-KKt4 or Bishop to Q1, P-B4), Knight to K4, threatening Knight to Kt5 and Knight to Q6. As things stand, White buys some time, but Black's position is still better.
21. Q-K2 Q-K2 22. P-Kt4 P-B3
21. Q-K2 Q-K2 22. P-Kt4 P-B3
to prevent P-Kt5.
to block P-Kt5.
23. R-Kt2 QR-K1 24. R-K1 Q-B2 25. Kt-Q2
23. R-Kt2 QR-K1 24. R-K1 Q-B2 25. Kt-Q2
intending to play P-B3, thus retarding Black’s P-K5, which is still hanging over White like Damocles’ sword. The move, however, lets in the Knight.
intending to play P-B3, thus delaying Black’s P-K5, which is still looming over White like Damocles’ sword. However, the move allows the Knight to come in.
25. … Kt-R5 26. R-R2 P-B4 27. P-B3 P-K5
25. … Kt-R5 26. R-R2 P-B4 27. P-B3 P-K5
Now this move is no longer feasible, as White’s brilliant sacrifice demonstrates. To make the move possible, long preparations would have been necessary, such as: R-Kt3, B-Q2-B3, etc.
Now this move isn't possible anymore, as White’s brilliant sacrifice shows. To make the move work, a lot of preparation would have been needed, like: R-Kt3, B-Q2-B3, etc.
28. QPxP QPxP 29. KtxKP PxKt 30. QxPch R-Kt3 31. R(R2)-K2
28. QPxP QPxP 29. KtxKP PxKt 30. QxPch R-Kt3 31. R(R2)-K2
The scene has changed with startling suddenness. White has open files and diagonals for all his forces, whilst Black’s pieces are immobilised. Whatever he plays, Black must lose the piece he has gained.
The scene has changed with shocking speed. White has open files and diagonals for all his pieces, while Black's pieces are stuck. No matter what he plays, Black is destined to lose the piece he has gained.
31. … B-Q3 32. Q-Q3 BxB 33. RxR Q-B5
31. … B-Q3 32. Q-Q3 BxB 33. RxR Q-B5
He cannot play B-Q4 on account of Q-Q4.
He can't play B-Q4 because of Q-Q4.
34. Kt-B6ch K-Kt2 35. QR-K7ch BxR 36. RxBch KxKt 37. Q-Q6ch Resigns.
34. Kt-B6ch K-Kt2 35. QR-K7ch BxR 36. RxBch KxKt 37. Q-Q6ch Resigns.
GAME No. 6
White: Mason. Black: Gunsberg.
White: Mason. Black: Gunsberg.
Giuoco Piano.
Giuoco Piano.
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-B4 B-B4 4. P-Q3 P-Q3 5. B-K3 B-Kt3 6. P-B3 Kt-B3 7. QKt-Q2 Q-K2 8. P-QR4
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. N-KB3 N-QB3 3. B-B4 B-B4 4. P-Q3 P-Q3 5. B-K3 B-Kt3 6. P-B3 N-B3 7. QN-Q2 Q-K2 8. P-QR4
A lost move. The logical continuation is Kt-B1-Kt3 and Castles.
A lost move. The logical next steps are Knight to B1, Knight to 3, and then castles.
8. … B-K3 9. B-QKt5 BxB
8. … B-K3 9. B-QKt5 BxB
Generally speaking, exchanges such as this are doubtful. However, in the present case, although it opens the B file for White, White cannot prevent Black from obtaining the same advantage.
Generally speaking, exchanges like this are questionable. However, in this case, even though it opens the B file for White, White can't stop Black from gaining the same advantage.
10. PxB P-QR3
10. PxB P-QR3
Black gives up the move he has gained. There is no justification for this, as nothing prevents him from proceeding with his development at once with 10. … Castles.
Black gives up the advantage he's gained. There's no reason for this, as nothing stops him from continuing his development right away with 10. … Castles.
11. BxKtch PxB 12. P-QKt4
11. BxKtch PxB 12. P-QKt4
White is anxious lest his KtP should be made “backward” by P-QR4 and P-B4. This is one of the drawbacks of the premature advance of the QRP.
White is worried that his KtP will be made “backward” by P-QR4 and P-B4. This is one of the downsides of advancing the QRP too soon.
12. … Castles KR 13. Castles Kt-Kt5 14. Q-K2 P-KB4 15. PxP BxP 16. P-K4 B-Q2 17. Kt-B4 Kt-B3 18. Kt-K3 P-Kt3 19. P-B4
12. … Castles KR 13. Castles Kt-Kt5 14. Q-K2 P-KB4 15. PxP BxP 16. P-K4 B-Q2 17. Kt-B4 Kt-B3 18. Kt-K3 P-Kt3 19. P-B4
This creates a weakness at Q4.
This creates a vulnerability at Q4.
Unimportant as it appears to be, it is the cause of the loss of the game, as the opposing Knight gets in ultimately. The doubling of the Rooks on the KB file would seem to be the best plan.
Unimportant as it seems, it is the reason for losing the game, as the opposing Knight manages to get in after all. Doubling the Rooks on the King’s Bishop file appears to be the best strategy.
19. … Kt-R4 20. P-Kt3
19. … Kt-R4 20. P-Kt3
White’s weaknesses at KB3 and KR3 are more damaging than the corresponding ones in the Black camp, as Black still possesses a Bishop of the same colour as the weakened squares. But the move is now compulsory; for were White to allow the Black Knight to his KB5, and to drive him off then with P-Kt3, the Knight could play to his R6 and prevent the doubling of the White Rooks.
White’s weaknesses at KB3 and KR3 are more harmful than the similar issues in the Black camp, since Black still has a Bishop that matches the weakened squares. However, the move is now necessary; if White lets the Black Knight get to KB5 and then drives it away with P-Kt3, the Knight could move to R6 and stop the doubling of White's Rooks.
20. … B-R6 21. R-B2 Kt-Kt2 22. Q-Kt2
20. … B-R6 21. R-B2 Kt-Kt2 22. Q-Kt2
White begins to operate in the centre and on the Q wing, as his position on the K side begins to be doubtful. The intention is to play P-Q4, which, however, Black opposes at once.
White starts to move in the center and on the queen side, as his position on the king side becomes uncertain. The plan is to play pawn to queen four, but Black immediately counters it.
22. … Kt-K3
22. … Kt-K3
![[Illustration]](images/diag106.jpg)
Diag. 106
Diag. 106
If now White plays P-Q4, he loses a piece by PxP; 24. KtxP?, RxR; 25. KxR, Q-B3ch.
If White plays pawn to queen's four now, he loses a piece with pawn takes pawn; 24. knight takes pawn?, rook takes rook; 25. king takes rook, queen to bishop three check.
23. R-K1
The Rook has no future here, and R-Q1, in order to play P-Q4, is more logical. But as Black obviously threatens to double his Rooks on the KB file, it would be advisable to play for an exchange of Rooks, with: Kt-Kt2, QR-B1 and Kt-K1.
The Rook has no future here, and R-Q1, in order to play P-Q4, makes more sense. But since Black clearly threatens to double his Rooks on the KB file, it would be wise to aim for an exchange of Rooks, with: Kt-Kt2, QR-B1 and Kt-K1.
23. … R-B2 24. QR-K2 QR-KB1 25. Kt-K1 Kt-Q5 26. R-Q2 Q-Kt4 27. Kt(K3)-Kt2 BxKt 28. KxB
23. … R-B2 24. QR-K2 QR-KB1 25. Kt-K1 Kt-Q5 26. R-Q2 Q-Kt4 27. Kt(K3)-Kt2 BxKt 28. KxB
KtxB is frustrated by Kt-B6ch.
KtxB is frustrated with Kt-B6ch.
28. … Q-K6
All the Black forces are now in action, and White has no defence, as his pieces can hardly move.
All the Black pieces are in play now, and White has no defense, since his pieces can barely move.
29. K-B1 Kt-Kt6!
Resigns.
29. K-B1 Kt-Kt6!
Gives up.
If R-K2 or B2, there follows RxRch; 31. RxR, Kt-Q7ch; 32. QxKt, QxQ.
If R-K2 or B2, then RxRch; 31. RxR, Kt-Q7ch; 32. QxKt, QxQ.
GAME No. 7
White: Marshall. Black: Tarrasch.
White: Marshall. Black: Tarrasch.
Max Lange Attack.
Max Lange Attack.
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. P-Q4 PxP 3. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 4. B-QB4 B-B4 5. Castles Kt-B3
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. P-Q4 PxP 3. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 4. B-QB4 B-B4 5. Castles Kt-B3
Black can avoid the complications of the Max Lange attack by 5. … P-Q3. In that case White cannot recover the pawn, and in order to develop his QKt effectively, would have to play P-B3, aiming at rapid development in return, after 6. … PxP; 7. KtxP. But Black can frustrate this plan either by pushing his pawn to Q6, so that the QKt is barred from the square B3, or by playing B-KKt5 with this probable continuation: 7. Q-Kt3, BxKt; 8. BxPch, K-B1; 9. PxB, Kt-B3, and Black has the better game, for White’s King’s side is broken up and his pieces undeveloped, while Black has prospects of attack on the open KB file.
Black can sidestep the complexities of the Max Lange attack by playing 5. … P-Q3. In that case, White can't regain the pawn and will need to play P-B3 to develop his knight effectively, aiming for rapid development afterward, following 6. … PxP; 7. KtxP. However, Black can disrupt this plan by advancing his pawn to Q6, blocking the knight from landing on B3, or by playing B-KKt5, leading to this likely sequence: 7. Q-Kt3, BxKt; 8. BxPch, K-B1; 9. PxB, Kt-B3. Black ends up with a stronger position since White’s kingside is disrupted and his pieces are undeveloped, while Black has opportunities to attack along the open KB file.
6. P-K5 P-Q4 7. PxKt PxB 8. R-K1ch B-K3 9. Kt-Kt5 Q-Q4
6. P-K5 P-Q4 7. PxKt PxB 8. R-K1ch B-K3 9. Kt-Kt5 Q-Q4
![[Illustration]](images/diag107.jpg)
Diag. 107
Diag. 107
This is the typical position in the Max Lange attack. With his ninth move White threatened to win a piece by KtxB and Q-R5ch. Black could not parry the threat by 9. … Q-Q3, on account of PxP followed by Kt-K4-B6ch. The position in the diagram appears to be favourable for Black, as all his minor pieces are in play, whilst White’s development is somewhat restricted by Black’s strong pawns at QB5 and Q5. For a long time this opening has not been played in tournaments, being considered unsatisfactory for White. With the present game, and his new move of 15. B-R6, Marshall has reopened the question as to whether White’s attack on the K file plus the pawn at KKt7 is sufficiently tempting.
This is the usual setup in the Max Lange attack. With his ninth move, White threatened to capture a piece with KtxB and Q-R5ch. Black couldn’t respond to the threat with 9. … Q-Q3, due to PxP followed by Kt-K4-B6ch. The position in the diagram seems to favor Black, as all his minor pieces are active, while White’s development is somewhat limited by Black’s strong pawns at QB5 and Q5. For a long time, this opening hasn’t been used in tournaments, as it’s been seen as inadequate for White. With this game and his new move of 15. B-R6, Marshall has raised the question of whether White’s attack on the K file along with the pawn at KKt7 is appealing enough.
10. Kt-QB3 Q-B4 11. QKt-K4 Castles QR
10. Knight to Queen's Bishop 3 Queen to Bishop 4 11. Queen to Knight 4 Castles Queen's Rook
This is imperative. If Black retires the Bishop from his unsafe position, White permanently prevents Black from castling, which is bound to be fatal in view of the open K file—e.g. 11. … B- Kt3; 12. PxP, R-KKt1; 13. P-KKt4, Q-Kt3; 14. KtxB, PxKt; l5. B- Kt5, RxP; 16. Q-B3 with a violent attack.
This is crucial. If Black moves the Bishop from its vulnerable spot, White permanently stops Black from castling, which is likely to be disastrous given the open King file—e.g. 11. … B-Knight3; 12. Pawn takes Pawn, Rook to Knight1; 13. Pawn to Knight4, Queen to Knight3; 14. Knight takes Bishop, Pawn takes Knight; 15. Bishop to Knight5, Rook takes Pawn; 16. Queen to Bishop3 with a fierce attack.
12. KtxQB
12. KtxQB
If White tries to win the exchange in the following way: 12. P- KKt4, Q-K4!; 13. Kt-KB3, Q-Q4; 14. PxP followed by Kt-B6, Black can initiate a promising counter attack by 14. … BxP!!; 15. PxR-Q, RxQ; 16. Kt-B6, QxKt; 17. QxQ, BxQ. In this case White exposes his King’s side by P-KKt4 in order to benefit from the unstable position of the Black KB, but unless care is taken, he can easily fall a victim to an attack on the open KKt file
If White tries to win the exchange like this: 12. P-KKt4, Q-K4!; 13. Kt-KB3, Q-Q4; 14. PxP followed by Kt-B6, Black can launch a strong counterattack with 14. … BxP!!; 15. PxR-Q, RxQ; 16. Kt-B6, QxKt; 17. QxQ, BxQ. Here, White exposes his King's side by P-KKt4 to take advantage of the unstable position of the Black Bishop, but if he’s not careful, he can easily become a target for an attack on the open KKt file.
12. … PxKt 13. P-KKt4 Q-K4
12. … PxKt 13. P-KKt4 Q-K4
Not Q-Q4, on account of PxP and Kt-B6.
Not Q-Q4, because of PxP and Kt-B6.
14. PxP KR-Kt1 15. B-R6
14. PxP KR-Kt1 15. B-R6
This is Marshall’s innovation. It gets the Bishop out of play, as P-Kt5 must necessarily follow, yet the pawn at Kt7 holds the Black Rook, and there is a permanent threat of Kt-B6 either winning the exchange or, if the Knight is taken, giving White a pair of formidable passed pawns.
This is Marshall’s innovation. It takes the Bishop out of the game since P-Kt5 has to follow, but the pawn at Kt7 keeps the Black Rook in check, and there’s an ongoing threat of Kt-B6 either winning the exchange or, if the Knight gets taken, giving White a strong pair of passed pawns.
15. … P-Q6 16. P-B3 B-Q3
This is quite to White’s liking, since he wishes to advance Ids centre pawns. Black’s only chance of escaping disaster would be: B-K2, with R-Q2, Kt-Q1-B2. Instead of this, his next few moves do not reveal any concerted plan, and he loses in a surprisingly short time.
This is exactly what White wants, as he aims to push his central pawns forward. Black’s only way to avoid disaster would be to play: B-K2, followed by R-Q2 and Kt-Q1-B2. Instead, his next few moves lack a clear plan, and he ends up losing in a surprisingly short time.
17. P-B4 Q-Q4 18. Q-B3 B-K2 19. P-Kt5 Q-B4 20. Kt-Kt3 Q-B2
17. P-B4 Q-Q4 18. Q-B3 B-K2 19. P-Kt5 Q-B4 20. Kt-Kt3 Q-B2
In manoeuvring his Q, Black has achieved nothing either for counter attack or defence. Now White has numerous attacking chances. He first turns his attention to the KP.
In moving his queen, Black has accomplished nothing for either his counterattack or defense. Now White has many opportunities to attack. He first focuses on the king's pawn.
21. Q-Kt4 QR-K1 22. R-K4! P-Kt4 23. P-QR4
21. Q-Kt4 QR-K1 22. R-K4! P-Kt4 23. P-QR4
and now even the QR takes part in the assault. Black’s game is hopeless.
and now even the QR joins in the attack. Black’s position is hopeless.
23. … P-R3 24. PxP PxP 25. K-Kt2
23. … P-R3 24. PxP PxP 25. K-Kt2
attacking the KP by avoiding the check.
attacking the KP by dodging the check.
25. … Kt-Q1 26. Q-B3 Q-Kt3 27. R-Q4 P-B3 28. RxKtch KxR 29. QxP Resigns.
25. … Kt-Q1 26. Q-B3 Q-Kt3 27. R-Q4 P-B3 28. RxKtch KxR 29. QxP Resigns.
After this, no master has tried to defend a “Max Lange” in an international tournament.
After this, no one has attempted to defend a “Max Lange” in an international tournament.
GAME No. 8
White: Blackburne. Black: Em. Lasker.
White: Blackburne. Black: Lasker.
Scotch Game.
Scotch Gambit.
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. P-Q4 PxP 4. KtxP B-B4 5. B-K3 Q-B3
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. P-Q4 PxP 4. KtxP B-B4 5. B-K3 Q-B3
The threat KtxKt and BxB must be met in some way. P-Q3 is not satisfactory, for Black remains with a trebled pawn after the double exchange. An alternative to the text move is B-Kt3. Q-B3, however, has the advantage of developing a piece, and although it is the Queen, White has no early opportunity of driving the same off, such as he often obtains when the Queen comes out so soon in the game.
The threat from KtxKt and BxB needs to be addressed somehow. P-Q3 isn’t a good option because Black ends up with a tripled pawn after the double exchange. An alternative to the suggested move is B-Kt3. Q-B3, however, has the benefit of developing a piece, and even though it's the Queen, White doesn’t have an immediate chance to force it off, which is often the case when the Queen is brought out early in the game.
6. P-QB3 KKt-K2 7. Kt-B2
6. P-QB3 Kt-K2 7. Kt-B2
In order to develop the QKt.
In order to develop the QKt.
7. … P-QKt3!
7. … P-QKt3!
Out of three possible moves, Lasker selects the one which contributes most to development. B-Kt3 does nothing in that direction, and BxB would bring the White Knight further into play. The text move prepares the development of the B at Kt2 with the option of Castles QR. If White exchanges Bishops he gives up the command of his Q4. Black’s P-Q3 might have had the same result, but then the exchange would have given White a majority of pawns on the K side, whilst White’s three Q side pawns would have held the black Q side pawns, one of the latter being doubled.
Out of three possible moves, Lasker chooses the one that helps his pieces develop the most. B-Kt3 doesn’t help with that, and BxB would just move the White Knight into a better position. The suggested move gets ready to develop the Bishop at Kt2 while keeping the option to castle queenside. If White trades Bishops, he loses control of his Q4. Black’s P-Q3 could have had the same result, but then the trade would have given White more pawns on the kingside, while White’s three pawns on the queenside would keep pressure on Black’s pawns, one of which is doubled.
8. Kt-Q2 Q-Kt3
8. Nc2 Q-Nc3
The exchange of Bishops allows White to play Kt-K3, thus avoiding the weakening move P-K Kt3. 9. B-KB4 is answered by P-Q4!.
The exchange of bishops lets White move Knight to King 3, avoiding the weakening pawn move to King’s Knight 3. 9. Bishop to King’s Bishop 4 is met with Pawn to Queen 4!
9. BxB PxB 10. Kt-K3 R-QKt1 11. P-QKt3 Castles 12. B-B4
9. BxB PxB 10. Kt-K3 R-QKt1 11. P-QKt3 Castles 12. B-B4
To prevent Black’s P-B4.
To prevent Black's pawn to B4.
At first sight it seems as if the QBP ought to move to B4, as the advance of the QKtP has weakened it. But White dares not allow a Black Knight to settle at Q5.
At first glance, it looks like the QBP should move to B4 since the advance of the QKtP has weakened it. However, White can't risk letting a Black Knight settle at Q5.
12. … P-Q3 13. P-B4!
![[Illustration]](images/diag108.jpg)
Diag. 108
Diag. 108
Black threatens to play K-R1 in order to play P-B4. White’s position would then be very bad, and therefore he rightly decides to anticipate the move, even at the cost of a pawn. In order to gain the QBP Black must waste a number of moves with the Q, and White gains time for a King’s side attack. The pawn sacrifice is very promising indeed.
Black is threatening to play K-R1 to set up P-B4. That would put White in a tough spot, so he wisely chooses to counter the move, even if it means giving up a pawn. To capture the QBP, Black has to use several moves with the Q, giving White a chance to launch an attack on the King's side. The pawn sacrifice looks very promising.
13. … Q-B3 14. Castles QxQBP 15. R-B3
13. … Q-B3 14. Castles QxQBP 15. R-B3
There seem to be many threats here, and the position is a difficult one to fathom. After disentangling his Queen, Black tries very hard to force his P-B4. As soon as he succeeds in this he has a won game, for the open file is available both for defence and counter-attack.
There seem to be a lot of threats here, and the situation is hard to understand. After getting his Queen out of trouble, Black works really hard to push his P-B4. As soon as he manages to do this, he’s got a winning game because the open file is available for both defense and counter-attack.
15. … Q-Q5 16. K-R1 B-K3 17. R-QB1 BxB 18. RxB Q-Kt7
15. … Q-Q5 16. K-R1 B-K3 17. R-QB1 BxB 18. RxB Q-Kt7
Q-B3 is impossible apart from the fact that it would block the KBP, e.g. 18. … Q-B3; 19. P-K5, PxP; 20. Kt-K4, etc.
Q-B3 is not feasible since it would block the KBP, for example, 18. … Q-B3; 19. P-K5, PxP; 20. Kt-K4, etc.
19. R-QB2 Q-B3
Now the attack shown in the last note could be answered with Q- R5.
Now the attack mentioned in the last note could be countered with Q-R5.
20. Kt-Kt4
20. Kt-Kt4
Here P-KKt4 could be answered by Kt-Q5, e.g. 21. P-Kt5, Q-Kt3; 22. R-Kt3, P-B4.
Here P-KKt4 could be answered by Kt-Q5, e.g. 21. P-Kt5, Q-Kt3; 22. R-Kt3, P-B4.
20. … Q-Kt3 21. R-Kt3 P-B4 22. Kt-K5 Q-K3 23. KtxKt KtxKt 24. P-K5 Kt-Kt5!
20. … Q-Kt3 21. R-Kt3 P-B4 22. Kt-K5 Q-K3 23. KtxKt KtxKt 24. P-K5 Kt-Kt5!
This prevents the Rook from occupying the Q file which is about to be opened.
This keeps the Rook from taking over the Q file that’s about to open.
25. R-B4 PxP
26. Q-R1 Q-Q2!
25. R-B4 PxP
26. Q-R1 Q-Q2!
If now QxP, Black plays R-B2 with unanswerable threats of R-K1 or Q1.
If QxP now, Black plays R-B2 with unstoppable threats of R-K1 or Q1.
27. Kt-B3 PxP 28. Kt-K5 Q-K2 29. RxKBP QR-K1 30. Kt-B4 Q-K8ch 31. R-B1 QxQ 32. RxQ KtxP 33. P-R3 P-B5 34. R-Q3 Kt-Kt5 35. R-Q7 P-B6! 36. PxP RxP 37. RxRP Kt-Q6
27. Knight to B3 Pawn takes Pawn 28. Knight to K5 Queen to K2 29. Rook takes King’s Bishop Pawn Rook to King’s 1 30. Knight to B4 Queen to K8 check 31. Rook to B1 Queen takes Queen 32. Rook takes Queen Knight takes Pawn 33. Pawn to R3 Pawn to B5 34. Rook to Q3 Knight to Knight 5 35. Rook to Q7 Pawn to B6! 36. Pawn takes Pawn Rook takes Pawn 37. Rook takes Rook Knight to Q6
threatens mate in six.
threatens checkmate in six.
38. R-R1 Kt-K8
38. R-R1 Kt-K8
mate is again threatened.
mate is once again threatened.
39. Kt-Q2 RxPch 40. K-Kt1 R-Kt6ch 41. K-R2 R-Q6! 42. RxKt RxKtch 43. RxR RxR 44. R-Q7 R-K6 45. RxP RxP 46. RxP P-R3 47. R-B6
39. Knight to Queen 2 Rook takes Pawn 40. King to Knight 1 Rook to Knight 6 check 41. King to R2 Rook to Queen 6! 42. Rook takes Knight Rook takes Knight check 43. Rook takes Rook Rook takes Rook 44. Rook to Queen 7 Rook to King 6 45. Rook takes Pawn Rook takes Pawn 46. Rook takes Pawn Pawn to R3 47. Rook to Bishop 6
A few more moves “for fun.”
A few more moves “just for fun.”
47. … K-R2 48. K-Kt2 P-R4 49. R-R6 P-Kt3 50. R-R4 K-R3 51. R-QB4 R-Kt7ch 52. K-Kt3 K-Kt4 53. R-B3 P-R5ch 54. K-R3 K-R4 55. R-B4 R-Kt6ch 56. K-R2 P-Kt4 57. R-R4 R-Kt7ch 58. K-Rsq P-R6 59. R-QB4 P-Kt5 60. K-Ktsq P-Kt6 61. R-B5ch K-Kt3 62. R-Bsq K-B4 63. R-Rsq R-Q7 64. R-Ksq K-B5 65. R-Rsq K-K6 66. R-R3ch R-Q6 67. R-Rsq K-K7 Resigns.
47. … K-R2 48. K-Kt2 P-R4 49. R-R6 P-Kt3 50. R-R4 K-R3 51. R-QB4 R-Kt7ch 52. K-Kt3 K-Kt4 53. R-B3 P-R5ch 54. K-R3 K-R4 55. R-B4 R-Kt6ch 56. K-R2 P-Kt4 57. R-R4 R-Kt7ch 58. K-Rsq P-R6 59. R-QB4 P-Kt5 60. K-Ktsq P-Kt6 61. R-B5ch K-Kt3 62. R-Bsq K-B4 63. R-Rsq R-Q7 64. R-Ksq K-B5 65. R-Rsq K-K6 66. R-R3ch R-Q6 67. R-Rsq K-K7 Resigns.
GAME No. 9
White: Salwe. Black: Marshall.
White: Salwe. Black: Marshall.
Two Knights’ Defence
Two Knights Defense
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-B4 Kt-B3 4. Kt-Kt5
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-B4 Kt-B3 4. Kt-Kt5
This attack may be tempting, as the BP cannot be protected, but it is against that elementary principle which says that no attack should be undertaken in the opening until the minor pieces are mobilised, provided of course that Black also has made sound opening moves. There is every likelihood that the attack in the present instance will lead to nothing. It has taken many years to find the correct reply, but now that it is known, the opening has practically disappeared from master practice. Instead of the move in the text, White can play either P-Q3, leading almost unavoidably to a drawing variation of the Giuoco piano, or Castles which might bring about the Max Lange attack after 4. … B-B4; 5. P-Q4, PxP.
This attack might seem appealing since the bishop cannot be defended, but it goes against the basic principle that no attack should be launched in the opening until the minor pieces are developed, assuming of course that Black has also made solid opening moves. There's a good chance that this attack won't amount to anything. It took many years to discover the right response, and now that it's known, the opening has nearly vanished from top-level play. Instead of the move mentioned, White can either play P-Q3, which almost inevitably leads to a drawing variation of the Giuoco Piano, or castle, which could lead to the Max Lange attack after 4. … B-B4; 5. P-Q4, PxP.
4. … P-Q4 5. PxP Kt-QR4!
4. … P-Q4 5. PxP N-QR4!
This is a typical position in the Two Knights’ defence. The former continuation 5. … KtxQP has long been abandoned, as the attack that White can initiate by 6. KtxBP, KxKt; 7. Q-B3ch, forcing the Black King to K3, is dangerous though the result is uncertain. The move in the text breaks the attack from the very first, and Black gets the advantage
This is a typical position in the Two Knights’ defense. The previous move 5. … KtxQP has been discarded for a long time because the attack that White can start with 6. KtxBP, KxKt; 7. Q-B3ch, which forces the Black King to K3, is risky even though the outcome is unclear. The move mentioned here stops the attack right away, giving Black the upper hand.
![[Illustration]](images/diag109.jpg)
Diag. 109
Diag. 109
as he can gain time by attacking the two minor pieces which it should be noted, are unsupported, and in addition obtain a speedy development, worth more than the pawn given up for it.
as he can gain time by attacking the two minor pieces which, it should be noted, are unsupported, and also achieve quick development, which is worth more than the pawn given up for it.
6. P-Q3
B-Kt5ch is an alternative. The advantage is Black’s in this case also—e.g. P-B3; 7. PxP, PxP; 8. B-K2, P-KR3; 9. Kt-KB3, P-K5; 10. Kt-K5, Q-B2; 11. P-Q4, B-Q3 (or PxP e.p. followed by B-Q3); 12. P-KB4, PxP e.p.; 13. KtxP, Kt-Kt5 or 11. P-B4, B-Q3; 12. P- Q4, PxP e.p.; 13 KtxP, Castles. Black has an easy game and open lines.
B-Kt5ch is an alternative. The advantage is with Black in this case—e.g. P-B3; 7. PxP, PxP; 8. B-K2, P-KR3; 9. Kt-KB3, P-K5; 10. Kt-K5, Q-B2; 11. P-Q4, B-Q3 (or PxP e.p. followed by B-Q3); 12. P-KB4, PxP e.p.; 13. KtxP, Kt-Kt5 or 11. P-B4, B-Q3; 12. P-Q4, PxP e.p.; 13 KtxP, Castles. Black has an easy game and open lines.
6. … P-KR3
7. Kt-KB3 P-K5
8. Q-K2 KtxB
9. PxKt B-QB4
10. KKt-Q2
6. … P-KR3
7. Knight to King's Bishop 3 Pawn to King's 5
8. Queen to King's 2 Knight takes Bishop
9. Pawn takes Knight Bishop to Queen's Bishop 4
10. King Knight to Queen's 2
The Knight must move sooner or later.
The Knight has to move eventually.
10. … Castles 11. Kt-Kt3 B-KKt5 12. Q-B1
10. … Castles 11. Kt-Kt3 B-KKt5 12. Q-B1
A sorry retreat, but the plausible Q-Q2 would be disastrous, e.g. P-K6!; 13. PxP, Kt-K5 and Q-R5ch
A disappointing retreat, but the believable Q-Q2 would be a disaster, for example, P-K6!; 13. PxP, Kt-K5 and Q-R5ch
12. … B-Kt5ch
12. … B-Kt5ch
Black’s superior development begins to tell in no uncertain fashion. Now White can neither play 13. B-Q2 on account of BxBch; 14. QKtxB, R-K1, followed by P-K6, nor 13. Kt-B3 on account of BxKt; 14. PXB, P-B3 regaining the pawn and maintaining positional advantage. White has therefore no alternative but P-B3, which weakens his Q3, where a Black Knight soon settles down.
Black's advanced position starts to make a significant impact. Now White can't play 13. B-Q2 because of BxBch; 14. QKtxB, R-K1, then P-K6. Nor can White play 13. Kt-B3 due to BxKt; 14. PXB, P-B3, which would regain the pawn and keep the positional advantage. So, White has no choice but to play P-B3, which weakens his Q3, where a Black Knight will soon establish itself.
13. P-B3 B-K2 14. P-KR3 B-R4 15. P-Kt4 B-Kt3
13. P-B3 B-K2 14. P-KR3 B-R4 15. P-Kt4 B-Kt3
At last White can castle. He can, of course, only castle on the Queen’s side, because his King’s side pawns are shattered. Now games in which the Kings castle on different wings are more or less beyond calculation, as pointed out before. On the whole, the player who first attacks wins. But experience has shown that the Queen’s side is more difficult to defend on account of its greater expanse, and this theory is supported by the present game. In addition, White’s development is not completed yet, whilst all the Black forces are ready to strike.
At last, White can castle. He can only castle on the Queen’s side, though, because his King’s side pawns are in disarray. When Kings castle on different sides, the games become pretty unpredictable, as mentioned earlier. Generally, the player who attacks first tends to win. However, experience has shown that the Queen’s side is harder to defend due to its larger space, and this is backed up by the current game. Additionally, White’s development isn’t complete yet, while all of Black’s pieces are ready to attack.
16. B-K3 Kt-Q2 17. QKt-Q2 Kt-K4 18. Castles P-Kt4
16. B-K3 Kt-Q2 17. QKt-Q2 Kt-K4 18. Castles P-Kt4
Storming the position with pawns is peculiar to this kind of game. The intention is to break up the opposing pawn position, and to open files for the Rooks. Pawns are cheap in such cases. Open lines for the pieces are the things that matter, and the fewer pawns there are left, the more open lines are available for the attack.
Storming the position with pawns is typical in this kind of game. The goal is to disrupt the opponent's pawn structure and create open files for the rooks. In these situations, pawns are expendable. What really counts are open lines for the pieces, and the fewer pawns remaining, the more open lines there are for attacking.
19. PxP Kt-Q6ch 20. K-Kt1 QxP 21. K-R1
19. PxP Knight to Q6 check 20. King to Knight 1 Queen takes Pawn 21. King to R1
The King was not safe on the diagonal. White wishes to push on his King’s side pawns (P-B4-B5, and so on). But after PxP e.p. there would be a fatal discovered check by the Black Knight.
The King wasn't secure on the diagonal. White wants to advance his King’s side pawns (P-B4-B5, and so on). But after PxP e.p., there would be a deadly discovered check by the Black Knight.
22. … QxP
22. … QxP
Black’s advantage becomes more marked. He has recovered his pawn, and for the ensuing attacks on both sides he is better placed, having already two open files for his Rooks.
Black’s advantage is becoming more clear. He has regained his pawn, and for the upcoming attacks on both sides, he is in a better position, already having two open files for his Rooks.
22. P-KB4 P-QR4
23. QR-Kt1 P-KB4
24. Kt-Q4 Q-R5!
22. P-KB4 P-QR4
23. QR-Kt1 P-KB4
24. Kt-Q4 Q-R5!
![[Illustration]](images/diag110.jpg)
Diag. 110
Diag. 110
The position bristles with chances for daring sacrifices. After 25. KtxBP, for instance, Black could play RxKt!; 26. PxR, Kt-Kt5; 27. PxKt, PxP; 28. P-R3 (Q-B4ch?, B-B2), B-B3; 29. K-R2, QxPch; 30. PxQ, RxP mate.
The position is full of opportunities for bold sacrifices. After 25. KtxBP, for example, Black could play RxKt!; 26. PxR, Kt-Kt5; 27. PxKt, PxP; 28. P-R3 (Q-B4ch?, B-B2), B-B3; 29. K-R2, QxPch; 30. PxQ, RxP mate.
25. P-Kt3 Q-Q2 26. PxP BxP 27. Q-Kt2 P-B4
25. P-Kt3 Q-Q2 26. PxP BxP 27. Q-Kt2 P-B4
White’s compulsory 25. P-Kt3 has weakened his QB3, and the move in the text is intended to open the diagonal KB3-QB6 for the Black Bishop.
White’s forced 25. Kt to P3 has weakened his QB3, and the move in the text is meant to open the diagonal from KB3 to QB6 for the Black Bishop.
28. KtxB QxKt 29. QxP B-B3 30. Q-B4ch K-R1 31. Kt-K4 QR-K1
28. KtxB QxKt 29. QxP B-B3 30. Q-B4ch K-R1 31. Kt-K4 QR-K1
White cannot parry all the threats at once. Though he gets rid of the threatening B, he lets in the hostile R on the K file and the end cannot long be delayed.
White can't block all the threats at once. While he deals with the threatening B, he allows the hostile R to enter the K file, and the end can't be postponed for long.
32. KtxB RxKt 33. B-B1 KR-K3 34. B-R3 R-K7 35. KR-Q1 Kt-K8 36. BxP Kt-B7ch 37. K-Kt2 Kt-Kt5ch
32. KtxB RxKt 33. B-B1 KR-K3 34. B-R3 R-K7 35. KR-Q1 Kt-K8 36. BxP Kt-B7ch 37. K-Kt2 Kt-Kt5ch
and mate at R7 or B7.
and mate at R7 or B7.
GAME No. 10
White: Teichmann. Black: Amateurs in consultation.
White: Teichmann. Black: Amateur players discussing strategy.
Two Knights’ Defence.
Two Knights Defense.
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-B4 Kt-B3 4. Castles
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-B4 Kt-B3 4. Castles
![[Illustration]](images/diag111.jpg)
Diag. 111
Diag. 111
The idea underlying this pawn sacrifice is to open the K file for the Rook. It will be seen that, with correct play, Black manages to castle just in time, and White, though winning back his pawn, has no advantage in position. The opening is seldom played by modern masters.
The idea behind this pawn sacrifice is to open the K file for the Rook. As you'll see, with the right moves, Black manages to castle just in time, and while White wins back the pawn, there’s no advantage in position. Modern masters rarely play this opening.
Instead of the move in the text, White can hardly defend the KP with Kt-B3, as Black simply captures the pawn and recovers his piece by P-Q4, with a satisfactory position. It is even better for Black if White plays 6. BxPch in reply to 5. … KtxP. The capture of White’s KP is far more important than that of the Black KBP, particularly as the White Bishop, which could be dangerous on the diagonal QR2-KKt8, is exchanged, e.g. 6. … KxB; 7. KtxKt, P-Q4; 8. Kt-Kt5ch, K-Kt1! Black continues P-KR3, K-R2, R-B1 and has open lines for Rooks and Bishops.
Instead of the move in the text, White can barely defend the king's pawn with knight to b3, as Black simply takes the pawn and gets back their piece with pawn to queen's 4, ending up in a strong position. It gets even better for Black if White plays 6. bishop takes pawn check in response to 5. ... knight takes pawn. Capturing White’s king's pawn is way more significant than taking the Black king's bishop pawn, especially since the White bishop, which could be threatening on the diagonal from queen's rook 2 to knight's 8, is traded off, for example, 6. ... king takes bishop; 7. knight takes knight, pawn to queen's 4; 8. knight to knight 5 check, king to knight 1! Black continues with pawn to king's rook 3, king to rook 2, rook to bishop 1 and has open lines for rooks and bishops.
4. … KtxP
4. … KtxP
Black can, of course, develop his B-B4. Then he must either submit to the Max Lange attack (5. P-Q4, PxP) or play BxP, giving up the useful B, in which case he loses the pawn gained after 6. KtxB, KtxKt; 7. P-KB4, P-Q3; 8. PxP, PxP; 9. B-KKt5, and eventually Q-B3.
Black can definitely develop his bishop to B-B4. Then he has to either deal with the Max Lange attack (5. P-Q4, PxP) or play BxP, which means giving up the useful bishop, and in that case, he’ll lose the pawn he gained after 6. KtxB, KtxKt; 7. P-KB4, P-Q3; 8. PxP, PxP; 9. B-KKt5, and eventually Q-B3.
5. P-Q4
R-K1 at once would lead to nothing.
R-K1 would immediately lead to nothing.
5. … PxP 6. R-K1 P-Q4 7. BxP! QxB 8. Kt-B3
5. … PxP 6. R-K1 P-Q4 7. BxP! QxB 8. Kt-B3
![[Illustration]](images/diag112.jpg)
Diag. 112
Diag. 112
This attack has been analysed extensively by Steinitz. The only square where the Queen cannot be attacked at once by the minor pieces is at QI. After 8. … Q-QI, Black obtains quite a satisfactory game: 9. RxKtch, B-K2; 10. KtxP, P-B4. This is Pillsbury’s move, intending to displace the Rook. Black has then open lines for his two Bishops as compensation for his shattered pawn position. 11. R-KB4, Castles; 12. KtxKt, QxQch; 13. KtxQ, PxKt. Now it is not easy to find a reasonable plan for White, as Black threatens to cramp White’s game with B-Q3 and P-B5. It is therefore necessary for White to take measures against that by playing R-B4 and B-B4. If Black still plays B-Q3, B-B4 follows, with the intention of exchanging and of provoking Black’s P-B4, which leaves the QP “backward.”
This attack has been analyzed extensively by Steinitz. The only square where the Queen can’t be attacked immediately by the minor pieces is at QI. After 8. … Q-QI, Black gets a pretty solid game: 9. RxKtch, B-K2; 10. KtxP, P-B4. This is Pillsbury’s move, aiming to move the Rook. Black then has open lines for his two Bishops as compensation for his weakened pawn structure. 11. R-KB4, Castles; 12. KtxKt, QxQch; 13. KtxQ, PxKt. Now it’s not easy for White to come up with a solid plan since Black threatens to limit White’s options with B-Q3 and P-B5. Therefore, White needs to take steps against that by playing R-B4 and B-B4. If Black still plays B-Q3, B-B4 follows, intending to exchange and provoke Black’s P-B4, which leaves the QP “backward.”
8. … Q-KR4 9. KtxKt B-K2 10. B-Kt5 B-K3 11. BxB KtxB 12. Kt-Kt3 Q-R3 13. QxP Castles KR 14. QR-Q1
8. … Q-KR4 9. KtxKt B-K2 10. B-Kt5 B-K3 11. BxB KtxB 12. Kt-Kt3 Q-R3 13. QxP Castles KR 14. QR-Q1
Now White is ahead with his development, having both Rooks in play and his Queen better placed. Nor can the latter be attacked by R-Q1, as White would simply play QxR. On the Queen being driven away by the Black Knight, he exchanges the latter and plays the Queen back into the same dominating position, eventually producing a dislocation of the Black Queen’s side pawns.
Now White is ahead in development, with both Rooks active and his Queen in a stronger position. The Queen can’t be attacked by R-Q1, since White would just play QxR. When the Black Knight drives the Queen away, he exchanges the Knight and repositions the Queen to the same dominating spot, ultimately causing disruption in the Black Queen’s side pawns.
14. … Kt-B3 15. Q-QR4 QR-Q1 16. Kt-Q4! KtxKt 17. RxKt RxR 18. QxR P-QKt3 19. Q-K5 P-QB4
14. … Kt-B3 15. Q-QR4 QR-Q1 16. Kt-Q4! KtxKt 17. RxKt RxR 18. QxR P-QKt3 19. Q-K5 P-QB4
It is instructive to watch how this very slight weakness created by Black’s advance of his pawns brings him into trouble. A White Knight settles down at his Q6, which is no longer guarded by the Black QBP, and paralyses the whole of Black’s game. Another factor in White’s superiority of position is the possession of the King’s file. The Black Rook cannot move until the King gets a loophole by a pawn move. As we have seen, such a pawn move often affords an entry to the opposing pieces.
It’s interesting to see how this small weakness caused by Black pushing his pawns leads to trouble. A White Knight takes position at Q6, which is no longer protected by the Black QBP, and it freezes Black’s entire game. Another reason for White’s stronger position is control of the King’s file. The Black Rook can’t move until the King finds an escape with a pawn move. As we've seen, such a pawn move often opens the door for the opponent's pieces.
20. P-KB4 B-B1
Not BxP, of course, because of P-QKt3 and Q-Kt2. The Bishop which cannot remain at K3 is to go to Kt2, so that the threat of mate after Q-QB3 may also hold up a White piece.
Not BxP, of course, because of P-QKt3 and Q-Kt2. The Bishop that can’t stay at K3 is supposed to go to Kt2, so the threat of checkmate after Q-QB3 can also prevent a White piece from moving.
21. P-B5 B-Kt2 22. Q-K7 Q-QB3 23. R-K2 P-B3
21. P-B5 B-Kt2 22. Q-K7 Q-QB3 23. R-K2 P-B3
Compulsory, as otherwise P-B6 forces the KtP to advance, which is fatal in any case. After P-Kt3, White would cover his BP and play his Q to KR6. On the other hand, after PxP there is Kt-R5-B6, and Black is in a mating net.
Compulsory, as otherwise P-B6 forces the KtP to advance, which is fatal in any case. After P-Kt3, White would cover his BP and play his Q to KR6. On the other hand, after PxP there is Kt-R5-B6, and Black is in a mating net.
24. Kt-K4 Q-Q4 25. Kt-Q6 B-B3
24. Knight to K4 Queen to Q4 25. Knight to Q6 Bishop to B3
The threat was QxRch and R-K8 mate.
The threat was QxRch and R-K8 mate.
26. P-KR3
in order to retreat to R2 in case of Q-Q8ch. In a way P-KR3 creates a certain weakness, as the square at Kt3 is now defenceless, but Black has no pieces with which to take advantage of it: his Rook cannot move, his Bishop is on the White squares. If Black had a KB instead, the move would be very doubtful, because then Black might break in through White’s KKt3.
in order to pull back to R2 in case of Q-Q8ch. In a way, P-KR3 creates a bit of a weakness since the square at Kt3 is now undefended, but Black has no pieces to exploit it: his Rook is stuck, and his Bishop is on the White squares. If Black had a KB instead, the move would be very questionable, because then Black could break through White’s KKt3.
26. … P-B5
White’s threat was to repel the Black Queen by P-B4 and to mate in five moves, beginning with Q-K6ch.
White's plan was to drive away the Black Queen with pawn to b4 and checkmate in five moves, starting with Queen to K6 check.
27. P-B3 P-KR3
![[Illustration]](images/diag113.jpg)
Diag. 113
Diag. 113
This disposes of the winning of the Queen by the threatened mate. But it creates a weakness at Black’s Kt3, which White exploits in grand style. He decides to play the King himself to Kt6, threatening mate at Kt7. In spite of several raids by the Black Queen, this quaint device is crowned with success. The weakness created by P-KR3 could not be demonstrated more drastically.
This resolves the issue of the Queen being captured by the threatened checkmate. However, it creates a vulnerability at Black’s Kt3, which White takes full advantage of. He chooses to move the King to Kt6, posing a checkmate threat at Kt7. Despite several attacks by the Black Queen, this clever tactic succeeds. The weakness caused by P-KR3 could not be shown more clearly.
28. K-R2 P-QKt4 29. K-Kt3 P-QR4 30. K-R4 P-Kt3
28. K-R2 P-QKt4 29. K-Kt3 P-QR4 30. K-R4 P-Kt3
If White were to play PxP now, Black would mate him one move earlier (Q-Kt4). Of course he parries the threat first, and Black is helpless.
If White plays PxP now, Black can checkmate him one move earlier (Q-Kt4). Of course, he deflects the threat first, and Black is powerless.
31. R-K3 QxKtP 32. R-Kt3 Q-B7
31. R-K3 QxKtP 32. R-Kt3 Q-B7
After P-Kt4ch White could not play 33. K-Kt4 on account of the pretty mate by B-B6. He would play K-R5-Kt6.
After P-Kt4ch, White couldn't play 33. K-Kt4 because of the nice checkmate by B-B6. He would play K-R5-Kt6.
33. PxP Q-B5ch 34. R-Kt4 Q-B7ch 35. K-R5 Resigns.
33. PxP Q-B5ch 34. R-Kt4 Q-B7ch 35. K-R5 Resigns.
A most instructive game, showing how the superior position of the pieces can lead indirectly to a win, by reducing the opponent’s pieces gradually to impotence and compelling him to move pawns, thereby affording opportunities for a decisive entry.
A very informative game, demonstrating how having a stronger position can indirectly lead to a win by gradually weakening the opponent’s pieces, forcing them to move pawns, which creates chances for a decisive entry.
GAME No. 11
White: Schlechter. Black: Janowski.
White: Bad. Black: Janowski.
Ruy Lopez (compare p. 40).
Ruy Lopez (see p. 40).
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-Kt5 Kt-B3 4. Castles KtxP
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-Kt5 Kt-B3 4. Castles KtxP
A continuation, which has lately gained in favour, is: P-Q3 and B-K2 (see p. 39).
A continuation that has recently become popular is: P-Q3 and B-K2 (see p. 39).
5. P-Q4 B-K2
It is clearly very dangerous to gratify White’s wish for an open file by playing PxP. The move may be playable in the system of defence called the “Riga variation” (see Game No. 17). Here it would be advantageous to be able to close the KB’s diagonal. It is better when intending to play the “Riga variation” to have played P-QR3 on the third move.
It’s definitely risky to fulfill White’s request for an open file by playing PxP. This move might be viable in the defense system known as the “Riga variation” (see Game No. 17). In this case, it would be beneficial to close the KB’s diagonal. It’s preferable, when planning to play the “Riga variation,” to have moved P-QR3 on the third turn.
6. Q-K2 Kt-Q3
7. BxKt KtPxB
8. PxP Kt-Kt2
9. Kt-B3 Castles
10. R-K1 R-K1
6. Q-K2 N-Q3
7. BxN NxB
8. PxP N-N2
9. N-B3 Castles
10. R-K1 R-K1
The manœuvre cited on p. 40, namely Kt-B4-K3, which makes P-Q4 possible, is essential for the development of the QB. Black loses the present game because White is able to keep the Bishop shut in permanently
The move mentioned on p. 40, Kt-B4-K3, which allows for P-Q4, is crucial for developing the QB. Black loses this game because White can keep the Bishop permanently trapped.
11. Q-B4 Kt-B4
11. Qb4 Nxb4
so that the pawn B3 should not be “hanging” when the QP moves.
so that the pawn B3 won't be "hanging" when the QP moves.
12. Kt-KKt5! BxKt 13. BxB QxB 14. QxKt R-K3
12. Kt-KKt5! BxKt 13. BxB QxB 14. QxKt R-K3
![[Illustration]](images/diag114.jpg)
Diag. 114
Diag. 114
After the exchanges the position is clearly in favour of White. Against an undeveloped B, which also hampers a Rook, his Knight is mobile. The Black Queen’s side pawns are weak, and give White winning chances even if Black succeeds in playing P-Q4 and bringing the Bishop into play. The move in the text, which covers the pawn at B3, again prepares for P-Q4.
After the exchanges, the position clearly favors White. Against an undeveloped Bishop, which also restricts a Rook, his Knight is flexible. The pawns on Black's Queen side are weak, giving White winning opportunities even if Black manages to play Pawn to Queen 4 and activate the Bishop. The move in the text, which protects the pawn at B3, also sets up for Pawn to Queen 4.
15. Q-Q4 B-Kt2
15. Q-Q4 B-Kn2
The only chance lay in the pawn sacrifice by P-QB4, after which the Bishop gets to Kt2 with a threat of mate, and the QR is free.
The only chance was in the pawn sacrifice by P-QB4; after that, the Bishop moves to Kt2 with a threat of checkmate, and the QR is free.
16. Q-QKt4 B-B1 17. Kt-K4
16. Q-K4 B-B1 17. Kt-K4
Fine play. If Black captures the pawn, White obtains a combined attack with Q, R, and Kt, to which Black can only oppose the Q, so that the result cannot be in doubt—e.g. 17. … QxKP; 18. Kt- B5, Q-Q3; 19. Q-QB4, RxRch; 20. RxR, P-KR3; 21. R-K8ch, K-R2; 22. Q-K4ch, P-Kt3 (Q-Kt3?; 23. QxQ, followed by KtxP); 23. Kt-Q3 and R-K7.
Fine play. If Black captures the pawn, White gets a combined attack with the Queen, Rook, and Knight, which Black can only counter with the Queen, so the outcome is certain—e.g. 17. … QxKP; 18. Kt-B5, Q-Q3; 19. Q-QB4, RxRch; 20. RxR, P-KR3; 21. R-K8ch, K-R2; 22. Q-K4ch, P-Kt3 (Q-Kt3?; 23. QxQ, followed by KtxP); 23. Kt-Q3 and R-K7.
17. … Q-K2 18. Kt-B5 R-Kt3 19. R-K3 P-QR4 20. Q-Q4 R-Kt1 21. P-QB4
17. … Q-K2 18. Kt-B5 R-Kt3 19. R-K3 P-QR4 20. Q-Q4 R-Kt1 21. P-QB4
preventing R-Kt4
preventing R-Kt4
21. … P-R3 22. P-QKt3 K-R2 23. R-Q1 Q-Kt4 24. R-Kt3 Q-B4 25. RxR PxR
21. … P-R3 22. P-QKt3 K-R2 23. R-Q1 Q-Kt4 24. R-Kt3 Q-B4 25. RxR PxR
Black has built a wall of pawns round his King, but it does not avail against the superior forces which White can concentrate.
Black has surrounded his King with a wall of pawns, but it won't help against the stronger forces that White can bring together.
White’s plan is clear. He will advance his pawns, and break up those that surround the Black King, always taking care that Black does not free his Queen’s side meanwhile. His pieces will then break in easily, and Black is forced to look on passively.
White’s plan is straightforward. He will push his pawns and dismantle the ones around the Black King, while ensuring that Black doesn’t open up his Queen’s side in the meantime. His pieces will then come in easily, leaving Black to watch passively.
26. P-KR3 R-R1 27. P-QR4
to prevent the sacrifice of a pawn by P-R5, which would bring the Black Rook into play.
to prevent the loss of a pawn by moving the piece to R5, which would activate the Black Rook.
27. … R-Kt1 28. R-Q3 Q-Kt4 29. K-R2 Q-K2 30. P-B4 Q-B2 31. P-K6!!
27. … R-Kt1 28. R-Q3 Q-Kt4 29. K-R2 Q-K2 30. P-B4 Q-B2 31. P-K6!!
![[Illustration]](images/diag115.jpg)
Diag. 115
Diag. 115
A beautiful move which robs Black of his last chance of freeing his Queen’s side, which he might have accomplished by the pawn sacrifice of P-Q3.
A great move that takes away Black's last opportunity to free his queen's side, which he might have achieved by sacrificing the pawn on c3.
31. … PxP 32. Q-K5 Q-K2 33. P-KKt4 R-Kt5 34. K-Kt3 R-Kt3 35. P-R4 Q-B1 36. P-R5 PxP 37. QxRP R-Kt1 38. Q-K5 R-Kt3 39. P-Kt5 P-R4 40. P-Kt6ch
31. … PxP 32. Q-K5 Q-K2 33. P-KKt4 R-Kt5 34. K-Kt3 R-Kt3 35. P-R4 Q-B1 36. P-R5 PxP 37. QxRP R-Kt1 38. Q-K5 R-Kt3 39. P-Kt5 P-R4 40. P-Kt6ch
The end is near. Black must take, as QxRP forces a speedy
The end is near. Black has to take, as QxRP forces a quick
40. … KxP 41. Q-Kt5ch K-R2 42. QxRPch K-Kt1 43. Q-Kt5
40. … KxP 41. Q-Kt5ch K-R2 42. QxRPch K-Kt1 43. Q-Kt5
threatening R-Q8
threatening R-Q8
43. … K-B2 44. R-Q8 Q-K2 45. Q-R5ch Resigns.
43. … K-B2 44. R-Q8 Q-K2 45. Q-R5ch Resigns.
Loss of the Queen and mate in a few moves cannot be prevented. Black has played the whole game practically with two pieces less, and the mate was really only a matter of time.
Losing the Queen and getting checkmated in a few moves can’t be avoided. Black has spent the entire game essentially down two pieces, and the checkmate was truly just a matter of time.
GAME No. 12
White: Teichmann. Black: Rubinstein.
White: Teichmann. Black: Rubinstein.
Ruy Lopez (see p. 37).
Ruy Lopez (see p. 37).
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-Kt5 P-QR3 4. B-R4
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-Kt5 P-QR3 4. B-R4
By exchanging the Bishop White could not prove P-QR3 to be a lost move, for Black, by retaking with the QP, obtains open lines for Q and QB, and in addition to an easy development, retains two Bishops. This is a set-off against a certain weakness in Black’s game, which may be found in the fact that after P-Q4, PxP, White has four pawns to three on the King’s side, while his three pawns on the Queen’s side are able to hold the four opposing pawns, one of which is doubled. But this weakness can only tell in the end- game, which is too far ahead for practical purposes, and to which it may not come at all. An example of the usual line of play will be found in Game No. 18.
By exchanging the Bishop, White couldn't show that P-QR3 was a bad move because Black, by capturing with the QP, gets open lines for the Queen and Bishop. Plus, along with easy development, Black keeps two Bishops. This balances out a certain weakness in Black’s position, which can be seen after P-Q4, where PxP leaves White with four pawns to three on the King’s side, while on the Queen’s side, his three pawns can handle the four opposing pawns, one of which is doubled. However, this weakness will only matter in the endgame, which is too far ahead to consider practically, and may not even happen. An example of the usual play will be found in Game No. 18.
4. … Kt-B3 5. Castles B-K2 6. R-K1 P-QKt4 7. B-Kt3 P-Q3 8. P-B3
4. … Kt-B3 5. Castles B-K2 6. R-K1 P-QKt4 7. B-Kt3 P-Q3 8. P-B3
![[Illustration]](images/diag116.jpg)
Diag. 116
Diag. 116
8. … Castles
8. … Castles
In Capablanca’s opinion Black should not castle before White’s intentions in the centre have been made clear. It makes a great difference whether White plays his QP to Q4 or to Q3 only.
In Capablanca's view, Black shouldn't castle before White's plans in the center are clear. It really matters whether White moves his Queen's Pawn to d4 or to d3 only.
If after 8. … QKt-R4; 9. B-B2, P-B4 White plays: 10. P-Q4, his intention is to move his pawn further to Q5 as soon as Black has castled, and then to attack on the King’s wing with QKt-Q2-B1-K3, P-KKt4 and Kt-B5. For this reason Black should force White to disclose whether he intends to exchange his QP or to advance it to Q5. In the latter case Black can refrain from castling altogether and counter-attack on the King’s wing, e.g., 10. P-Q4, Q-B2; 11. P-KR3, B-Q2; 12. QKt-Q2, R-QB1; if now: 13. P-Q5 then P-R3 followed by P-Kt4-Kt5 gives Black many chances. If on the contrary 13. PxP, then Black need no longer fear an attack on the King’s side after he has castled, as his Rooks will have a favourable opportunity for operating on the open Queen’s file. However, there is still the disadvantage for Black of having advanced Queen’s side pawns, which are liable to attack (P-QR4).
If after 8. … QKt-R4; 9. B-B2, P-B4 White plays: 10. P-Q4, his plan is to push his pawn up to Q5 as soon as Black has castled, and then to launch an attack on the King’s side with QKt-Q2-B1-K3, P-KKt4 and Kt-B5. For this reason, Black should force White to show whether he intends to trade his Queen’s pawn or to push it to Q5. If it's the latter, Black can avoid castling altogether and counter-attack on the King’s side, for example, 10. P-Q4, Q-B2; 11. P-KR3, B-Q2; 12. QKt-Q2, R-QB1; if now: 13. P-Q5 then P-R3 followed by P-Kt4-Kt5 gives Black many opportunities. If instead 13. PxP, then Black doesn’t have to worry about an attack on the King’s side after castling, as his Rooks will have a good chance to operate on the open Queen’s file. However, Black still has the downside of having pushed forward Queen’s side pawns, which are vulnerable to attack (P-QR4).
The game takes a different course when Black exchanges the pawns in the centre. The continuation would then be: 11. … Kt-B3; 12. Q Kt-Q2, B-Q2; 13. Kt-B1, PxP; 14. PxP, PxP; 15. B-Kt5, Q- Kt3. It is difficult to decide which side has the advantage. Black has an extra pawn, but White has the initiative.
The game changes direction when Black swaps the pawns in the center. The next moves would be: 11. ... N-B3; 12. Q N-Q2, B-Q2; 13. N-B1, PxP; 14. PxP, PxP; 15. B-N5, Q-N3. It's hard to determine which side is better off. Black has one more pawn, but White is in control.
If in Diag. 116, after 8. … Castles White plays 9. P-Q4 at once, Black has an opportunity for the following interesting attack: 9. P-Q4, B-Kt5; 10. B-K3, KtxKP; 11. B-Q5, Q-Q2; 12. BxKKt, P-Q4; 13. B-B2, P-K5 14. P-KR3, B-R4; 15. Kt-K5, BxQ; 16. KtxQ, BxB; 17. KtxR, RxKt. White cannot take advantage of his Rooks, as there is no open file, whilst Black threatens to initiate a strong attack with P-B4.
If in Diag. 116, after 8. … Castles, White plays 9. P-Q4 right away, Black has a chance for an interesting attack: 9. P-Q4, B-Kt5; 10. B-K3, KtxKP; 11. B-Q5, Q-Q2; 12. BxKKt, P-Q4; 13. B-B2, P-K5; 14. P-KR3, B-R4; 15. Kt-K5, BxQ; 16. KtxQ, BxB; 17. KtxR, RxKt. White can't take advantage of their Rooks because there’s no open file, while Black is ready to launch a strong attack with P-B4.
Aljechin has analysed a variation of this line of play, which he thinks leads finally to White’s advantage: 12. PxP, Kt-Kt4; 13. BxKt, BxB; 14. P-KR3, BxKt; 15. QxB, KtxP; 16. RxKt, PxR; 17. BxR, B-B8; 18. Kt-R3, Q-Q7. I doubt that White can win this game.
Aljechin has examined a variation of this strategy, which he believes ultimately gives White the upper hand: 12. PxP, Kt-Kt4; 13. BxKt, BxB; 14. P-KR3, BxKt; 15. QxB, KtxP; 16. RxKt, PxR; 17. BxR, B-B8; 18. Kt-R3, Q-Q7. I’m not sure that White can actually win this game.
9. P-Q3
In this less aggressive continuation, in which nothing is immediately attempted against Black’s centre, White prepares gradually for a King’s side attack, as in this game with Kt-Q2- B1-Kt3. But Black should obtain time for operations in the centre.
In this less aggressive continuation, where nothing is immediately done against Black’s center, White gradually prepares for a Kingside attack, as seen in this game with N-Q2-B1-N3. But Black should get time to carry out operations in the center.
9. … Kt-QR4 10. B-B2 P-B4 11. QKt-Q2 Kt-B3 12. P-QR4
9. … Kt-QR4 10. B-B2 P-B4 11. QKt-Q2 Kt-B3 12. P-QR4
In many variations of the Ruy Lopez, this advance is always good, if Black cannot avoid exchanging the pawn, because the White Queen’s Rook, which only gets into play with difficulty, can either be exchanged or hold the Rook’s file. In any case the Black Knight’s pawn is weak for the end-game. If, as in the present game. Black can play P-Kt5, P-R4 is useless and even doubtful, as the Rook’s pawn itself may become weak in the end- game.
In many variations of the Ruy Lopez, this move is always a good choice if Black can’t avoid exchanging the pawn, since the White Queen’s Rook, which usually gets into play with difficulty, can either be exchanged or control the Rook’s file. Regardless, the Black Knight's pawn is weak for the endgame. In the current game, if Black plays P-Kt5, then P-R4 is pointless and even questionable, as the Rook’s pawn might become weak in the endgame.
12. … B-Kt2
12. … B-Kt2
This causes the loss of the game. In the Ruy Lopez the Bishop is nearly always needed on the diagonal QB1-KR6, to prevent a Knight from settling at White’s KB5, which otherwise cannot be repelled except by P-KKt3, a most undesirable consummation. The proper continuation would have been P-Kt5, B-K3, Q-B2 and P-Q4, capturing the Queen’s file. Compare note to move 13 in the next game.
This leads to losing the game. In the Ruy Lopez, the Bishop is almost always necessary on the diagonal QB1-KR6 to stop a Knight from landing at White's KB5, which can only be countered by P-KKt3, a very undesirable outcome. The correct continuation would have been P-Kt5, B-K3, Q-B2, and P-Q4, taking control of the Queen's file. See note to move 13 in the next game.
13. Kt-B1 Q-B2 14. Kt-Kt3 P-Kt3
13. Knight to B1 Queen to B2 14. Knight to Knight 3 Pawn to Knight 3
![[Illustration]](images/diag117.jpg)
Diag. 117
Diag. 117
Here is the weakness. White first provides against Black’s P-Q4, and then starts a sharp attack on the King’s side.
Here is the weakness. White first defends against Black’s P-Q4, and then begins a strong attack on the King’s side.
15. B-Kt5 QR-Q1
15. B-Kt5 QR-Q1
P-Q4 at once is not feasible, because of BxKt.
P-Q4 right away isn't possible, due to BxKt.
16. PxP PxP 17. Q-B1
16. PxP PxP 17. Q-B1
This brings the Q away from her file, which Black could now secure by P-Q4, followed by PxP.
This moves the Q away from her file, which Black could now protect by pushing P to Q4, followed by capturing pawn on pawn.
17. … KR-K1
The proper continuation is the one outlined in the note above.
The right continuation is the one mentioned in the note above.
18. P-R3
White has now ample leisure to prepare the advance of his KBP.
White now has plenty of time to get ready for the advance of his KBP.
18. … R-R1 19. RxR RxR 20. Kt-R2 B-QB1 21. P-KB4 Kt-K1 22. P-B5 BxB 23. QxB Q-K2
18. … R-R1 19. RxR RxR 20. Kt-R2 B-QB1 21. P-KB4 Kt-K1 22. P-B5 BxB 23. QxB Q-K2
Black seeks salvation in exchanges, which White, of course, tries to avoid, having good prospects of driving home his attack. His pieces are concentrated on the King’s side, whilst the Black forces are scattered, and unable to get back in time for the defence. Moreover, it is likely that the weakness at Black’s KR3 and KB3 will prove fatal as the Black KB is exchanged.
Black looks for salvation in trades, which White, of course, tries to avoid since he has a strong chance of landing his attack. His pieces are focused on the King's side, while Black's forces are spread out and unable to regroup in time for defense. Additionally, the weakness at Black's KR3 and KB3 is likely to be disastrous as the Black KB is traded off.
24. Q-R6 Q-B1 25. Q-B1 Q-Kt2 26. R-B1 P-Kt4
24. Q-R6 Q-B1 25. Q-B1 Q-Kt2 26. R-B1 P-Kt4
White was threatening to play Kt-Kt4 with PxP and Kt-R6.
White was planning to move the knight to Kt4, capturing with PxP and then moving the knight to R6.
27. Kt-Kt4 Kt-B3 28. KtxKtch QxKt
27. Nf-Nb4 Nf-B3 28. Nxb5 Qxb5
One of the attacking Knights is eliminated. But there is another, which forces the entry at KB6 and KKt6.
One of the attacking knights is taken out. But there's another one that pushes into KB6 and KKt6.
29. P-R4
to gain access for the White Queen at KR6. If Black, captures there follows: 30. Kt-R5, Q-Q1; 31. Q-R6, Q-B1; 32. Kt-B6ch, an instructive example of the weakness created by P-KKt3.
to gain access for the White Queen at KR6. If Black captures, the sequence follows: 30. Kt-R5, Q-Q1; 31. Q-R6, Q-B1; 32. Kt-B6ch, an instructive example of the weakness created by P-KKt3.
29. … P-R3 30. Kt-R5 Q-Q1 31. P-B6
29. … P-R3 30. Kt-R5 Q-Q1 31. P-B6
All this is easy to understand.
All of this is easy to understand.
31. … K-R2 32. PxP B-Kt5 33. Kt-Kt7 K-Kt3 34. B-Q1 Q-Q2 35. Kt-B5 BxKt 36. PxBch Resigns.
31. … K-R2 32. PxP B-Kt5 33. Kt-Kt7 K-Kt3 34. B-Q1 Q-Q2 35. Kt-B5 BxKt 36. PxBch Resigns.
The conclusion might be: K-R2; 37. B-R5, PxP; 38. QxP, R-KKt1; 39. B-Kt6ch, PxB; 40. Q-R4 mate.
The conclusion might be: K-R2; 37. B-R5, PxP; 38. QxP, R-KKt1; 39. B-Kt6ch, PxB; 40. Q-R4 mate.
GAME No. 13
White: Teichmann. Black: Schlechter.
White: Teichmann. Black: Schlechter.
Ruy Lopez (see p. 37).
Ruy Lopez (see p. 37).
Move 1-8 as in Game No. 12.
Move 1-8 just like in Game No. 12.
![[Illustration]](images/diag118.jpg)
Diag. 118
Diag. 118
9. P-Q3 Kt-QR4 10. B-B2 P-B4 11. QKt-Q2 Q-B2
9. P-Q3 Knight to R4 10. Bishop to B2 Pawn to B4 11. Queen Knight to Q2 Queen to B2
Supporting, as it does, the KP, this is not a lost move, although White has not played P-Q4. It prepares Black’s P-Q4 (after Kt- B3), the KP being fully protected against White’s double attack by PxP.
Supporting the KP, this isn't a wasted move, even though White hasn’t played P-Q4. It sets up Black’s P-Q4 (after Kt-B3), with the KP being fully protected against White’s double attack by PxP.
12. Kt-B1 Kt-B3 13. Kt-K3 B-Kt2
12. Kt-B1 Kt-B3 13. Kt-K3 B-Kt2
The logical move would have been B-K3, to enforce P-Q4. Black is then very well developed, whilst White labours under a somewhat undeveloped Queen’s side. An attempt to exert pressure in the centre with P-Q4 in order to prevent Black’s P-Q4 would be belated. Black would gain the advantage by: l4. … KPxP; 15. PxP, PxP; 16. KtxP, KtxKt; 17. QxKt, Kt-Kt5! Nor would B-Kt5 before Kt-K3 be more successful; after B-K3; 14. Kt-K3, QR-Q1; 15. P-Q4, BPxP; 16. PxP, PxP; 17. KtxP, KtxKt; 18. QxKt, Q-B4, Black has the better chances in the end-game. The move in the text is not good because, as we saw before, the Bishop is wanted on the other diagonal to cover the square at KB4.
The logical move would have been B-K3 to support P-Q4. Black is then very well developed, while White struggles with a somewhat undeveloped Queen’s side. Trying to apply pressure in the center with P-Q4 to stop Black’s P-Q4 would be too late. Black would take the advantage by: 14. … KPxP; 15. PxP, PxP; 16. KtxP, KtxKt; 17. QxKt, Kt-Kt5! Moving B-Kt5 before Kt-K3 wouldn’t work either; after B-K3; 14. Kt-K3, QR-Q1; 15. P-Q4, BPxP; 16. PxP, PxP; 17. KtxP, KtxKt; 18. QxKt, Q-B4, Black has stronger chances in the endgame. The move in the text is not good because, as we observed before, the Bishop is needed on the other diagonal to cover the square at KB4.
14. Kt-B5 KR-K1 15. B-Kt5 Kt-Q2
14. Knight to B5 King to Rook 1 15. Bishop to Knight 5 Knight to Queen 2
Even now it was desirable to aim at P-Q4, therefore QR-Q1 was preferable.
Even now, it was better to aim for P-Q4, so QR-Q1 was the preferred move.
16. B-Kt3
16. B-Kt3
The position of the White pieces points to a dangerous menace to the opposing King’s side.
The position of the White pieces indicates a serious threat to the opposing King’s side.
16. … Kt-B1
17. B-Q5!!
16. … Kt-B1
17. B-Q5!!
The beginning of a brilliant combination. BxKt is threatened, and Black must first cover his B at K2.
The start of an exciting combination. BxKt is under threat, and Black must first protect his B at K2.
17. … Kt-Kt3
18. BxB KKtxB
17. … Kt-Kt3
18. BxB KKtxB
QKtxB is not feasible, because of BxB and KtxQP.
QKtxB isn't practical due to BxB and KtxQP.
19. BxPch!! KxB 20. Kt-Kt5ch
19. BxPch!! KxB 20. Kt-Kt5ch
![[Illustration]](images/diag119.jpg)
Diag. 119
Diag. 119
Quite a number of charming combinations are hidden in this position. If K-Kt3 or Kt1, then 21. KtxKtP! If K-B3 White can capture the RP first with check.
Quite a few charming combinations are hidden in this position. If K-Kt3 or Kt1, then 21. KtxKtP! If K-B3, White can capture the RP first with check.
20. … K-Kt1 21. Q-R5 KtxKt 22. QxRPch K-B1 23. QxKtch K-Kt1 24. Q-Kt6!!!
20. … K-Kt1 21. Q-R5 KxK 22. QxR+ K-B1 23. QxK+ K-Kt1 24. Q-Kt6!!!
The point. This prevents P-Kt3, which would allow Black to bring up his Q for the defence at Kt2. Now nothing can be done against the threatening R-K3-B3 or R3.
The point. This stops P-Kt3, which would let Black bring up his Q for defense at Kt2. Now there's no way to counter the threatening R-K3-B3 or R3.
24. … Q-Q2 25. R-K 3 Resigns
24. … Q-Q2 25. R-K 3 Resigns
A wonderful game in which Teichmann, the great judge of position, proves himself also a master in hand-to-hand fighting, in the wild chaos of sacrificial combinations.
A fantastic game where Teichmann, the great evaluator of positions, also shows he’s a master in direct combat amidst the wild chaos of sacrificial combinations.
GAME No. 14
White: Spielmann. Black: Tarrasch.
White: Spielmann. Black: Tarrasch.
Ruy Lopez (see p. 41).
Ruy Lopez (see p. 41).
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-KT5 P-QR3 4. B-R4 Kt-B3 5. Castles Kt-P 6. P-Q4
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-KT5 P-QR3 4. B-R4 Kt-B3 5. Castles Kt-P 6. P-Q4
![[Illustration]](images/diag120.jpg)
Diag. 120
Diag. 120
In a game between Riga and Berlin PxP was tried for the first time, a bold venture which anticipates White’s desire to open the King’s file. After 7. R-K1 Black can defend the Kt by P-Q4, but after 8. KtxP White threatens again to win the Kt by P-KB3, besides attacking the QKt a second time. However, Black has a surprising answer in readiness. He initiates a violent counter attack which keeps White busy until Black, by castling, escapes the dangers of the double pin. (Compare Game No. 17.)
In a game between Riga and Berlin, PxP was tried for the first time, a bold move that anticipates White’s intention to open the King’s file. After 7. R-K1, Black can defend the Knight by P-Q4, but after 8. KtxP, White threatens to capture the Knight again with P-KB3, while also targeting the Queen’s Knight for the second time. However, Black has a surprising response ready. He starts a fierce counterattack that keeps White occupied until Black, by castling, avoids the risks of the double pin. (Compare Game No. 17.)
6. … P-QKt4 7. B-Kt3 P-Q4 8. P-QR4
6. … P-QKt4 7. B-Kt3 P-Q4 8. P-QR4
This gives Black an opportunity of disposing of his QKt by exchanging it, thereby enabling him to round off his pawn position by P-QB4, at the same time threatening to cut off the Bishop by P-B5. 8. PxP followed by P-B3 is the natural continuation, as shown in the first part of this book, because the Bishop, retreating to B2, can operate on a useful diagonal.
This gives Black a chance to get rid of his knight by exchanging it, which allows him to strengthen his pawn structure with pawn to b4 while also threatening to block the bishop with pawn to b5. 8. Pawn takes pawn followed by pawn to b3 is the logical next move, as discussed in the first part of this book, because if the bishop retreats to b2, it can work on a useful diagonal.
8. … QKtxP!
8. … QKtxP!
QR-Kt1 would not be so good, because White obtains an open file for his Rook. The move in the text is an absolutely valid defence, as was proved by Schlechter in his match against Lasker.
QR-Kt1 wouldn’t be as effective because White gets an open file for his Rook. The move mentioned in the text is a completely valid defense, as demonstrated by Schlechter during his match against Lasker.
9. KtxKt PxKt 10. Kt-B3
9. KtxKt PxKt 10. Kt-B3
PxP and P-B3 seems a more natural continuation.
PxP and P-B3 seem like a more natural continuation.
10. … KtxKt
10. … KtxKt
Not PxKt, on account of BxP.
Not PxKt, on account of BxP.
11. PxKt P-QB4 12. RPxP B-K2
11. PxKt P-QB4 12. RPxP B-K2
in order to castle in reply to B-R4.
in order to castle in response to B-R4.
13. Q-B3
Here White should have got back his second pawn by PxQP. If then 13. … P-B5; 14. B-R4, Castles; 15. PxP, BxP, White plays P-QB3, providing a retreat for his R or B. After the move in the text this manœuvre becomes impossible, because the B after P-B3 can be attacked twice but has lost the support of the Queen.
Here White should have regained his second pawn by capturing with PxQP. If then 13. … P-B5; 14. B-R4, castles; 15. PxP, BxP, White plays P-QB3, creating a retreat for his rook or bishop. After the move in the text, this maneuver becomes impossible because the bishop after P-B3 can be attacked twice and has lost the support of the queen.
13. … B-K3 14. RxP Castles 15. PxP P-B5 16. B-R2
13. … B-K3 14. RxP Castles 15. PxP P-B5 16. B-R2
Now the Bishop is hemmed in permanently; in other words, Black is a piece up and must win easily. Therefore 16. B-R4 was compulsory in order to get at any rate three pawns for the piece, thus: 16. … B-Q2; 17. QxP, RxR; 18. PxR, BxB; 19. QxP.
Now the Bishop is completely boxed in; in other words, Black has a piece advantage and is set to win easily. So 16. B-R4 was necessary to at least secure three pawns for the piece, like this: 16. … B-Q2; 17. QxP, RxR; 18. PxR, BxB; 19. QxP.
16. … RxR 17. PxR Q-R4 18. B-Kt1 P-B6 19. Q-Kt3
16. … RxR 17. PxR Q-R4 18. B-Kt1 P-B6 19. Q-Kt3
White tries to work up an attack on the King’s side while Black is still occupied on the other wing.
White tries to launch an attack on the King's side while Black is still busy on the other side.
19. … R-B1 20. P-B4 B-KB4 21. R-K1 B-B3 22. K-R1
In order to answer BxQP by 23. B-K3 and P-R7, 22. … QxP is not feasible because of QxP.
In order to respond to BxQP by 23. B-K3 and P-R7, 22. … QxP isn’t possible because of QxP.
22. … P-R3 23. P-R3 R-Kt1 24. B-K3 QxP 25. R-Q1 Q-R8 26. Q-K1
22. … P-R3 23. P-R3 R-Kt1 24. B-K3 QxP 25. R-Q1 Q-R8 26. Q-K1
![[Illustration]](images/diag121.jpg)
Diag. 121
Diag. 121
The sequel forms an instructive example of how superior development can afford winning chances even when there is no immediate prospect of material gain. The opposing pieces are gradually constricted until the defending lines are weakened by compulsory pawn moves. In the present position Black quietly sets to work to bring his Bishops to bear on the White King.
The sequel provides a useful example of how better development can create winning opportunities even when there’s no immediate prospect of material gain. The opposing pieces are gradually restricted until the defending lines weaken due to forced pawn moves. In the current position, Black calmly starts to bring his Bishops to apply pressure on the White King.
26. … B-K5 27. K-R2 B-K2 28. Q-B1
to free his game somewhat with P-B5, which Black prevents at once.
to slightly open his game with P-B5, which Black immediately blocks.
28. … P-B4 29. R-K1 B-R5
Being probably short of time, Black makes a few irrelevant moves. If his aim was not the opening of the KKt file but the subsequent sacrifice of the Queen, he might have played Q-Kt7 at once, followed by Q-Kt4.
Being probably short on time, Black makes a few irrelevant moves. If his goal wasn't to open the KKt file but to sacrifice the Queen later, he could have just played Q-Kt7 right away, followed by Q-Kt4.
30. P-Kt3 B-K2 31. B-B2 B-Q3 32. R-B1 K-R2 33. R-K1 R-Kt3 34. R-B1 B-R6 35. R-K1 Q-Kt7 36. Q-K2 R-Kt5 37. R-Kt1 R-Kt3
30. P-Kt3 B-K2 31. B-B2 B-Q3 32. R-B1 K-R2 33. R-K1 R-Kt3 34. R-B1 B-R6 35. R-K1 Q-Kt7 36. Q-K2 R-Kt5 37. R-Kt1 R-Kt3
Otherwise White might embark upon a counter attack, beginning with P-Kt4. Now this is impossible on account of R-Kt3.
Otherwise, White might launch a counterattack, starting with P-Kt4. Now this isn't possible because of R-Kt3.
38. R-K1 Q-Kt4 39. Q-R5
38. R-K1 Q-Kt4 39. Q-R5
After the exchange of Queens, Black would win easily by R-Kt7. 39. B-R2 also fails on account of QxQ; 40. RxQ, R-Kt7; 41. B-Kt3, B-Q6!; 42. R-K5, BxP, and the passed pawn costs a Rook. With the text move, White provokes the sacrifice of the Queen at Kt 8, apparently not seeing the fine continuation at Black’s disposal on the forty-first move.
After the exchange of queens, Black wins easily with R-Kt7. 39. B-R2 also fails because of QxQ; 40. RxQ, R-Kt7; 41. B-Kt3, B-Q6!; 42. R-K5, BxP, and the passed pawn costs a rook. With this move, White sets up the sacrifice of the queen at Kt 8, seemingly overlooking the strong continuation that Black has available on the forty-first move.
39. … QxB! 40. RxQ RxR 41. P-Kt4
39. … QxB! 40. RxQ RxR 41. P-Kt4
Compulsory. B-Kt1 would be followed by R-QB8, etc.
Compulsory. B-Kt1 would be followed by R-QB8, etc.
41. … B-B8!! Resigns.
B-B8 resigns.
There might follow 42. K-Kt3, P-Kt3; 43. Q-R4, BxPch; 44. KxB, P- Kt4ch, and so on. 4l. … B-Q3 would have given White a little respite, though his game would still have been hopeless after PxP and R-K8.
There might follow 42. K-Kt3, P-Kt3; 43. Q-R4, BxPch; 44. KxB, P-Kt4ch, and so on. 41. … B-Q3 would have given White a slight break, although his game would still have been hopeless after PxP and R-K8.
GAME No. 15
White: Aljechin. Black: Niemzowitsch.
White: Aljechin. Black: Niemzowitsch.
Ruy Lopez (see p. 41).
Ruy Lopez (see p. 41).
1. P-K4 P-K4
2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3
3. B-Kt5 P-QR3
4. B-R4 Kt-B3
5. Castles KtxP
6. P-Q4 P-QKt4
7. B-Kt3 P-Q4
8. PxP B-K3
9. P-B3 B-K2
10. R-K1
1. P-K4 P-K4
2. N-KB3 N-QB3
3. B-N5 P-QR3
4. B-R4 N-B3
5. Castles NxP
6. P-Q4 P-QKt4
7. B-N3 P-Q4
8. PxP B-K3
9. P-B3 B-K2
10. R-K1
![[Illustration]](images/diag122.jpg)
Diag. 122
Diag. 122
This is one of the most important positions in the Ruy Lopez. Black has the better development, but his centre is less secure. Whilst White has a pawn secured in the centre, Black has a Knight there which will soon be driven away. White’s Q4, the basis of his centre, is entirely in his hands, while Black’s Q4 is exposed to a steady pressure by the White pieces. Finally Black’s Q Kt is unfavourably placed, obstructing as it does the QBP and preventing it from falling into line with its fellows. In Petrograd, 1909, Lasker tried the following new defence: Kt-B4 followed by B-Kt5, giving up the moves gained before in order to relieve the pressure on the Black QP and to exchange the same ultimately at Q5. The various possibilities of the position have been discussed in connection with Diag. 22. It may be added that after 10. … Castles; QKt-Q2 is surely a better move than the usual Kt-Q4, as the Queen’s side should be developed before undertaking an attack (11. … Q-Q2?; 12. KtxB, followed by RxKt). For a long time it was thought that after Kt-Q4 Black had to exchange Knights, which enables White to make the pawn at QB7 “backward” by B-K3. For Black must first play P-KR3 to guard his Kt against the threat of P-B3 and P-KR4. However, a sensational innovation which refutes the Kt’s move was introduced in Breslau in 1912. It is the following sacrifice: 10. … Castles; 11. Kt- Q4, KtxKP!; 12. P-B3, B-Q3!!; 13. PxKt, B-Kt5!!; 14. Q-Q2, Q-R5 with an overpowering attack.
This is one of the most important positions in the Ruy Lopez. Black has better development, but the center is less secure. While White has a pawn secured in the center, Black has a Knight there that will soon be pushed away. White’s Q4, the foundation of his center, is completely under his control, while Black’s Q4 is exposed to constant pressure from White’s pieces. Additionally, Black’s Q Kt is poorly placed, blocking the QBP and preventing it from aligning with its partners. In Petrograd, 1909, Lasker tried a new defense: Kt-B4 followed by B-Kt5, giving up the previous moves to relieve the pressure on the Black QP and ultimately exchange it at Q5. The various possibilities of the position have been discussed in connection with Diag. 22. It can be noted that after 10. … Castles; QKt-Q2 is definitely a better move than the usual Kt-Q4, as the Queen's side should be developed before launching an attack (11. … Q-Q2?; 12. KtxB, followed by RxKt). For a long time, it was believed that after Kt-Q4, Black had to exchange Knights, allowing White to make the pawn at QB7 “backward” by B-K3. Black must first play P-KR3 to protect his Kt from the threat of P-B3 and P-KR4. However, a groundbreaking innovation that counters the Kt’s move was introduced in Breslau in 1912. It is the following sacrifice: 10. … Castles; 11. Kt-Q4, KtxKP!; 12. P-B3, B-Q3!!; 13. PxKt, B-Kt5!!; 14. Q-Q2, Q-R5 with a powerful attack.
10. … Kt-B4 11. B-B2 B-Kt5 12. Q Kt-Q2 Castles 13. Kt-Kt3 Kt-K5
10. … Kt-B4 11. B-B2 B-Kt5 12. Q Kt-Q2 Castles 13. Kt-Kt3 Kt-K5
Here Lasker played Kt-K3 against Janowski (Paris, 1912), but it proved to be inferior, because 14. Q-Q3 disorganises Black’s King’s side forcibly.
Here Lasker played Knight to King 3 against Janowski (Paris, 1912), but it turned out to be a weaker move because 14. Queen to Queen 3 disrupts Black’s King side forcefully.
The move in the text is not really a pawn sacrifice. After 14. BxKt, PxB; 15. QxQ, QRxQ; 16. KKt-Q4, KtxKt; 17. KtxKt, R-Q4, White cannot play 18. RxP, because of P-QB4; 19. Kt-B2, B-B4 or 19. Kt-B3, R-Q8ch; 20. Kt-K1, B-B4; 21. R-K2, B-Q6; 22. R-K3, B- Kt4.
The move in the text isn’t really a pawn sacrifice. After 14. BxKt, PxB; 15. QxQ, QRxQ; 16. KKt-Q4, KtxKt; 17. KtxKt, R-Q4, White can’t play 18. RxP, because of P-QB4; 19. Kt-B2, B-B4 or 19. Kt-B3, R-Q8ch; 20. Kt-K1, B-B4; 21. R-K2, B-Q6; 22. R-K3, B-Kt4.
14. B-B4 P-B4 15. PxP e.p. KtxP(B3) 16. Q-Q3 Kt-K5?
14. B-B4 P-B4 15. PxP e.p. KtxP(B3) 16. Q-Q3 Kt-K5?
This loses the QBP, and weakens the QP. Black might have tried BxKt; 17. QxB, B-Q3. It would then have been possible to support the QP by P-B3 after moving the Kt away. If Black was anxious to preserve his two Bishops he would even have risked P-Kt3. After 17. B-R6, R-B2, the Bishop could have been driven away again by the KKt from Kt1 or Kt5. The open file offered some compensation and chances of counter attack.
This loses the QBP and weakens the QP. Black could have tried BxKt; 17. QxB, B-Q3. Then it would have been possible to support the QP with P-B3 after moving the Kt away. If Black wanted to keep his two Bishops, he might have even risked P-Kt3. After 17. B-R6, R-B2, the Bishop could have been driven away again by the KKt from Kt1 or Kt5. The open file provided some compensation and opportunities for a counterattack.
17. BxP Q-Q2
17. BxP Q-Q2
Not QxB because of QxPch.
Not QxB due to QxPch.
18. Kt-K5 KtxKt 19. BxKt B-R5
18. Kt-K5 KtxKt 19. BxKt B-R5
RxP is bad because of 20. RxKt, B-KB4; 21. Q-Kt3.
RxP is risky because of 20. RxKt, B-KB4; 21. Q-Kt3.
20. B-Kt3 BxB 21. RPxB B-B4
20. B-Kt3 BxB 21. RPxB B-B4
Now RxP! was feasible with a level game after: 22. RxKt, B-B4! 23. KxR, BxR; 24. Q any, Q-B4ch, followed by BxB. After missing this chance, Black soon loses the game.
Now RxP! was possible with a balanced game after: 22. RxKt, B-B4! 23. KxR, BxR; 24. Q any, Q-B4ch, followed by BxB. After missing this opportunity, Black quickly loses the game.
22. Q-Q4 KR-Q1 23. QR-Q1 Q-QB2 24. Kt-Q2 KtxKBP
22. Q-Q4 KR-Q1 23. QR-Q1 Q-QB2 24. Kt-Q2 KtxKBP
A last and desperate attempt. Black obtains Rook and pawn against two minor pieces, but has no time to initiate an attack with the Rooks. The wisest plan was to give up the P, with a view to effecting the exchange of the minor pieces, because an ending with Queen and Rooks generally produces a draw. Black could not play KtxKtP instead of the move in the text because of 25. B- Kt3!.
A final and urgent effort. Black has a Rook and a pawn against two minor pieces, but there's no time to start an attack with the Rooks. The best strategy was to sacrifice the pawn to exchange the minor pieces since an endgame with a Queen and Rooks usually ends in a draw. Black couldn't play KtxKtP instead of the move mentioned in the text because of 25. B-Kt3!.
25. BxB KtxR 26. RxKt QxKtP 27. B-K6ch K-R1 28. BxP QR-B1 29. Kt-K4 Q-R5 30. P-QKt3 R-B3
25. BxB KtxR 26. RxKt QxKtP 27. B-K6ch K-R1 28. BxP QR-B1 29. Kt-K4 Q-R5 30. P-QKt3 R-B3
White now obtains a passed pawn, and a speedy win.
White now has a passed pawn and is set for a quick victory.
31. Q-B2 Q-R4 32. Q-B3 QxQ 33. PxQ P-Kt3 34. R-Q2 R-Kt3 35. P-QB4 PxP 36. PxP R-Kt8ch 37. K-B2 P-QR4 38. P-B5 R-QB8 39. P-B6 K-Kt2 40. B-B4! RxB 41. RxR RxP 42. R-Q7ch K-R3 43. K-Kt3 R-B5 44. Kt-B2 K-Kt4
31. Q-B2 Q-R4 32. Q-B3 QxQ 33. PxQ P-Kt3 34. R-Q2 R-Kt3 35. P-QB4 PxP 36. PxP R-Kt8ch 37. K-B2 P-QR4 38. P-B5 R-QB8 39. P-B6 K-Kt2 40. B-B4! RxB 41. RxR RxP 42. R-Q7ch K-R3 43. K-Kt3 R-B5 44. Kt-B2 K-Kt4
Mate was threatened by: 45. Kt-Kt4ch, K-R4; 46. R-Q5ch, P-Kt4; 47. R-Q6 and R-R6 mate (or if RxKtch, PxR mate).
Mate was threatened by: 45. Kt-Kt4ch, K-R4; 46. R-Q5ch, P-Kt4; 47. R-Q6 and R-R6 mate (or if RxKtch, PxR mate).
45. R-Q5ch K-B3 46. RxP Resigns
45. R-Q5ch K-B3 46. RxP Resigns
GAME No. 16
White: Yates. Black: Gunsberg.
White: Yates. Black: Gunsberg.
Ruy Lopez.
Ruy Lopez.
1. P-K4 P-K4
2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3
3. B-Kt5 P-QR3
4. B-R4 Kt-B3
5. Castles KtxP
6. P-Q4 P-QKt4
7. B-Kt3 P-Q4
8. PxP B-K3
9. P-QB3 B-K2
10. B-K3
1. P-K4 P-K4
2. N-KB3 N-QB3
3. B-N5 P-QR3
4. B-R4 N-B3
5. Castles NxP
6. P-Q4 P-QN4
7. B-N3 P-Q4
8. PxP B-N3
9. P-QB3 B-N2
10. B-N3
in order to exchange the Black Knight if played to B4.
in order to trade the Black Knight if moved to B4.
10. … Castles 11. QKt-Q2
10. … Castles 11. QKt-Q2
If Q-Q3, then Kt-R4; 12. QKt-Q2, P-QB4.
If Q-Q3, then Kt-R4; 12. QKt-Q2, P-QB4.
11. … KtxKt
11. … KtxKt
This furthers White’s development, and should not be played unless there is no other move available. To be considered are P- B4 and B-KKt5. An argument against P-B4 is that White can deprive Black’s weak centre pawn of one protecting piece (12. PxP e.p., KtxP (B3); 13. Kt-Kt5), and experience has shown that White obtains the superior game.
This helps White's strategy and should only be played if there are no other options. Consider P-B4 and B-KKt5. One downside of P-B4 is that White can take away one of Black’s weak center pawn's defenders (12. PxP e.p., KtxP (B3); 13. Kt-Kt5), and experience has shown that White usually ends up with a better game.
12. QxKt Kt-R4 13. B-B2 Kt-B5
12. QxK K-R4 13. B-B2 K-B5
A very dangerous manœuvre, as White can evade the exchange of his Bishop and the Black Kt does not get back in time for the defence of the K side, where White’s attack becomes virulent. He should have played P-QB4 followed by Kt-B3.
A very risky move, as White can avoid trading his Bishop, and the Black Knight won't return in time to defend the Kingside, where White's attack intensifies. He should have played Pawn to Queen's Bishop 4 followed by Knight to Bishop 3.
14. Q-Q3 P-Kt3 15. B-R6 KtxKtP 16. Q-K2 R-K1 17. Kt-Q4
14. Q-Q3 P-Kt3 15. B-R6 KtxKtP 16. Q-K2 R-K1 17. Kt-Q4
Black had probably anticipated that White would be content with regaining his pawn by BxP, but, with fine positional insight, he retains his Bishop for the coming onslaught and speedily concentrates his forces on the K side; whilst Black, who has won a pawn at the expense of several moves, cannot mobilise an equivalent number of pieces in time for the defence.
Black probably expected that White would be satisfied with getting back his pawn by BxP, but with great positional awareness, he keeps his Bishop for the upcoming attack and quickly focuses his forces on the King side; meanwhile, Black, who has gained a pawn at the cost of several moves, can't organize an equal number of pieces in time for the defense.
17. … Kt-B5 18. P-B4 B-Q2
17. … Kt-B5 18. P-B4 B-Q2
White was threatening 19. Kt-B6, 20. KtxB, 21. B-Kt5, 22. B-B6; 18. … Q-Q2 is not sufficient, as 19. P-B5 would follow. Neither can 18. … B-QB4 be played because of 19. B-Kt5, Q-B1; 20. B-B6. Preferable to the text move seems B-KB1 (19. B-Kt5, Q-B1; 20. B- B6, B-Kt2), as then the Black pieces have more freedom of action.
White was threatening 19. Kt-B6, 20. KtxB, 21. B-Kt5, 22. B-B6; 18. … Q-Q2 isn’t enough, since 19. P-B5 would follow. Also, 18. … B-QB4 can’t be played because of 19. B-Kt5, Q-B1; 20. B-B6. A better move than the one in the text seems to be B-KB1 (19. B-Kt5, Q-B1; 20. B-B6, B-Kt2), as this gives the Black pieces more freedom to move.
19. QR-K1 P-QB4 20. P-K6
A brilliant sacrifice to which no satisfactory reply can be found. For instance, 20. … PxKt; 21. Q-Kt4, Kt-K6, 22. RxKt, PxR; 23. P-B5, BxP; 24. PxB, PxP, 25. BxP, etc.; or 24. … R- KB1; 25. PxPch, RxP; 26. Q-K6, Q-K1; 27. BxP, etc.; or 23. … P- Kt4; 24. PxPch, KxP; 25. Q-R5ch, K-Kt1; 26. P-B6, BxP; 27. BxP, etc.; or 21. … B-B4; 22. PxPch, KxP; 23. BxPch, PxB; 24. P-B5, etc. There are many variations, all leading to a speedy end.
A brilliant sacrifice for which there's no satisfactory response. For example, 20. … PxKt; 21. Q-Kt4, Kt-K6, 22. RxKt, PxR; 23. P-B5, BxP; 24. PxB, PxP, 25. BxP, etc.; or 24. … R-KB1; 25. PxPch, RxP; 26. Q-K6, Q-K1; 27. BxP, etc.; or 23. … P-Kt4; 24. PxPch, KxP; 25. Q-R5ch, K-Kt1; 26. P-B6, BxP; 27. BxP, etc.; or 21. … B-B4; 22. PxPch, KxP; 23. BxPch, PxB; 24. P-B5, etc. There are many variations, all leading to a quick conclusion.
![[Illustration]](images/diag123.jpg)
Diag. 123
Diag. 123
20. … B-KB3 21. P-Kt4 P-Kt 22. P-B5 P-Q6 23. BxP BxKP
20. … B-KB3 21. P-Kt4 P-Kt 22. P-B5 P-Q6 23. BxP BxKP
If PxKP then 24. PxKtP, Kt-K4; 25. RxKt, BxR; 26. Q-R5, Q-B3; 27. RxQ, BxR; 28. PxPch, K-R1; 29. Q-B7, etc.; or 26. … BxP; 27. B- B8, etc.
If PxKP then 24. PxKtP, Kt-K4; 25. RxKt, BxR; 26. Q-R5, Q-B3; 27. RxQ, BxR; 28. PxPch, K-R1; 29. Q-B7, etc.; or 26. … BxP; 27. B-B8, etc.
24. PxB Q-Kt3ch 25. K-R1 Resigns
24. PxB Q-Kt3ch 25. K-R1 Resigns
GAME No. 17
White: Berlin. Black: Riga.
White: Berlin. Black: Riga.
Ruy Lopez.
Ruy Lopez opening.
Move 1-6 as in Game No. 16.
Move 1-6 like in Game No. 16.
![[Illustration]](images/diag124.jpg)
Diag. 124
Diag. 124
6. … PxP
6. … PxP
Compare note to move No. 6 in Game 14.
Compare note to move No. 6 in Game 14.
7. R-K1 P-Q4 8. KtxP B-Q3
7. R-K1 P-Q4 8. K takes P B-Q3
This is the key to the variation. Black threatens to obtain a draw by perpetual check through BxPch, followed by Q-R5ch and QxPch. This is not good enough against a weaker opponent in a tournament, and a strong player cannot afford to play the Riga defence. But that is not a point against the variation. To prove it unsound, White has to find a win.
This is the key to the variation. Black risks getting a draw by using perpetual check with BxPch, followed by Q-R5ch and QxPch. This strategy isn’t strong enough against a weaker player in a tournament, and a strong player can't afford to use the Riga defense. However, that's not a reason to dismiss the variation. To show that it's not a good option, White needs to find a winning move.
9. KtxKt BxPch 10. K-R1!
9. KtxKt BxPch 10. K-R1!
After 10. K-B1 Black has a tremendous attack, and drives it home before White can manage to bring his extra piece into play. A game Maroczy-Berger (Vienna, 1908) is an illustration of this. It continued in this way: 10. K-B1, Q-R5; 11. B-K3, Castles; 12. Kt- Q4, B-Kt5; 13. Kt-KB3, Q-R4. Now White has no satisfactory continuation. 14. Kt-Q2 obstructs the Queen, and it is difficult to bring the Rooks into concerted action. 14. Kt-B3, QR-Q1; 15. Q-Q3, BxKt; 16. PxB, QxP; 17. KtxKt, PxKt; 18. Q-B3, Q-R6ch; 19. K-K2, Q-Kt5ch; 20. K-B1, R-Q4; 21. B-Kt3, R-KR4; 22. P-B3, PxP; Resigns.
After 10. K-B1, Black launches a powerful attack and solidifies it before White can bring their extra piece into play. A game between Maroczy and Berger (Vienna, 1908) illustrates this. It continued like this: 10. K-B1, Q-R5; 11. B-K3, Castles; 12. Kt-Q4, B-Kt5; 13. Kt-KB3, Q-R4. Now, White has no good options. 14. Kt-Q2 blocks the Queen, which makes it tough to coordinate the Rooks. 14. Kt-B3, QR-Q1; 15. Q-Q3, BxKt; 16. PxB, QxP; 17. KtxKt, PxKt; 18. Q-B3, Q-R6ch; 19. K-K2, Q-Kt5ch; 20. K-B1, R-Q4; 21. B-Kt3, R-KR4; 22. P-B3, PxP; Resigns.
10. … Q-R5
It now looks as if White were lost. But a fine sacrifice forces the exchange of all Black’s attacking pieces, and saves the situation.
It now seems like White is in trouble. However, a great sacrifice forces the exchange of all of Black’s attacking pieces and salvages the situation.
11. RxKtch PxR 12. Q-Q8ch QxQ 13. KtxQch KxKt 14. KxB …
11. RxKtch PxR 12. Q-Q8ch QxQ 13. KtxQch KxKt 14. KxB …
![[Illustration]](images/diag125.jpg)
Diag. 125
Diag. 125
After the terrible slaughter, the position is somewhat clearer. Black has a Rook and two pawns for two minor pieces, a slight advantage for the end-game, but as yet there is no thought of an end-game. White, in possession of two Bishops, with an open Queen’s file on which the Black King stands, has good attacking chances, and most masters would think the position favourable for White.
After the brutal battle, the situation is a bit clearer. Black has a Rook and two pawns for two minor pieces, which gives a slight edge for the endgame, but no one is thinking about that yet. White, holding two Bishops and with an open Queen's file that the Black King occupies, has strong attacking opportunities, and most masters would consider this position favorable for White.
14. … B-K3
P-KB4 is a plausible move, but is followed by a pretty mate by 15. B-Kt5. The move in the text threatens to eliminate the KB by P-QB4, P-QKt4.
P-KB4 is a reasonable move, but it's followed by a strong checkmate with 15. B-Kt5. The move mentioned threatens to capture the bishop by P-QB4, P-QKt4.
15. B-K3 P-KB4 16. Kt-B3 K-K2 17. P-KKt4
15. B-K3 P-KB4 16. Kt-B3 K-K2 17. P-KKt4
Tarrasch recommends 17. R-Q1, threatening Kt-Q5ch. If P-B3, White could play 18. B-Kt6, thereby permanently preventing Black from contesting the Queen’s file, and then try to exchange Black’s B by Kt-K2-Q4. With two Bishops, White would then have winning chances.
Tarrasch suggests 17. R-Q1, which threatens Kt-Q5ch. If P-B3, White can respond with 18. B-Kt6, permanently stopping Black from contesting the Queen’s file, and then aim to exchange Black’s Bishop by Kt-K2-Q4. With two Bishops, White would then have good chances to win.
A subtle idea underlies White’s move of P-KKt4. He wishes to take advantage of the fact that Black has exchanged the KB by playing P-Kt5, thus holding all the four pawns on the King’s side. But Black finds a surprising reply, which seems to refute White’s plan.
A subtle idea lies behind White’s move of P-KKt4. He wants to take advantage of the fact that Black has traded off the King’s Bishop by playing P-Kt5, thus keeping all four pawns on the King’s side. But Black comes up with a surprising response that seems to counter White’s plan.
Capablanca played against Ed. Lasker (New York, 1915), 17. P- KKt4, P-KKt3; 18. K-Kt3, P-KR4; 19. PxBP, P-R5ch; 20. K-R2, PxP; 21. Kt-K2, P-Kt4; 22. B-Kt3, BxB; 23. RPxB, KR-KKt1; 24. R-Q1, QR-Q1; 25. RxR, KxR; 26. Kt-K4, winning a pawn.
Capablanca played against Ed. Lasker (New York, 1915), 17. P-KKt4, P-KKt3; 18. K-Kt3, P-KR4; 19. PxBP, P-R5ch; 20. K-R2, PxP; 21. Kt-K2, P-Kt4; 22. B-Kt3, BxB; 23. RPxB, KR-KKt1; 24. R-Q1, QR-Q1; 25. RxR, KxR; 26. Kt-K4, winning a pawn.
17. … P-KKt3 18. P-Kt5 QR-KKt1!!
17. … P-KKt3 18. P-Kt5 QR-KKt1!!
Black offers the exchange in order to get rid of White’s QB. If White accepts the sacrifice, he loses his KKtP, and Black retains three passed pawns for the piece, at least an equivalent for the end-game. White should decline the doubtful gift and meet the threat of P-R3 and P-KKt4 with 19. R-KKt1.
Black proposes the exchange to eliminate White's queen's bishop. If White accepts the sacrifice, he loses his knight on the king's side, and Black keeps three passed pawns for the piece, which is at least a fair trade for the endgame. White should refuse this questionable offer and respond to the threats of pawn to rook three and pawn to knight four with 19. rook to knight one.
19. B-Q4 P-R3 20. B-B6ch K-B2 21. BxR RxB 22. R-Q1
19. B-Q4 P-R3 20. B-B6ch K-B2 21. BxR RxB 22. R-Q1
in order to play 23. B-Q7 in answer to P-B4. This explains White’s check at move 20.
in order to play 23. B-Q7 in response to P-B4. This clarifies White’s check at move 20.
22. … PxPch 23. K-Kt2 K-B3!
22. … PxPch 23. K-Kt2 K-B3!
If now 24. Kt-Q5ch, Black would assail the White King with K-K4; 25. KtxP, B-B5-K7-B6. The Black phalanx of pawns becomes menacing.
If now 24. Kt-Q5ch, Black would attack the White King with K-K4; 25. KtxP, B-B5-K7-B6. The Black line of pawns becomes threatening.
24. B-Kt3 BxB
25. RPxB K-K3
26. P-Kt4 R-R2
24. B-Kt3 BxB
25. RPxB K-K3
26. P-Kt4 R-R2
Black need no longer fear to exchange Rooks, for he would then threaten the Queen’s side pawns with his King whilst the passed pawns kept the White forces occupied.
Black no longer has to worry about exchanging Rooks because it would allow him to threaten the Queen’s side pawns with his King while the passed pawns keep the White pieces busy.
27. Kt-K2 R-Q2 28. Kt-Q4ch K-B3 29. P-QB3 P-B3
27. Knight to King 2 Rook to Queen 2 28. Knight to Queen 4 check King to Bishop 3 29. Pawn to Queen Bishop 3 Pawn to Bishop 3
The aim of this move is not clear. Black should adopt a forward policy with P-Kt5, P-B5, R-R2, etc.
The goal of this move isn't clear. Black should take an aggressive approach with P-Kt5, P-B5, R-R2, etc.
30. R-KR1 P-Kt5 31. R-R8
30. R-KR1 P-Kt5 31. R-R8
Now none of the pawns can advance: P-B5 would be answered by 32. R-K8, R-K2; 33. RxR, KxR; 34. Kt-Kt3 and one of the pawns is lost.
Now none of the pawns can move forward: P-B5 would be responded to with 32. R-K8, R-K2; 33. RxR, KxR; 34. Kt-Kt3 and one of the pawns is lost.
31. … R-K2 32. Kt-K2 R-Q2 33. Kt-Q4 R-K2 34. R-B8ch K-Kt2 35. R-Q8 P-B5 36. R-Q6 K-B2 37. Kt-B2 R-K3 38. R-Q7ch R-K2 39. R-Q6 R-K3 40. R-Q1
31. … R-K2 32. Kt-K2 R-Q2 33. Kt-Q4 R-K2 34. R-B8ch K-Kt2 35. R-Q8 P-B5 36. R-Q6 K-B2 37. Kt-B2 R-K3 38. R-Q7ch R-K2 39. R-Q6 R-K3 40. R-Q1
White tries to win at all costs—and loses. By a forcible advance on the Queen’s side, he creates new chances, but also new weaknesses.
White tries to win no matter what—and ends up losing. With a bold push on the Queen’s side, he opens up new opportunities, but also exposes new vulnerabilities.
40. … K-B3 41. P-B4 R-K2 42. R-Q4 K-Kt4 43. R-Q6 P-K6! 44. P-B3
40. … K-B3 41. P-B4 R-K2 42. R-Q4 K-Kt4 43. R-Q6 P-K6! 44. P-B3
PxP fails on account of P-B6ch and R-R2.
PxP fails because of P-B6ch and R-R2.
44. … P-K7 45. Kt-K1 P-Kt6 46. P-Kt5
44. … P-K7 45. Knight to K1 Pawn to Knight 6 46. Pawn to Knight 5
Too late.
Too late.
46. … R-R2 47. PxBP PxP 48. R-K6 R-R7ch 49. K-Kt1 R-B7 50. Kt-B2 RxP 51. RxKP R-Q6 52. Kt-K1 R-Kt6 53. R-Q2 P-B6 54. Kt-Q3 P-R4 Resigns
46. … R-R2 47. PxBP PxP 48. R-K6 R-R7ch 49. K-Kt1 R-B7 50. Kt-B2 RxP 51. RxKP R-Q6 52. Kt-K1 R-Kt6 53. R-Q2 P-B6 54. Kt-Q3 P-R4 Resigns
The RP cannot be prevented from pushing on to R6, after which a mate is threatened by the BlacKRon the eighth rank. R-Q1 would then be compulsory. But that lets the Black Rook in on the seventh (KR-R7, followed by P-B7ch).
The RP can’t be stopped from moving to R6, after which a mate is threatened by the Black Rook on the eighth rank. R-Q1 would then be required. But that allows the Black Rook to take position on the seventh (KR-R7, followed by P-B7ch).
GAME No. 18
Emanuel Lasker. Capablanca.
Emanuel Lasker. Capablanca.
Ruy Lopez (see p. 37)
Ruy Lopez (see p. 37)
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. B-Kt5 P-QR3 4. BxKtQ PxB 5. P-Q4 PxP
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. N-KB3 N-QB3 3. B-N5 P-QR3 4. BxNQ PxB 5. P-Q4 PxP
Worthy of consideration is: 5. … B-KKt5; 6PxP, QxQch; 7. KxQ, Castles ch; 8. K-K2, R-K1; 9. P-KR3, BxKtch; 10. KxB, P-B3; with a good game. In this opening Black is justified in assuming the initiative, as the exchange, which has opened a diagonal for his QB, has furthered his development. If he does not do so, and confines himself to defending tamely, the chances are that he will lose on account of White’s majority of pawns on the King’s side.
Worthy of consideration is: 5. … B-KKt5; 6PxP, QxQch; 7. KxQ, Castles ch; 8. K-K2, R-K1; 9. P-KR3, BxKtch; 10. KxB, P-B3; with a good game. In this opening, Black is justified in taking the initiative, as the exchange has opened a diagonal for his QB and has helped his development. If he doesn't do so and just plays defense passively, he’s likely to lose because of White’s advantage in pawns on the King’s side.
6. QxP QxQ
6. QxP QxQ
Compulsory. If B-K3 instead, 7. B-B4 attacks QB7. B-Q3 in reply to that would be inferior. By exchanging Bishops White would render the Black QP “backward,” and on the open file its capture would be inevitable.
Compulsory. If B-K3 instead, 7. B-B4 attacks QB7. B-Q3 in response to that would be a poor choice. By trading Bishops, White would make the Black QP “backward,” and on the open file, its capture would be unavoidable.
7. KtxQ B-Q3 8. Kt-QB3 Kt-K2
7. KtxQ B-Q3 8. Kt-QB3 Kt-K2
Black prepares to castle on the King’s side. It is more usual, and probably stronger, to castle on the Queen’s side, as the King then protects the QBP, which in the present case would be weak if Black’s KB were to be exchanged.
Black is getting ready to castle on the King’s side. Normally, it's more common and likely stronger to castle on the Queen’s side because then the King defends the Queen's bishop pawn, which would be vulnerable in this situation if Black’s bishop on the King’s side were to be traded.
9. Castles Castles. 10. P-B4 R-K1
9. Castles Castles. 10. P-B4 R-K1
![[Illustration]](images/diag126.jpg)
Diag. 126
Diag. 126
Black allows his opponent too much latitude on the King’s wing. He should prevent White’s P-B5, which obstructs his QB, by P-KB4. After P-K5 the game would be equalised by B-B4, BxKt, and B-K3.
Black is giving his opponent too much freedom on the kingside. He should block White’s pawn to b5, which is blocking his bishop, by playing pawn to b4. After pawn to k5, the game would be balanced by bishop to b4, bishop takes knight, and bishop to k3.
A draw would then be practically certain, with the Bishops of opposite colours. Black probably thought White would not risk weakening his KP by P-B5. But with unfailing judgment Lasker foresees that, in consequence of the greater mobility of his pieces, his attack will be successful before a counter attack on the weak KP can be instituted.
A draw would then be almost guaranteed, with the bishops of opposite colors. Black probably thought White wouldn’t take the chance of weakening his king pawn by pushing to b5. But with impeccable judgment, Lasker anticipates that due to the greater mobility of his pieces, his attack will succeed before any counterattack on the weak king pawn can be launched.
11. Kt-Kt3 P-B3
11. Kt-Kt3 P-B3
Even now P-KB4 was imperative, though it would keep the Bishop from that square. The continuation could have been 12. P-K5, B- Kt5; 13. Kt-K2 (or R4), Kt-Q4, and the Bishop is safe.
Even now, P-KB4 was crucial, even though it would prevent the Bishop from moving to that square. The sequence could have been 12. P-K5, B-Kt5; 13. Kt-K2 (or R4), Kt-Q4, and the Bishop is safe.
12. P-B5!!
This move has a twofold aim. It shuts in the Bishop, and allows B-B4, exchanging the Black QB.
This move has two purposes. It traps the Bishop and allows B-B4, trading the Black Queen.
12. … P-QKt3
12. … P-QKt3
The diagonal QR1-KR8 is the only one in which the Bishop has any prospects of action. However, as soon as he relinquishes his present diagonal, a White Knight settles at K6 and the Black Rooks are very much hampered.
The diagonal QR1-KR8 is the only one where the Bishop has any chance of taking action. However, as soon as he gives up his current diagonal, a White Knight moves to K6 and the Black Rooks are significantly restricted.
13. B-B4 B-Kt2
13. B-B4 B-Kt2
Black should have exchanged the Bishops. Now he gets a weak pawn at Q3. Before playing B-Kt2, P-B4 should be played to prevent the Knight getting from Kt3-Q4-K6.
Black should have traded the Bishops. Now he ends up with a weak pawn at Q3. Before playing B-Kt2, P-B4 should be played to stop the Knight from moving from Kt3 to Q4 to K6.
14. BxB PxB 15. Kt-Q4 QR-Q1 16. Kt-K6 R-Q2 17. QR-Q1 Kt-B1 18. R-B2 P-QKt4 19. KR-Q2
14. BxB PxB 15. Kt-Q4 QR-Q1 16. Kt-K6 R-Q2 17. QR-Q1 Kt-B1 18. R-B2 P-QKt4 19. KR-Q2
This holds Black’s Kt at B1. White’s next move prevents the Bishop getting into action by P-B4. After depriving all the Black pieces of their mobility, White turns his attention to a determined assault on the Black King.
This keeps Black's Knight at B1. White's next move stops the Bishop from being active by playing P-B4. After limiting all of Black's pieces' movement, White focuses on a strong attack on the Black King.
19. … QR-K2 20. P-QKt4 K-B2 21. P-QR3 B-R1 22. K-B2 R-R2 23. P-Kt4 P-R3 24. R-Q3 P-QR4 25. P-KR4 PxP 26. PxP R(R2)-K2
19. … QR-K2 20. P-QKt4 K-B2 21. P-QR3 B-R1 22. K-B2 R-R2 23. P-Kt4 P-R3 24. R-Q3 P-QR4 25. P-KR4 PxP 26. PxP R(R2)-K2
There are no prospects on the Rook’s file, and Black is restricted to keeping his pieces mutually protected. He cannot prevent White from penetrating the King’s side.
There are no opportunities on the Rook's side, and Black is stuck keeping his pieces protected by each other. He can't stop White from making moves on the King's side.
27. K-B3 R-Kt1 28. K-B4 P-Kt3 29. R-Kt3 P-Kt4ch 30. K-B3
27. K-B3 R-Kt1 28. K-B4 P-Kt3 29. R-Kt3 P-Kt4ch 30. K-B3
If Black captures the pawn, he would lose it again forthwith through White’s R-R3, and the pawn at R3 would also be captured.
If Black takes the pawn, he will immediately lose it again with White’s R-R3, and the pawn at R3 will also be captured.
30. … Kt-Kt3 31. PxP RPxP 32. R-R3 R-Q2 33. K-Kt3
30. … Kt-Kt3 31. PxP RPxP 32. R-R3 R-Q2 33. K-Kt3
![[Illustration]](images/diag127.jpg)
Diag. 127
Diag. 127
The White King leaves the diagonal because Black’s P-B4 would interfere with the combination by which White intends to annihilate Black’s game in a few moves.
The White King moves away from the diagonal because Black's pawn to B4 would disrupt White's plan to totally dismantle Black's game in just a few moves.
33. … K-K1 34. QR-KR1 B-Kt2 35. P-K5!!
33. … K-K1 34. QR-KR1 B-Kt2 35. P-K5!!
A beautiful final stroke.
A stunning final touch.
35. … QPxP 36. Kt-K4!! Kt-Q4 37. Kt(K6)-B5 B-B1
35. … QPxP 36. Kt-K4!! Kt-Q4 37. Kt(K6)-B5 B-B1
Black dares not move the Rook on account of KtxB and Kt-Q6ch.
Black does not dare to move the Rook because of KtxB and Kt-Q6ch.
38. KtxR BxKt 39. R-R7ch R-B1 40. R-R1 K-Q1 41. R-R8ch B-B1 42. Kt-B5 Resigns
38. KtxR BxKt 39. R-R7ch R-B1 40. R-R1 K-Q1 41. R-R8ch B-B1 42. Kt-B5 Resigns
Mate in two is threatened. Black’s only move is Kt-K2, after which he is helpless, and White can capture the pawns one by one at his leisure (R-B7, etc.). In this game, so beautifully engineered by White, we have a further example of Lasker’s remarkable grasp of position.
Mate in two is inevitable. Black's only option is Kt-K2, after which he is powerless, and White can take the pawns one by one without hurry (R-B7, etc.). In this game, which is so expertly crafted by White, we see another example of Lasker's extraordinary understanding of position.
GAME No. 19
White: Eduard Lasker. Black: Janowski.
White: Eduard Lasker. Black: Janowski.
Four Knights’ Game.
Four Knights Opening.
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. Kt-B3 Kt-B3 4. B-Kt5 B-Kt5
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. Kt-B3 Kt-B3 4. B-Kt5 B-Kt5
B-K2; 5 Castles, P-Q3; would lead into the Ruy Lopez.
B-K2; 5 Castles, P-Q3; would lead into the Ruy Lopez.
5. Castles Castles 6. P-Q3 P-Q 3
5. Castles Castles 6. P-Q3 P-Q 3
It is, of course, better to castle before playing P-Q3, as the opponent could at once play Kt-Q5 and utilise the pin to initiate an immediate attack, e.g. 5. Castles, P-Q3; 6. Kt-Q5, B-B4; 7. P- Q4, PxP; 8. B-Kt5.
It’s definitely better to castle before moving your pawn to Q3 because your opponent could immediately play knight to Q5 and take advantage of the pin to launch a quick attack. For example: 5. Castles, P-Q3; 6. Kt-Q5, B-B4; 7. P-Q4, PxP; 8. B-Kt5.
7. B-Kt5
7. B-Kt5
![[Illustration]](images/diag128.jpg)
Diag. 128
Diag. 128
The position is not unlike that in Diagram 90, and the same remarks apply to it. Here B-K3 is inadvisable, because P-Q4, threatening to fork two pieces, forces the exchange of Black’s centre pawn. After 7. … B-Kt5; 8. Kt-Q5, Kt-Q5; 9. B-B4, B-B4, on the other hand, we get the position discussed on p. 115, in which White obtains the advantage by Q-Q2. Instead of 9. … B- B4, Black should play Q-Q2 with a similar threat. But he has not the cooperation of his King’s Bishop for the attack, and White just manages to escape with a draw, e.g. 9. … Q-Q2; 10. KtxKtch, PxKt; 11. BxP, P-KR3(BxKt; 12. PxB, Q-R6 fails on account of K-R1 and R-KKt1); 12. P-B3, KtxKtch; 13. PxKt, B-KR4; 14. K-R1, K-R2 (Diagram 129); 15. R-KKt1.
The position is similar to that in Diagram 90, and the same comments apply. Here, B-K3 is not a good choice because P-Q4, which threatens to fork two pieces, forces the exchange of Black's center pawn. After 7. … B-Kt5; 8. Kt-Q5, Kt-Q5; 9. B-B4, B-B4, we reach the position discussed on p. 115, where White gains an advantage by playing Q-Q2. Instead of 9. … B-B4, Black should play Q-Q2 with a similar threat. However, he doesn't have the support of his King’s Bishop for the attack, and White just manages to escape with a draw, for example, 9. … Q-Q2; 10. KtxKtch, PxKt; 11. BxP, P-KR3 (BxKt; 12. PxB, Q-R6 fails due to K-R1 and R-KKt1); 12. P-B3, KtxKtch; 13. PxKt, B-KR4; 14. K-R1, K-R2 (Diagram 129); 15. R-KKt1.
![[Illustration]](images/diag129.jpg)
Diag. 129
Diag. 129
This is the saving clause. If now Black had his B at B4, as White has in the corresponding attack, White would first have to protect his BP with 15 Q-K2, and would be lost after R-KKt1; 16. R-KKt1, R-Kt3; as 17. B-R4 fails because of Q-R6; 18. B-KKt3, R- B3; and on the other hand, after 17. RxR, PxR Black plays R-KB1, attacking the BP a second time.
This is the saving clause. If Black had his bishop at B4, like White has in the corresponding attack, White would first need to protect his bishop pawn with 15 Q-K2, and would be lost after R-KKt1; 16. R-KKt1, R-Kt3; since 17. B-R4 fails because of Q-R6; 18. B-KKt3, R-B3; and alternatively, after 17. RxR, PxR, Black would play R-KB1, attacking the bishop pawn a second time.
With the Black Bishop at Kt5, however, Black does not succeed. The continuation could be l5. … R-KKt1; 16. R-Kt3, R-Kt3; 17. B-R4, with a probable draw.
With the Black Bishop at Kt5, however, Black doesn't succeed. The continuation could be l5. … R-KKt1; 16. R-Kt3, R-Kt3; 17. B-R4, leading to a likely draw.
This line of play is most difficult for both sides, and it has been avoided so far in tournaments.
This line of play is very challenging for both sides, and it has been avoided in tournaments up to now.
In Diagram 128 the favourite continuation for many years was: 7. … BxKt; 8. PxB, Kt-K2. The opening of the KKt file by 9. BxKKt is not to be feared, because of the reasons given when discussing Diagram 90. But White obtains the advantage with 9. Kt-R4, preparing the opening of the KB file by P-B4 and PxP. 9. … Kt- Kt3, in order to retake with the BP after 10. KtxKt and to open the file for Black’s Rooks, is not a sufficient reply, because after 11. P-B4 and PxP White has a clear advantage, having an extra pawn in effect for the end-game. For the three Black pawns on the King’s side are held by the two adverse pawns, which they cannot pass.
In Diagram 128, the preferred move for many years was: 7. ... BxKt; 8. PxB, Kt-K2. The opening of the KKt file with 9. BxKKt is not a concern, based on the reasons discussed in Diagram 90. However, White gains the advantage with 9. Kt-R4, setting up to open the KB file with P-B4 and PxP. 9. ... Kt-Kt3, aiming to recapture with the BP after 10. KtxKt and to activate Black’s Rooks, isn’t a strong enough response, because after 11. P-B4 and PxP, White has a clear edge, effectively having an extra pawn for the endgame. The three Black pawns on the King’s side are blocked by the two opposing pawns, preventing any progress.
The attempt to expel the troublesome Bishop after 9. … Kt-K1 by P-KB3, and then play for a centre by P-B3, Kt-B2 and P-Q4 fails on account of the withering attack which White obtains on the KB file, e.g. 9. … Kt-K1; 10. B-QB4, K-R1; 11. P-B4, P-KB3; 12. Q- R5, PxB; 13. PxP, etc.
The effort to kick out the annoying Bishop after 9. … N-K1 by P-KB3, and then aim for a center with P-B3, N-B2, and P-Q4 falls short due to the devastating attack that White gets on the KB file, for example: 9. … N-K1; 10. B-QB4, R-K1; 11. P-B4, P-KB3; 12. Q-R5, PxB; 13. PxP, etc.
In consequence the defence by 7. … BxKt and Kt-K2 has been abandoned.
In response, the defense by 7. … BxKt and Kt-K2 has been abandoned.
In the present game Black reverts to a very old defence, comprising the moves: BxKt, Q-K2, Kt-Q1-K3. It had been abandoned because White, by playing R-K1, P-Q4, and eventually B-B1 and B- R3, forces the exchange of Black’s centre pawn, and obtains an advantage, on well-known grounds. Here Black strengthens the defence by interpolating P-KR3!, after which White must come to a decision as to maintaining the pin. If he decides to do so the White Bishop will no longer be able to threaten the Black Queen from QR3.
In this game, Black goes back to a very old defense with the moves: BxKt, Q-K2, Kt-Q1-K3. It had been set aside because White, by playing R-K1, P-Q4, and later B-B1 and B-R3, forces the exchange of Black’s center pawn and gains an advantage based on well-known tactics. Here, Black strengthens the defense by adding P-KR3!, after which White has to decide whether to keep the pin. If he chooses to do so, the White Bishop won’t be able to threaten the Black Queen from QR3 anymore.
7. … BxKt 8. PxB P-KR3 9. B-KR4
7. … BxKt 8. PxB P-KR3 9. B-KR4
If the B retreats to B1 or K3, Black can adopt the defence Kt-K2- Kt3. Then Kt-R4 would be inferior, because Black can simply play P-KKt4. In this case the advance of the pawns is justified, because Black can bring his QKt to KKt3 and have practically one piece more on the King’s side, and good prospects for the attack which he can open with K-R2, R-KKt1, Kt-Kt3-B5.
If the Bishop moves to B1 or K3, Black can defend with Knight to K2 and then Knight to K3. In that case, Knight to R4 would not be a good move because Black can just play Pawn to KKt4. Here, the pawn advance makes sense because Black can position his Knight to KKt3, effectively having almost one extra piece on the King’s side and strong chances for an attack, which he can initiate with King to R2, Rook to KKt1, and Knight to Kt3-B5.
9. … Q-K2
P-KKt4 would be premature. White would win at once by 10. KtxKtP, PxKt; 11. BxP, as he can attack the Knight a second time by P-KB4 and PxP before Black can either protect it sufficiently or relieve the “pin.”
P-KKt4 would be too early. White would win immediately with 10. KtxKtP, PxKt; 11. BxP, since he can attack the Knight again with P-KB4 and PxP before Black can either protect it well enough or get rid of the “pin.”
10. Q-Q2 Kt-Q1 11. P-Q4 B-Kt5 12. Q-K3 BxKt 13. QxB Kt-K3
10. Q-Q2 Kt-Q1 11. P-Q4 B-Kt5 12. Q-K3 BxKt 13. QxB Kt-K3
It would be wrong to play for the gain of a pawn with P-KKt4 and PxP, e.g. 13. … P-KKt4; 14. B-Kt3, PxP; 15. R-K1!, PxP; 16. P- K5, etc.
It would be a mistake to play for a pawn gain with P-KKt4 and PxP, for example, 13. … P-KKt4; 14. B-Kt3, PxP; 15. R-K1!, PxP; 16. P-K5, etc.
14. BxKt
14. BxKt
Black’s threat was to develop an attack, similar to that described at move 9, with P-KKt4 and Kt-B5.
Black's threat was to launch an attack, like the one described at move 9, with P-KKt4 and Kt-B5.
14. … QxB 15. QxQ PxQ 16. B-B4
14. … QxB 15. QxQ PxQ 16. B-B4
in order to exchange the Knight, which is generally superior to a Bishop in an end-game, as mentioned before.
in order to trade the Knight, which is usually stronger than a Bishop in the endgame, as mentioned before.
16. … PxP 17. BxKt PxB 18. PxP
16. … PxP 17. BxKt PxB 18. PxP
![[Illustration]](images/diag130.jpg)
Diag. 130
Diag. 130
In the end-game thus brought about the White Rooks have more freedom, as they can be mobilised easily on the third rank to act on either wing. Black’s pawns, however, are stronger, being easily protected by the King, whilst White’s weak pawns at QR2 and QB2 are at too great a distance from the King; therefore White must see to it that Black does not open files for his Rooks on the Queen’s side.
In the endgame that has developed, the White rooks have more mobility as they can be easily positioned on the third rank to influence either side. However, Black’s pawns are stronger since they are well protected by the King, while White’s weak pawns at QR2 and QB2 are too far from the King for protection. Therefore, White needs to ensure that Black doesn’t open files for his rooks on the Queen’s side.
18. … QR-B1 19. QR-Kt1 P-Kt3 20. KR-Q1 KR-Q1 21. R-Kt3
18. … QR-B1 19. QR-Kt1 P-Kt3 20. KR-Q1 KR-Q1 21. R-Kt3
White must now allow Black to occupy the QB or Q file. After 21. P-Q5 Black would simply play PxP; 22. PxP, P-B3, with a certain draw.
White must now let Black take control of the QB or Q file. After 21. P-Q5, Black would just play PxP; 22. PxP, P-B3, leading to a likely draw.
21. … P-Q4 22. R-Kt3ch
21. … P-Q4 22. R-N3ch
P-KB3 was the correct move here, in view of subsequent threats of mate.
P-KB3 was the right move here, considering the upcoming threats of checkmate.
22. … K-B2 23. PxP RxP 24. R-QR3 P-QR4 25. P-KB4?
22. … K-B2 23. PxP RxP 24. R-QR3 P-QR4 25. P-KB4?
A mistake under time pressure, costing a pawn. QR-Q3 was the move.
A mistake made under time pressure, losing a pawn. QR-Q3 was the move.
25. … P-QB4 26. R-QB3 QR-Q1 27. R-Kt1 RxP 28. RxKtP RxP 29. P-KR3 R-Q7 30. R-Kt5
25. … P-QB4 26. R-QB3 QR-Q1 27. R-Kt1 RxP 28. RxKtP RxP 29. P-KR3 R-Q7 30. R-Kt5
Not RxP, on account of R-B7, and the KKtP cannot be saved.
Not RxP, because of R-B7, and the KKtP can't be saved.
30. … R-(B5)B7 31. R-KKt3 P-B4 32. P-B4 P-B5 33. R-KKt4 P-R4 34. R-Kt5 RxP 35. P-R4
30. … R-(B5)B7 31. R-KKt3 P-B4 32. P-B4 P-B5 33. R-KKt4 P-R4 34. R-Kt5 RxP 35. P-R4
Mate was threatened in a few moves through R-QB7-B8 and R(R7)-R8.
Mate was threatened in a few moves through R-QB7-B8 and R(R7)-R8.
35. … R-(B7)Kt7
35. … R-(B7)Kt7
If now R-B7, White would win the KBP or obtain a perpetual check (36. R-QKt7ch, followed by R-QKt8-KB8). After the move in the text, White can still draw, as he wins back his pawn.
If now R-B7, White would win the KBP or get a perpetual check (36. R-QKt7ch, followed by R-QKt8-KB8). After the move in the text, White can still draw, as he wins back his pawn.
36. RxR RxR 37. RxRP?
36. RxR RxR 37. RxRP?
This careless move now loses the game. Of course White should have taken the BP. If then P-R5, R-R5 held the pawn from behind, also after 37. … K-B3; 38. RxQRP, P-K4, a draw would have been the result, as the White BP would soon have become threatening, e.g. 39. R-R8, K-B4; 40. P-B5, P-K5; 41. P-B6, R-QB7; 42. R-QB8, K-Kt5; 43. P-B7, KxP; 44. K-R2, P-K6; 45. R-B8, RxP; 46. RxPch, K-Kt4; 47. R-K4, R-B6; 48. K-Kt3, etc.; or 44. R-K8, RxP; 45. RxP, K-Kt6; 46. R-K1, R-B7; 47. K-R1, RxP; 48. R-K3ch, and so on.
This careless move now loses the game. White should have taken the pawn. If then pawn to R5, rook to R5 would have held the pawn from behind. Also, after 37. ... K-B3; 38. RxQRP, P-K4, it would have ended in a draw, as the White pawn would soon become a threat, for example, 39. R-R8, K-B4; 40. P-B5, P-K5; 41. P-B6, R-QB7; 42. R-QB8, K-Kt5; 43. P-B7, KxP; 44. K-R2, P-K6; 45. R-B8, RxP; 46. RxPch, K-Kt4; 47. R-K4, R-B6; 48. K-Kt3, etc.; or 44. R-K8, RxP; 45. RxP, K-Kt6; 46. R-K1, R-B7; 47. K-R1, RxP; 48. R-K3ch, and so on.
37. … P-R5
38. RxP P-R6
Resigns.
37. … P-R5
38. RxP P-R6
Resigns.
After R-R5 there follows P-R7 and R-Kt8ch, or (if 40. K-R 2) P- B6.
After R-R5, there's P-R7 and R-Kt8ch, or (if 40. K-R2) P-B6.
GAME No. 20
White: Eduard Lasker. Black: Englund.
White: Eduard Lasker. Black: Englund.
Four Knights’ Game.
Four Knights' Opening.
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. Kt-B3 Kt-B3 4. B-Kt5 Kt-Q5 5. KtxP
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. N-KB3 N-QB3 3. N-B3 N-B3 4. B-N5 N-Q5 5. N takes P
Black can now get White’s KP by playing Q-K2, and moreover exchange White’s valuable Bishop. Instead of the move in the text it is advisable to retire the Bishop to R4 or B4, or else to play 5. KtxKt, PxKt; 6. P-K5, PxKt; 7. PxKt. Black would then play QxP and not PxQPch, as the latter move allows White to develop quickly, and Black has no time to castle—e.g. 8. BxP, QxP; 9. Castles, B-K2; 10. B-B3, followed by R-K1.
Black can now take White’s king pawn by playing queen to king two, and also trade off White’s valuable bishop. Instead of the move mentioned, it’s better to move the bishop back to rook four or bishop four, or to play 5. knight takes knight, pawn takes knight; 6. pawn to king five, pawn takes knight; 7. pawn takes knight. Then, Black would play queen takes pawn and not pawn takes queen pawn check, since that allows White to develop quickly, and Black won’t have time to castle—like in this sequence: 8. bishop takes pawn, queen takes pawn; 9. castles, bishop to king two; 10. bishop to bishop three, followed by rook to king one.
5. … Q-K2 6. Kt-B3 KtxP?
5. … Q-K2 6. N-B3 N x P?
![[Illustration]](images/diag131.jpg)
Diag. 131
Diag. 131
Here KtxB was essential, followed by QxP, freeing the Bishop. After 7. KtxKt, QxPch; 8. Q-K2, QxQch; 9. KxQ, Kt-Q4 (10. P-B4, P-QR3), Black completes his development a little later (10. R-K1, P-KB3; 11. K-B1ch, K-B2), but after the exchange of Queens there is not much to fear from an immediate attack, and the value of the two Bishops soon asserts itself. In a match game Ed. Lasker- Cole (London, 1913) the continuation was 12. P-Q4, P-QR3; 13. Kt- B3, KtxKt; 14. PxKt, P-Q4. Here the doubled pawn is a disadvantage, in that the pawn at B2 is immobile, and constantly liable to be attacked by B-B4. P-Q3 was the better move.
Here, KtxB was crucial, followed by QxP, freeing the Bishop. After 7. KtxKt, QxPch; 8. Q-K2, QxQch; 9. KxQ, Kt-Q4 (10. P-B4, P-QR3), Black finishes developing a little later (10. R-K1, P-KB3; 11. K-B1ch, K-B2), but after the queen exchange, there’s not much to worry about from an immediate attack, and the strength of the two Bishops soon becomes clear. In a match game Ed. Lasker-Cole (London, 1913) the continuation was 12. P-Q4, P-QR3; 13. Kt-B3, KtxKt; 14. PxKt, P-Q4. Here, the doubled pawn is a disadvantage because the pawn at B2 is stuck and likely to be targeted by B-B4. P-Q3 was the better move.
7. Castles KtxKt
7. Castles
Now KtxB was no longer possible. After KtxQKt there would be threats of KtxBP as well as of R-K1 and P-Q3. The game is almost lost for Black at this stage, as the King cannot escape the impending attack on the K file by castling.
Now KtxB is no longer an option. After KtxQKt, there will be threats of KtxBP along with R-K1 and P-Q3. The game is almost over for Black at this point, as the King can't avoid the imminent attack on the K file by castling.
8. QPxKt KtxKtch
9. QxKt Q-B4
10. R-K1ch B-K2
11. B-Q3
8. QPxKt KtxKtch
9. QxKt Q-B4
10. R-K1ch B-K2
11. B-Q3
prevents castling, as Q-K4 would win a piece.
prevents castling, as Q-K4 would capture a piece.
11. … P-Q4 12. B-K3
White has the development of the B gratis, as Black must lose time with the Queen.
White has the free development of the B, since Black has to waste time with the Queen.
12. … Q-Q3 13. B-KB4 Q-KB3 14. QxP!!
12. … Q-Q3 13. B-KB4 Q-KB3 14. QxP!!
Black being behind with his development is already threatened by sacrificial combinations. If he takes the Bishop he loses by 15. B-Kt5ch, K-B1; 16. Q-Q8ch!, BxQ; 17. R-K8 mate, or l5. … P-B3; 16. BxPch, and so on.
Black, having fallen behind in development, is already at risk from sacrificial combinations. If he captures the Bishop, he loses by 15. 1. B-Kt5ch, K-B1; 16. Q-Q8ch!, BxQ; 17. R-K8 mate, or 15. … P-B3; 16. BxPch, and so on.
14. … P-B3 15. Q-K4 B-K3 16. R-K3 B-QB4
Here Black might have castled on the Queen’s side, but R-Q1 would have had much the same sequel as in the actual game.
Here Black might have castled on the Queen’s side, but R-Q1 would have had much the same outcome as in the actual game.
17. B-K5 Q-R3
18. R-Kt3 B-KB1
17. B5 Q3
18. R3 B1
A sorry retreat. But after Q-Q7, which may have been Black’s original intention, White plays R-KB1, threatening B-KB4.
A disappointing retreat. But after Q-Q7, which might have been Black’s original plan, White plays R-KB1, threatening B-KB4.
19. R-Q1
This move completes White’s development, and only seems to give Black a chance of castling. However, Black has no satisfactory continuation.
This move finishes White's development and only appears to give Black a chance to castle. However, Black doesn’t have a good follow-up.
19. … Castles? 20. QxPch PxQ 21. B-R6 Mate
19. … Castles? 20. QxPch PxQ 21. B-R6 Mate
GAME No. 21
White: Eduard Lasker. Black: Aljechin.
White: Eduard Lasker. Black: Alekhine.
Three Knights’ Defence.
Three Knights Defense.
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. Kt-B3 B-Kt5 4. Kt-Q5
1. P-K4 P-K4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. Kt-B3 B-Kt5 4. Kt-Q5
Developing another piece by B-Kt5 or B4 would be more in accordance with principle.
Developing another piece with B-Kt5 or B4 would be more aligned with the principle.
4. … B-K2
There was a threat of KtxB and KtxP. If Black plays P-Q3, the B must retire all the same after 5. B-Kt5. It seems best to retire the B to K2 rather than to B4 or R4, because there remains the threat of a pin subsequently by B-KKt5, which might become serious with the Knight at Q5.
There was a threat from KtxB and KtxP. If Black plays P-Q3, the B has to move back anyway after 5. B-Kt5. It seems better to move the B to K2 instead of B4 or R4, because there’s still a threat of a pin later on with B-KKt5, which could become serious with the Knight at Q5.
5. B-B4 Kt-B3 6. P-Q3 P-Q3 7. KtxB QxKt 8. P-B3 P-KR3
5. B-B4 Kt-B3 6. P-Q3 P-Q3 7. KtxB QxKt 8. P-B3 P-KR3
The KKt is to support the advance of P-Q4 subsequently, and that is why Black does not want to allow it to be pinned. This is sound strategy, since White has exchanged his QKt, which from B3 prevents P-Q4 in the ordinary way.
The KKt is meant to support the advance of P-Q4 later, which is why Black wants to avoid getting it pinned. This is a smart strategy because White has already exchanged his QKt, which typically prevents P-Q4 from B3 in the usual way.
9. B-K3 Castles 10. Q-Q2 B-K3 11. B-Kt3
9. B-K3 Castles 10. Q-Q2 B-K3 11. B-Kt3
The first mistake. B-QKt5 should be played to retard P-Q4.
The first mistake. B-QKt5 should be played to stop P-Q4.
11. … BxB 12. PxB P-Q4
11. … BxB 12. PxB P-Q4
![[Illustration]](images/diag132.jpg)
Diag. 132
Diag. 132
13. PxP
13. PxP
The second mistake. Unimportant as it seems, it leads to the loss of the game. White did not defend the pawn by Q-B2, because it would have proved 10. Q-Q2 to have been a lost move. But giving up the centre is a far greater evil. Black now commands his Q5 and KB5, and this enables him to start an attack to which there is no defence. The game shows conclusively how important it is to maintain the centre.
The second mistake. As unimportant as it may seem, it results in losing the game. White didn’t defend the pawn by moving the queen to B2 because that would have shown that moving the queen to Q2 was a bad move. However, giving up control of the center is a much bigger issue. Black now dominates Q5 and KB5, allowing him to launch an attack that has no defense. The game clearly demonstrates how crucial it is to keep control of the center.
13. … KtxP 14. Castles KR P-B4 15. P-QKt4 P-QKt3 16. Q-K2
13. … KtxP 14. Castles KR P-B4 15. P-QKt4 P-QKt3 16. Q-K2
to prevent P-K5, which would now be countered by PxP and Q-B4. However, as P-K5 cannot be prevented permanently, and the Q must move in any case, Q-B2 would have been the better move, as there the Queen cannot be molested by a Rook.
to prevent P-K5, which would now be countered by PxP and Q-B4. However, since P-K5 can't be stopped for good, and the Queen has to move anyway, Q-B2 would have been the better move, as there the Queen can't be bothered by a Rook.
16. … Q-Q3 17. P-Kt5 QKt-K2 18. B-Q2 Kt-Kt3 19. R-R4 QR-K1!
16. … Q-Q3 17. P-Kn5 QKn-K2 18. B-Q2 Kt-Kt3 19. R-R4 QR-K1!
Black’s game is beautifully developed, whilst White cannot make a combined effort. The Black Rooks are particularly well placed, and threaten to take an effective part in the attack in various ways. All this is the outcome of White losing the centre.
Black's game is beautifully developed, while White can't seem to coordinate effectively. The Black Rooks are especially well-placed and pose threats to contribute significantly to the attack in different ways. This situation is a result of White losing control of the center.
20. P-KKt3
20. P-KKt3
Though this prevents Kt(Q 4)-B5, it weakens KB3, which is all the more serious as Black threatens to open the file by P-B5.
Though this stops Kt(Q 4)-B5, it weakens KB3, which is even more serious as Black threatens to open the file with P-B5.
20. … Q-Q2
If now White refrains from taking the pawn, Black plays P-QR4!
If White decides not to take the pawn, Black plays P-QR4!
21. RxP P-K5 22. Kt-Q4 PxP 23. QxP Kt-K4 24. Q-K2 P-B5
21. RxP P-K5 22. Kt-Q4 PxP 23. QxP Kt-K4 24. Q-K2 P-B5
All the avenues of attack are now open, and White’s game collapses quickly.
All avenues of attack are now open, and White’s game falls apart quickly.
25. Q-R5 Kt-KB 3 26. Q-B5 Kt-B6ch 27. K-R1 QxQ 28. KtxQ KtxB 29. R-Q1 Kt(B3)-K5 30. KtxP KtxBPch 31. K-Kt2 P-B6ch Resigns.
25. Q-R5 N-KB 3 26. Q-B5 N-B6ch 27. K-R1 QxQ 28. KxQ KxB 29. R-Q1 N(B3)-K5 30. KxP KxBPch 31. K-Kt2 P-B6ch Resigns.
GAME No. 22
White: Forgacz. Black: Tartakower.
White: Forgacz. Black: Tartakower.
French Defence (see p. 48).
French Defense (see p. 48).
1. P-K4 P-K3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 4. B-Kt5 B-K2 5. P-K5 Kt-K5
1. P-K4 P-K3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. N-QB3 N-KB3 4. B-N5 B-K2 5. P-K5 N-K5
KKt-Q2 is better, because it would support the advance of P-QB4 and also be of use eventually in an attack on White’s centre by P-KB3. The text move allows the exchange of two minor pieces, which can only be to White’s advantage, as Black cannot get his QB into play, and is for a long time practically a piece down.
KKt-Q2 is better because it would help advance P-QB4 and could eventually be useful for an attack on White’s center with P-KB3. The move in the text allows the exchange of two minor pieces, which only benefits White since Black can’t activate his QB and is effectively down a piece for a long time.
6. KtxKt BxB
6. KtxKt BxB
After PxKt the pawn would be very weak, and could hardly be held for long.
After PxKt, the pawn would be very weak and could hardly be held for long.
7. KtxB QxKt 8. P-KKt3
7. KtxB QxKt 8. P-KKt3
To be able to play P-KB4 before developing the Kt (see p. 49).
To play P-KB4 before developing the knight (see p. 49).
8. … P-QB4 9. P-QB3 Kt-B3 10. P-KB4 Q-K2 11. Q-Q2 B-Q2 12. Kt-B3 Castles KR 13. B-Q3 P-B5 14. B-B2 P-QKt4 15. Castles KR P-Kt2 16. Q R-K1 P-QR4
8. … P-QB4 9. P-QB3 N-B3 10. P-KB4 Q-K2 11. Q-Q2 B-Q2 12. N-B3 Castles KR 13. B-Q3 P-B5 14. B-B2 P-QN4 15. Castles KR P-KN2 16. Q R-K1 P-QR4
![[Illustration]](images/diag133.jpg)
Diag. 133
Diag. 133
So far the game is easy to understand in the light of the remarks made on page 44, when treating of the openings. The continuation shows in an instructive fashion that White’s attack is the more effective, being directed against the King’s side.
So far, the game is easy to understand based on the comments made on page 44 regarding the openings. The following play demonstrates clearly that White’s attack is more effective, targeting the King’s side.
17. P-B5! KPxP
17. P-B5! KPxP
This sacrifice of a pawn in conjunction with a second sacrifice on the next move, produces a combination of rare beauty.
This sacrifice of a pawn, along with a second sacrifice on the next move, creates a combination of rare beauty.
18. P-Kt4!! PxP
18. P-Kt4!! PxP
If Black did not capture White would. In either case the storming of the position by pawns achieves its object and the lines of attack are free for the pieces.
If Black didn’t capture, White would. In either case, the pawns breaking through the position accomplish their goal, and the lines of attack are open for the pieces.
19. Kt-Kt5 P-Kt3
19. Nf3 Ng6
Now that White has made an opening for himself at KB6, the rest is easy. 19. … P-R3 is of no avail. The sequel might have been: 20 Kt-R 7, KR-Q1; 21 Kt-B6ch, after which White wins after either PxKt; 22 QxP, or K-R1 KtxP.
Now that White has created a position for himself at KB6, the rest is straightforward. 19. … P-R3 doesn't help. The next moves could have been: 20 Kt-R7, KR-Q1; 21 Kt-B6ch, after which White wins after either PxKt; 22 QxP, or K-R1 KtxP.
20. R-B6 K-Kt2
20. R-B6 K-Kt2
Black gets no breathing space. If P-R3, then 21 BxP.
Black gets no break. If P-R3, then 21 BxP.
21. QR-KB1 B-K1 22. Q-B4 Kt-Q1 23. P-K6 R-R3 24. Q-K5 K-R3 25. QR-B5
21. QR-KB1 B-K1 22. Q-B4 Kt-Q1 23. P-K6 R-R3 24. Q-K5 K-R3 25. QR-B5
Help!
Help!
25. … BPxP 26. Kt-B7ch QxKt 27. R-R5ch K-Kt2 28. RxKtP mate
25. … BPxP 26. Kt-B7ch QxKt 27. R-R5ch K-Kt2 28. RxKtP mate
GAME No. 23
White: Yates. Black: Esser.
White: Yates. Black: Esser.
French Defence.
French Defense.
1. P-K4 P-K3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 4. B-Kt5 PxP 5. BxKt PxB
1. Pawn to King 4 Pawn to King 3 2. Pawn to Queen 4 Pawn to Queen 4 3. Knight to Queen's Bishop 3 Knight to King's Bishop 3 4. Bishop to Knight 5 Pawn takes Pawn 5. Bishop takes Knight Pawn takes Bishop
If the Queen recaptures, White obtains too great an advantage in development, and therefore Black submits to the doubling of his pawns. It is doubtful if this means a handicap, although the King’s side gets broken up. For Black keeps his two Bishops, a powerful weapon, unless White succeeds in developing swiftly an attack on the King’s side. The present game is instructive and shows the chances afforded to both sides by the position brought about by the exchange at KB6.
If the Queen is recaptured, White gains too much of an advantage in development, so Black agrees to double his pawns. It's unclear if this puts him at a disadvantage, even though the King’s side becomes weaker. Black still has his two Bishops, which are a strong asset, unless White quickly launches an attack on the King’s side. This game is educational and illustrates the opportunities available to both sides from the position created by the exchange at KB6.
6. KtxP P-KB4
6. KtxP P-KB4
As the KB obtains a long diagonal at Kt2, this advance is justified. Otherwise there would be strong objections to it, as the pawn is likely to be subjected to attack, and apart from that, it gives up command of Black’s K4.
As the king's bishop gets a long diagonal at Kt2, this move makes sense. Otherwise, there would be serious objections to it, since the pawn is likely to come under attack, and besides that, it loses control of Black’s K4.
7. Kt-QB3
7. Kt-QB3
Kt-Kt3 would seem more natural, firstly, because Black has weaknesses on the K side, and White will need his pieces for attack in that quarter, and secondly, because the QP ought to be supported by P-B3, as Black will attack it by B-Kt2.
Kt-Kt3 would seem more natural, first because Black has weaknesses on the king side, and White will need his pieces for an attack there, and second because the queen pawn should be supported by pawn to bishop three, as Black will attack it with bishop to knight two.
7. … B-Kt2 8. Kt-B3 Castles 9. B-B4
7. … B-Kt2 8. Kt-B3 Rooks 9. B-B4
If now the Knight were at Kt3, White could play P-B3 and BQ3. This is the proper place for the B, which might obtain an open diagonal after P-KKt4.
If the Knight was now at Kt3, White could play P-B3 and BQ3. This is the best position for the B, which could get an open diagonal after P-KKt4.
9. … Kt-B3 10. Kt-K2 Kt-R4 11. B-Q3 P-B4 12. P-B3 P-QB5
9. … Kt-B3 10. Kt-K2 Kt-R4 11. B-Q3 P-B4 12. P-B3 P-QB5
P-Kt3 seems preferable, as the text move releases the hold on White’s Q4. The isolated pawn resulting after 13. PxP is not to be feared, as the B at Kt2 would have greater efficiency (QR- Kt1), and White would not be so firmly established in the centre.
P-Kt3 seems better because the move frees up White's Q4. The isolated pawn that comes after 13. PxP isn’t something to worry about, since the B at Kt2 would be more effective (QR-Kt1), and White wouldn’t be as securely positioned in the center.
13. B-B2 P-Kt4 14. Q-Q2
13. B-B2 P-Kt4 14. Q-Q2
There now ensues an interesting struggle. White builds up an attack with Q and both Knights and eventually the B (P-KKt4). If Black can manage to play his King into safety at R1 in time, and then occupies the Kt file with his Rooks, he would have the better of it, his pieces having by far the greater range of action.
There’s now an interesting struggle. White starts an attack with the Queen and both Knights, eventually bringing in the Bishop (P-KKt4). If Black can get his King to safety at R1 in time, and then takes control of the Knight file with his Rooks, he would have the advantage, since his pieces would have a much greater range of action.
14. … B-Kt2 15. Q-B4 Q-B3
14. … B-Kt2 15. Q-B4 Q-B3
K-R1 and KR-Kt1 might be considered.
K-R1 and KR-Kt1 could be considered.
16. Kt-Kt3 B-KR3 17. Q-B7 Q-Q1 18. Q-K5
16. Kt-Kt3 B-KR3 17. Q-B7 Q-Q1 18. Q-K5
White gains a move by attacking the Knight’s Pawn. It may seem far fetched if I now point out that this could not have happened if from the first Black had given preference to the pawn formation at QKt3 and B4 instead of Kt4 and B5, though the whole game would almost certainly have taken a different course. Still, when advancing a pawn into an unprotected position there always is the risk of its becoming the object of an attack at an opportune moment, and whenever the plan of development does not necessitate such moves they are best avoided.
White gains a move by attacking the Knight’s Pawn. It might seem unlikely if I point out that this couldn’t have happened if Black had chosen the pawn formation at QKt3 and B4 instead of Kt4 and B5 from the beginning. However, the whole game would almost certainly have gone in a different direction. Still, moving a pawn into an unprotected position always carries the risk of it becoming a target for an attack at a crucial moment, and whenever the plan for development doesn’t require such moves, it’s best to avoid them.
18. … B-Q4 19. Kt-R5 Kt-B3? 20. Q-Kt3ch??
18. … B-Q4 19. Kt-R5 Kt-B3? 20. Q-Kt3ch??
![[Illustration]](images/diag134.jpg)
Diag. 134
Diag. 134
The last moves have decided the game. Both players have overlooked that 20. Q-B6 would have won a pawn at least (QxQ, 21. KtxQch with KtxB and BxP). 20. … BxKt leads to an immediate loss by 21. QxB, BxKt; 22. QxB followed by P-KKt4! with an overwhelming attack.
The final moves have determined the outcome of the game. Both players missed that 20. Q-B6 would have at least won a pawn (QxQ, 21. KtxQch with KtxB and BxP). 20. … BxKt leads to an immediate loss with 21. QxB, BxKt; 22. QxB, followed by P-KKt4! leading to a dominant attack.
Instead of 19. … Kt-B3, Black should have played P-B3, followed by K-R1 and the occupation of the Kt file by the Rooks. White’s last move allows him to de this with even greater effect.
Instead of 19. … Kt-B3, Black should have played P-B3, followed by K-R1 and moved the Rooks onto the Kt file. White’s last move lets him do this even more effectively.
20. … K-R1 21. Q-R3 R-KKt1
20. … K-R1 21. Q-R3 R-KKt1
Black has now a preponderance of material on the field of battle, and it can be concluded off-hand that White, not being able to bring his Rooks into play, must lose.
Black now has a significant advantage on the battlefield, and it's clear that White, unable to activate his Rooks, is destined to lose.
22. Kt-Kt3 Q-B3 23. K-B1
22. Kt-Kt3 Q-B3 23. K-B1
K-K2 is a shade better. But there is no longer any adequate defence.
K-K2 is slightly better. But there's no longer a strong defense.
23. … R-Kt5 24. R-K1 QR-KKt1 25. Kt-K5
23. … R-Kt5 24. R-K1 QR-KKt1 25. Kt-K5
Black was threatening BxKt, followed by R-R5 and P-B5
Black was threatening BxKt, followed by R-R5 and P-B5.
25. … KtxKt 26. PxKt Q-Kt4 27. Q-R5 BxPch 28. K-Kt1 RxKt?
25. … Kb5 26. Qb3 Q-c4 27. Q-e5 BxPch 28. K-c1 RxKb?
QxQ and B-K5ch was simple and effective.
QxQ and B-K5ch were straightforward and efficient.
29. RPxR BxR 30. QxQ BxQ 31. KxB R-Q1 32. P-B4
29. RPxR BxR 30. QxQ BxQ 31. KxB R-Q1 32. P-B4
R-Q1 is much more promising, although it means the loss of a pawn (RxR and B-B8, etc.). With Bishops of different colour the game is not easy to win even now.
R-Q1 looks much more promising, even though it results in losing a pawn (RxR and B-B8, etc.). With Bishops on different colors, the game is still hard to win at this point.
32. … R-Q7 33. PxB RxB 34. R-Q1 RxKtP 35. R-Q7 K-Kt2 36. RxRP R-QB7
32. … R-Q7 33. PxB RxB 34. R-Q1 RxKtP 35. R-Q7 K-Kt2 36. RxRP R-QB7
He could have played P-Kt5 at once.
He could have played Knight to f5 right away.
37. R-R5 R-QKt7 38. P-R4
37. R-R5 R-QK7 38. P-R4
R-R3 would only have drawn out the agony a little longer.
R-R3 would have just prolonged the suffering a bit more.
38. … P-Kt5 Resigns.
Resigns.
GAME No. 24
White: Atkins. Black: Barry.
White: Atkins. Black: Barry.
French Defence.
French Defense.
1. P-K4 P-K3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 4. B-Kt5 B-K2 5. P-K5 KKt-Q2 6. BxB QxB
1. P-K4 P-K3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 4. B-Kt5 B-K2 5. P-K5 KKt-Q2 6. BxB QxB
![[Illustration]](images/diag135.jpg)
Diag. 135
Diag. 135
7. Kt-Kt5
7. Kt-Kt5
The intention is to strengthen the centre by P-QB3. Though it takes a number of moves to bring the Knight into play again, yet most of the tournament games in this variation have been won by White, mostly through a King’s side attack on the lines set out in the notes to Game No. 22. Investigations by Alapin tend to show that this is due to the fact that Black in all cases devoted his attention to Queen’s side operations (just as in Game No. 22) when he could have utilised White’s backward development, by himself starting a counter attack on the King’s side. He can then either aim at the White centre at once with P-KB3, or else play P-KB4 and prepare the advance of the KKtP by Kt-B3-Q1-B2. These various lines of play are still under discussion. Simple development is probably preferable to the move in the text, e.g. 7. B-Q3, Castles; 8. P-B4, P-QB4; 9. Kt-B3.
The goal is to strengthen the center with P-QB3. Although it takes a few moves to get the Knight back in action, most tournament games in this variation have been won by White, mainly through a King's side attack based on the strategies outlined in the notes for Game No. 22. Research by Alapin indicates that this is because Black has typically focused on Queen's side operations (similar to Game No. 22) when he could have taken advantage of White's backward development by launching a counterattack on the King's side. He can then either directly target the White center with P-KB3 or play P-KB4 to set up the advance of the KKtP with Kt-B3-Q1-B2. These different play styles are still being debated. Simple development is likely better than the move in the text, e.g., 7. B-Q3, Castles; 8. P-B4, P-QB4; 9. Kt-B3.
7. … K-Q1
There can be no advantage in forfeiting the option of castling unless there be no other way of getting the King into safety and of bringing the Rooks into concerted action. It is obvious that otherwise the free development of pieces is hindered, and the King is in appreciable danger, for it is easier to open files in the centre than on the wings where the pawns have not advanced yet. Therefore Kt-Kt3 is the only move worth considering.
There’s no benefit in giving up the option to castle unless there’s no other way to get the King to safety and to coordinate the Rooks. Clearly, otherwise, the free movement of the pieces is restricted, and the King is at significant risk, since it’s easier to open up files in the center than on the sides where the pawns haven’t moved yet. So, Kt-Kt3 is the only move that makes sense.
8. P-QB3 P-KB3 9. PxP
8. P-QB3 P-KB3 9. P x P
With the Black King remaining in the centre, White has no further interest in the maintenance of his pawn at K5. On the contrary he will try to clear the centre.
With the Black King staying in the center, White is no longer interested in keeping his pawn at K5. Instead, he will try to open up the center.
9. … PxP 10. Q-Q2 P-B3 11. Kt-QR3 Kt-B1
9. … PxP 10. Q-Q2 P-B3 11. Kt-QR3 Kt-B1
At this early stage it is clear that Black will have to contend with difficulties in trying to complete his development. The usual way (P-QB4) is barred on account of the dangers to Black’s King with which a clearance in the centre is fraught.
At this early stage, it's clear that Black will face challenges in completing their development. The usual move (P-QB4) is blocked due to the threats to Black's King that come with a central clearance.
12. Kt-B3 B-Q2 13. P-KKt3!
12. Kt-B3 B-Q2 13. P-KKt3!
As Black can force this advance at any time by playing R-KKt1, White decides to develop his KB at Kt2, thereby covering his KB3 and KR3. The weakness of the latter squares would not be of any great moment if White were to castle on the Queen’s wing. But as P-QB4 is necessary in order to break up the centre, castling KR is the right course.
As Black can push this advance anytime by playing R-KKt1, White chooses to develop his bishop at Kt2, which protects his KB3 and KR3. The weakness of those squares wouldn’t be that significant if White were to castle on the queenside. But since P-QB4 is needed to disrupt the center, castling kingside is the best option.
13. … B-K1 14. B-Kt2 QKt-Q2 15. P-B4 PxP 16. KtxP Kt-QKt3 17. KtxKt PxKt 18. Castles KR Kt-Kt3 19. KR-K1 B-Q2 20. Q-B3 R-K1 21. Kt-Q2 Q-B1 22. P-QR4!
13. … B-K1 14. B-Kt2 QKt-Q2 15. P-B4 PxP 16. KtxP Kt-QKt3 17. KtxKt PxKt 18. Castles KR Kt-Kt3 19. KR-K1 B-Q2 20. Q-B3 R-K1 21. Kt-Q2 Q-B1 22. P-QR4!
White wishes to get rid of the pawn at Black’s Kt3, in order to break in with his Knight at B5. Black has no means of preventing this, and soon succumbs to the overwhelming array of White forces.
White wants to eliminate the pawn at Black’s Kt3 to be able to advance his Knight to B5. Black can’t stop this, and soon gives in to the powerful presence of White’s pieces.
22. … Kt-K2 23. P-R5 P-QKt4 24. Kt-Kt3 Kt-Q4 25. BxKt KPxB 26. RxRch BxR 27. Kt-B5 Q-B2 28. R-K1 K-B2 29. Q-K3 B-Q2 30. Q-B4ch Resigns.
22. … Knight to King 2 23. Pawn to Rook 5 Pawn to Queen Knight 4 24. Knight to Knight 3 Knight to Queen 4 25. Bishop takes Knight King takes Bishop 26. Rook to Rook check Bishop takes Rook 27. Knight to Bishop 5 Queen to Bishop 2 28. Rook to King 1 King to Bishop 2 29. Queen to King 3 Bishop to Queen 2 30. Queen to Bishop 4 check Resigns.
If K-Q1, 31. KtxPch followed by Kt-Q6ch. If K-B1 White wins by 31. Q-Q6 and R-K7.
If K-Q1, 31. KtxPch followed by Kt-Q6ch. If K-B1 White wins by 31. Q-Q6 and R-K7.
GAME No. 25
White: Emanuel Lasker. Black: Tarrasch.
White: Emanuel Lasker. Black: Tarrasch.
French Defence.
French Defense.
1. P-K4 P-K3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 4. B-Kt5 B-Kt5
1. P-K4 P-K3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. N-B3 N-KB3 4. B-N5 B-N5
![[Illustration]](images/diag136.jpg)
Diag. 136
Diag. 136
This line of defence, called the McCutcheon variation, was recommended for many years by Tarrasch as being the strongest. The most obvious continuation 5. P-K5 leads to complications, and the final verdict has not yet been reached. After 5. … P-KR3, the best continuation is thought to be: 6. PxKt, PxB; 7. PxP, R- Kt1; 8. P-KR4, PxP; 9. Q-R5, Q-B3; 10. QxRP, QxP.
This line of defense, known as the McCutcheon variation, was suggested for many years by Tarrasch as the strongest option. The most straightforward move 5. P-K5 leads to complications, and the final outcome hasn’t been determined yet. After 5. … P-KR3, the best continuation is believed to be: 6. PxKt, PxB; 7. PxP, R-Kt1; 8. P-KR4, PxP; 9. Q-R5, Q-B3; 10. QxRP, QxP.
White has an easy development, whilst Black, as in most variations in the French defence, finds it difficult to bring his QB into play. After P-KR3, it is not advisable to retire the Bishop; 6. B-R4, P-KKt4; 7. B-Kt3, for here the Bishop is out of play, and Black’s King’s Knight being free can play to K5 for concerted action with Black’s KB. Lasker’s continuation in the present instance is at once simple and effective. It leads to an entirely different system of development.
White has an easy development, while Black, as in most variations of the French defense, struggles to activate the queen's bishop. After pawn to king's rook three, it’s not wise to move the bishop back; instead, play 6. bishop to rook four, then pawn to knight four; 7. bishop to knight three, because now the bishop is inactive, and Black's king's knight can move to king five to coordinate with Black's king's bishop. Lasker’s continuation in this case is both straightforward and effective. It leads to a completely different system of development.
5. PxP QxP
5. PxP QxP
If Black recaptures with the pawn, he must lose a move with the Bishop in order to avoid getting an isolated doubled pawn after 6. Q-B3. The doubled pawn which Black may get after the move in the text would not be isolated, and therefore not necessarily weak. It could become a weakness if Black were to castle on the King’s side. But otherwise it might even become a source of strength, supporting, as it would, an advance of Black’s KP against the White centre.
If Black takes back with the pawn, he has to waste a move with the Bishop to avoid ending up with an isolated doubled pawn after 6. Q-B3. The doubled pawn that Black could end up with after the move mentioned in the text wouldn't be isolated, so it wouldn't automatically be a weakness. It could turn into a weakness if Black castles on the King’s side. Otherwise, it might actually become a strength, as it would support an advance of Black’s KP against the White center.
6. Kt-B3 P-B4?
6. Kt-B3 P-B4?
Black should retain the option of castling QR, in case White exchanges at his KB6; P-QKt3 and B-Kt2 would have been better.
Black should keep the option to castle queenside in case White captures at his KB6; moving the pawn to QKt3 and the bishop to Kt2 would have been a better choice.
7. BxKt PxB
8. Q-Q2 BxKt
9. QxB Kt-Q2
10. R-Q1 R-KKt1
11. PxP QxP
12. Q-Q2 Q-Kt3
7. BxKt PxB
8. Q-Q2 BxKt
9. QxB Kt-Q2
10. R-Q1 R-KKt1
11. PxP QxP
12. Q-Q2 Q-Kt3
guarding against the mate at Q1 before moving the Kt. But this would have been better effected by Q-K2. After Q-Kt3 the Knight cannot move yet because of B-Kt5ch.
guarding against the check at Q1 before moving the Knight. But this would have been better done by moving the Queen to K2. After moving the Queen to Kt3, the Knight can't move yet because of Bishop to Kt5 check.
![[Illustration]](images/diag137.jpg)
Diag. 137
Diag. 137
13. P-B3 P-QR3 14. Q-B2 P-B4 15. P-KKt3 Kt-B4 16. B-Kt2 Q-B2
13. P-B3 P-QR3 14. Q-B2 P-B4 15. P-KKt3 Kt-B4 16. B-Kt2 Q-B2
Black wishes to push on the KP. White, however, prevents this at once.
Black wants to advance on the KP. White, however, immediately stops this.
17. Q-K2 P-Kt4 18. Castles B-Kt2
17. Q-K2 P-Kt4 18. Castles B-Kt2
The Black position has any number of weaknesses. The King cannot castle into safety; the pawn position is full of holes, and open to attack. White takes full advantage of this and wins in masterly fashion with a few strokes.
The Black position has numerous weaknesses. The King can't castle to safety; the pawn structure is full of gaps and vulnerable to attacks. White capitalizes on this completely and wins impressively with just a few moves.
19. P-B4 P-Kt5 20. Q-Q2 R-Kt1
19. P-B4 P-Kt5 20. Q-Q2 R-Kt1
Now White cannot capture the KtP because of BxKt. But he does not want the pawn, he wants the King.
Now White can't capture the KtP because of BxKt. But he doesn't want the pawn; he wants the King.
21. Q-R6 BxKt 22. BxB Q-K4 23. KR-K1 QxP 24. Q-B4 QR-B1 25. Q-Q6 P-B3
21. Q-R6 BxKt 22. BxB Q-K4 23. KR-K1 QxP 24. Q-B4 QR-B1 25. Q-Q6 P-B3
Mate in two was threatened (B-B6ch, etc.).
Mate in two was threatened (B-B6ch, etc.).
26. B-R5ch R-Kt3 27. BxRch PxB 28. RxPch Resigns.
26. B-R5ch R-Kt3 27. BxRch PxB 28. RxPch Resigns.
GAME No. 26
White: Capablanca. Black: Blanco
White: Capablanca. Black: Blanco
French Defence.
French Defense.
1. P-K4 P-K3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 PxP 4. KtxP Kt-Q2 5. Kt-KB3 KKt-B3 6. KtxKtch KtxKt 7. Kt-K5
1. P-K4 P-K3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 PxP 4. KtxP Kt-Q2 5. Kt-KB3 KKt-B3 6. KtxKtch KtxKt 7. Kt-K5
This crosses Black’s plan of developing the QB at Kt2.
This interferes with Black’s plan to develop the QB at Kt2.
7. … B-Q3 8. Q-B3 P-B3
9. B-Kt5ch, P-B3; 10. KtxP was threatened.
9. B-Kt5ch, P-B3; 10. K takes Pawn was threatened.
9. P-B3 Castles 10. B-KKt5 B-K2 11. B-Q3
9. P-B3 Castles 10. B-KKt5 B-K2 11. B-Q3
Whatever Black plays now, he must create some weakness in order to provide against White’s Q-R3, BxKt, QxRP, and White’s attack must succeed. The whole of Black’s plan is thus frustrated, as the only reason for abandoning the centre by PxP was the occupation of the long diagonal by the QB. Now the Queen’s side pieces cannot get into play without much difficulty, and by the time they have succeeded it is too late.
Whatever Black plays now, he needs to create some weaknesses to counter White's Q-R3, BxKt, QxRP, and White's attack must work. Black’s entire strategy is thrown off because the only reason for leaving the center with PxP was to control the long diagonal with the QB. Now, the pieces on the Queen's side struggle to get into play, and by the time they manage it, it’s too late.
![[Illustration]](images/diag138.jpg)
Diag. 138
Diag. 138
11. … Kt-K1
11. … Kt-K1
Intending to intercept the diagonal of the White KB by P-KB4. If Black plays P-KKt3 with the same intention, White plays P-KR4-5 and PxP, and brings the Rook into play.
Intending to cut off the diagonal of the White King Bishop by moving the Pawn to King Bishop 4. If Black plays Pawn to Knight 3 with the same goal, White plays Pawn to Rook 4-5 and takes the Pawn, bringing the Rook into action.
12. Q-R3 P-KB4
P-KR3 would lead to an immediate disaster: 13. BxP, PxB; 14. QxRP, P-KB4; 15. P-KKt4. The move in the text avoids the immediate attack on the King, but the King’s Pawn is now “backward,” and White immediately fastens on this weakness.
P-KR3 would result in an immediate disaster: 13. BxP, PxB; 14. QxRP, P-KB4; 15. P-KKt4. The move in the text avoids the immediate threat to the King, but the King’s Pawn is now “backward,” and White quickly takes advantage of this weakness.
13. BxB QxB 14. Castles KR R-B3 15. KR-K1 Kt-Q3 16. R-K2 B-Q2 17. QR-K1 R-K1 18. P-QB4 Kt-B2 19. P-Q5 KtxKt 20. RxKt P-KKt3
13. BxB QxB 14. Castles KR R-B3 15. KR-K1 Kt-Q3 16. R-K2 B-Q2 17. QR-K1 R-K1 18. P-QB4 Kt-B2 19. P-Q5 KtxKt 20. RxKt P-KKt3
21. BxP was threatened.
BxP was under threat.
21. Q-R4 K-Kt2 22. Q-Q4 P-B4 23. Q-B3 P-Kt3 24. PxP B-B1 25. B-K2
21. Q-R4 K-Kt2 22. Q-Q4 P-B4 23. Q-B3 P-Kt3 24. PxP B-B1 25. B-K2
The Bishop now settles at Q5, and whether Black takes the pawn or not, he is paralysed either by the pawn itself, or the pin of the Bishop if the pawn is taken.
The Bishop now moves to Q5, and whether Black takes the pawn or not, they're stuck either because of the pawn itself or because of the Bishop's pin if the pawn is taken.
25. … BxP 26. B-B3 K-B2 27. B-Q5 Q-Q3 28. Q-K3 R-K2 29. Q-R6 K-Kt1 30. P-KR4
25. … BxP 26. B-B3 K-B2 27. B-Q5 Q-Q3 28. Q-K3 R-K2 29. Q-R6 K-Kt1 30. P-KR4
The deciding manœuvre, tearing up the chain of pawns in front of the K.
The decisive move, breaking through the line of pawns in front of the King.
30. … P-QR3 31. P-R5 P-B5 32. PxP PxP 33. RxB Resigns.
30. … P-QR3 31. P-R5 P-B5 32. PxP PxP 33. RxB Resigns.
After RxR, 34. RxR, RxR; 35. QxPch wins a piece. A beautifully concise game.
After RxR, 34. RxR, RxR; 35. QxPch wins a piece. A beautifully concise game.
GAME No. 27
White: Niemzowitsch. Black: Tarrasch. French Defence.
White: Niemzowitsch. Black: Tarrasch. French Defense.
1. P-K4 P-QB4
This opening is called the Sicilian Defence. White, however, adopts a continuation which leads into a variation of the French Defence.
This opening is known as the Sicilian Defense. However, White chooses a line that leads into a variation of the French Defense.
2. P-QB3 P-K3 3. P-Q4 P-Q4 4. P-K5 Kt-QB3 5. Kt-B3 Q-Kt3 6. B-Q3 PxP
2. P-QB3 P-K3 3. P-Q4 P-Q4 4. P-K5 Kt-QB3 5. Kt-B3 Q-Kt3 6. B-Q3 PxP
Black seeks to demonstrate that White’s QP is weak. The present game, however, seems to prove that White is able to guard it adequately, thus permanently supporting the KP too. It would therefore appear to be better to attack the KP itself, and to play P-B3 on the fifth move. Now B-Q2 would be better than the text move. As White cannot give further support to his Q4, he would have to play PxP, and the protection of the K5 would have to be undertaken by pieces, which is not desirable.
Black aims to show that White’s queen pawn is weak. However, the current game seems to indicate that White can defend it well, which also permanently supports the king pawn. Therefore, it seems more effective to attack the king pawn directly and play pawn to B3 on the fifth move. Now bishop to Q2 would be a better choice than what was played. Since White can’t provide more support to his queen pawn, he would have to capture the pawn, and the king’s fifth rank would then need to be defended by pieces, which isn’t ideal.
7. PxP B-Q2
7. PxP B-Q2
Not KtxP, 8. KtxKt, QxKt, because of B-Kt5ch.
Not KtxP, 8. KtxKt, QxKt, because of B-Kt5ch.
8. B-K2
The B cannot go to B2 on account of Kt-Kt5 and B-Kt4.
The B can't move to B2 because of Kt-Kt5 and B-Kt4.
8. … KKt-K2
9. P-QKt3 Kt-B4
10. B-Kt2
8. … NK-K2
9. P-NK3 N-B4
10. B-N2
Now White’s centre is safe from further attacks. True, White has forfeited castling, but as he dominates the King’s side, where Black cannot undertake anything, there is no harm in P-Kt3, preparatory to “artificial castling.”
Now White’s center is secure from further attacks. It's true that White has given up castling, but since he controls the King’s side, where Black can't launch any actions, there’s no issue with P-Kt3, setting up for “artificial castling.”
10. … B-Kt5ch 11. K-B1 B-K2
10. … B-Kt5ch 11. K-B1 B-K2
Directed against 12. P-Kt4, driving off the Kt. Now Kt-R5 would follow.
Directed against 12. P-Kt4, driving away the knight. Now Kt-R5 would follow.
12. P-Kt3 P-QR4
12. P-Kt3 P-Q4
![[Illustration]](images/diag139.jpg)
Diag. 139
Diag. 139
This manœuvre is unwise; White counters with 13. P-QR4, a move which was necessary in any case, in order to develop the QKt via R3, this being the Knight’s only chance of getting into play, because, as long as the QP is attacked three times the lines of B and Q must not be interrupted. That is a weakness in White’s game, and it was necessary for Black to prevent his Kt being driven off by P-KKt4. P-KR4 was the correct move. Then White also had to play P-KR4 to prevent P-KKt4-5, in which case Black could have played l3. … P-KKt3, and have brought his Rooks into concerted action. P-KKt3 would have been necessary before castling, because White’s B-Q3 would have attacked the KKt. The latter could not then capture the Queen’s Pawn on account of a discovered check, e.g. l2. … Castles; 13 B-Q3, KtxP?; 14 KtxKt, KtxKt; 15 BxKt, QxB?; 16 B-R7ch, and QxQ.
This move is a bad choice; White responds with 13. P-QR4, a necessary move to develop the QKt via R3, which is the Knight’s only chance to come into play, since as long as the QP is under attack three times, the lines of B and Q can’t be interrupted. That’s a weakness in White’s strategy, and it was crucial for Black to stop his Kt from being pushed away by P-KKt4. P-KR4 was the right move. Then White also had to play P-KR4 to block P-KKt4-5, at which point Black could have played 13. … P-KKt3 and coordinated his Rooks. P-KKt3 had to happen before castling, because White’s B-Q3 would have targeted the KKt. The latter couldn't capture the Queen's Pawn due to a discovered check, e.g., 12. … Castles; 13 B-Q3, KtxP?; 14 KtxKt, KtxKt; 15 BxKt, QxB?; 16 B-R7ch, and QxQ.
In Diagram 139 Black’s P-QR4 is not only a lost move, but moreover allows a White piece to settle permanently at QKt5. It also prevents the Knight from playing to QR4, from where White’s P-QR4 could be answered by Kt-Kt6 eventually.
In Diagram 139, Black’s move to P-QR4 isn’t just a bad choice; it also lets a White piece take a permanent position at QKt5. This move stops the Knight from moving to QR4, where White’s P-QR4 could eventually be responded to by Kt-Kt6.
13. P-QR4 R-QB1 14. B-Kt5 Kt-Kt5
13. P-QR4 R-QB1 14. B-Kt5 Kt-Kt5
All these skirmishes only result in the exchange of pieces, and as long as Black’s KRis out of play this can only be of advantage to White.
All these battles just lead to trading pieces, and as long as Black’s King’s Rook is out of play, this can only benefit White.
15. Kt-B3 Kt-QR3
15. Kt-B3 Kt-QR3
This is in order to drive off the B. Black should have exchanged his own inactive QB, as the White B might become effective on the Diagonal QKt1-KR7, whilst Black’s QB has no future.
This is to get rid of the B. Black should have traded his own inactive QB, as the White B might become useful on the Diagonal QKt1-KR7, while Black’s QB has no future.
16. K-Kt2 Kt-B2 17. B-K2 B-Kt5
16. K-Kt2 Kt-B2 17. B-K2 B-Kt5
Black cannot yet castle, because of 18. B-Q3 Kt-KR3, 19. B-QB1).
Black can't castle yet because of 18. B-Q3 Kt-KR3, 19. B-QB1).
18. Kt-R2 Kt-QR3 19. B-Q3 Kt-K2 20. R-QB1 Kt-B3 21. KtxB QKtxKt 22. B-Kt1
18. Knight to R2 Knight to QR3 19. Bishop to Q3 Knight to K2 20. Rook to QB1 Knight to B3 21. Knight takes Bishop Queen takes Knight 22. Bishop to Kt1
White’s last eight moves completed his development, and his Bishops lie in wait for the attack on the Black King. Meanwhile Black has effected nothing. On the contrary, he
White’s last eight moves finished his development, and his Bishops are positioned, ready to strike at the Black King. On the other hand, Black hasn’t done anything. In fact, he
![[Illustration]](images/diag140.jpg)
Diag. 140
Diag. 140
has exchanged his valuable KB, and also allowed his KKt to be driven off. His King’s side is bare, and castling would be fraught with danger. If Black castles now, White plays Kt-Kt5, and Black must weaken his position by P-R3 or P-Kt3, and White would advance his KtP or RP and force an exchange, opening a file for his Rook. In consequence Black decides to forfeit castling and to bring his KR to bear on the KB file. For this also Black must first play P-R3, and White obtains an open file by P-Kt4- Kt5. The sequel is shown here.
has exchanged his valuable knight, and also allowed his knight to be driven off. His king’s side is exposed, and castling would be risky. If Black castles now, White plays knight to knight 5, and Black must compromise his position by moving pawn to rook 3 or pawn to knight 3, and White would push his knight pawn or rook pawn and force an exchange, opening a file for his rook. As a result, Black decides to forfeit castling and to bring his rook to bear on the bishop file. For this, Black must first play pawn to rook 3, and White gains an open file by playing pawn to knight 4 to knight 5. The follow-up is shown here.
22. … P-R3 23. P-Kt4 Kt-K2 24. RxRch BxR 25. Kt-K1
22. … P-R3 23. P-Kt4 Kt-K2 24. RxRch BxR 25. Kt-K1
White waits first, to see whether Black is going to castle, and meanwhile tries to exchange Black’s QKt, which commands his QB2 and Q3.
White waits first to see if Black is going to castle, and in the meantime tries to exchange Black’s knight, which controls his bishop on B2 and queen on C3.
25. … R-B1 26. Kt-Q3 P-B3 27. KtxKt QxKt 28. PxP RxP 29. B-B1 Kt-B3 30. P-Kt5 PxP 31. BxP R-B1 32. B-K3 Q-K2 33. Q-Kt4
25. … R-B1 26. Kt-Q3 P-B3 27. KtxKt QxKt 28. PxP RxP 29. B-B1 Kt-B3 30. P-Kt5 PxP 31. BxP R-B1 32. B-K3 Q-K2 33. Q-Kt4
This provides against Black attempting to free his Bishop by P- K4. Black’s B-Q2 is countered by B-Kt6ch. White new wins surprisingly quickly, through the greater mobility of his pieces.
This prevents Black from trying to free his Bishop by moving to P-K4. Black’s B-Q2 is countered by B-Kt6ch. White wins surprisingly quickly, thanks to the greater mobility of his pieces.
33. … Q-B3
34. R-Kt1 R-R1
35. K-R1 R-R5
33. … Q-B3
34. R-Kt1 R-R1
35. K-R1 R-R5
Here Black could have held out a little longer by defending his KtP: 35. … K-B1; 36. R-Kt3, R-R5; 37. Q-Q1, K-Kt1; 38. B-Kt5, QxP (RxP, 39. Q-R5); 39. R-Q3, QxP; 40. BxR, QxB.
Here Black could have held out a little longer by defending his KtP: 35. … K-B1; 36. R-Kt3, R-R5; 37. Q-Q1, K-Kt1; 38. B-Kt5, QxP (RxP, 39. Q-R5); 39. R-Q3, QxP; 40. BxR, QxB.
36. Q-Kt3 RxP
36. Q-Kt3 Rxe4
Compulsory. B-Kt5 was threatened, and after R-R1, QxP, QxQ, RxQ, the RP wins easily.
Compulsory. B-Kt5 was under threat, and after R-R1, QxP, QxQ, RxQ, the RP wins easily.
37. BxR KtxB 38. QxP Q-B6ch 39. Q-Kt2 QxQch 40. RxQ KtxP 41. P-R4 Resigns.
37. BxR KtxB 38. QxP Q-B6ch 39. Q-Kt2 QxQch 40. RxQ KtxP 41. P-R4 Resigns.
GAME No. 28
White: Alapin. Black: Rubinstein.
White: Alapin. Black: Rubinstein.
Sicilian Defence.
Sicilian Defense.
1. P-K4 P-QB4
At first glance this move would seem to lose time, as it does nothing towards the main object of opening strategy, namely, the development of pieces. But we shall find that it does contribute to that aim, although indirectly. For one thing it could, by a transposition of moves, lead into an opening in which P-QB4 is played in any case; in other openings it is of use, in that it acts from the first against the formation of a strong white centre. Concurrently it prepares the opening of a file for the Rooks.
At first glance, this move might seem like a waste of time, as it doesn't directly help with the main goal of opening strategy, which is developing pieces. However, we will see that it does contribute to that goal, albeit indirectly. For one thing, it could, through a rearrangement of moves, lead to an opening where P-QB4 is played anyway; in other openings, it is useful because it immediately counters the creation of a strong white center. At the same time, it sets up the opening of a file for the Rooks.
2. Kt-KB3 Kt-KB3?
Kt-KB3?
Black should not play Kt-KB3 as long as White’s P-K5 means the clear gain of a move. There are plenty of developing moves to choose from.
Black shouldn't play Kt-KB3 as long as White’s P-K5 clearly gains a move. There are plenty of developing moves available.
Two systems of development can be followed by Black according to whether the KB is to develop at K2 or Kt2. In the first case (compare Game No. 29) P-K3 is played. In the second case, the opening might take this course: 2. … Kt-QB3; 3. P-Q4, PxP; 4. KtxP, Kt-B3; 5. Kt-QB3, P-Q3 (not P-KKt3 at once, because White would exchange Knights and drive off the KKt by P-K5); 6. B-K3, P-KKt3, and B-Kt2. White’s position is superior, as he has a pawn in the centre in conjunction with greater mobility. Black will find it difficult to bring his QB into play. Nevertheless his position is compact and difficult to get at.
Two development strategies can be used by Black depending on whether the KB is going to develop at K2 or Kt2. In the first scenario (see Game No. 29), P-K3 is played. In the second scenario, the opening might go like this: 2. … Kt-QB3; 3. P-Q4, PxP; 4. KtxP, Kt-B3; 5. Kt-QB3, P-Q3 (not P-KKt3 right away because White would exchange Knights and chase off the KKt with P-K5); 6. B-K3, P-KKt3, and B-Kt2. White has a better position since he has a pawn in the center along with increased mobility. Black will struggle to develop his QB. Still, his position is solid and hard to attack.
3. P-K5
Undoubtedly Rubinstein had taken this move into account when playing 2. … Kt-KB3. His idea was to provoke the advance of the KP. The pawn at K5 is weaker than at K4, particularly as Black’s QBP prevents its natural support by P-Q4. Moreover Black’s Q4 is free from interference by White. White refutes this ultra subtilty by simple and straight-forward play, and he gets such an advantage in development that his attack succeeds before Black is able to demonstrate any weakness in White’s game.
Undoubtedly, Rubinstein considered this move when playing 2. … Kt-KB3. His strategy was to encourage the advance of the KP. The pawn on K5 is weaker than it would be on K4, especially since Black’s QBP blocks its natural support by P-Q4. Plus, Black’s Q4 is not disrupted by White. White counters this clever move with simple, straightforward play, gaining such an advantage in development that his attack succeeds before Black can show any weaknesses in White’s position.
3. … Kt-Q4 4. Kt-B3 KtxKt 5. QPxKt Kt-B3 6. B-QB4 P-Q3
3. … Knight to Q4 4. Knight to B3 Knight takes Knight 5. Queen takes Knight Knight to B3 6. Bishop to QB4 Pawn to Q3
After 6 … P-K3, 7. B-B4 would restrain the QP.
After 6 ... P-K3, 7. B-B4 would hold back the QP.
7. B-B4 PxP
7. B-B4 Pawn takes Pawn
At this early stage Black has no satisfactory means of development. The QP is attacked three times, and therefore the KP cannot move, nor can the KB be developed at Kt2. B-Kt5, in order to play BxKt and PxP, is refuted by BxPch. The move in the text which brings about the exchange of Queens, but develops another White piece at the same time, is more or less forced. It is instructive to watch how White’s advantage in development soon materialises.
At this early stage, Black has no effective way to develop. The queen’s pawn is attacked three times, so the king’s pawn can’t move, and the king’s bishop can’t be developed at knight 2. Moving the bishop to knight 5 to play bishop takes knight and pawn takes pawn is countered by bishop takes pawn check. The move in the text leads to the exchange of queens while also developing another White piece at the same time, which is more or less necessary. It’s interesting to see how White’s advantage in development quickly shows itself.
8. KtxP QxQch
9. RxQ KtxKt
10. BxKt P-QR3
8. KtxP QxQch
9. RxQ KtxKt
10. BxKt P-QR3
White’s threat of B-Kt5ch could not be parried by B-Q2 because of 11. BxPch.
White's threat of B-Kt5ch couldn't be blocked by B-Q2 because of 11. BxPch.
![[Illustration]](images/diag141.jpg)
Diag. 141
Diag. 141
11. B-B7 B-Kt5 12. P-B3 QR-B1 13. B-Kt6 B-B4 14. B-Kt3 P-K4 15. B-R4ch K-K2 16. P-QB4
11. B-B7 B-Kt5 12. P-B3 QR-B1 13. B-Kt6 B-B4 14. B-Kt3 P-K4 15. B-R4ch K-K2 16. P-QB4
Here White could have won a pawn at once by R-Q5. If then K-K3, 17. P-QB4.
Here White could have won a pawn right away by playing R-Q5. If then K-K3, 17. P-QB4.
16. … P-B3 17. K-B2 K-B2 18. B-Q7! BxB 19. RxBch B-K2 20. KR-Q1!
16. … P-B3 17. K-B2 K-B2 18. B-Q7! BxB 19. RxBch B-K2 20. KR-Q1!
The pawns can wait. 20. RxP would not have been profitable because of R-QKt1.
The pawns can wait. 20. RxP wouldn't have been a good move because of R-QKt1.
20. … K-K3 21. RxP B-Q3
20. … K-K3 21. RxP B-Q3
Black might have resigned here. It is only a question of time.
Black might have given up here. It's just a matter of time.
22. B-R7 R-B3
Otherwise there follows R-Kt6.
Otherwise, there follows R-Kt6.
23. RxP P-QR4 24. R-Kt7 R-R1 25. R-Q5 P-R4 26. P-QR4 P-R5 27. P-QKt3 R(R1)-QB1 28. R-Kt5 Resigns.
23. RxP P-QR4 24. R-Kt7 R-R1 25. R-Q5 P-R4 26. P-QR4 P-R5 27. P-QKt3 R(R1)-QB1 28. R-Kt5 Resigns.
GAME No. 29
White: Teichmann. Black: Spielmann.
White: Teichmann. Black: Spielmann.
Sicilian Defence (see p. 215).
Sicilian Defense (see p. 215).
1. P-K4 P-QB4 2. Kt-QB3 P-K3 3. KKt-K2
1. P-K4 P-QB4 2. Knight to QB3 Pawn to K3 3. King Knight to K2
This comes to the same as Kt-B3, as after P-Q4, PxP the Knight recaptures. If, however, Black plays P-Q4 there is a certain advantage for White to have the Kt at K2, e.g. 3. … P-Q4; 4. PxP, PxP; 5. P-Q4. If now Black does not exchange pawns, White is able to bring his KB to bear on the centre after P-KKt3 and B- Kt2.
This is the same as Kt-B3, since after P-Q4, PxP the Knight recaptures. However, if Black plays P-Q4, White has a definite advantage with the Knight on K2, for example, 3. … P-Q4; 4. PxP, PxP; 5. P-Q4. If Black doesn't exchange pawns now, White can bring the Bishop into play in the center after P-KKt3 and B-Kt2.
3. … Kt-QB3
3. … Kt-QB3
White can exchange this Knight later on, and thus make P-K5 possible as soon as he should deem it advisable to drive the Black Knight from his KB3, where the same is bound to develop sooner or later. It is perhaps wise to prevent P-K5 by Q-B2 instead of the move in the text. This is an old defence, introduced by Paulsen. Though it retards the development of Black’s minor pieces, it produces a strong defensive position, and the opening of the QB file gives attacking chances on the Queen’s side. The defence might run like this: 3. … P-QR3; 4. P-Q4, PxP; 5. KtxP, Q-B2; 6. B-K3, Kt-KB3; 7. B-K2, B-K2; 8. Castles, P-QKt4 followed by B-Kt2, P-Q3, QKt-Q2, etc.
White can trade this Knight later on, allowing P-K5 as soon as he decides it's right to push the Black Knight from his KB3, where it’s bound to develop eventually. It might be smarter to prevent P-K5 with Q-B2 instead of the move shown in the text. This is an old defense introduced by Paulsen. While it delays the development of Black’s minor pieces, it creates a solid defensive position, and opening the QB file offers attacking opportunities on the Queen’s side. The defense could go like this: 3. … P-QR3; 4. P-Q4, PxP; 5. KtxP, Q-B2; 6. B-K3, Kt-KB3; 7. B-K2, B-K2; 8. Castles, P-QKt4 followed by B-Kt2, P-Q3, QKt-Q2, etc.
4. P-Q4 PxP 5. KtxP P-QR3 6. KtxKt KtPxKt 7. B-Q3 P-Q4 8. Castles Kt-B3 9. B-KB4 B-Kt5
4. P-Q4 PxP 5. KtxP P-QR3 6. KtxKt KtPxKt 7. B-Q3 P-Q4 8. Castles Kt-B3 9. B-KB4 B-Kt5
![[Illustration]](images/diag142.jpg)
Diag. 142
Diag. 142
As White can force Black to play P-Kt3, a weakening move, by P-K5 and Q-Kt4, Black should have played P-Kt3 at once, so as to have Kt-R4 in answer to P-K5, thus keeping one piece for the defence of the King’s side. The latter is in jeopardy after the move in the text, and White’s attack succeeds.
As White can make Black play P-Kt3, a weakening move, by using P-K5 and Q-Kt4, Black should have played P-Kt3 right away to respond with Kt-R4 to P-K5, which would keep one piece to defend the King’s side. The King’s side is in danger after the move in the text, and White's attack is successful.
10. P-K5 Kt-Q2 11. Q-Kt4 P-Kt3 12. KR-K1 P-QB4
10. P-K5 Knight to Q2 11. Queen to Knight 4 Pawn to Knight 3 12. Rook to King 1 Pawn to Queen's Bishop 4
Of course Black must not accept the sacrifice of the exchange by playing P-Q5. After 13 Kt-K4, BxR; 14 Kt-Q6ch, K-B1; 15 R x B, Black is in a mating net, from which there is no escape, as he has no time to collect sufficient forces for the defence. The move in the text does not stem the tide either, and White quickly forces the win by a beautiful combination.
Of course, Black shouldn't accept the sacrifice of the exchange by playing P-Q5. After 13 Kt-K4, BxR; 14 Kt-Q6ch, K-B1; 15 R x B, Black is caught in a mating net with no way out, as there's no time to gather enough forces for defense. The move in the text doesn't stop the momentum either, and White quickly secures the win with a brilliant combination.
13. P-QR3 B-R4 14. B-KKt5 Q-Kt3
13. P-QR3 B-R4 14. B-KKt5 Q-Kt3
Q-B2 leads to the same conclusion.
Q-B2 reaches the same conclusion.
15. P-Kt4! PxP 16. KtxP PxKt 17. P-K6
15. P-Kt4! PxP 16. KxP PxKt 17. P-K6
The object of White’s fifteenth move is revealed. Without it the R at K1 would now be attacked.
The purpose of White’s fifteenth move is made clear. Without it, the R at K1 would currently be under attack.
17. … P-B4
Kt-B4 fails on account of 18. PxPch, KxP; 19. R-K7ch, followed by Q-KB4.
Kt-B4 fails because of 18. PxPch, KxP; 19. R-K7ch, followed by Q-KB4.
18. PxKt double ch KxP
19. BxPch Resigns.
18. PxKt double ch KxP
19. BxPch Resigns.
GAME No. 30
White: Tarrasch. Black: Spielmann.
White: Tarrasch. Black: Spielmann.
Sicilian Defence.
Sicilian Defense.
1. P-K4 P-QB4 2. Kt-QB3 Kt-QB3 3. P-KKt3
1. P-K4 P-QB4 2. Kt-QB3 Kt-QB3 3. P-KKt3
Speedy development by Kt-B3 and P-Q4 is more desirable, as otherwise Black may have time to get a firm footing at his Q5.
Speedy development by Kt-B3 and P-Q4 is more desirable, as otherwise Black may have time to establish a strong position at his Q5.
3. … P-KKt3 4. B-Kt2 B-Kt2
3. … P-KKt3 4. B-Kt2 B-Kt2
The Black Bishop is the more effective, as the line of the White Bishop is masked by the KP. Small as this advantage would seem, it becomes serious later on. It is another confirmation of the doctrine that the value of each manœuvre in the opening depends on the measure of mobility it affords for the pieces.
The Black Bishop is more effective, as the White Bishop's line is blocked by the pawn. While this advantage may seem small, it becomes significant later on. This reinforces the idea that the effectiveness of each move in the opening relies on how much mobility it provides for the pieces.
5. KKt-K2 Kt-B3 6. P-Q3
5. KKt-K2 Kt-B3 6. P-Q3
Here White could still obtain a freer game with P-Q4. Perhaps he was afraid of losing a pawn after 6. … PxP; 7. KtxP, KtxP. But there is nothing in it, e.g. 8. KKtxKt, KtxKt; 9. KtxQ, KtxQ; 10. KtxBP! (KtxKtP? BxKt; 11. BxB, R-QKt1), KxKt (KtxBP?; 11. KtxR, KtxR; 12. KtxP, KtxP; 13. KtxP), KxKt. There was nothing else to be feared after P-Q4.
Here, White could still play more freely with P-Q4. Maybe he was worried about losing a pawn after 6. … PxP; 7. KtxP, KtxP. But there’s nothing to worry about, for example, 8. KKtxKt, KtxKt; 9. KtxQ, KtxQ; 10. KtxBP! (KtxKtP? BxKt; 11. BxB, R-QKt1), KxKt (KtxBP?; 11. KtxR, KtxR; 12. KtxP, KtxP; 13. KtxP), KxKt. There was nothing else to fear after P-Q4.
6. … P-Q3 7. Castles B-Q2
6. … P-Q3 7. Castles B-Q2
in order to play Q-B1 and B-R6 and to exchange Bishops, after which there would be weak points at White’s KR3 and KB3.
in order to move Q-B1 and B-R6 and to trade Bishops, after which there would be weaknesses at White’s KR3 and KB3.
8. P-KR3 Castles 9. B-K3 P-KR3
8. P-KR3 Castles 9. B-K3 P-KR3
Black also prevents an exchange of Bishops.
Black also stops any trade of Bishops.
10. Q-Q2 K-R2 11. P-B4 Kt-K1
10. Q-Q2 K-R2 11. P-B4 Kt-K1
The position has now become exceedingly difficult. In order to make the most of the favourable development of his KB, Black must advance on the Queen’s side. But in moving his King’s side pieces over to the Queen’s side, Black must proceed warily, as White might get chances of an attack with overwhelming forces on the King’s side.
The situation has become really challenging. To take advantage of the positive development of his KB, Black needs to move forward on the Queen’s side. However, while shifting his King’s side pieces to the Queen’s side, Black has to be cautious, as White may find opportunities to launch a powerful attack on the King’s side.
12. P-KKt4 Kt-B2 13. Kt-Kt3
12. P-KKt4 Kt-B2 13. Kt-Kt3
Here it was necessary to play R-B2 in order to play the QR to KB1 before Black could manage to drive the Kt to Q1 by P-QKt4-5.
Here, it was necessary to move R-B2 in order to move the QR to KB1 before Black could successfully push the Kt to Q1 by moving P-QKt4-5.
13. … P-QKt4
14. Kt-Q1?
13. … P-QKt4
14. N-Q1?
It would still have been better to play QR-K1 and to leave the Queen’s side to itself as long as possible after P-Kt5, 15. Kt- Q1, in order to start an assault on the King’s side with P-B5, P- KR4 and P-Kt5. After the text move the Queen’s Rook remains shut in.
It would still have been better to play QR-K1 and to leave the Queen's side alone for as long as possible after P-Kt5, 15. Kt-Q1, in order to begin an attack on the King's side with P-B5, P-KR4, and P-Kt5. After the current move, the Queen's Rook stays trapped.
14. … QR-Kt1 15. Kt-K2
14. … QR-Kt1 15. Kt-K2
in order to play P-B3 and P-Q4. The whole plan, however, is inconsequent, as he has started an attack on the King’s side. Now he suddenly opens up files on the Queen’s side where Black has assembled superior forces. The result is that White gets into trouble on both wings, for as soon as he gives up his King’s side attack, the advanced pawns there, as one knows, are only a source of weakness.
in order to play P-B3 and P-Q4. However, the entire plan doesn't make sense since he has begun an attack on the King’s side. Now he suddenly opens up files on the Queen’s side where Black has gathered stronger forces. As a result, White finds himself in trouble on both sides, because as soon as he abandons his attack on the King’s side, the advanced pawns there are, as we know, just a source of weakness.
15. … P-Kt5 16. P-B3 PxP 17. PxP Q-B1 18. P-Q4 PxP 19. PxP Q-R3 20. R-B1 Kt-Kt4 21. P-Q5
15. … P-Kt5 16. P-B3 PxP 17. PxP Q-B1 18. P-Q4 PxP 19. PxP Q-R3 20. R-B1 Kt-Kt4 21. P-Q5
![[Illustration]](images/diag143.jpg)
Diag. 143
Diag. 143
This shuts in the White KB altogether, and at the same time opens the diagonal of Black’s KB. Therefore, on principle alone the move is questionable. In effect it gives Black an opportunity for a beautiful winning combination. Only P-K5 was worth considering, as then the opposing Bishop would have been shut in and White’s own diagonal opened.
This completely traps White's king's bishop while simultaneously opening up the diagonal for Black's king's bishop. So, just based on principle, the move is questionable. Basically, it gives Black a chance to create a stunning winning combination. Only moving the pawn to king's fifth rank was worth considering, as that would have closed in the opposing bishop and opened up White's own diagonal.
21. … Kt-Kt5!! 22. QxKt Kt-Q5 23. QxKt BxQ 24. KtxB
21. … Knight to Kt5!! 22. Queen takes Knight Knight to Q5 23. Queen takes Knight Bishop takes Queen 24. Knight takes Bishop
Although three minor pieces are generally an equivalent for the Queen, in this case the White game collapses quickly. The advanced pawns have produced too many weak points which afford an entry for the Black forces.
Although three minor pieces typically equal a Queen, in this case, the White game falls apart quickly. The advanced pawns have created too many weak points that allow the Black forces to enter.
24. … KR-B1 25. RxR RxR 26. R-B2 Q-R6 27. R-K2
24. … KR-B1 25. RxR RxR 26. R-B2 Q-R6 27. R-K2
B-R5 was threatened. But the text move is of no avail either. Black winds up the game with another fine combination.
B-R5 was in danger. But the text move doesn't help either. Black ends the game with another great combination.
27. … R-B8!
28. BxR QxB
27. … R-B8!
28. BxR QxB
If R-K1, Q-B4.
If R-K1, Q-B4.
29. Kt-B3 QxKtch
30. K-B2 B-Kt4
Resigns.
29. Kt-B3 QxKtch
30. K-B2 B-Kt4
Resigns.
GAME No. 31
White: John. Black: Janowski
White: John. Black: Janowski
Sicilian Defence.
Sicilian Defense.
1. P-K4 P-QB4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. P-Q4 PxP 4. KtxP Kt-B3
1. P-K4 P-QB4 2. Knight to KB3 Knight to QB3 3. P-Q4 Pawn takes Pawn 4. Knight takes Pawn Knight to B3
The aim of this move is to provoke Kt-B3, and incidentally to prevent P-QB4. The latter move would give White command of his Q5 and not only prevent Black’s P-Q4 but also immobilise Black’s KP unless his QP is to remain “backward.”
The goal of this move is to prompt Kt-B3 and also to stop P-QB4. The latter move would give White control of his Q5, preventing Black’s P-Q4 and also limiting Black’s KP unless his QP stays “backward.”
5. QKt-B3 P-KKt3
5. QKt-B3 P-KKt3
As shown on p. 216, P-Q3 must be played first. In any case Black must be wary of playing P-KKt3. If, for instance, after P-Q3 White plays 6. B-QB4, and Black replies with P-KKt3, there follows 7. KtxKt, PxKt; 8. P-K5!, Kt-Kt5 (PxP?, 9. BxPch); 9. P- K6, P-KB4, with advantage to White (see game in the match Schlechter-Lasker).
As shown on p. 216, P-Q3 has to be played first. Regardless, Black needs to be careful about playing P-KKt3. For example, if after P-Q3 White plays 6. B-QB4 and Black responds with P-KKt3, then it follows 7. KtxKt, PxKt; 8. P-K5!, Kt-Kt5 (PxP?, 9. BxPch); 9. P-K6, P-KB4, giving White the advantage (see game in the match Schlechter-Lasker).
6. KtxKt KtPxKt
7. P-K5 Kt-Kt1
8. B-QB4 P-Q4
9. PxP, e.p. PxP
10. Q-B3
6. KtxKt KtPxKt
7. P-K5 Kt-Kt1
8. B-QB4 P-Q4
9. PxP, e.p. PxP
10. Q-B3
![[Illustration]](images/diag144.jpg)
Diag. 144
Diag. 144
White has now three pieces in action and Black none. Black’s game is hopeless already; his B2 cannot be covered by Q-Q2 because of: 11. BxPch, QxB; 12. QxPch, and after Q-K2ch there follows: 11. B-K3, B-Kt2; 12. Castles QR, and 13. KR-K1, with an overwhelming attack.
White has three pieces in play now, while Black has none. Black’s position is already hopeless; the B2 cannot be defended by Q-Q2 because of: 11. BxPch, QxB; 12. QxPch, and after Q-K2ch, it follows: 11. B-K3, B-Kt2; 12. Castles QR, and 13. KR-K1, leading to an overwhelming attack.
10. … Q-Q2 11. Kt-Q5
10. … Q-Q2 11. Knight to Q5
In view of the fact that his game is so much more developed, and that the opposing King will hardly be able to escape from the centre of the board, White decides to sacrifice a Knight in order to open the files in the centre for his Rooks, instead of following the simple line indicated in the previous note.
Given that his game is so much more advanced and that the opposing King will likely struggle to escape from the center of the board, White chooses to sacrifice a Knight to open the files in the center for his Rooks, rather than taking the straightforward approach mentioned earlier.
11. … PxKt 12. BxP Q-K2ch 13. B-K3 R-Kt1 14. Castles KR
11. … PxKt 12. BxP Q-K2ch 13. B-K3 R-Kt1 14. Castles KR
Castles QR is stronger still, as the QR gets into action at once.
Castles QR is even stronger, as the QR springs into action right away.
14. … B-KKt2 15. B-KB4 R-Kt3 16. B-B6ch RxB
14. … B-KKt2 15. B-KB4 R-Kt3 16. B-B6ch RxB
If B-Q2, the continuation might have been: 17. BxB, QxB; 18. QR- Q1, Q-Kt2; 19. KR-K1ch, Kt-K2; 20. RxKtch, KxR; 21. BxPch, etc.; or 18. … Q-B1; 19. BxP, etc.
If B-Q2, the continuation might have been: 17. BxB, QxB; 18. QR-Q1, Q-Kt2; 19. KR-K1ch, Kt-K2; 20. RxKtch, KxR; 21. BxPch, etc.; or 18. … Q-B1; 19. BxP, etc.
After 17. R-K1 Black could have held out a little longer with B- B3. After the text move, however, Black’s game collapses quickly before the concentrated onslaught of the White forces.
After 17. R-K1, Black could have lasted a bit longer with B-B3. However, after the current move, Black’s position falls apart quickly under the focused attack of the White forces.
17. QxRch Q-Q2 18. Q R-K1ch Kt-K2 19. RxKtch! KxR 20. R-K1ch K-B1 21. BxPch K-Kt1 22. R-K8ch B-B1 23. RxBch K-Kt2 24. Q-B3ch Resigns.
17. QxRch Q-Q2 18. Q R-K1ch Kt-K2 19. RxKtch! KxR 20. R-K1ch K-B1 21. BxPch K-Kt1 22. R-K8ch B-B1 23. RxBch K-Kt2 24. Q-B3ch Resigns.
GAME No. 32
White: Ed. Lasker. Black: Mieses.
White: Ed Lasker. Black: Mieses.
Centre Counter Defence.
Center Counter Defense.
1. P-K4 P-Q4 2. PxP Kt-KB3
1. P-K4 P-Q4 2. PxP N-KB3
This is to tempt White to play P-QB4, a weak move (see p. 35). By playing P-QB3 Black would obtain by far the better game in exchange for the pawn.
This is to tempt White to play P-QB4, a weak move (see p. 35). By playing P-QB3, Black would get a much better game in exchange for the pawn.
3. P-Q4 QxP
3. P-Q4 QxP
KtxP can also be played. In either case White wins a move by driving off the Black piece by Kt-QB3 or P-QB4. Furthermore, White has a pawn in the centre. Black’s plan in retaking with the Queen might be to castle early on the Queen’s side and attack White’s centre pawn by P-K4, and White must be on the alert against this plan, though it will not be easy for Black to put the same into execution, because of the exposed position of his Queen. After 4. Kt-QB3, Q-QR4 is the only move which brings the Queen into momentary security, and even then Black must provide for a retreat, as after White’s B-Q2 there would be a threat of an advantageous “discovery” by the Kt. P-QB3 provides such a retreat, but it bars the QKt from its natural development at B3, where the Kt could exert further pressure on White’s Q4. The QB, too, is difficult to get into play and easily becomes an object of attack, as in the present game.
KtxP can also be played. In either case, White wins a move by driving off the Black piece with Kt-QB3 or P-QB4. Additionally, White has a pawn in the center. Black’s strategy for retaking with the Queen might include castling early on the Queen’s side and attacking White’s center pawn with P-K4, so White needs to stay alert against this plan, although it won’t be easy for Black to execute it due to the exposed position of his Queen. After 4. Kt-QB3, Q-QR4 is the only move that brings the Queen into temporary safety, and even then, Black has to consider a retreat. With White’s B-Q2, there would be a threat of a favorable “discovery” from the Kt. P-QB3 offers such a retreat but blocks the QKt from its natural development at B3, where the Kt could apply more pressure on White’s Q4. The QB is also hard to mobilize and can easily become a target for attack, as seen in this game.
4. Kt-QB3 Q-QR4 5. Kt-B3 B-B4
4. Knight to Queen's Bishop 3 Queen to Queen's Rook 4 5. Knight to Bishop 3 Bishop to Bishop 4
B-Kt5 would only help White’s intentions to attack on the King’s side in the absence of Black’s Queen, e.g. 6. P-KR3, B-R4; 7. P- KKt4, B-Kt3; 8. Kt-K5 (threatening Kt-B4), P-B3; 9. P-KR4, Q Kt- Q2; 10. Kt-B4, Q-B2; 11. P-R5, B-K5; 12. KtxB, KtxKt; 13. Q-B3 and B-B4 with the superior game.
B-Kt5 would only assist White’s plan to attack on the King’s side if Black’s Queen is absent, for example, 6. P-KR3, B-R4; 7. P-KKt4, B-Kt3; 8. Kt-K5 (threatening Kt-B4), P-B3; 9. P-KR4, Q Kt-Q2; 10. Kt-B4, Q-B2; 11. P-R5, B-K5; 12. KtxB, KtxKt; 13. Q-B3 and B-B4 with a better position.
![[Illustration]](images/diag145.jpg)
Diag. 145
Diag. 145
6. Kt-K5! Kt-K5
6. Kt-K5! Kt-K5
P-B3 was urgent here, to provide against Kt-B4 and Q-B3. Now the game is as good as lost. White obtains a violent attack with superior forces, and brings it home before Black has time to complete his development.
P-B3 was crucial here to protect against Kt-B4 and Q-B3. Now the game is practically lost. White launches a fierce attack with stronger forces and secures victory before Black has a chance to finish developing his pieces.
7. Q-B3 Kt-Q3
7. Q-B3 N-Q3
If KtxKt, B-Q2.
If KtxKt, B-Q2.
8. B-Q2 P-K3 9. P-KKt4 B-Kt3
8. B-Q2 P-K3 9. P-KKt4 B-Kt3
Black had to guard his KB2 because of Kt-Kt5, KtxKt, QxPch.
Black had to protect his KB2 because of Knight to Knight 5, Knight takes Knight, Queen takes Pawn check.
10. P-KR4 Q-Kt3 11. Castles P-KB3
10. P-KR4 Q-Kt3 11. Castles P-KB3
Compulsory. Kt-B3 is refuted by 12. KtxKt, QxKt; 13. QxQ, PxQ; 14. B-Kt2 and P-R5. On the other hand, the answer to 11. … QxP would be 12. B-KB4, Q-B4; 13. P-R5, P-B3; 14. PxB, PxKt; 15. B- KKt5 followed by RxKt and R-Q8 or Q-B7 mate.
Compulsory. Kt-B3 is countered by 12. KtxKt, QxKt; 13. QxQ, PxQ; 14. B-Kt2 and P-R5. On the other hand, the response to 11. ... QxP would be 12. B-KB4, Q-B4; 13. P-R5, P-B3; 14. PxB, PxKt; 15. B-KKt5 followed by RxKt and R-Q8 or Q-B7 checkmate.
12. KtxB PxKt 13. B-Q3 QxP
12. KtxB PxKt 13. B-Q3 QxP
K-B2 or P-KB4 were also unavailing in consequence of Black’s poor development.
K-B2 or P-KB4 also didn’t help because of Black’s poor development.
14. BxPch K-Q2 15. B-K3 Q-Kt5 16. P-R3 Q-B5 17. QxKtP Q-B3 18. B-K4 Resigns.
14. BxPch K-Q2 15. B-K3 Q-Kt5 16. P-R3 Q-B5 17. QxKtP Q-B3 18. B-K4 Resigns.
GAME No. 33
White: Barasz. Black: Mieses.
White: Barasz. Black: Mieses.
Centre Counter Defence.
Center Counter Defense.
1. P-K4 P-Q 4 2. PxP QxP 3. Kt-QB3 Q-QR4 4. Kt-B3
1. P-K4 P-Q 4 2. PxP QxP 3. Kt-QB3 Q-QR4 4. Kt-B3
It is better to advance the QP at once and so threaten B-Q2, after which Black is almost under compulsion to provide a retreat for his Q by P-QB3, thus blocking his QKt.
It’s better to move the queen’s pawn right away and threaten the queen on B-Q2, after which Black is almost forced to retreat his queen with P-QB3, blocking his knight.
4. … Kt-QB3 5. B-K2 B-B4 6. P-Q3
4. … Kt-QB3 5. B-K2 B-B4 6. P-Q3
Already now the mistake of having allowed Black to develop his Queen’s side unmolested is apparent. P-Q4 is now impossible, for Black would castle on the Queen’s side and keep the initiative by exerting a permanent pressure on White’s QP by P-K4. White must yield up the centre to Black.
Already now the mistake of having let Black develop his queenside without interference is clear. P-Q4 is now off the table, because Black would castle queenside and maintain the initiative by applying constant pressure on White’s QP with P-K4. White must give up the center to Black.
6. … P-K4 7. B-Q2 Castles 8. P-QR3 Q-B4
6. … P-K4 7. B-Q2 Castles 8. P-QR3 Q-B4
The Queen must escape from White’s threat of P-QKt4.
The Queen needs to get away from White’s threat of P-QKt4.
9. Castles Kt-B3 10. P-QKt4 Q-K2 11. P-Kt5
9. Castles Kt-B3 10. P-QKt4 Q-K2 11. P-Kt5
This advance is somewhat purposeless, as the White pieces are not ready for an attack on Black’s King. It is difficult, though, to find a sensible plan, as the White pieces have so little mobility. It would perhaps be best to play R-K1, B-B1, and Kt-K4.
This move is somewhat pointless, as the White pieces aren't set to attack Black’s King. It's tough to come up with a sensible strategy since the White pieces have so little mobility. It might be best to play R-K1, B-B1, and Kt-K4.
11. … Kt-Q5 12. R-K1 Q-B4 13. B-KB1 B-Q3 14. Q-Kt1?
11. … Kt-Q5 12. R-K1 Q-B4 13. B-KB1 B-Q3 14. Q-Kt1?
![[Illustration]](images/diag146.jpg)
Diag. 146
Diag. 146
The purpose of this move is not clear. The advance of the KtP could only be condoned by a desire to obtain an open file, and it seems illogical to protect it now. If White wanted to escape the pinning of his KKt he need not have moved the Queen. KtxKt would have effected this and prevented the King’s side from being laid bare.
The reason for this move isn't clear. Advancing the KtP could only make sense if there was a desire to open a file, and it seems unreasonable to protect it now. If White wanted to free their KKt from being pinned, they didn’t need to move the Queen. KtxKt would have achieved this and kept the King’s side from being exposed.
White’s game would still have been bad, particularly as the exchange at Q4 opens the diagonal for the Black KB, but the move in the text has even a worse effect. Mieses concludes the game with an elegant sacrifice.
White's game would still have been poor, especially since the exchange at Q4 opens the diagonal for the Black King’s Bishop, but the move mentioned has an even worse outcome. Mieses finishes the game with a stylish sacrifice.
14. … KtxKtch 15. PxKt P-K5! 16. QPxP BxPch 17. KxB QxPch 18. B-Kt2 RxB 19. R-K2 RxR 20. KtxR QxKt 21. PxB Q-K4ch 22. K-R1 R-K1
14. … KtxKtch 15. PxKt P-K5! 16. QPxP BxPch 17. KxB QxPch 18. B-Kt2 RxB 19. R-K2 RxR 20. KtxR QxKt 21. PxB Q-K4ch 22. K-R1 R-K1
Black has wrought fearful havoc in the White ranks, and the defenceless King cannot withstand the onslaught of the three White pieces for long.
Black has caused devastating damage to the White pieces, and the defenseless King can't hold off the attack from the three White pieces for much longer.
23. P-QB4 Kt-R4 24. K-Kt1 Q-Q5ch 25. K-R2 R-K7
23. P-QB4 Kt-R4 24. K-Kt1 Q-Q5ch 25. K-R2 R-K7
threatening Q-R5ch, Q-B7ch, and mate at Kt7 or R7.
threatening Q-R5ch, Q-B7ch, and checkmate at Kt7 or R7.
26. Q-R1 Q-K4ch
27. P-B4 QxPch
28. K-Kt1 Q-Q5ch
Resigns.
26. Q-R1 Q-K4ch
27. P-B4 QxPch
28. K-Kt1 Q-Q5ch
Resigns.
GAME No. 34
White: Em. Lasker. Black: Niemzowitsch.
White: Em. Lasker. Black: Niemzowitsch.
Caro-Kann Defence (compare p. 50).
Caro-Kann Defense (see p. 50).
1. P-K4 P-QB3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 PxP 4. KtxP Kt-B3 5. KtxKt KtPxKt 6. B-K2 B-B4 7. B-B3 Q-R4ch 8. P-B3 P-KR4!
1. P-K4 P-QB3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 PxP 4. KtxP Kt-B3 5. KtxKt KtPxKt 6. B-K2 B-B4 7. B-B3 Q-R4ch 8. P-B3 P-KR4!
A deep conception. If White accepts the proffered sacrifice of a pawn, he loses time, as he must retire his B before bringing out his Kt, and, moreover, the KR file being open, he can only castle on the Q side. But there the Black Queen is ready for the attack. If he refuses the sacrifice, the text move is still of value, as even then it is hardly advisable for White to castle on the K side, whilst Black can play B-R3 as soon as it might be desirable to exchange White’s QB.
A deep idea. If White takes the offered pawn sacrifice, he loses time because he has to move his Bishop back before bringing out his Knight. Plus, with the rook's file open, he can only castle on the Queen side. But there, the Black Queen is poised to attack. If he declines the sacrifice, the move mentioned is still valuable, as it’s not really a good idea for White to castle on the King side anyway, while Black can play Bishop to R3 as soon as it's beneficial to exchange White’s Queen Bishop.
9. BxP Kt-Q2 10. B-Kt4 BxB 11. QxB Castles 12. Kt-K2 P-K3 13. B-B4 Q-QKt4!
9. BxP Kt-Q2 10. B-Kt4 BxB 11. QxB Castles 12. Kt-K2 P-K3 13. B-B4 Q-QKt4!
Black is the first to complete his development, and he assumes the offensive.
Black is the first to finish his development and takes the offensive.
14. Castles QR!
14. QR Castles!
This is much stronger than the alternative P-QKt3, which would fatally disturb the pawn skeleton, particularly as castling is only possible on the Q side. Although Black can now gain two pawns, White obtains an attack and Black only just manages to escape with a draw.
This is much stronger than the alternative P-QKt3, which would seriously disrupt the pawn structure, especially since castling can only happen on the queen side. Even though Black can now win two pawns, White launches an attack, and Black barely manages to secure a draw.
14. … Kt-Kt3 15. Kt-Kt3
14. … Knight-Knight3 15. Knight-Knight3
intending Q-K2 in answer to Kt-B5. Again P-QKt3 is not to be thought of, and R-Q2 also fails because of Kt-B5; 16. R-B2, KtxP.
intending Q-K2 in response to Kt-B5. Once more, P-QKt3 is not an option, and R-Q2 also doesn’t work because of Kt-B5; 16. R-B2, KtxP.
15. … Q-Q4 16. K-Kt1 QxKtP 17. QR-Kt1 QxBP 18. Kt-K4 Q-R5 19. Q-B3 Kt-B5!
15. … Q-Q4 16. K-Kt1 QxKtP 17. QR-Kt1 QxBP 18. Kt-K4 Q-R5 19. Q-B3 Kt-B5!
![[Illustration]](images/diag147.jpg)
Diag. 147
Diag. 147
Whilst Black was busy capturing two pawns by moving the Queen four times, White was concentrating the whole of his forces, and now threatens to win back the pawn with R-Kt4. The move in the text anticipates the threat, for now the answer to 20. R-Kt4 would be Q-R4; 21. KtxP?, Q-B4ch; 22. Kt-K4?? Kt-Q7ch, winning the Q.
While Black was busy taking two pawns by moving the Queen four times, White was focused on gathering all of his pieces, and now threatens to reclaim the pawn with R-Kt4. The move in the text anticipates this threat, because now the response to 20. R-Kt4 would be Q-R4; 21. KtxP?, Q-B4ch; 22. Kt-K4?? Kt-Q7ch, resulting in the loss of the Queen.
20. K-R1 P-KB4 21. Kt-Kt5 B-Q3 22. B-B1 R-Q2 23. R-Kt2 B-B2
20. K-R1 P-KB4 21. Knight to Knight 5 Bishop to Queen 3 22. Bishop to Bishop 1 Rook to Queen 2 23. Rook to Knight 2 Bishop to Bishop 2
intending to get rid of the awkward White Knight by Kt-Q3-K5.
intending to eliminate the awkward White Knight by moving Kt-Q3-K5.
24. KR-Kt Kt-Q3 25. Q-K2 Kt-K5 26. Kt-B3 Q-R6 27. P-R3
24. Knight to Knight 3 25. Queen to King 2 Knight to King 5 26. Knight to Bishop 3 Queen to Rook 6 27. Pawn to Rook 3
White appears to be in “time” difficulties, or else he remains passive, in order to give Black an opportunity for making the risky attempt to hold the extra pawn by P-B3 and P-K4.
White seems to be struggling with "time" issues, or they are remaining passive to give Black a chance to take the risky move of holding the extra pawn by pushing P-B3 and P-K4.
27. … P-R3 28. B-K3 KR-Q1 29. K-R2 R-R1
If Black wants to play for a win, he must play P-B3. In view of the favourable position of the White pieces, he prefers to risk nothing and to avoid the weakening of position which follows upon practically every pawn move.
If Black wants to play for a win, he has to move P-B3. Considering the strong position of the White pieces, he chooses to play it safe and avoid the weakening that comes with almost every pawn move.
30. K-R1 KR-Q1 31. K-R2 R-K1 32. R-Kt8 RxR 33. RxRch R-Q1 34. R-Kt7 R-Q2 35. R-Kt8ch
30. K-R1 KR-Q1 31. K-R2 R-K1 32. R-Kt8 RxR 33. RxRch R-Q1 34. R-Kt7 R-Q2 35. R-Kt8ch
As long as Black plays steadily, White cannot hope for more than a draw.
As long as Black plays consistently, White can only expect to get a draw.
35. … R-Q1 36. R-Kt7 R-B1 37. P-B4 Kt-B3
35. … R-Q1 36. R-Kt7 R-B1 37. P-B4 Kt-B3
In order to drive off the Rook; White now enforces the draw by a fine combination.
To drive off the Rook, White now secures the draw with a clever combination.
38. B-Kt5! Kt-R4 39. RxP! RxR 40. QxPch R-Q2
38. B-Kt5! Kt-R4 39. RxP! RxR 40. QxPch R-Q2
Not K-Kt1 on account of 41. Q-K8ch, K-R2; 42. QxR, QxKt; 43. QxB, threatening B-K7.
Not K-Kt1 because of 41. Q-K8ch, K-R2; 42. QxR, QxKt; 43. QxB, threatening B-K7.
41. Kt-K5! Draw.
41. Kt-K5! Draw.
For after BxKt there follows 42. Q-K8ch, K-B2; 43. QxBch, with perpetual check.
For after BxKt, the next moves are 42. Q-K8ch, K-B2; 43. QxBch, resulting in a continuous check.
Both players have shown a deep positional insight, and the game shows in an interesting manner how a preponderance of material can be counterbalanced by the greater mobility of the pieces.
Both players have demonstrated a strong understanding of the position, and the game interestingly illustrates how a material advantage can be offset by the greater mobility of the pieces.
GAME No. 35
White: Reti. Black: Tartakower.
White: Reti. Black: Tartakower.
Caro-Kann Defence.
Caro-Kann Defense.
1. P-K4 P-QB3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 PxP 4. KtxP Kt-KB3 5. Q-Q3
1. P-K4 P-QB3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. Kt-QB3 PxP 4. KtxP Kt-KB3 5. Q-Q3
White wishes to castle as soon as possible on the Queen’s side, in order to operate on the Queen’s file with the help of the Rook.
White wants to castle on the Queen’s side as soon as possible to use the Rook to control the Queen’s file.
5. … P-K4
Here Black loses two moves in bringing White’s centre pawn away. The manœuvre therefore is not sound. QKt-Q2, KtxKt, and Kt-B3, or any other developing moves would be preferable.
Here Black loses two moves by moving White’s center pawn away. So, this maneuver isn’t effective. QKt-Q2, KtxKt, and Kt-B3, or any other developing moves would be better.
6. PxP Q-R4ch
7. B-Q2 QxP
8. Castles!
6. PxP Q-R4ch
7. B-Q2 QxP
8. Castles!
![[Illustration]](images/diag148.jpg)
Diag. 148
Diag. 148
White prepares a magnificent mating combination, which can only be made possible at such an early stage, when the opponent has utterly neglected his development.
White sets up a stunning mating combination, which can only happen this early in the game when the opponent has completely neglected their development.
8. … KtxKt
9. Q-Q8ch!! KxQ
10. B-Kt5 double ch K-B2
11. B-Q8 mate
8. … KtxKt
9. Q-Q8ch!! KxQ
10. B-Kt5 double check K-B2
11. B-Q8 checkmate
A beautiful mate. If 11. … K-K1, 11. R-Q8 mate.
A beautiful checkmate. If 11. … K-K1, then 11. R-Q8 checkmate.
GAME No. 36
White: Forgacz. Black: E. Cohn.
White: Forgacz. Black: E. Cohn.
Queen’s Gambit.
Queen's Gambit.
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. Kt-KB3 P-K3 3. P-B4 PxP 4. Kt-B3 Kt-KB3 5. B-Kt5 B-K2 6. P-K4 P-KR3
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. Kt-KB3 P-K3 3. P-B4 PxP 4. Kt-B3 Kt-KB3 5. B-Kt5 B-K2 6. P-K4 P-KR3
Through 3. … PxP Black’s development is one move behind, and such pawn moves should at any cost be avoided as do not contribute to the mobilisation of the pieces. Castles, P-QKt3, B- Kt2, and QKt-Q 2 was the proper course.
Through 3. … PxP Black’s development is one move behind, and such pawn moves should definitely be avoided as they do not help in mobilizing the pieces. Castles, P-QKt3, B-Kt2, and QKt-Q2 were the right moves.
7. BxKt
7. BxKt
This is better than to withdraw the Bishop; Black’s last move was clearly loss of time.
This is better than pulling back the Bishop; Black's last move was definitely a waste of time.
7.. … BxB 8. BxP Kt-Q2 9. Castles Castles
7.. … BxB 8. BxP Kt-Q2 9. Castles Castles
![[Illustration]](images/diag149.jpg)
Diag. 149
Diag. 149
There seems to be nothing alarming about the position, yet on closer investigation a number of vital failings can be discerned in Black’s camp. The absence of a pawn in the centre and the unsatisfactory development have a far-reaching influence. White will be able to bring his forces to the King’s side by way of K4, which is made accessible by the disappearance of Black’s QP, before Black has time to bring his QB to bear on White’s K4 by P- QKt3 and B-Kt2. White’s immediate threat (after P-K5) is Q-K2-K4 and B-Q3. If Black does not wish to risk P-KKt3, he must defend himself with R-K1, Kt-B1. In the meantime White can play R-Q1 and threaten P-Q5, opening the Queen’s file. This again necessitates P-B3, which postpones the efficiency of the QB at Kt2 until White’s QKt and QR have been brought up for the attack. The game develops on these lines, and provides an excellent example of the advantage of the command of the centre.
There doesn’t seem to be anything concerning about the situation, but upon closer inspection, several critical weaknesses become apparent in Black’s camp. The lack of a pawn in the center and poor development have significant consequences. White will be able to move his pieces to the king’s side via K4, which is possible because Black’s QP is gone, before Black can effectively position his QB against White’s K4 with P-QKt3 and B-Kt2. White’s immediate threat (after P-K5) is Q-K2-K4 and B-Q3. If Black wants to avoid risking P-KKt3, he must defend with R-K1 and Kt-B1. Meanwhile, White can play R-Q1 and threaten P-Q5, opening the queen’s file. This again requires P-B3, which delays the effectiveness of the QB at Kt2 until White’s QKt and QR are ready for the attack. The game evolves along these lines and perfectly illustrates the advantage of controlling the center.
10. P-K5 B-K2 11. Q-K2 R-K1 12. QR-Q1 P-QB3 13. Q-K4 Q-B2
preparing P-QKt3.
preparing P-QKt3.
14. KR-K1 Kt-B1 15. Q-Kt4 P-QKt3 16. Q-R5 B-Kt2 17. R-K4 B-Kt5
14. KR-K1 Kt-B1 15. Q-Kt4 P-QKt3 16. Q-R5 B-Kt2 17. R-K4 B-Kt5
Black cannot yet play P-QB4, as R-B4 is threatened with an attack on KB7. The Bishop which obstructs the Q would have no move, save the sorry retreat to Q1, and White would win speedily: 17. … P- QB4; 18. R-B4, B-Q1; 19. P-Q5, PxP; 20. KtxP, BxKt; 21. BxB, attacking R and P.
Black cannot play P-QB4 yet because R-B4 is threatened by an attack on KB7. The Bishop blocking the Queen would only have the unfortunate option to retreat to Q1, and White would win quickly: 17. … P-QB4; 18. R-B4, B-Q1; 19. P-Q5, PxP; 20. KtxP, BxKt; 21. BxB, attacking R and P.
18. R-Kt4 BxKt 19. PxB K-R1
18. R-Kt4 BxKt 19. PxB K-R1
QxP was threatened.
QxP received a threat.
20. Kt-Kt5 R-K2 21. Kt-K4
20. Knight to K5 Rook to K2 21. Knight to K4
Even the Knight is brought in via K4.
Even the Knight is brought in using K4.
21. … R-Q1 22. R-Q3 P-QB4 23. Kt-B6
21. … R-Q1 22. R-Q3 P-QB4 23. Kt-B6
threatening QxPch and R-Kt8 mate. Black cannot capture the Kt because of QxPch and mate at Kt7. But the mate cannot be delayed much longer in view of the concentration of superior forces for the attack.
threatening QxPch and R-Kt8 mate. Black can't take the Kt because of QxPch and mate at Kt7. But the mate can't be postponed much longer given the concentration of stronger forces for the attack.
23. … Kt-Kt3 24. R-R3 Resigns
23. … Kt-Kt3 24. R-R3 Resigns
There is no answer to Q-Kt5 and RxP.
There is no answer to Q-Kt5 and RxP.
GAME No. 37
White: Marshall. Black: Capablanca.
White: Marshall. Black: Capablanca.
Queen’s Gambit Declined (see p. 52).
Queen's Gambit Declined (see p. 52).
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. P-QB4 P-K3 3. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 4. B-Kt5 B-K2 5. P-K3 Kt-K5
1. Pawn to Queen 4 Pawn to Queen 4 2. Pawn to Queen Bishop 4 Pawn to King 3 3. Knight to Queen Bishop 3 Knight to King Bishop 3 4. Bishop to Knight 5 Bishop to Knight 2 5. Pawn to King 3 Knight to King 5
![[Illustration]](images/diag150.jpg)
Diag. 150
Diag. 150
Lasker has played this move successfully in his match against Marshall; but it has not come into general use. White should get the better game by 6. BxB, QxB; 7. Q-B2, KtxKt; 8. QxKt or 7. PxP, KtxKt; 8. PxKt, PxP; 9. Q-Kt3, in the first case because the Black QB is out of play, in the second case because of the open Kt file. 7. KtxKt is bad, because PxKt prevents the natural development of the KKt at B3, and Black can obtain an attack after castling by P-KB4-5.
Lasker played this move successfully in his match against Marshall, but it hasn't become widely used. White should have the advantage with 6. BxB, QxB; 7. Q-B2, KtxKt; 8. QxKt or 7. PxP, KtxKt; 8. PxKt, PxP; 9. Q-Kt3. In the first scenario, it’s because the Black Queen’s Bishop is out of play, and in the second, it’s due to the open Knight file. 7. KtxKt is a poor choice because PxKt blocks the natural development of the King's Knight at B3, and Black can launch an attack after castling with P-KB4-5.
6. BxB QxB 7. B-Q3
6. BxB QxB 7. B-Q3
This also is a good move, as it furthers development.
This is also a smart move, as it promotes growth.
7. … KtxKt 8. PxKt PxP
7. … KtxKt 8. PxKt PxP
Giving up the centre pawn in this case is not against the spirit of the opening, as it opens the only diagonal on which the Black QB can operate.
Giving up the center pawn in this case is actually in line with the spirit of the opening because it opens the only diagonal on which the Black queen's bishop can function.
9. BxP P-QKt3 10. Q-B3 P-QB3 11. Kt-K2 B-Kt2 12. Castles KR Castles 13. P-QR4
9. BxP P-QKt3 10. Q-B3 P-QB3 11. Kt-K2 B-Kt2 12. Castles KR Castles 13. P-QR4
This move can only be good if White intends to operate on the Queen’s side, possibly by KR-Kt1 and P-R5. But the position of the White Queen makes the adoption of a different plan compulsory. For one thing, it is rational to concentrate forces where the Queen can take her share, therefore, in this case, on the King’s side. On the other hand, the manœuvre referred to could not be put into execution here because Black can prevent P- R5 by P-QB4 and Kt-B3. A fairly obvious course was to play P-K4, taking possession of the centre. P-QB4 would then be answered by P-Q5, after which the White Rooks would be very effective at Q1 and K1. In this game White does initiate a King’s side attack subsequently, and thus 13. … P-QR4 is clearly a lost move.
This move can only be beneficial if White plans to play on the Queen’s side, possibly by moving the rook to Kt1 and pawn to R5. However, the position of the White Queen requires a different strategy. For one, it makes sense to focus forces where the Queen can be involved, which in this case is on the King’s side. On the other hand, the move mentioned can’t be carried out here because Black can block P-R5 with P-QB4 and Kt-B3. A more straightforward option was to play P-K4, controlling the center. After that, P-QB4 would be met with P-Q5, allowing the White Rooks to be very powerful at Q1 and K1. In this game, White does indeed launch a King’s side attack later, making 13. … P-QR4 a clear mistake.
13. … P-QB4
14. Q-Kt3 Kt-B3
15. Kt-B4 QR-B1
13. … P-QB4
14. Q-Kt3 Kt-B3
15. Kt-B4 QR-B1
The tempting move of P-K4 cannot be played because of 16. Kt-Q5, Q-Q1; 17. PxBP, Kt-R4; 18. KR-Q1. The move in the text threatens PxP, KtxP and RxB.
The appealing move of P-K4 can't be played because of 16. Kt-Q5, Q-Q1; 17. PxBP, Kt-R4; 18. KR-Q1. The move in the text threatens PxP, KtxP, and RxB.
16. B-R2 KR-Q1 17. KR-K1 Kt-R4
16. B-R2 KR-Q1 17. KR-K1 Kt-R4
This threatens B-B3 attacking the RP. White decides to yield the same at once, thinking quite rightly that a direct attack must have good chances, as Black gets two pieces out of play in capturing the pawn.
This puts B-B3 at risk of attacking the RP. White chooses to give in immediately, rightly believing that a direct attack has a good chance of succeeding since Black loses two pieces by capturing the pawn.
18. QR-Q1 B-B 3 19. Q-Kt4
18. QR-Q1 B-B 3 19. Q-Kt4
Black cannot take the pawn yet, because of KtxP and BxPch.
Black can't take the pawn yet because of KtxP and BxPch.
19. … P-B5 20. P-Q5?
![[Illustration]](images/diag151.jpg)
Diag. 151
Diag. 151
There is no need to play for violent complications. The logical course was to open the way to the King’s side for the Rooks by P- K4. The continuation could have been: 20. P-K4, BxRP; 21. Kt-R5, P-Kt3; 22. P-K5, BxR; 23. RxB followed by Kt-B6, with a strong attack; also after 21. … P-B3, 22. R-Q2, White’s attacking chances are good. After the move in the text, Black could get an advantage by simply exchanging: 20. … PxP; 21. KtxP, BxKt; 22. RxB, RxR; 23. QxRch, R-Q1; 24. Q-KB5, P-Kt3; 25. Q-B2, Q-R6. In taking the RP, however, Black incurs grave risks.
There’s no need to create violent complications. The logical move was to open up the path to the King’s side for the Rooks by playing P-K4. The sequence could have gone like this: 20. P-K4, BxRP; 21. Kt-R5, P-Kt3; 22. P-K5, BxR; 23. RxB followed by Kt-B6, leading to a strong attack; also after 21. … P-B3, 22. R-Q2, White’s attacking chances are promising. After the move in the text, Black could gain an advantage by simply exchanging pieces: 20. … PxP; 21. KtxP, BxKt; 22. RxB, RxR; 23. QxRch, R-Q1; 24. Q-KB5, P-Kt3; 25. Q-B2, Q-R6. However, by capturing the RP, Black takes on serious risks.
20. … BxRP 21. R-Q2 P-K4 22. Kt-R5 P-Kt3 23. P-Q6 Q-K3 24. Q-Kt5 K-R1
20. … BxRP 21. R-Q2 P-K4 22. Kt-R5 P-Kt3 23. P-Q6 Q-K3 24. Q-Kt5 K-R1
Black finds the weaknesses at his KB3 and KR3 very troublesome. RxP would lose at once, because of 25. RxR, QxR; 26. Q-R6!
Black finds the weaknesses at his KB3 and KR3 quite concerning. RxP would lose immediately, due to 25. RxR, QxR; 26. Q-R6!
25. Kt-B6 RxP 26. RxR QxR 27. B-Kt1
25. Knight to B6 Rook takes Pawn 26. Rook takes Rook Queen takes Rook 27. Bishop to Knight 1
Q-R4 would have been answered by K-Kt2.
Q-R4 would have been answered by K-Kt2.
27. … Kt-B3
27. … Kt-B3
Black must try to bring back his minor pieces for the defence. If he succeeds in doing that in time, the end-game is easily won on the Queen’s side.
Black needs to bring his minor pieces back for defense. If he manages to do that in time, the endgame can be easily won on the Queen's side.
28. B-B5 R-Q1
Not PxB because of Q-R6.
Not PxB due to Q-R6.
29. P-KR4
White’s attacking resources seem inexhaustible. By exchanging Queens he could have got his pawn back in this way: 29. B-Q7, Q- B1 (R xB?, 30. Q-R6); 30. BxKt, BxB; 31. QxQP, Q-Q3; 32. Kt- Q7,QxQ; 33. KtxQ, B-K1; 34. KtxQBP. But even then Black would maintain a superiority in the end-game owing to the freedom of his passed pawn, and because he can post his Rook at the seventh after P-QKt4. This explains why Marshall prefers not to win back his pawn, but to enter upon a violent attack with a doubtful issue. However, Capablanca finds the right move in all the ensuing complications, and finally wins the game.
White’s attacking options seem endless. By exchanging Queens, he could have regained his pawn like this: 29. B-Q7, Q-B1 (R xB?, 30. Q-R6); 30. BxKt, BxB; 31. QxQP, Q-Q3; 32. Kt-Q7, QxQ; 33. KtxQ, B-K1; 34. KtxQBP. But even then, Black would maintain an advantage in the endgame because of his passed pawn and the ability to place his Rook on the seventh rank after P-QKt4. This is why Marshall chooses not to recover his pawn, opting instead for a fierce attack with uncertain results. However, Capablanca finds the right move in all the subsequent complexities and ultimately wins the game.
![[Illustration]](images/diag152.jpg)
Diag. 152
Diag. 152
29. … Kt-K2 30. Kt-K4 Q-B2 31. Q-B6ch K-Kt1 32. B-K6
29. … Kt-K2 30. Kt-K4 Q-B2 31. Q-B6ch K-Kt1 32. B-K6
This is now compulsory. If White loses time in withdrawing the B, Black consolidates his position by: Kt-Q4 and Q-K2.
This is now mandatory. If White takes too long to move the bishop back, Black strengthens his position by: knight to queen four and queen to king two.
32. … PxB
32. … PxB
R-B1 is refuted by 33. Kt-Kt5!, PxB; 34. QxR, etc.
R-B1 is countered by 33. Kt-Kt5!, PxB; 34. QxR, etc.
33. QxKPch
33. QxKPch
Better than Kt-Kt5, for after Kt-Q4, 34. QxPch, the Black King finds a safe retreat at Kt2.
Better than Kt-Kt5, because after Kt-Q4, 34. QxPch, the Black King can safely retreat to Kt2.
33. … K-B1 34. Kt-Kt5 Kt-Kt1 35. P-B4
33. … K-B1 34. Kt-Kt5 Kt-Kt1 35. P-B4
in order to open the file for the Rook.
in order to open the file for the Rook.
35. … R-K1 36. PxP R-K2 37. R-B1ch K-Kt2 38. P-R5 B-K1 39. P-R6ch K-R1
35. … R-K1 36. PxP R-K2 37. R-B1ch K-Kt2 38. P-R5 B-K1 39. P-R6ch K-R1
KtxP fails on account of Q-B6ch.
KtxP fails due to Q-B6ch.
40. Q-Q6
White takes all possible advantage from the position, but cannot bring home his attack, as Black has concentrated his forces for the defence. Black must still be careful to avoid a mate, e.g. QxQ?; 41. PxQ, RxP; 42. R-B7 or 4l. … R-Q2; 42. R-B8.
White takes full advantage of the position, but can't convert the attack into a win, as Black has gathered his forces for defense. Black still needs to be cautious to avoid being checkmated, for example, QxQ?; 41. PxQ, RxP; 42. R-B7 or 41. … R-Q2; 42. R-B8.
40. … Q-B4 41. Q-Q4
Here White could have tried QxQ and R-B8. There was then a permanent threat of RxB, e.g. 41. QxQ, PxQ; 42. R-B8, RxP; 43. Kt-B3, R-K2; 44. Kt-Kt5, etc. It seems as if Black would have to give up the piece again by 43. … R-R4 in order to win. White, however, would then have drawing chances, which would have been a fitting conclusion to this wonderful game.
Here, White could have played QxQ and R-B8. This would create a constant threat of RxB, for example, 41. QxQ, PxQ; 42. R-B8, RxP; 43. Kt-B3, R-K2; 44. Kt-Kt5, and so on. It looks like Black would have to sacrifice the piece again with 43. … R-R4 to win. However, White would then have chances to draw, which would have been a fitting ending to this fantastic game.
41. … RxP
42. Q-Q7 R-K2
Resigns
41. … RxP
42. Q-Q7 R-K2
Forfeits
GAME No. 38
White: Rotlewi. Black: Teichmann.
White: Rotlewi. Black: Teichmann.
Queen’s Gambit Declined.
Queen's Gambit Declined.
1. P-Q4 P-Q 4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-KB3 3. P-B4 P-K3 4. Kt-B3 QKt-Q2 5. B-Kt5 B-K2
1. P-Q4 P-Q 4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-KB3 3. P-B4 P-K3 4. Kt-B3 QKt-Q2 5. B-Kt5 B-K2
Capablanca tried 5. … B-Kt5; against Ed. Lasker in New York, 1915. The continuation was: 6. P-K3, P-B4; 7. B-Q3, Q-R4; 8. Q- Kt3.
Capablanca tried 5. … Nf5; against Ed. Lasker in New York, 1915. The continuation was: 6. e3, d5; 7. Bc3, Qh4; 8. Qf3.
The correct move is here 8. Castles. If Black wins the pawn by BxKt; 9. PxB, QPxP; 10. BxP, QxBP, White obtains a strong attack, e.g., 11. R-B1, Q-R4; 12. BxKt, PxB (KtxB; 13. PxP); 13. P-Q5, with this possible continuation l3. … Kt-Kt3, 14. PxP, PxP; 15. Q-Q6, with a strong attack.
The right move is 8. Castles. If Black wins the pawn with BxKt; 9. PxB, QPxP; 10. BxP, QxBP, White gets a strong attack, for example, 11. R-B1, Q-R4; 12. BxKt, PxB (KtxB; 13. PxP); 13. P-Q5, with this possible continuation 13. … Kt-Kt3, 14. PxP, PxP; 15. Q-Q6, leading to a strong attack.
6. P-K3 Castles 7. Q-B2 P-B4
6. P-K3 Castles 7. Q-B2 P-B4
White intends to castle on the Queen’s side, and to follow this up with a storm by the King’s side pawns. Although Rubinstein has on many occasions been successful with this form of attack, it is open to criticism. For, where Kings have castled on different wings, the attack on the King which has castled on the Q side should be more successful.
White plans to castle on the Queen's side and then launch an aggressive attack with the King’s side pawns. While Rubinstein has often succeeded with this strategy, it has its flaws. When Kings have castled on opposite sides, an attack on the King that has castled on the Queen’s side should generally be more effective.
![[Illustration]](images/diag153.jpg)
Diag. 153
Diag. 153
This is much stronger than P-Q Kt3 and B-Kt2, as then the Black Queen cannot participate in the attack quickly enough. As pointed out before, speed is the first consideration for the attack, whenever the Kings have castled on different wings. An interesting counterpart to the present game is found in a game won by Rubinstein from Teichmann (Match, Vienna, 1908) 7. … P- QKt3; 8. PxP, PxP; 9. B-Q3, B-Kt2; 10. Castles QR, P-B4; 11. P- KR4, P-B5? (the only hope lay in the opening of the QB file); 12. B-B5, R-K1; 13. BxKKt, KtxB; 14. P-KKt4, B-Q3; 15. P-Kt5, Kt- K5; 16. P-R5, Q-K2; 17. QR-Kt1, P-QR3; 18. BxPch!, KxB; 19. P- Kt6ch, K-Kt1; 20. KtxKt, PxKt; 21. P-R6, P-B31 22. PxP, PxKt; 23 R-R8ch, KxP; 24. R-R7ch, and Black resigned a few moves later.
This is much stronger than 1. P-Q Kt3 and 2. B-Kt2, since then the Black Queen can't join the attack quickly enough. As mentioned before, speed is the main priority for the attack when the Kings have castled on opposite sides. A notable comparison to this game is found in a match where Rubinstein defeated Teichmann (Match, Vienna, 1908): 7. … P-QKt3; 8. PxP, PxP; 9. B-Q3, B-Kt2; 10. Castles QR, P-B4; 11. P-KR4, P-B5? (the only chance was to open the QB file); 12. B-B5, R-K1; 13. BxKKt, KtxB; 14. P-KKt4, B-Q3; 15. P-Kt5, Kt-K5; 16. P-R5, Q-K2; 17. QR-Kt1, P-QR3; 18. BxPch!, KxB; 19. P-Kt6ch, K-Kt1; 20. KtxKt, PxKt; 21. P-R6, P-B31 22. PxP, PxKt; 23. R-R8ch, KxP; 24. R-R7ch, and Black resigned a few moves later.
8. Castles Q-R4 9. PxQP
8. Castles Q-R4 9. PxQP
White loses time in the centre. It was imperative to proceed at once with P-KKt4 followed by BxKt, P-Kt5 and P-KR4.
White is wasting time in the center. It was essential to immediately play P-KKt4, followed by BxKt, P-Kt5, and P-KR4.
9. … KPxP 10. PxP KtxP 11. Kt-Q4 B-K3 12. K-Kt1
9. … KPxP 10. PxP KtxP 11. Kt-Q4 B-K3 12. K-Kt1
It would be too risky to leave both King and Queen on the QB file.
It would be too risky to leave both the King and Queen on the QB file.
12. … QR-B1 13. B-Q3 P-KR3
The threat was: BxKt and BxPch. Had White played P-KKt4 and P-KR4 instead of effecting exchanges in the centre, Black would not have been able to afford this weakening move. But now Black wins the game on the other wing, before White is able to make use of the weakness thus created.
The threat was: BxKt and BxPch. If White had played P-KKt4 and P-KR4 instead of exchanging pieces in the center, Black wouldn't have been able to make this weakening move. But now Black wins the game on the other side before White can take advantage of the weakness created.
14. BxKt BxB 15. B-B5 KR-Q1 16. BxB PxB 17. Q-Kt6
14. BxKt BxB 15. B-B5 KR-Q1 16. BxB PxB 17. Q-Kt6
The Queen must leave the QB file without delay, as Kt-K5 is threatened. Black’s game is already superior; with the exception of the Queen, White has no piece available for the attack on the opposing King.
The Queen needs to leave the QB file immediately, as Kt-K5 is in danger. Black's position is already stronger; apart from the Queen, White has no pieces left to attack the opposing King.
17. … R-Q3 18. R-QB1 R-R3
Now White must again provide against Black’s Kt-K5, as White’s QKt is needed for the defence of QR2.
Now White must once again prepare for Black’s Knight to King 5, as White’s Queen's Knight is needed to defend Queen’s Rook 2.
19. P-B3 R-Q1
Black intends to move his B and then to advance his KP with an attack on the Queen. The object of the text move is to prevent White from saving himself by an attack on the Rook (Q-B5).
Black plans to move his Bishop and then push his King’s Pawn to launch an attack on the Queen. The aim of this move is to stop White from escaping by attacking the Rook (Q-B5).
20. R-B2 BxKt
20. R-B2 BxKt
By this exchange Black achieves his object of driving off the Knight by P-Q5, but White has time to give his RP further protection by P-QKt3, This, Black would have prevented by playing B-Kt4 instead of the text move, e.g. 21. P-B4, P-K4; 22. Q-B5, PxKt; 23. PxP, B-B3; 24. PxKt, P-Q5, etc.
By this exchange, Black manages to push the Knight away with P-Q5, but White can still reinforce his RP by playing P-QKt3. Black could have stopped this by playing B-Kt4 instead of the move in the text, for example: 21. P-B4, P-K4; 22. Q-B5, PxKt; 23. PxP, B-B3; 24. PxKt, P-Q5, and so on.
21. PxB P-K4 22. Q-Kt4 PxP 23. QxP Kt-K3 24. Q-K5
21. PxB P-K4 22. Q-Kt4 PxP 23. QxP Kt-K3 24. Q-K5
This delays the fatal advance of the QP for one move.
This delays the inevitable move of the QP by one turn.
24. … P-QKt4 25. P-QKt3 P-Q5 26. Kt-K4 P-Q6 27. R-Q2 Kt-Q5 28. R-QB1 Kt-B7 29. Q-Kt2 Kt-R6ch 30. K-R1 Kt-B7ch 31. K-Kt1 Kt-R6ch 32. K-R1 Kt-B7ch 33. K-Kt1
24. … P-QKt4 25. P-QKt3 P-Q5 26. Kt-K4 P-Q6 27. R-Q2 Kt-Q5 28. R-QB1 Kt-B7 29. Q-Kt2 Kt-R6ch 30. K-R1 Kt-B7ch 31. K-Kt1 Kt-R6ch 32. K-R1 Kt-B7ch 33. K-Kt1
![[Illustration]](images/diag154.jpg)
Diag. 154
Diag. 154
Black does not play for a draw, but only wishes to gain time.
Black isn't playing for a draw; they just want to buy some time.
33. … R-QB3
The intention is to double Rooks and to force an entry at B7. P- Kt5 would not be good. The White Rook would no longer be attacked, and the Knight could attack the QP.
The goal is to double the Rooks and break through at B7. P- Kt5 wouldn’t be a good move. The White Rook wouldn't be under attack anymore, and the Knight could go after the QP.
34. R(B1)-Q1 KR-QB1
Now that the White Rook has left the QB file, one Rook would be sufficient to force an entry at B7, and Kt-R6ch followed by P-Kt5 could have been played at once, e.g. 34. … Kt-R6ch; 35. K-R1, P-Kt5 (preventing P-QKt4); 36. Kt-B2,R-B7; 37. RxR, PxR; 38. R- QB1, Q-Kt3; 39. Kt-K4, R-Q8 followed by RxRch, Q-Q5ch and P-B8 mate.
Now that the White Rook has left the QB file, one Rook would be enough to get into B7, and Kt-R6ch followed by P-Kt5 could have been played immediately, for example, 34. … Kt-R6ch; 35. K-R1, P-Kt5 (blocking P-QKt4); 36. Kt-B2, R-B7; 37. RxR, PxR; 38. R-QB1, Q-Kt3; 39. Kt-K4, R-Q8 followed by RxRch, Q-Q5ch, and P-B8 mate.
35. RxP Kt-R6ch 36. K-R1 P-Kt5 37. R-Q7 Q-K4!!
35. RxP Kt-R6ch 36. K-R1 P-Kt5 37. R-Q7 Q-K4!!
If QxQ, Black mates in three.
If QxQ, Black wins in three moves.
38. R-Q8ch RxR 39. RxRch K-R2 40. R-Q1 QxQch
38. R-Q8ch RxR 39. RxRch K-R2 40. R-Q1 QxQch
Curiously enough there is nothing better. Q-B2 only leads to the exchange of Queens and the same end-game, which, however, is an easy win for Black, as the permanent mating threat keeps the White Rook tied to the first rank, whilst the Black King threatens to capture all the White pawns.
Curiously enough, there’s nothing better. Q-B2 just leads to the exchange of Queens and the same endgame, which, however, is an easy win for Black, as the constant mating threat keeps the White Rook stuck on the first rank, while the Black King threatens to take all the White pawns.
If Q-B2 White forces the exchange of Queens with the following combination: 41. Q-Q2, R-B7; 42. Q-Q3, R-B8ch; 43. K-Kt2, with a threat of Kt-B6ch and Q-R7 mate. Black therefore would have to play Q-B7ch, etc., as in the game.
If Q-B2 White forces the exchange of Queens with the following moves: 41. Q-Q2, R-B7; 42. Q-Q3, R-B8ch; 43. K-Kt2, threatening Kt-B6ch and Q-R7 mate. Black would then have to respond with Q-B7ch, etc., as in the game.
41. KxQ R-B7ch 42. K-R1 RxP 43. R-R1 P-Kt4 44. Kt-B6ch K-Kt2 45. Kt-K4 K-Kt3 46. Kt-Q6 P-QR4
41. KxQ R-B7ch 42. K-R1 RxP 43. R-R1 P-Kt4 44. Kt-B6ch K-Kt2 45. Kt-K4 K-Kt3 46. Kt-Q6 P-QR4
We have now a position with a forced move. If the White Knight moves, there follows K-B4-B5, etc. Therefore White gives up his R P voluntarily.
We now have a situation with a forced move. If the White Knight moves, it leads to K-B4-B5, etc. So, White voluntarily gives up his R P.
47. R-QB1 RxP 48. Kt-B4 Kt-Kt4
47. R-QB1 RxP 48. Kt-B4 Kt-Kt4
Now Kt-B6 and RxP mate are threatened.
Now Kt-B6 and RxP mate are at risk.
49. Kt-K5ch K-Kt2 50. Kt-Kt4 R-K7 51. R-B5 R-K8ch 52. K-Kt2 Kt-R6 53. R-B7ch K-B1 54. R-B1 R-K7ch 55. K-R1 Kt-B7ch 56. K-Kt1 Kt-R6ch
49. Knight to King 5 check King to Knight 2 50. Knight to Knight 4 Rook to King 7 51. Rook to Bishop 5 Rook to King 8 check 52. King to Knight 2 Knight to Rook 6 53. Rook to Bishop 7 check King to Bishop 1 54. Rook to Bishop 1 Rook to King 7 check 55. King to Rook 1 Knight to Bishop 7 check 56. King to Knight 1 Knight to Rook 6 check
Black again appears to be short of time.
Black seems to be running out of time again.
57. K-R1 Kt-Kt4 58. R-B5 R-K8ch 59. K-Kt2 Kt-R6 60. R-B1 R-K7ch
57. K-R1 Kt-Kt4 58. R-B5 R-K8ch 59. K-Kt2 Kt-R6 60. R-B1 R-K7ch
Now, after the sixtieth move Black has again plenty of time, and can prepare the final combination at leisure.
Now, after the sixtieth move, Black has plenty of time again and can prepare the final combination at their own pace.
61. K-R1 R-K3 62. R-R1 K-Kt2 63. R-QB1 K-Kt3 64. R-B6 RxR 65. Kt-K5ch K-B4 66. KtxR P-R4 67. Kt-Q4ch K-K4 68. Kt-K2 Kt-B7ch 69. K-Kt2 Kt-Q5 Resigns.
61. K-R1 R-K3 62. R-R1 K-Kt2 63. R-QB1 K-Kt3 64. R-B6 RxR 65. Kt-K5ch K-B4 66. KtxR P-R4 67. Kt-Q4ch K-K4 68. Kt-K2 Kt-B7ch 69. K-Kt2 Kt-Q5 Resigns.
GAME No. 39
White: Rotlewi. Black: Rubinstein
White: Rotlewi. Black: Rubinstein
Queen’s Gambit Declined.
Queen’s Gambit Declined.
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. Kt-KB3 P-K3 3. P-K3 P-QB4 4. P-B4 Kt-QB3 5. Kt-B3 Kt-B3 6. QPxP BxP 7. P-QR3 P-QR3 8. P-QKt4 B-Q3 9. B-Kt2 Castles
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. N-KB3 P-K3 3. P-K3 P-QB4 4. P-B4 N-QB3 5. N-B3 N-B3 6. QxP BxP 7. P-QR3 P-QR3 8. P-QN4 B-Q3 9. B-N2 Castles
![[Illustration]](images/diag155.jpg)
Diag. 155
Diag. 155
10. Q-Q2
White cannot win the QP by 10. PxP, PxP; 11. KtxP, KtxKt; 12. QxKt, because BxPch wins the Queen. The text move is played with the intention of bringing up the QR for the attack on the QP. However, it would have been more correct to fix the object of attack first by PxP, as Black could now cross White’s intentions by playing PxP, after which he would sooner or later gain a move by occupying the Q file with a Rook, and forcing the White Queen to retreat.
White cannot win the QP by 10. PxP, PxP; 11. KtxP, KtxKt; 12. QxKt, because BxPch wins the Queen. The current move is made with the goal of bringing up the QR to attack the QP. However, it would have been better to establish the target of the attack first by playing PxP, as Black could now thwart White’s plans by playing PxP. After that, Black would eventually gain a move by taking control of the Q file with a Rook, forcing the White Queen to retreat.
10. … Q-K2!
Black offers to give up his Queen’s Pawn. If White accepts the sacrifice, Black’s attack on the Queen’s file will become deadly, as White must lose a move in bringing his Queen out of the line of action of the hostile Rook. The White King has then no time to get into safety, e.g. 11. PxP, PxP; 12. KtxP, KtxKt; 13. QxKt, R- Q1; 14. Q-Kt3, B-K3 followed by KtxP, etc.
Black offers to give up his Queen’s Pawn. If White accepts the sacrifice, Black’s attack on the Queen’s file will become unstoppable, as White needs to waste a move getting his Queen out of the way of the opposing Rook. The White King then has no time to escape, for example: 11. PxP, PxP; 12. KtxP, KtxKt; 13. QxKt, R-Q1; 14. Q-Kt3, B-K3 followed by KtxP, and so on.
11. B-Q3?
Here again PxP (followed by B-K2, R-Q1, Castles) would have avoided the loss of a move, as indicated in my note to move 10. Now White loses yet another move, as Black exchanges pawns and the Bishop has taken two moves to reach B4, as against one only in the case of the Black KB. The loss of two moves in the opening stages should be fatal, and of this Rubinstein gives a striking example in the present game.
Here again, PxP (followed by B-K2, R-Q1, Castles) would have prevented the loss of a move, as noted in my comment on move 10. Now White loses yet another move, since Black exchanges pawns and the Bishop has taken two moves to reach B4, compared to just one for the Black KB. Losing two moves in the opening stages should be critical, and Rubinstein provides a striking example of this in the current game.
11. … PxP 12. BxP P-QKt4 13. B-Q3 R-Q1 14. Q-K2 B-Kt2 15. Castles KR Kt-K4
11. … PxP 12. BxP P-QKt4 13. B-Q3 R-Q1 14. Q-K2 B-Kt2 15. Castles KR Kt-K4
The advantage which Black obtains by his last move is generally gained by White in this opening (compare Diag. 36). But in the game White has lost two moves and Black has assumed the offensive, having moreover a Rook acting on the Q file.
The advantage that Black gains with his last move is usually achieved by White in this opening (see Diag. 36). However, in this game, White has lost two moves, and Black has taken the offensive, plus he has a Rook operating on the Q file.
16. KtxKt BxKt 17. P-B4
16. KtxKt BxKt 17. P-B4
Black’s threat was: BxPch followed by Q-Q3ch and QxB. If White replies: 17. KR-Q1 the answer is Q-B2 attacking both the RP and the Kt. The text move is unsatisfactory, as it will be necessary to advance the KP to K4 or K5, where it will block the diagonal of one of the Bishops.
Black's threat was: BxPch followed by Q-Q3ch and QxB. If White responds with 17. KR-Q1, the reply is Q-B2, attacking both the RP and the Kt. The current move isn’t ideal, as it will be necessary to move the KP to K4 or K5, which will block the diagonal of one of the Bishops.
17. … B-B2 18. P-K4 QR-B1 19. P-K5 B-Kt3ch 20. K-R1 Kt-Kt5!!
17. … B-B2 18. P-K4 QR-B1 19. P-K5 B-Kt3ch 20. K-R1 Kt-Kt5!!
![[Illustration]](images/diag156.jpg)
Diag. 156
Diag. 156
The beginning of magnificent sacrifices. 21. QxKt cannot be played because of RxB and R-Q7, etc.
The start of amazing sacrifices. 21. QxKt can’t be played because of RxB and R-Q7, etc.
21. B-K4 Q-R5 22. P-Kt3
21. B-K4 Q-R5 22. P-Kt3
After P-R3 Black wins also in fine style: RxKt!!; 23. QxKt, QxQ; 24. PxQ, BxB; 25. BxR, R-Q6 threatening R-R 6 mate; or, 23. BxR, BxB; 24. QxB, Q-Kt6; 25. PxKt, Q-R5 mate.
After P-R3 Black wins in style too: RxKt!!; 23. QxKt, QxQ; 24. PxQ, BxB; 25. BxR, R-Q6 threatening R-R6 mate; or, 23. BxR, BxB; 24. QxB, Q-Kt6; 25. PxKt, Q-R5 mate.
22. … RxKt!! 23. PxQ R-Q7!! 24. QxR BxBch 25. Q-Kt2 R-R6
22. … RxKt!! 23. PxQ R-Q7!! 24. QxR BxBch 25. Q-Kt2 R-R6
and mate at R7.
and friend at R7.
GAME No. 40
White: Rubinstein. Black: Capablanca.
White: Rubinstein. Black: Capablanca.
Queen’s Gambit Declined.
Queen's Gambit Declined.
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. Kt-KB3 P-QB4 3. P-B4 P-K3 4. PxQP KPxP 5. Kt-B3 Kt-QB3 6. P-KKt3 B-K3 7. B-Kt2 B-K2 8. Castles R-B1
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. Kt-KB3 P-QB4 3. P-B4 P-K3 4. PxQP KPxP 5. Kt-B3 Kt-QB3 6. P-KKt3 B-K3 7. B-Kt2 B-K2 8. Castles R-B1
This move is not satisfactory at this juncture. It rather helps a combination which is frequently resorted to in similar positions, namely, the exchange of the Black QB and subsequent pressure on the KP by the White KB on the diagonal KR3-QB8. 8. … Kt-B3 should have been played, after
This move is not satisfactory right now. It actually supports a strategy that is often used in similar situations, which is the exchange of the Black QB and the subsequent pressure on the KP by the White KB on the diagonal KR3-QB8. 8. … Kt-B3 should have been played, after
![[Illustration]](images/diag157.jpg)
Diag. 157
Diag. 157
which White could hardly be said to possess any advantage, e.g. 9. B-Kt5, Kt-K5, or 9. B-K3, Kt-KKt5, or 9. P-QR3, or 9. PxP, BxP; 10. B-Kt5, B-K2. After 9. PxP, however, it would be weak to recapture with the Queen. In a game E. Cohn-Ed. Lasker (match 1909) there followed: 9. … Q-R4; 10. Kt-KKt5, QxP; 11. B-K3, Q- R4; 12. Q-Kt3, after which Black had to give up a pawn already: Castles QR; 13. KtxB, PxKt; 14. B-R3, etc.
which White could hardly be said to have any advantage, e.g. 9. B-Kt5, Kt-K5, or 9. B-K3, Kt-KKt5, or 9. P-QR3, or 9. PxP, BxP; 10. B-Kt5, B-K2. After 9. PxP, however, it would be weak to recapture with the Queen. In a game E. Cohn-Ed. Lasker (match 1909) the following moves occurred: 9. … Q-R4; 10. Kt-KKt5, QxP; 11. B-K3, Q- R4; 12. Q-Kt3, after which Black had to give up a pawn already: Castles QR; 13. KtxB, PxKt; 14. B-R3, etc.
9. PxP BxP 10. Kt-KKt5 Kt-B3 11. KtxB PxKt 12. B-R3 Q-K2 13. B-Kt5
9. PxP BxP 10. Kt-KKt5 Kt-B3 11. KtxB PxKt 12. B-R3 Q-K2 13. B-Kt5
P-K4 is stronger here, in order to play B-Kt5 after PxP. l3. … P-Q5 would then be refuted by Kt-Q5.
P-K4 is stronger here, so that I can play B-Kt5 after PxP. l3. … P-Q5 would then be countered by Kt-Q5.
13. … Castles
14. BxKt QxB
13. … Castles
14. BxKt QxB
After this White gains a pawn by a complicated and well-timed combination. Capablanca did not consider the subtle reply on Rubinstein’s seventeenth move. Otherwise he would have recaptured with the pawn. However, in that case too, White’s chances are good in the end-game which ensues after: 15. KtxP, PxKt; 16. QxPch, K-R1; 17. BxR. The Rooks would soon become effective in view of the open K side.
After this, White grabs a pawn with a tricky and well-timed combination. Capablanca overlooked the clever response on Rubinstein’s seventeenth move. If he had seen it, he would have taken back with the pawn. Still, even in that scenario, White's prospects look strong in the endgame that follows: 15. KtxP, PxKt; 16. QxPch, K-R1; 17. BxR. The Rooks would quickly become powerful given the open King's side.
15. KtxP Q-R3
15. KtxP Q-R3
BxPch fails because of 16. K-Kt2, Q-B2; 17. Kt-B4!
BxPch fails because of 16. K-Kt2, Q-B2; 17. Kt-B4!
16. K-Kt2 QR-Q1 17. Q-B1
16. K-Kt2 QR-Q1 17. Q-B1
![[Illustration]](images/diag158.jpg)
Diag. 158
Diag. 158
17. … PxKt
17. … PxKt
If RxKt, White exchanges Queens and plays BxPch.
If RxKt, White swaps Queens and plays BxPch.
18. QxB Q-Q7 19. Q-Kt5 Kt-Q5 20. Q-Q3
18. QxB Q-Q7 19. Q-Kt5 Kt-Q5 20. Q-Q3
With an extra pawn White forces the exchange of Queens. Black cannot prevent it, as 20. … QxKtP loses the Knight on account of 21. KR-Kt1, and 20. … Q-Kt5 loses the QP by 21. KR-Q1 and B- K6ch.
With an extra pawn, White forces the Queens to be exchanged. Black can't stop it because 20. ... QxKtP loses the Knight due to 21. KR-Kt1, and 20. ... Q-Kt5 loses the QP after 21. KR-Q1 and B-K6ch.
20. … QxQ 21. PxQ KR-K1 22. B-Kt4
20. … QxQ 21. PxQ KR-K1 22. B-Kt4
KR-K1 would not prevent the entry of the Black Rook: Kt-B7; 23. RxRch, RxR; 24. R-QB1, R-K7; 25. B-Kt4, R-Q7. Black would win the pawn back and might even succeed in the end-game with a Knight against a Bishop.
KR-K1 wouldn't stop the Black Rook from entering: Kt-B7; 23. RxRch, RxR; 24. R-QB1, R-K7; 25. B-Kt4, R-Q7. Black would reclaim the pawn and might even win the end-game with a Knight against a Bishop.
22. … R-Q3 23. KR-K1 RxR 24. RxR R-QKt3
22. … R-Q3 23. KR-K1 RxR 24. RxR R-QKt3
Black should first play his King to KB3, and keep the Rook away from his K5. Not that the QP is of paramount importance; the QKtP fully makes up for its loss. But as played the Knight is driven from his dominating position, and the badly placed Bishop gets into play. No doubt even after the text move the ending is most difficult, and it requires Rubinstein’s full powers to bring it to a successful issue.
Black should first move his King to KB3 and keep the Rook away from K5. The QP isn't the most important piece; losing it is fully compensated by the QKtP. However, moving like this forces the Knight out of its strong position and allows the poorly positioned Bishop to become active. Even after this move, the endgame is still very challenging, and it takes Rubinstein's full skills to navigate it successfully.
25. R-K5 RxP 26. RxP Kt-B3 27. B-K6ch K-B1 28. R-B5ch K-K1 29. B-B7ch K-Q2 30. B-B4 P-QR3
25. R-K5 RxP 26. RxP Kt-B3 27. B-K6ch K-B1 28. R-B5ch K-K1 29. B-B7ch K-Q2 30. B-B4 P-QR3
Black’s only chance is his extra pawn on the Q side. To exchange the Kt for the B by 30. … K-Q3; 31. R-B 7, Kt-K4; 32. RxKKtP, KtxB would take too much time where time is all-important. White would clear the K side in the meantime, push on his KRP, and ultimately give up his R for Black’s remaining P, as soon as the latter runs into Queen, after which the three passed pawns win easily against the Rook. Generally speaking it is wise, in R endings like the present one, to advance pawns on the side where there is an extra pawn, in order to get a passed pawn as soon as possible. Then the hostile Rook has to look after that pawn lest it should queen, and the greater mobility of one’s own Rook often saves the game even when opposed by a preponderance of pawns.
Black’s only chance is his extra pawn on the queenside. To trade the knight for the bishop with 30. … K-Q3; 31. R-B7, Kt-K4; 32. RxKKtP, KtxB would take too long, and time is crucial. In the meantime, White would clear the kingside, advance his kingside pawn, and eventually trade his rook for Black’s remaining pawn once it gets close to promoting, after which the three passed pawns would easily win against the rook. Generally, it’s smart in rook endings like this one to push pawns on the side where you have an extra pawn to create a passed pawn as soon as possible. Then, the opposing rook has to pay attention to that pawn so it doesn't promote, and the increased mobility of your own rook often saves the game even if you’re up against a lot of pawns.
31. R-B7ch K-Q3 32. RxKKtP P-Kt4 33. B-Kt8 P-QR4 34. RxP P-R5 35. P-R4 P-Kt5 36. R-R6ch K-B4 37. R-R5ch K-Kt3 38. B-Q5 P-Kt6
31. R-B7ch K-Q3 32. RxKKtP P-Kt4 33. B-Kt8 P-QR4 34. RxP P-R5 35. P-R4 P-Kt5 36. R-R6ch K-B4 37. R-R5ch K-Kt3 38. B-Q5 P-Kt6
RxP is tempting but unavailing, as White plays B-B4 followed by R-Kt5ch and P-R5-6, etc. After the text move White has a problem- like continuation, which he has worked out with great accuracy.
RxP is tempting but doesn’t lead to anything, as White plays B-B4 followed by R-Kt5ch and P-R5-6, etc. After the last move, White has a challenging continuation that he has figured out with great precision.
39. PxP P-R6 40. BxKt
39. PxP P-R6 40. BxKt
If now P-R7, White simply plays 41. R-Kt5ch, K-R3; 42. R-Kt8-R8.
If now P-R7, White simply plays 41. R-Kt5ch, K-R3; 42. R-Kt8-R8.
40. … RxKtP 41. B-Q5 P-R7 42. R-R6ch Resigns.
40. … RxKtP 41. B-Q5 P-R7 42. R-R6ch Resigns.
As the R holds the RP, e.g. K-R4; 43. B-B4 followed by R-R6ch or 42. … K-R2; 43. R-R8, etc.
As the R holds the RP, e.g. K-R4; 43. B-B4 followed by R-R6ch or 42. … K-R2; 43. R-R8, etc.
GAME No. 41
White: Niemzowitsch. Black: Tarrasch.
White: Niemzowitsch. Black: Tarrasch.
Queen’s Gambit Declined.
Queen's Gambit Declined.
1. P-Q4 P-Q4
2. Kt-KB3 P-QB4
3. P-B4 P-K3
4. P-K3 Kt-KB3
5. B-Q3 Kt-B3
6. Castles B-Q3
7. P-QKt3 Castles
8. B-Kt2 P-QKt3
9. QKt-Q2 B-Kt2
10. R-B1 Q-K2
11. PxQP
1. P-Q4 P-Q4
2. N-KB3 P-QB4
3. P-B4 P-K3
4. P-K3 N-KB3
5. B-Q3 N-B3
6. Castles B-Q3
7. P-QN3 Castles
8. B-KN2 P-QN3
9. N-Q2 B-N2
10. R-B1 Q-K2
11. PxQP
The most natural move to which the development of the QKt at Q2 instead of B3 would seem to lead is Kt-K5 followed by P-B4. After 11. Kt-K5 Black could not yet attempt 11. … PxQP; 12. KPxP, B- R6, weakening the QP, because of 13. BxB, QxB; 14. PxP, KtxKt; 15. PxKt, KtxP; 16. Kt-B4 and Kt-Q6.
The most logical move resulting from the development of the knight at Q2 instead of B3 seems to be moving the knight to K5 followed by pushing the pawn to B4. After 11. Knight to K5, Black couldn't try 11. ... Pawn takes Queen's Pawn; 12. Queen's Pawn takes Pawn, Bishop to R6, which weakens the Queen's Pawn, because of 13. Bishop takes Bishop, Queen takes Bishop; 14. Pawn takes Pawn, Knight takes Knight; 15. Pawn takes Knight, Knight takes Pawn; 16. Knight to B4 and Knight to Q6.
11. … KPxP 12. Kt-R4
11. … KPxP 12. Kt-R4
In order to provoke Black’s weakening move: P-Kt3, which might give White chances of attack on the long diagonal QR1-KR8, White gives up two clear moves. Black is able to get considerably ahead in his development, much to White’s disadvantage.
To provoke Black’s weak move: P-Kt3, which might give White a chance to attack along the long diagonal QR1-KR8, White sacrifices two clear moves. As a result, Black can significantly advance in development, putting White at a disadvantage.
12. … P-Kt3
13. KKt-B3 QR-Q sq
12. … P-Kt3
13. KKt-B3 QR-Q sq
Not Kt-K5 yet, on account of 14. PxP, PxP?; 15. BxKt, PxB; 16. KtxP.
Not Kt-K5 yet, because of 14. PxP, PxP?; 15. BxKt, PxB; 16. KtxP.
14. PxP
14. PxP
White’s position is uncomfortable, and a satisfactory continuation is hard to find. Possibly passive resistance might have been the best plan, thus: Q-K2, KR-Q1, Kt-B1-Kt3. The text move is a preliminary to operations on the Queen’s side, but allows Black too much scope in the centre.
White’s situation is tough, and it's challenging to find a decent way to continue. Maybe playing defensively would have been the better strategy, like: Q-K2, KR-Q1, Kt-B1-Kt3. The move described is a setup for action on the Queen’s side but gives Black too much freedom in the center.
14. … PxP 15. B-Kt5
14. … PxP 15. B-K5
White wishes to get rid of the Black Knight which supports the advance of P-Q5.
White wants to eliminate the Black Knight that backs the move of P-Q5.
15. … Kt-K5 16. BxKt BxB 17. Q-B2
15. … Kt-K5 16. BxKt BxB 17. Q-B2
White has no idea of the threatened disaster, or he would have played P-KKt3. Even then, however, Black has the better game with two Bishops, and the Q and Kt better placed.
White has no clue about the looming disaster, or he would have played P-KKt3. Even so, Black still has the advantage with two Bishops, and the Queen and Knight are positioned better.
17. … KtxKt
17. … KtxKt
The beginning of a brilliant mating combination.
The start of an amazing pairing.
18. KtxKt P-Q5!
18. KtxKt P-Q5!
Black would have played the same move if White had retaken with the Queen.
Black would have made the same move if White had taken back with the Queen.
19. PxP
19. PxP
P-K4 was comparatively the best move, although Black’s attack would have become overwhelming after P-B4, e.g. 20. P-B3, B-B5, etc.
P-K4 was the best move overall, even though Black’s attack would have become too strong after P-B4, for example, 20. P-B3, B-B5, etc.
![[Illustration]](images/diag159.jpg)
Diag. 159
Diag. 159
19. … BxPch!! 20. KxB Q-R5ch 21. K-Kt1 BxP!
19. … BxPch!! 20. KxB Q-R5ch 21. K-Kt1 BxP!
Emanuel Lasker won a celebrated game from Bauer (Amsterdam, 1889) with a similar sacrifice of two Bishops, and very likely this is the reason why Tarrasch’s beautiful game only earned him the second brilliancy prize at Petrograd (1914).
Emanuel Lasker won a famous game against Bauer (Amsterdam, 1889) with a similar sacrifice of two bishops, and this is probably why Tarrasch’s stunning game only got him the second brilliancy prize at Petrograd (1914).
22. P-B3
If KxB, then Q-Kt5ch; 23. K-R1, R-Q4; 24. QxP, R-R4ch; 25. QxR, QxQch; 26. K-Kt2, Q-Kt4ch and QxKt.
If KxB, then Q-Kt5ch; 23. K-R1, R-Q4; 24. QxP, R-R4ch; 25. QxR, QxQch; 26. K-Kt2, Q-Kt4ch and QxKt.
22. … KR-K1
Not Q-Kt6, because of Kt-K4.
Not Q-Kt6, because of Kt-K4.
23. Kt-K4 Q-R8ch 24. K-B2 BxR 25. P-Q5 P-B4 26. Q-B3 Q-Kt7ch 27. K-K3 RxKtch! 28. PxR P-B5ch
23. Kt-K4 Q-R8ch 24. K-B2 BxR 25. P-Q5 P-B4 26. Q-B3 Q-Kt7ch 27. K-K3 RxKtch! 28. PxR P-B5ch
With Q-Kt6ch Black mates two moves earlier.
With Q-Kt6ch, Black checkmates two moves earlier.
29. KxP R-B1ch
30. K-K5 Q-R7ch
31. K-K6 R-K1ch
Resigns.
29. KxP R-B1ch
30. K-K5 Q-R7ch
31. K-K6 R-K1ch
Resigns.
If K-Q7, B-Kt4 mate, if K-B6, Q-R5 mate.
If K-Q7, B-Kt4 is checkmate; if K-B6, Q-R5 is checkmate.
[FOOTNOTE: Emanuel Lasker-Bauer: 1. P-KB4, P-Q4; 2. P-K3, Kt-KB3; 3. P-QKt3, P-K3; 4. B-Kt2, B-K2; 5. B-Q3, P-QKt3; 6. Kt-QB3, B- Kt2; 7. Kt-B3, QKt-Q2; 8. Castles, Castles; 9. Kt-K2, P-B4; 10. Kt-Kt3, Q-B2; 11. Kt-K5, KtxKt; 12. BxKt, Q-B3; 13. Q-K2, P-QR3; 14. Kt-R5, KtxKt; 15. BxPch!!, KxB; 16. QxKtch, K-Kt1; 17. BxP!, KxB; 18. Q-Kt4ch, K-R2; 19. R-B3, P-K4; 20. R-R3ch, Q-R3; 21. RxQ, KxR; 22. Q-Q7, and White won.]
[FOOTNOTE: Emanuel Lasker-Bauer: 1. P-KB4, P-Q4; 2. P-K3, N-KB3; 3. P-QN3, P-K3; 4. B-KN2, B-K2; 5. B-Q3, P-QN3; 6. N-QB3, B-N2; 7. N-B3, QN-Q2; 8. Castles, Castles; 9. N-K2, P-B4; 10. N-N3, Q-B2; 11. N-K5, NxN; 12. BxN, Q-B3; 13. Q-K2, P-QR3; 14. N-R5, NxN; 15. BxP!!, KxB; 16. QxNch, K-KN1; 17. BxP!, KxB; 18. Q-KN4ch, K-R2; 19. R-B3, P-K4; 20. R-R3ch, Q-R3; 21. RxQ, KxR; 22. Q-Q7, and White won.]
GAME No. 42
White: Capablanca. Black: Aljechin.
White: Capablanca. Black: Alekhine.
Queen’s Gambit Declined (see pp. 57 and 58).
Queen's Gambit Declined (see pp. 57 and 58).
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. P-QB4 P-QB3 3. P-K3 Kt-B3 4. Kt-KB3 P-K3 5. QKt-Q2 QKt-Q2 6. B-Q3 B-K2 7. Castles Castles 8. Q-B2
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. P-QB4 P-QB3 3. P-K3 N-B3 4. N-KB3 P-K3 5. QN-Q2 QN-Q2 6. B-Q3 B-K2 7. Castles Castles 8. Q-B2
![[Illustration]](images/diag160.jpg)
Diag. 160
Diag. 160
Black’s difficulty is the development of his QB, particularly after White’s last move, which prevents P-K4. If now Q-B2 White plays 9. P-K4 and either the Queen or the Knight bear on K5, e.g. 9. … PxKP; 10. KtxP, P-K4; 11. QKt-Kt5, B-Q3; 12. P-B5, etc.
Black’s challenge is building up his position, especially after White’s last move, which stops P-K4. If White plays 9. P-K4 now, the Queen or Knight will target K5, for example 9. ... PxKP; 10. KtxP, P-K4; 11. QKt-Kt5, B-Q3; 12. P-B5, and so on.
Black therefore must develop his QB at Kt2 with P-QKt3, B-Kt2 and P-B4. Having moved the QBP twice, Black is a move behind the development usual in this opening. However, it would have been the lesser evil. In the present game the Bishop does not get into play in time.
Black must develop his knight at Kt2 with P-QKt3, B-Kt2, and P-B4. After moving the queen's pawn twice, Black is lagging behind the typical development in this opening. Still, it would have been the better option. In this game, the bishop fails to come into play in time.
8. … PxP
9. KtxP P-B4
10. QKt-K5 PxP
11. PxP Kt-Kt3
12. Kt-Kt5
8. … PxP
9. KtxP P-B4
10. QKt-K5 PxP
11. PxP Kt-Kt3
12. Kt-Kt5
If Black captures the pawn, White gains time by threatening the Queen, and brings all his forces into play, whilst the Black Queen’s side remains undeveloped, e.g.: 12. … QxP; 13. R-Q1, Q-B4; 14. Kt-Kt4, P-Kt3; 15. B-K3, Q-R4; 16. R-B1, with a strong attack. Black of course need not take the pawn, but the move in the text is a valuable one nevertheless, as the threat Q-B3-R3 provokes a weakening pawn move.
If Black takes the pawn, White buys time by threatening the Queen and brings all his pieces into action, while the Black side remains undeveloped, like this: 12. … QxP; 13. R-Q1, Q-B4; 14. Kt-Kt4, P-Kt3; 15. B-K3, Q-R4; 16. R-B1, leading to a strong attack. Of course, Black doesn’t have to take the pawn, but the move in the text is still a valuable one, as the threat Q-B3-R3 forces a weakening pawn move.
12. … P-Kt3 13. KKt-B3 K-Kt2
12. … P-Kt3 13. KKt-B3 K-Kt2
preventing the entry of the B at R6.
preventing the entry of the B at R6.
14. B-KKt5 QKt-Q4 15. QR-B1 B-Q2 16. Q-Q2 Kt-Kt1
14. B-KKt5 QKt-Q4 15. QR-B1 B-Q2 16. Q-Q2 Kt-Kt1
It should be noted how the weakness at KR3 acts to the detriment of Black’s game. The text move covers the weak square, but at the same time brings the Kt out of play. White in consequence gets the upper-hand on the Queen’s side, and the Knight cannot return in time.
It’s important to point out how the weakness at KR3 negatively impacts Black’s game. The move protects the weak square but also takes the Knight out of action. As a result, White gains the advantage on the Queen’s side, and the Knight can’t come back in time.
17. BxB QxB
17. BxB QxB
It would be no use taking with the KKt, as the threat Kt-Kt4 and Q-R6 must be guarded against. If the other Kt captures there follows: 18. B-K4, R-Kt1; 19. R-B3 and KR-B1.
It would be pointless to engage with the Knight on the K-side, since we need to be cautious of the threat from the Kt-Kt4 and Q-R6. If the other Knight captures, the sequence would be: 18. B-K4, R-Kt1; 19. R-B3 and KR-B1.
18. B-K4 B-Kt4
18. B-K4 B-Kt4
This drives the Rook to a better square, but already now there is no satisfactory move. It would perhaps have been best to parry the threat of BxKt and R-B7 by playing Q-Q3, although the pawn would have to recapture after 19. BxKt, because of 20. R-B5 and KR-B1. The chance of bearing on the QP through the open file, which was probably Black’s intention all along, would then be lost. After the text move, however, White takes possession of the seventh rank, and Black’s game collapses quickly.
This pushes the Rook to a better position, but already there’s no good move left. It might have been smarter to counter the threat of BxKt and R-B7 by playing Q-Q3, although the pawn would have to recapture after 19. BxKt because of 20. R-B5 and KR-B1. The opportunity to target the QP through the open file, which was probably Black’s plan all along, would then be gone. After the current move, though, White gains control of the seventh rank, and Black’s position falls apart quickly.
19. KR-K1 Q-Q3 20. BxKt PxB 21. Q-R5 P-QR3 22. Q-B7 QxQ 23. RxQ P-R3
19. KR-K1 Q-Q3 20. BxKt PxB 21. Q-R5 P-QR3 22. Q-B7 QxQ 23. RxQ P-R3
Kt-Kt5 and Kt-K6ch was threatened.
Kt-Kt5 and Kt-K6ch were threatened.
24. RxP QR-B1 25. P-QKt3 R-B7 26. P-QR4 B-K7 27. Kt-R4! P-KR4
24. RxP QR-B1 25. P-QKt3 R-B7 26. P-QR4 B-K7 27. Kt-R4! P-KR4
The KtP cannot be saved.
The KtP can't be saved.
28. KKtxP R-K1 29. RxPch Resigns.
28. KKtxP R-K1 29. RxPch Resigns.
GAME No. 43
White: Capablanca. Black: Bernstein.
White: Capablanca. Black: Bernstein.
Queen’s Gambit Declined.
Queen's Gambit Declined.
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-KB3 3. P-B4 P-K3 4. Kt-B3 QKt-Q2 5. B-Kt5 B-K2 6. P-K3 P-B3 7. B-Q3 PxP
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. Kt-KB3 Kt-KB3 3. P-B4 P-K3 4. Kt-B3 QKt-Q2 5. B-Kt5 B-K2 6. P-K3 P-B3 7. B-Q3 PxP
Before initiating this manœuvre, which aims at the development of the Queen’s wing, Black should castle, as otherwise the King is exposed to dangerous and immediate attacks in the centre.
Before starting this move to develop the Queen’s wing, Black should castle; otherwise, the King is at risk of dangerous and immediate attacks in the center.
8. BxBP P-Kt4 9. B-Q3 P-QR3
8. BxBP P-Kt4 9. B-Q3 P-QR3
The system of opening chosen by Black has been tried frequently of late. It seems to be somewhat artificial, as the QB Pawn takes two moves to get to his fourth. On the other hand the pawn formation at QR3, QKt4, and QB4 is attained, whilst it can be prevented in other variations, e.g. 6. … Castles; 7. B-Q3, PxP; 8. BxP, P-QR3; 9 P-QR4.
The opening system chosen by Black has been used quite a bit recently. It feels a bit forced since the QB pawn takes two moves to reach its fourth square. On the flip side, the pawn formation at QR3, QKt4, and QB4 is established, although it can be blocked in other variations, such as 6. … Castles; 7. B-Q3, PxP; 8. BxP, P-QR3; 9. P-QR4.
10. P-K4 P-K4
![[Illustration]](images/diag161.jpg)
Diag. 161
Diag. 161
Black’s only plausible move here seems to be P-B4, and many critics have remarked that after 11. P-K5, PxP!; 12. Kt-K4 (if PxKt, PxKt) KtxKt; 13. BxKt, R-QKt1; 14. BxB, QxB; 15. QxP, Q-B4; the game would have been even. However, this is not the case, for on the 15th move White does not capture the pawn with the Q but with the Kt and Black has no satisfactory continuation. If he had castled he could play l5. … B-Kt2 which now is not available because of: 16. Kt-B6, BxKt; 17. BxB, with an overwhelming advantage in position for White. White’s refutation of the text move is above criticism.
Black's only reasonable move here seems to be P-B4, and many critics have pointed out that after 11. P-K5, PxP!; 12. Kt-K4 (if PxKt, PxKt) KtxKt; 13. BxKt, R-QKt1; 14. BxB, QxB; 15. QxP, Q-B4; the game would have been even. However, that's not true because on the 15th move, White doesn't capture the pawn with the Q but with the Kt, and Black has no good follow-up. If he had castled, he could play 15. … B-Kt2, which is not an option now because of: 16. Kt-B6, BxKt; 17. BxB, giving White a dominating advantage in position. White's response to the text move is above criticism.
11. PxP Kt-Kt5 12. B-KB4 B-B4
11. PxP Kt-Kt5 12. B-KB4 B-B4
If Q-B2, White would play R-B1, after which Black could not recapture the KP yet, as the QBP is en prise. 13. … KKtxP; 14. KtxKt, KtxKt; 15. Kt-Q5, Q-Q3; 16. BxKt, QxB; 19. RxP, etc.
If Q-B2, White would play R-B1, after which Black couldn't recapture the KP yet, as the QBP is hanging. 13. … KKtxP; 14. KtxKt, KtxKt; 15. Kt-Q5, Q-Q3; 16. BxKt, QxB; 19. RxP, etc.
13. Castles Q-B2 14. R-B1 P-B3
13. Castles Q-B2 14. R-B1 P-B3
Again KtxP is not feasible on account of the loss of the QBP, as can be easily seen.
Again, KtxP isn't practical because of the loss of the QBP, which is easy to see.
15. B-Kt3 PxP
15. B-Kt3 PxP
Black’s game cannot be saved. If l5. … Kt(Kt5)xKP there follows 16. KtxKt, KtxKt; 17. Kt-Q5, Q-Q3; 18. BxKt, PxB; 19. RxB, or 16. … PxKt; 17. Q-R5ch, P-Kt3, 18. Q-R6.
Black's game cannot be saved. If 15. ... Kt(Kt5)xKP then 16. KtxKt, KtxKt; 17. Kt-Q5, Q-Q3; 18. BxKt, PxB; 19. RxB, or 16. ... PxKt; 17. Q-R5ch, P-Kt3, 18. Q-R6.
16. P-Kt4!
16. P-K4!
Now White initiates a brilliant attack, driving it home without giving Black a moment’s rest. If Black takes the pawn, White plays Kt-Q4, with many threats, e.g. P-B4; 18. Kt-Q5, Q-Q3; 19. Kt-K6, or l7. … Kt(Kt5)-B3; 18. Kt-K6, etc.
Now White launches an impressive attack, pressing on without giving Black a moment to breathe. If Black takes the pawn, White plays Kt-Q4, creating numerous threats, such as P-B4; 18. Kt-Q5, Q-Q3; 19. Kt-K6, or 17. … Kt(Kt5)-B3; 18. Kt-K6, etc.
16. … B-R2 17. BxKtP
16. … B-R2 17. BxKtP
The sacrifice is fairly obvious, as White obtains three pawns for the piece, and moreover drives the King into the field of battle. However, this does not detract from the beauty of the game, which is full of brilliant phases.
The sacrifice is pretty clear, as White gets three pawns for the piece and also pushes the King into the battlefield. However, this doesn’t take away from the beauty of the game, which is full of brilliant moments.
17. … RPxB 18. KtxKtP Q-Q1
17. … RPxB 18. KtxKtP Q-Q1
Or Q-Kt3; 19. Kt-Q6ch, K-K2; 20. Kt-B5ch, followed by Q-Q6.
Or Q-Kt3; 19. Kt-Q6ch, K-K2; 20. Kt-B5ch, followed by Q-Q6.
19. Kt-Q6ch K-B1 20. RxP Kt-Kt3
19. Knight to Q6 check King to B1 20. Rook takes Pawn Knight to Knight 3
The threat was: 21. Q-Q5, Kt-R3; 22. KtxB, RxKt; 23. R-Q6, etc. 20. … Kt(Q2)-B3 is of no avail because of 21. Q-Kt3, Kt-R3; 22. KtxP, or 21. … Q-Q2; 22. KR-B1, etc.
The threat was: 21. Q-Q5, Kt-R3; 22. KtxB, RxKt; 23. R-Q6, etc. 20. … Kt(Q2)-B3 doesn’t help because of 21. Q-Kt3, Kt-R3; 22. KtxP, or 21. … Q-Q2; 22. KR-B1, etc.
21. B-R4 Q-Q2 22. KtxB! QxR
21. B-R4 Q-Q2 22. KtxB! QxR
Not RxKt because of 23. QxQ. Now Black is a whole Rook ahead. But it is as much out of play as his Queen’s side pieces. The King is driven into a mating net by the concentration of superior White forces, and only escapes by giving up the extra piece.
Not RxKt because of 23. QxQ. Now Black is a whole Rook ahead. But it's just as out of play as his Queenside pieces. The King is trapped in a mating net by the powerful concentration of White's forces, and only escapes by sacrificing the extra piece.
23. Q-Q8ch Q-K1 24. B-K7ch K-B2 25. Kt-Q6ch K-Kt3 26. Kt-R4ch K-R4
23. Q-Q8ch Q-K1 24. B-K7ch K-B2 25. Kt-Q6ch K-Kt3 26. Kt-R4ch K-R4
If K-R3 there follows mate in three by 27. Kt(Q6)-B5ch; 28. Kt- Kt3ch; 29. B-Kt5 mate.
If K-R3, then checkmate in three moves: 27. Kt(Q6)-B5 check; 28. Kt-Kt3 check; 29. B-Kt5 checkmate.
27. KtxQ RxQ
28. KtxPch K-R3
29. Kt(Kt7)-B5ch K-R4
30. P-KR3!
27. KtxQ RxQ
28. KtxPch K-R3
29. Kt(Kt7)-B5ch K-R4
30. P-KR3!
This threatens 31. PxKtch, KxP; 32. P-B3ch, followed by P-Kt3 or Kt4 mate. If Black plays 30. QR-KKt1, White wins as follows: 31. PxKtch, RxP; 32. P-B3, Kt-B1ch; 33. K-R2, KtxB; 34. PxRch, KxP; 35. KtxKt, K x Kt; 36. R-B7. If 30. … Kt-R3; 31. Kt-Kt7 mate.
This threatens 31. PxKtch, KxP; 32. P-B3ch, followed by P-Kt3 or Kt4 mate. If Black plays 30. QR-KKt1, White wins as follows: 31. PxKtch, RxP; 32. P-B3, Kt-B1ch; 33. K-R2, KtxB; 34. PxRch, KxP; 35. KtxKt, KxKt; 36. R-B7. If 30. … Kt-R3; 31. Kt-Kt7 mate.
30. … Kt-B1 31. PxKtch KxP 32. BxR RxB 33. P-Kt3 R-Q7 34. K-Kt2 R-K7 35. P-R4 Kt-Kt3 36. Kt-K3ch K-R4 37. P-R5 Kt-Q2 38. Kt(R4)-B5 Kt-B3 39. P-Kt5 B-Q5 40. K-B3 R-R7 41. P-R6 B-R2 42. R-B1 R-Kt7 43. P-Kt4ch K-Kt4 44. R-B7 RxPch 45. KxR KtxKtPch 46. K-B3 Resigns.
30. … Kt-B1 31. PxKtch KxP 32. BxR RxB 33. P-Kt3 R-Q7 34. K-Kt2 R-K7 35. P-R4 Kt-Kt3 36. Kt-K3ch K-R4 37. P-R5 Kt-Q2 38. Kt(R4)-B5 Kt-B3 39. P-Kt5 B-Q5 40. K-B3 R-R7 41. P-R6 B-R2 42. R-B1 R-Kt7 43. P-Kt4ch K-Kt4 44. R-B7 RxPch 45. KxR KtxKtPch 46. K-B3 Resigns.
GAME No. 44
White: Dus Chotimirski. Black: Vidmar.
White: Dus Chotimirski. Black: Vidmar.
Queen’s Pawn Game.
Queen's Pawn Opening.
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. Kt-KB3 P-QB4 3. P-B3 P-K3 4. B-B4
1. P-Q4 P-Q4 2. Kt-KB3 P-QB4 3. P-B3 P-K3 4. B-B4
We have seen on page 55 that Black can hardly develop his QB without disadvantage. White, however, has no difficulty in doing so, as his QP is protected, and after Black’s Q-Kt3 he has only to look after his KtP. He could play Q-B1, which might bring the Q into effective action on the diagonal to R6.
We saw on page 55 that Black can barely develop his queen’s bishop without a disadvantage. White, on the other hand, has no trouble doing so since his queen pawn is protected, and after Black moves his queen knight to 3, he just has to pay attention to his knight pawn. He could move his queen to B1, which could bring the queen into play effectively along the diagonal to rook 6.
The aim of the text move is the early occupation of K5. But, as the present game shows, this cannot be effected. Black must not waste time with Q-Kt3, but play B-Q3 at once.
The goal of the text move is to quickly occupy K5. However, as the current game demonstrates, this can't be accomplished. Black shouldn't waste time playing Q-Kt3, but should instead play B-Q3 right away.
4. … Kt-QB3 5. P-K3 Kt-B3 6. QKt-Q2 B-Q3 7. B-Kt3 Castles 8. Kt-K5 BxKt! 9. PxB Kt-Q2
4. … Knight to Queen’s Bishop 3 5. Pawn to King’s 3 Knight to Bishop 3 6. Queen to Knight 2 Bishop to Queen 3 7. Bishop to Knight 3 Castles 8. Knight to King 5 Bishop takes Knight! 9. Pawn takes Bishop Knight to Queen 2
Now White has no means of maintaining his centre. Whether he supports the pawn with Kt-B3 or P-KB4, Black forces matters with P-B3.
Now White has no way to hold his center. Whether he supports the pawn with Knight to Bishop 3 or Pawn to King Bishop 4, Black pushes the issue with Pawn to Bishop 3.
![[Illustration]](images/diag162.jpg)
Diag. 162
Diag. 162
Now that the idea underlying White’s opening strategy has proved impracticable, he has difficulty in formulating a plan. Making the best of a bad job, he abandons his KP in exchange for Black’s KRP. But Black obtains a powerful pawn centre, a telling advantage.
Now that the concept behind White’s opening strategy has shown to be unworkable, he struggles to come up with a plan. Making the most of a bad situation, he gives up his king's pawn for Black’s king's rook pawn. However, Black gains a strong pawn center, which is a significant advantage.
10. B-Q3 KKtxP 11. BxKt KtxB 12. BxPch KxB 13. Q-R5ch K-Kt1 14. QxKt P-B3 15. Q-R5 Q-Kt3
10. B-Q3 KKtxP 11. BxKt KtxB 12. BxPch KxB 13. Q-R5ch K-Kt1 14. QxKt P-B3 15. Q-R5 Q-Kt3
Black wishes to provoke the advance of the QKtP and QBP in order to obtain a passed pawn (16. P-QKt3, P-K4; 17. Castles KR, Q-R4; 18. P-QB4, P-Q5). In order to avoid this continuation, White takes his chance of castling on the Queen’s side. This turns out to Black’s advantage. Indeed it is a foregone conclusion. In the ensuing double assault by pawns, Black is several moves ahead, as the White pawns concerned in the attack are still on their original squares.
Black aims to push the QKtP and QBP forward to create a passed pawn (16. P-QKt3, P-K4; 17. Castles KR, Q-R4; 18. P-QB4, P-Q5). To prevent this sequence, White seizes the opportunity to castle on the Queen’s side. However, this ultimately benefits Black. In fact, it's a done deal. During the following double pawn attack, Black is several moves ahead, while the White pawns involved in the attack are still on their starting positions.
16. Castles QR P-K4 17. P-KKt4 P-Q5 18. P-QB4 B-Q2 19. P-Kt5 PxKtP 20. QxP RxP 21. PxP BPxP!
16. Castles QR P-K4 17. P-KKt4 P-Q5 18. P-QB4 B-Q2 19. P-Kt5 PxKtP 20. QxP RxP 21. PxP BPxP!
Finely played. Black gives up his KP in order to get his QR into play with the gain of a move.
Nicely done. Black sacrifices his king's pawn to bring his queen's rook into action, gaining a move in the process.
22. QxP R-K1 23. Q-Kt3 QR-K7 24. KR-K1
22. QxP R-K1 23. Q-Kt3 QR-K7 24. KR-K1
KR-Kt1 would also be of no avail because of Q-KR3, 25. Q-Q3, Q- KB3 threatening B-B4. The move in the text puts an end to the agony.
KR-Kt1 would also be useless because of Q-KR3, 25. Q-Q3, Q-KB3 threatens B-B4. The move in the text puts an end to the struggle.
24. … RxKt!!
Resigns.
24. … RxKt!!
Quits.
For after 25. RxR, RxR; 26. KxR, QxPch; 27. K-Q3, B-B4ch; 28. R- K4, Q-B6ch; 29. K-K2, QxQ; Black remains with an extra piece.
For after 25. RxR, RxR; 26. KxR, QxPch; 27. K-Q3, B-B4ch; 28. R-K4, Q-B6ch; 29. K-K2, QxQ; Black has an extra piece.
GAME No. 45
White: Rubinstein. Black: Spielmann.
White: Rubinstein. Black: Spielmann.
Irregular Opening.
Unscheduled Opening.
1. P-Q4 P-QB4
With this move Black tries to avoid well-trodden paths of tournament practice. White can, at will, lead into a peaceful Queen’s Gambit by 2. P-K3 or into a Sicilian Defence by P-K4. It is more usual, however, to play P-Q5, which blocks up the Black centre to some extent.
With this move, Black tries to steer clear of the usual tournament strategies. White can choose to lead into a calm Queen’s Gambit with 2. P-K3 or enter a Sicilian Defense with P-K4. However, it's more common to play P-Q5, which somewhat blocks up the Black center.
If 2. PxP, Black regains his pawn after P-K3 without any disadvantage.
If 2. PxP, Black gets back his pawn after P-K3 without any disadvantage.
2. P-Q5 P-Q3 3. P-QB4
Coupled with 4. P-K4, this move is of doubtful value, as Black gains command of White’s Q4. It is advisable to keep the QBP back, thus retaining the option of driving off a hostile piece from Q4 by P-QB3. Moreover, the White KB is hemmed in by the pawn at QB4.
Coupled with 4. P-K4, this move is questionable, as Black takes control of White’s Q4. It’s better to hold back the QBP, keeping the option to drive away an enemy piece from Q4 with P-QB3. Additionally, the White KB is blocked in by the pawn at QB4.
3. … P-KKt3 4. P-K4 B-Kt2 5. B-Q3 P-K3
3. … P-KKt3 4. P-K4 B-Kt2 5. B-Q3 P-K3
The development of the KKt is not desirable at B3, where it would block the long diagonal. From K2, however, it commands KB4, where it can take up a strong position after the exchange of pawns in the centre, or else it can support the advance of the KBP.
The development of the KKt is not a good idea at B3, as it would block the long diagonal. However, from K2, it controls KB4, where it can take a strong position after the exchange of pawns in the center, or it can support the advance of the KBP.
6. Kt-QB3 Kt-K2 7. KKt-K2
6. Kt-QB3 Kt-K2 7. KKt-K2
Kt-B3 would have been slightly better, because the Black QKt might play to his K4.
Kt-B3 would have been a little better because the Black Queen's Knight might move to his King 4.
7. … PxP 8. KPxP Kt-Q2 9. P-B4
7. … PxP 8. KPxP Kt-Q2 9. P-B4
This move weakens the King’s position, and would be justified only if there was a possibility of opening the file for the Rook by P-B5. But Black has too strong a hold on his KB4. The text move aims at preventing the exchange of White’s KB through Black’s Kt-K4. It would have been better to withdraw the B to B2.
This move weakens the King’s position and would only be justified if there was a chance to open the file for the Rook by moving P-B5. But Black has too strong of a grip on his KB4. The current move aims to prevent the exchange of White’s KB through Black’s Kt-K4. It would have been better to pull the B back to B2.
9. … Kt-KB3 10. Kt-Kt3 P-KR4!
9. … Kt-KB3 10. Kt-Kt3 P-KR4!
Now White cannot enforce P-B5, as Black can attack the Knight by P-R5. White cannot prevent this with P-KR4, as the Black Knight would take up a commanding position at Kt5. Black’s game is superior. He can concentrate all his minor pieces on the King’s wing, while White’s QB is ineffective on account of the ill- considered advance of the KBP.
Now White can't play P-B5, because Black can attack the Knight with P-R5. White can't stop this with P-KR4, as the Black Knight would move to a strong position at Kt5. Black's game is better. He can focus all his minor pieces on the King’s side, while White’s Queen's Bishop isn't effective due to the poorly thought-out advance of the King's Pawn.
![[Illustration]](images/diag163.jpg)
Diag. 163
Diag. 163
11. Castles P-R5 12. KKt-K4 KtxKt 13. BxKt
11. Castles P-R5 12. KKt-K4 KtxKt 13. BxKt
White has to capture with the B, in order to exchange the Black Knight if it should play to B4. After 13. KtxKt, B-Q5ch; 14. K- R1, Kt-B4; White’s Knight would not be able to move from K4 on account of the threat: Kt-Kt6ch. Sooner or later, Black would get a deciding advantage by enforcing the exchange of White’s Knight, e.g. 15. Q-K1, Q-K2; 16. R-QKt1, B-Q2; 17. P-QKt3, Castles QR; 18. B-Kt2, QxKt; 19. BxQ, Kt-Kt6ch; 20. QxKt, PxQ; 21. P-KR3, BxP; 22. PxB, RxPch; 23. K-Kt2, R-R7ch; 24. KxP, RxB; or 21. BxB, RxPch, followed by PxB and QR-R1.
White has to capture with the bishop to exchange the black knight if it moves to b4. After 13. knight takes knight, black plays bishop to Q5 check; 14. king to R1, knight to b4; White’s knight wouldn’t be able to move from K4 because of the threat: knight to Kt6 check. Eventually, Black would gain a decisive advantage by forcing the exchange of White’s knight, for example, 15. queen to K1, queen to K2; 16. rook to QR1, bishop to Q2; 17. pawn to QKt3, castles queen's rook; 18. bishop to Kt2, queen takes knight; 19. bishop takes queen, knight to Kt6 check; 20. queen takes knight, pawn takes queen; 21. pawn to KR3, bishop takes pawn; 22. pawn takes bishop, rook to P check; 23. king to Kt2, rook to R7 check; 24. king takes pawn, rook takes bishop; or 21. bishop takes bishop, rook to P check, followed by pawn takes bishop and rook to R1.
13. … B-Q5ch 14. K-R1 Kt-B4 15. BxKt BxB
13. … B-Q5ch 14. K-R1 Kt-B4 15. BxKt BxB
White is helpless against the two powerful Bishops.
White is powerless against the two strong Bishops.
16. R-K1ch K-B1
16. R-K1ch K-B1
Black forfeits his chance of castling, not a great loss under the circumstances. In any case his KR is needed on the Rook’s file, and Black would only have castled on the Queen’s side if at all.
Black loses his opportunity to castle, which isn't a big deal given the situation. Regardless, his king's rook is needed on the rook’s file, and Black would only have castled on the queen’s side, if at all.
17. Q-B3
Here P-KR3 was essential in order to prevent the further advance of the KRP. The weakness at Kt3 would not have been so serious in the absence of a Black Knight. Now Black forces the advance of White’s KKtP, and the Bishops become immediately effective.
Here P-KR3 was crucial to stop the KRP from progressing further. The vulnerability at Kt3 wouldn't have been as critical if there hadn't been a Black Knight. Now Black compels White’s KKtP to advance, and the Bishops become instantly impactful.
17. … P-R6 18. P-KKt3
17. … P-R6 18. P-KKt3
not P-KKt4 on account of Q-R5.
not P-KKt4 due to Q-R5.
18. … Q-Q2 19. B-Q2 B-Kt5 20. Q-B1
18. … Q-Q2 19. B-Q2 B-Kt5 20. Q-B1
If Q-Q3, Black plays Q-B4 and White cannot exchange Queens because of B-B6 mate.
If Q-Q3, Black plays Q-B4 and White can't exchange Queens because of B-B6 mate.
20. … Q-B4
threatening Q-B7.
threatening Q-B7.
21. QR-B1 K-Kt2 22. B-K3 B-B3
21. QR-B1 K-Kt2 22. B-K3 B-B3
Black must not exchange his valuable Bishop.
Black shouldn't trade his important Bishop.
23. P-Kt3 KR-K1 24. B-B2
23. P-Kt3 KR-K1 24. B-B2
There is no answer to Black’s threat of doubling the Rooks on the K file. If White plays Q-B2, Black’s Queen effects an entry at Q6, after which he would double his Rooks, and White’s Bishop cannot be defended. After the text move, Black forces the exchange of his two Rooks for the Queen. Generally speaking, this is no disadvantage, but in consequence of the exposed position of the White King, it means a speedy loss for White.
There’s no way to counter Black’s threat to double the Rooks on the K file. If White plays Q-B2, Black’s Queen can move in at Q6, after which he would double his Rooks, making it impossible to defend White’s Bishop. After this move, Black forces the trade of his two Rooks for the Queen. Typically, that wouldn’t be a problem, but due to the exposed position of the White King, it leads to a quick loss for White.
24. … B-B6ch 25. K-Kt1 B-Kt7 26. RxR BxQ 27. RxR Q-Q6!
24. … B-B6ch 25. K-Kt1 B-Kt7 26. RxR BxQ 27. RxR Q-Q6!
If now RxB Black plays Q-B6.
If now RxB Black plays Q-B6.
28. R-K8
In order to play R-K3 if Black plays BxKt.
In order to play R-K3 if Black captures the knight with the bishop.
28. … Q-B6! 29. KxB Q-R8ch 30. B-Kt1 Q-Kt7ch 31. K-K1 QxBch 32. K-Q2 QxPch Resigns
28. … Q-B6! 29. KxB Q-R8ch 30. B-Kt1 Q-Kt7ch 31. K-K1 QxBch 32. K-Q2 QxPch Resigns
for the pawn queens.
for the pawn queens.
GAME No. 46
White: G. A. Thomas. Black: Ed. Lasker.
White: G. A. Thomas. Black: Ed. Lasker.
Irregular Opening (compare Game No. 45).
Irregular Opening (compare Game No. 45).
1. P-Q4 P-QB4 2. P-Q5 P-Q3 3. P-QB4 P-KKt3 4. Kt-QB3 B-Kt2 5. B-Q2
1. P-Q4 P-QB4 2. P-Q5 P-Q3 3. P-QB4 P-KKt3 4. Kt-QB3 B-Kt2 5. B-Q2
This is not necessary. Black could hardly exchange his B for the Kt; the weakness at his KB3 and KR3 would become too serious a disadvantage.
This isn't necessary. Black could barely trade his B for the Kt; the weakness at his KB3 and KR3 would become too serious of a disadvantage.
5. … P-K3 6. P-K4 PxP 7. KtxP!
5. … P-K3 6. P-K4 PxP 7. KtxP!
In view of the fact that Black’s position after BP or KPxP would be very promising, as all his pieces would be easy to bring into play, White decides upon the sacrifice of a pawn, in order to further his own development.
Considering that Black's position after BP or KPxP would be very strong, since all his pieces would be easy to mobilize, White chooses to sacrifice a pawn to advance his own development.
7. … BxP
8. R-Kt1 B-Kt2
9. Q-R4ch Kt-B3
10. KKt-B3
7. … BxP
8. R-Kt1 B-Kt2
9. Q-R4ch Kt-B3
10. KKt-B3
Kt-Kt6, R-Kt sq; 11. B-R5 leads to nothing, as Black plays 12. QK2.
Kt-Kt6, R-Kt sq; 11. B-R5 goes nowhere, as Black responds with 12. QK2.
10. … P-KR3
If Black plays KKt-K2 at once, his position becomes somewhat cramped after 11. B-Kt5, Castles; 12. Kt-B6ch, K-R1; 13. Q-Q1.
If Black plays KKt-K2 right away, his position becomes a bit cramped after 11. B-Kt5, Castles; 12. Kt-B6ch, K-R1; 13. Q-Q1.
11. B-Q3 Kt-K2 12. Castles Castles 13. Q-B2 P-Kt3
11. B-Q3 Kt-K2 12. Castles Castles 13. Q-B2 P-Kt3
This allows the development of the QB.
This allows for the development of the QB.
14. B-B3 KtxKt 15. KPxKt Kt-K4
14. B-B3 KtxKt 15. KPxKt Kt-K4
![[Illustration]](images/diag164.jpg)
Diag. 164
Diag. 164
Kt-K2 should have been played here in order to play BxB; 17. QxB, B-Kt5 with Kt-B4, in answer to 16. Q-Kt2. Black is still open to attack in consequence of his broken King’s side, but there is no demonstrable advantage for White. The text move is a mistake, and gives White chances of a decisive attack.
Kt-K2 should have been played here to allow for BxB; 17. QxB, B-Kt5 with Kt-B4, in response to 16. Q-Kt2. Black is still vulnerable due to the broken King's side, but White doesn't have a clear advantage. The move listed is a mistake and gives White opportunities for a significant attack.
16. KtxKt BxKt 17. BxB PxB 18. BxP! Q-Kt4
16. KtxKt BxKt 17. BxB PxB 18. BxP! Q-Kt4
Of course not PxB, on account of 19. QxPch, K-R1; 20. QxPch, K- Kt1; 21. R-Kt3, etc. 18. … P-B4 fails because of 19. R-Kt3.
Of course not PxB, because of 19. QxPch, K-R1; 20. QxPch, K-Kt1; 21. R-Kt3, etc. 18. … P-B4 doesn't work because of 19. R-Kt3.
19. B-K4 P-B4 20. P-B4!!
This elegant continuation decides the game. If PxP, White simply plays 21. B-Q3, and Black can hardly hope to save the end-game, as his pawns are broken up. If the Queen retreats, however, there follows: 21. PxP, and White obtains two passed pawns for the B and has the superior position.
This classy move seals the deal. If Black takes the pawn, White just plays 21. B-Q3, and Black barely stands a chance in the endgame since his pawns are all messed up. If the Queen pulls back, though, it leads to: 21. PxP, and White gets two passed pawns for the Bishop and has the upper hand.
20. … Q-Kt2 21. PxP PXB 22. RxRch QxR 23. R-KB1 Q-Kt2 24. QxP Q-Kt5 25. R-B4 Q-Q8ch 26. K-B2 Q-Q5ch 27. QxQ PxQ 28. P-K6 B-R3 29. RxP R-B1ch
20. … Q-Kt2 21. PxP PXB 22. RxRch QxR 23. R-KB1 Q-Kt2 24. QxP Q-Kt5 25. R-B4 Q-Q8ch 26. K-B2 Q-Q5ch 27. QxQ PxQ 28. P-K6 B-R3 29. RxP R-B1ch
If K-B1, 30. P-Q6.
If K-B1, 30. P-Q6.
30. K-K3 R-B3 31. K-K4 R-B7 32. P-Q6 R-K7ch
30. K-K3 R-B3 31. K-K4 R-B7 32. P-Q6 R-K7ch
He might play K-Q5, after which B-Kt2ch has points.
He could play K-Q5, after which B-Kt2ch is worth points.
33. K-Q3 Resigns.
33. K-Q3 Forfeits.
GAME No. 47
White: Tartakower. Black: Asztalos.
White: Tartakower. Black: Asztalos.
Dutch Opening.
Dutch Opening.
1. P-KB4 P-Q4
It has been tried to refute White’s non-developing first move by a pawn sacrifice: 1. … P-K4; which leads to a rapid mobilisation of the Black forces after 2. PxP, P-Q3; 3. PxP, BxP. But this attack—called the From Gambit—does not seem to prevail against the best defence. In a match game, Tartakower-Spielmann (Vienna, 1913), White won as follows:
It has been attempted to counter White's non-developing first move with a pawn sacrifice: 1. … P-K4; which allows for a quick mobilization of Black's pieces after 2. PxP, P-Q3; 3. PxP, BxP. However, this attack—known as the From Gambit—does not appear to succeed against the strongest defense. In a match game between Tartakower and Spielmann (Vienna, 1913), White won as follows:
4. Kt-KB3, P-KKt4; 5. P-Q4, P-Kt5; 6. Kt-K5, Kt-QB3; 7. KtxKt, PxKt; 8. P-KKt3, P-KR4; 9. B-Kt2, P-R5; 10. Q-Q3, B-Q2; 11. Kt- B3, R-Kt1; 12. Castles, PxP; 13. PxP, P-QB4; 14. B-B4, BxB; 15. RxB, Q-Kt4; 16. Kt-K4, Q-R3; 17. KtxP, Kt-B3; 18. KtxB, KtxKt; 19. Q-K4ch, K-Q1; 20. RxBP, R-K1; 21. QxP, Q-K6ch; 22. K-B1, Resigns.
4. Knight to Bishop 3, Pawn to Knight 4; 5. Pawn to Queen 4, Pawn to Knight 5; 6. Knight to King 5, Knight to Queen Bishop 3; 7. Knight takes Knight, Pawn takes Knight; 8. Pawn to Knight 3, Pawn to Rook 4; 9. Bishop to Knight 2, Pawn to Rook 5; 10. Queen to Queen 3, Bishop to Queen 2; 11. Knight to Bishop 3, Rook to Knight 1; 12. Castles, Pawn takes Pawn; 13. Pawn takes Pawn, Pawn to Queen Bishop 4; 14. Bishop to Bishop 4, Bishop takes Bishop; 15. Rook takes Bishop, Queen to Knight 4; 16. Knight to King 4, Queen to Rook 3; 17. Knight takes Pawn, Knight to Bishop 3; 18. Knight takes Bishop, Knight takes Knight; 19. Queen to King 4 check, King to Queen 1; 20. Rook takes Bishop Pawn, Rook to King 1; 21. Queen takes Pawn, Queen to King 6 check; 22. King to Bishop 1, Resigns.
When Black plays P-KB4 in answer to 1. P-Q4 we have the Dutch Defence. After 1. P-Q4, P-KB4, White can also sacrifice a pawn by 2. P-K4, and thereby obtain a far more favourable position than Black does in From’s gambit, as he is a move to the good, having already advanced his QP, e.g. 2. P-K4, PxP; 3. Kt-QB3, Kt-KB3; 4. P-B3 or 4. B-Kt5 and then P-B3. If Black captures the KBP, White obtains a powerful attack. A drastic example is found in the following little game, played by two students in an academic tournament at Petrograd: 4. P-B3, PxP; 5. KtxP, P-K3; 6. B-KKt5, B-K2; 7. B-Q3, Castles; 8. Castles, P-QKt3; 9. Kt-K5, B-Kt2; 10. BxKt, BxB; 11. BxPch, KxB; 12. Q-R5ch, K-Kt1; 13. Kt-Kt6, R-K1; 14. Q-R8ch, K-B2; 15. Kt-K5ch, K-K2; 16. QxPch!!, BxQ; 17. R- B7ch, K-Q3; 18. Kt-Kt5ch, K-Q4; 19. P-B4ch, K-K5; 20. R-K1 mate.
When Black plays P-KB4 in response to 1. P-Q4, we have the Dutch Defense. After 1. P-Q4, P-KB4, White can also give up a pawn with 2. P-K4 and get a much better position than Black does in From's gambit, since White is a move ahead, having already pushed his QP. For example, 2. P-K4, PxP; 3. Kt-QB3, Kt-KB3; 4. P-B3 or 4. B-Kt5 and then P-B3. If Black takes the KBP, White gets a strong attack. A striking example can be seen in the following short game played by two students in an academic tournament in Petrograd: 4. P-B3, PxP; 5. KtxP, P-K3; 6. B-KKt5, B-K2; 7. B-Q3, Castles; 8. Castles, P-QKt3; 9. Kt-K5, B-Kt2; 10. BxKt, BxB; 11. BxPch, KxB; 12. Q-R5ch, K-Kt1; 13. Kt-Kt6, R-K1; 14. Q-R8ch, K-B2; 15. Kt-K5ch, K-K2; 16. QxPch!!, BxQ; 17. R-B7ch, K-Q3; 18. Kt-Kt5ch, K-Q4; 19. P-B4ch, K-K5; 20. R-K1 mate.
Black’s best answer is to play P-Q4 after White’s 4. P-KB3 (5. B-Kt5, B-B4). If 4. B-Kt5, it is not yet possible to play P-Q4 because of the threat: BxKt, Q-R5ch, and QxQP. In that case Black must first play P-QB3, after which White again obtains a strong attack by P-KB3.
Black’s best move is to play pawn to Queen’s 4 after White’s 4. pawn to King’s Bishop 3 (5. Bishop to Knight 5, Bishop to Bishop 4). If 4. Bishop to Knight 5, Black cannot yet play pawn to Queen’s 4 because of the threat: Bishop takes Knight, Queen to Rook 5 check, and Queen takes Queen’s Pawn. In that case, Black must first play pawn to Queen’s Bishop 3, after which White gains a strong attack again by playing pawn to King’s Bishop 3.
Black can avoid the attacks which follow after 1. P-Q4, P-KB4; 2. P-K4, by playing P-K3 on his first move, and then lead into the Dutch defence with P-KB4 on his second move. He must, however, reckon with having to play the French defence which White can bring about with 2. P-K4.
Black can dodge the attacks that come after 1. P-Q4, P-KB4; 2. P-K4, by playing P-K3 on his first move, and then transition into the Dutch defense with P-KB4 on his second move. However, he has to be prepared to play the French defense if White plays 2. P-K4.
2. P-K3 P-K3 3. Kt-KB3 P-QB4 4. P-QKt3 Kt-QB3 5. B-Kt5 Kt-B3
2. P-K3 P-K3 3. Kt-KB3 P-QB4 4. P-QKt3 Kt-QB3 5. B-Kt5 Kt-B3
Black should have played B-Q2 here, as White can exchange at B6, leaving Black with a doubled pawn. This in itself is not a drawback, but in the present position it is serious, as Black will have difficulty in finding a place for his QB. For there is no prospect of enforcing P-K4, as White commands that square in sufficient force.
Black should have played B-Q2 here, since White can exchange at B6, leaving Black with a doubled pawn. This alone isn’t a disadvantage, but in the current position, it is significant, as Black will struggle to find a spot for his QB. There’s no chance of pushing P-K4, as White controls that square with enough force.
6. B-Kt2 B-K2
7. Castles Castles
8. BxQKt PxB
9. Kt-K5 Q-B2
10. P-Q3 P-QR4
6. B-Kt2 B-K2
7. Castles Castles
8. BxQKt PxB
9. Kt-K5 Q-B2
10. P-Q3 P-QR4
Black’s attempt of capturing his K4 by playing Kt-Q2 and P-B3, White would cross at once with Q-Kt4. With the text move Black begins operations on the Q side, which is quite correct, as White has the upper hand on the other wing.
Black’s move to capture his K4 by playing Kt-Q2 and P-B3, White would immediately respond with Q-Kt4. With this move, Black starts to operate on the Q side, which is the right strategy, since White has the advantage on the other side.
11. Q-K2
White should have prevented the further advance of the Black RP by 11. P-QR4. This would have been sound policy in any case, as the R file could not have been forced open for the Black Rooks.
White should have stopped the Black RP from moving forward by playing 11. P-QR4. This would have been a smart move anyway, as the R file couldn't have been opened for the Black Rooks.
11. … P-R5 12. Kt-Q2 PxP
11. … P-R5 12. Kt-Q2 PxP
Premature. The capture is only of value if the file can be held. To that end it is first necessary to play B-Kt2 and to occupy the R file with Rooks and Queen. After the exchange of Rooks, Black is at a disadvantage for the end-game because of the inefficiency of the QB.
Premature. The capture only matters if you can keep the file. To make that happen, you first need to play B-Kt2 and control the R file with your Rooks and Queen. After exchanging Rooks, Black has a disadvantage in the end-game because the QB isn't effective.
![[Illustration]](images/diag165.jpg)
Diag. 165
Diag. 165
If instead of the text move Black had driven off the Bishop to B1 with P-R6 (13. B-B3?, P-Q5!; 14. PxP, Kt-Q4) he could have enforced his P-K4, but in the long run White would have captured the QRP, and remained with a passed pawn on the R file, a powerful weapon for the end-game, e.g. l2. … P-R6; 13. B-B1, Kt-Q2; 14. KtxKt, BxKt; 15. P-K4, P-KB3; 16. P-B4, followed by Kt-Kt1.
If instead of the move Black had played B1 by moving the Bishop to B1 with P-R6 (13. B-B3?, P-Q5!; 14. PxP, Kt-Q4) he could have pushed his P-K4, but in the long run White would have taken the QRP and would have a passed pawn on the R file, which is a strong asset for the endgame, e.g. l2. … P-R6; 13. B-B1, Kt-Q2; 14. KtxKt, BxKt; 15. P-K4, P-KB3; 16. P-B4, followed by Kt-Kt1.
13. RPxP RxR 14. RxR B-Kt2 15. P-KKt4
13. RPxP RxR 14. RxR B-Kt2 15. P-KKt4
The Black pieces being cut off from the K side, White is free to attack.
The Black pieces are cut off from the king side, so White can attack freely.
15. … R-R1 16. RxRch BxR 17. P-Kt5 Kt-Q2 18. Q Kt-B3 KtxKt 19. BxKt Q-R4 20. P-B4
15. … R-R1 16. RxRch BxR 17. P-Kt5 Kt-Q2 18. Q Kt-B3 KtxKt 19. BxKt Q-R4 20. P-B4
in order to prevent the release of the B by the pawn sacrifice P- B5 and P-B4.
in order to prevent the release of the B by the pawn sacrifice P-B5 and P-B4.
20. … B-Kt2 21. K-B2 K-B1 22. P-R4 B-R3 23. P-R5 B-Kt2 24. P-R6 P-Kt3
20. … B-Kt2 21. K-B2 K-B1 22. P-R4 B-R3 23. P-R5 B-Kt2 24. P-R6 P-Kt3
By advancing his RP White has weakened Black’s KB3, with the constant threat of establishing his Kt there and of capturing the RP.
By pushing his RP, White has weakened Black’s KB3, with the ongoing threat of placing his Kt there and capturing the RP.
25. K-B1
This move is superfluous and probably dictated by time pressure. The proper plan is: Q-QKt2 with the threat of B-B7 or Kt8 and Q- R8ch.
This move is unnecessary and likely influenced by time constraints. The right move is: Q-QKt2 with the threat of B-B7 or Kt8 and Q-R8ch.
25. … Q-R6
26. Q-QKt2
25. … Q-R6
26. Q-Knight2
The end-game is a clear win for White. He plays his Kt to KKt4, threatening to reach B6 or K5. The effect is twofold.
The endgame is a straightforward win for White. He moves his knight to knight 4, threatening to advance to bishop 6 or king 5. This has a twofold impact.
![[Illustration]](images/diag166.jpg)
Diag. 166
Diag. 166
Black must keep his B at K2 and his K must remain near the KBP. White’s King marches to QKt6 and captures the QB pawns, queening his QKtP. Black cannot prevent the White King from doing this by B-Q1, as White, by attacking Black’s QB4 with his B, could at any time force the B back to his K2. The remainder of the game needs no comment.
Black must keep his bishop at K2, and his king should stay close to the king's bishop pawn. White's king moves to knight six and captures the queen's bishop pawns, promoting his knight pawn. Black can't stop the white king from doing this by moving his bishop to queen one since white can attack black's queen bishop four with his bishop, forcing the bishop back to K2 at any time. The rest of the game speaks for itself.
26. … QxQ 27. BxQ B-Q3 28. Kt-R2 K-K1 29. Kt-Kt4 B-K2 30. B-K5 K-Q2 31. K-K2 K-K1 32. K-Q2 K-Q2 33. K-B2 K-K1 34. K-Kt2 K-Q2 35. K-R3 K-K1 36. K-R4 K-Q2 37. B-Kt8 K-B1 38. B-R7 K-Q2 39. B-Kt6 P-Q5 40. P-K4 K-K1 41. P-K5 K-Q2 42. Kt-B2 Resigns.
26. … QxQ 27. BxQ B-Q3 28. Kt-R2 K-K1 29. Kt-Kt4 B-K2 30. B-K5 K-Q2 31. K-K2 K-K1 32. K-Q2 K-Q2 33. K-B2 K-K1 34. K-Kt2 K-Q2 35. K-R3 K-K1 36. K-R4 K-Q2 37. B-Kt8 K-B1 38. B-R7 K-Q2 39. B-Kt6 P-Q5 40. P-K4 K-K1 41. P-K5 K-Q2 42. Kt-B2 Resigns.
because there follows Kt-K4 and BxP.
because there follows Kt-K4 and BxP.
GAME No. 48
White: Blackburne. Black: Niemzowitsch.
White: Blackburne. Black: Niemzowitsch.
Irregular Opening.
Irregular Opening.
1. P-K3 P-Q3
It is due to this reply of Black’s that the opening is irregular. For had he played P-Q4 a peaceful QP game would have resulted, or after White’s 2. P-KB4 a Dutch opening.
It’s because of this response from Black that the opening is irregular. If he had played P-Q4, a calm QP game would have followed, or after White’s 2. P-KB4, a Dutch opening would have occurred.
2. P-KB4 P-K4 3. PxP PxP
2. P-KB4 P-K4 3. PxP PxP
Black has the superior position; he has a pawn in the centre and his pieces are more free.
Black is in a stronger position; he has a pawn in the center and his pieces are more mobile.
4. Kt-QB3 B-Q3
4. Kt-QB3 B-Q3
As was seen on a former occasion, it is a shade better to develop the Knights before the Bishops, as the choice of moves for the latter is less limited. The alternative might have been 5. Kt-B3, B-KKt5; 6. B-K2, Kt-B3.
As mentioned before, it's slightly better to develop the Knights before the Bishops, since the options for the latter are more restricted. The alternative could have been 5. Kt-B3, B-KKt5; 6. B-K2, Kt-B3.
5. P-K4
Now White has also a pawn in the centre, but he is a move behind in his development.
Now White also has a pawn in the center, but he is one move behind in his development.
5. … B-K3
6. Kt-B3 P-KB3
7. P-Q3 Kt-K2
8. B-K3 P-QB4
9. Q-Q2 QKt-B3
10. B-K2 Kt-Q5
11. Castles KR Castles
12. Kt-Q1 KKt-B3
13. P-B3
5. … B-K3
6. Kt-B3 P-KB3
7. P-Q3 Kt-K2
8. B-K3 P-QB4
9. Q-Q2 QKt-B3
10. B-K2 Kt-Q5
11. Castles KR Castles
12. Kt-Q1 KKt-B3
13. P-B3
Now Black has gained an advantage from the command of his Q5. The advance of White’s QBP, which was necessitated by the dominating position of the Black Knight, has left White with a “backward” pawn at Q3.
Now Black has gained an advantage by controlling his Q5. The movement of White’s QBP, which was needed because of the strong position of the Black Knight, has left White with a “backward” pawn at Q3.
13. … KtxBch 14. QxKt R-K1
13. … KtxBch 14. QxKt R-K1
If now a general exchange takes place after P-Q4, the KP is lost through B-Q4.
If a general exchange happens after P-Q4, the KP is lost due to B-Q4.
15. Kt-R4
15. Kt-R4
White’s counter attack on the King’s side becomes threatening, and Black must continue his operations on the Queen’s wing with the greatest care, as he may be called upon at any time to concentrate his pieces for the defence of the King’s wing.
White’s counterattack on the King’s side becomes a serious threat, and Black needs to carefully continue his efforts on the Queen’s side because he might have to quickly focus his pieces to defend the King’s side.
15. … B-KB1 16. Kt-B5 K-R1 17. P-KKt4 Q-Q2 18. Kt-B2 P-QR4
15. … B-KB1 16. Kt-B5 K-R1 17. P-KKt4 Q-Q2 18. Kt-B2 P-QR4
Black wishes to open up files on the Queen’s side.
Black wants to open files on the Queen's side.
19. P-QR3
Freeing the QR.
Unlocking the QR.
19. … P-QKt4 20. QR-Q1 QR-Kt1 21. R-Q2 P-Kt5 22. RPxP RPxP 23. P-B4 R-R1 24. Q-B3 R-R7
19. … P-QKt4 20. QR-Q1 QR-Kt1 21. R-Q2 P-Kt5 22. RPxP RPxP 23. P-B4 R-R1 24. Q-B3 R-R7
Before trying to push home his advantage on the Queen’s side, which is made possible by the weakness of White’s QP, Black should look after his King’s side, where White has collected an alarming array of forces. After the text move the Rook is quite out of play.
Before trying to take advantage on the Queen’s side, which is possible due to the weakness of White’s QP, Black should take care of his King’s side, where White has gathered a concerning number of forces. After the move in the text, the Rook is pretty much out of play.
25. P-Kt5 P-Kt3?
25. P-Knight5 P-Knight3?
![[Illustration]](images/diag167.jpg)
Diag. 167
Diag. 167
Black should simply play PxP with the following continuation: 26. BxP, Kt-Q5; 27. KtxKt, QxKt; 28. B-K3, Q-Q3. After the move in the text, White’s attack is overwhelming.
Black should just play PxP with the following continuation: 26. BxP, Kt-Q5; 27. KtxKt, QxKt; 28. B-K3, Q-Q3. After the move in the text, White’s attack is too strong.
26. Kt-Kt4!
26. Kt-Kt4!
White obtains a Rook and two pawns for his two Knights; this is in itself an equivalent of material. In the present instance the exchange is of decisive advantage for White, as Black must lose several moves to bring up his Rook for the defence of his unguarded King.
White trades a Rook and two pawns for his two Knights; this is, in itself, a material equivalent. In this case, the exchange provides a crucial advantage for White, as Black will need to spend several moves to activate his Rook to defend his exposed King.
26. … PxKt 27. KtxBP Kt-Q5
26. … PxKt 27. KtxBP Kt-Q5
If PxP, White wins by 28. Q-R5, Q-B2; 29. P-Kt6, QxPch; 30. QxQ and KtxR.
If PxP, White wins with 28. Q-R5, Q-B2; 29. P-Kt6, QxPch; 30. QxQ and KtxR.
28. Q-B2 Q-B3 29. KtxR QxKt 30. BxKt KPxB 31. PxP B-Q2 32. R-K1 Q-B2 33. Q-R4! R-R1
28. Q-B2 Q-B3 29. KtxR QxKt 30. BxKt KPxB 31. PxP B-Q2 32. R-K1 Q-B2 33. Q-R4! R-R1
Not BxP because of 34. R-KB2, followed by KR-KB sq.
Not BxP because of 34. R-KB2, followed by KR-KB sq.
34. R-KB2 B-B3 35. Q-Kt4
34. R-KB2 B-B3 35. Q-Kt4
The threat is to open the Rook’s file by P-Kt6 with an attack on the King by the Rooks.
The threat is to open the Rook’s file by moving the Knight to 6 and attacking the King with the Rooks.
35. … R-K1 36. RxR QxR
35. … R-K1 36. RxR QxR
BxR in order to play Q-R4 might be better. With the Queens off the board, Black has winning chances on account of his two Bishops. But then White might evade the exchange and proceed to seize the King’s file with the Rook after 37. Q-B4.
BxR to play Q-R4 might be a better move. With the Queens off the board, Black has winning chances because of his two Bishops. However, White might avoid the exchange and then take control of the King’s file with the Rook after 37. Q-B4.
37. R-K2 Q-Q2 38. R-K6 B-R1
in order to play Q-QKt2 or R2.
in order to play Q-QKt2 or R2.
39. P-Kt6! PxP
39. P-Kt6! PxP
If Q-QKt2, 40. R-K8!, if Q-R2, 40. Q-R4. White wins in either case.
If Q-QKt2, 40. R-K8!, if Q-R2, 40. Q-R4. White wins in either case.
40. RxP Q-KR2 41. Q-Kt3
40. RxP Q-KR2 41. Q-Kt3
Threatens Q-K5ch.
Threatens Q-K5ch.
41. … Q-R4 42. R-Kt4! Resigns.
41. … Q-R4 42. R-Kt4! Resigns.
TABLE OF OPENINGS
A. KING’S PAWN GAMES
a. 1. P-K4 P-K4
2. P-KB4 PxP
2. … B-B4
2. … P-Q4
2. P-Q4 PxP 3. QxP
3. Kt-KB3 P-QB4
3. … Kt-QB3
3. B-QB4
3. P-QB3 PxP
3. … P-Q4
2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. P-Q4 PxP 4. KtxP
4. B-QB4
4. P-B3
3. B-B4 B-B4 4. P-Q3
4. P-B3
3. … Kt-B3
3. Kt-B3 Kt-B3
3. … B-Kt5
3. B-Kt5 P-Q3 4. P-Q4
3. … Kt-B3 4. Castle P-Q3
4. … KtxP
3. … P-QR3 4. B-R4 Kt-B3 5. Castle B-K2
5. … KtxP
a. 1. P-K4 P-K4
2. P-KB4 PxP
2. … B-B4
2. … P-Q4
2. P-Q4 PxP 3. QxP
3. Kt-KB3 P-QB4
3. … Kt-QB3
3. B-QB4
3. P-QB3 PxP
3. … P-Q4
2. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 3. P-Q4 PxP 4. KtxP
4. B-QB4
4. P-B3
3. B-B4 B-B4 4. P-Q3
4. P-B3
3. … Kt-B3
3. Kt-B3 Kt-B3
3. … B-Kt5
3. B-Kt5 P-Q3 4. P-Q4
3. … Kt-B3 4. Castle P-Q3
4. … KtxP
3. … P-QR3 4. B-R4 Kt-B3 5. Castle B-K2
5. … KtxP
4. BxKt QPxB 5. KtxP
5. P-Q4
2. … P-Q3 3. P-Q4 QKt-Q2
2. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 3. P-B4 P-Q4
4. BxKt QPxB 5. KtxP
5. P-Q4
2. … P-Q3 3. P-Q4 QKt-Q2
2. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 3. P-B4 P-Q4
b. 1. P-K4 P-K3
2. P-Q4 P-Q4 3. P-K5
3. Kt-QB3 Kt-KB3 4. P-K5
4. B-Kt5 B-K2
4. … B-Kt5
3. … PxP
1. P-K4 P-Q4 2. PxP QxP
1. P-K4 P-QB3 2. P-Q4 P-Q4
1. P-K4 P-QB4
b. 1. Pawn to King 4 Pawn to King 3
2. Pawn to Queen 4 Pawn to Queen 4 3. Pawn to King 5
3. Knight to Queen's Bishop 3 Knight to King's Bishop 3 4. Pawn to King 5
4. Bishop to Knight 5 Bishop to King 2
4. … Bishop to Knight 5
3. … Pawn takes Pawn
1. Pawn to King 4 Pawn to Queen 4 2. Pawn takes Pawn Queen takes Pawn
1. Pawn to King 4 Pawn to Queen's Bishop 3 2. Pawn to Queen 4 Pawn to Queen 4
1. Pawn to King 4 Pawn to Queen's Bishop 4
B. QUEEN’S PAWN GAMES
a. 1. P-Q4 P-Q4
2. P-QB4 PxP
2. … P-K3 3. KtQB3 KtKB3
3. … PQB4 4. PK3
4. Kt-KB3 Kt-QB3 5. PxQP
2. … P—K4
2. … B-B4
2. … P-QB3
2. Kt-KB3 P-K3 3. P-B4 PxP
3. … P-QB4
3. … Kt-KB3
2. … P-QB4 3. P-B4 P-K3 4. P-K3
4. Kt-B3 Kt-QB3
3. P-K3 P-K3 4. B-Q3 Kt-KB3 5. P-QKt3
3. P-B3
2. … Kt-KB3
a. 1. P-Q4 P-Q4
2. P-QB4 PxP
2. … P-K3 3. NQB3 NK3
3. … PQB4 4. PK3
4. N-KB3 N-QB3 5. PxQP
2. … P—K4
2. … B-B4
2. … P-QB3
2. N-KB3 P-K3 3. P-B4 PxP
3. … P-QB4
3. … N-KB3
2. … P-QB4 3. P-B4 P-K3 4. P-K3
4. N-B3 N-QB3
3. P-K3 P-K3 4. B-Q3 N-KB3 5. P-QKt3
3. P-B3
2. … N-KB3
b. 1. P-Q4 P-QB4 1. P-Q4 Kt-KB3 2. Kt-KB3 P-Q3 1. P-Q4 P-KB4
b. 1. P-Q4 P-QB4 1. P-Q4 Kt-KB3 2. Kt-KB3 P-Q3 1. P-Q4 P-KB4
C. IRREGULAR OPENINGS
1. P-QB4 1. P-KB4 P-Q4 1. … P-K4 1. P-K3 P-Q3
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!